P. 1
123

123

|Views: 1,692|Likes:
Published by ravikiran_g

More info:

Published by: ravikiran_g on May 09, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

10/26/2012

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • USER’S MANUAL
  • Legal notice
  • TABLE OF CONTENTS
  • PREFACE
  • STYLE CONVENTIONS
  • GENERAL INFORMATION
  • I. PLAY BOX MODULES
  • II. COMMON CONFIGURATIONS
  • Or
  • III. SOFTWARE UPDATES AND PROTECTION
  • IV. WORKFLOW BASICS
  • AIRBOX
  • II.1. Title Bar
  • II.2. Status Bar
  • II.3. Video Overlay Window
  • II.4. Playback Control Buttons
  • II.5. Playlist and Clip Buttons
  • II.6. Playlist Grid
  • III. MENU BAR
  • III.2. List Menu
  • III.2.1. Add
  • III.2.2. Insert
  • III.3. View Menu
  • III.4. Events Menu
  • III.5. Options Menu
  • III.5.1. Settings
  • III.5.2. Colors
  • III.5.3. Modules
  • III.5.4. Module Options
  • III.5.5. Logo Options
  • III.5.6. Media Folders
  • III.5.7. Log Options
  • III.5.8. StartUp Options
  • III.5.9. TC Options
  • III.5.10. Filename Parser
  • III.5.11. SubtitleBox
  • III.5.12. Mirror Mode
  • III.5.13. Admin…
  • III.6. Commands Menu
  • III.7. Help Menu
  • IV. VDCP Manager
  • CAPTUREBOX
  • II.1. Capture Mode
  • II.1.2. Clip Data fields
  • II.1.3. Capturing
  • II.2. Print-to Tape
  • II.2.1. SDTI Compilation
  • II.2.2. Print-to-Tape
  • II.3. Schedule
  • II.3.1. Schedule Grid
  • II.3.2. Clip Data Fields
  • II.4. RS-422 Controller
  • II.5. Audio Control
  • III.2. View Menu
  • III.3. Capture Menu
  • CAPTUREBOX ME
  • II. USER INTERFACE
  • II.1. Capture Grid
  • II.2. Capture Control Buttons
  • II.3. Menu Bar
  • II.3.1. File Menu
  • II.3.2. Capture Menu
  • II.3.3. Help Menu
  • FINISHBOX LE
  • II.1. Standard
  • II.2. Folder Watch
  • DATABOX
  • I.1. Installation
  • I.2. Quick Start
  • II.1. Tree View
  • II.1.1. Classification scheme and Credits
  • II.1.2. Sequences node
  • II.1.3. Templates node
  • II.1.4. Expired node
  • II.2. Search Fields
  • II.3. Data Grid
  • III.1. Grid
  • III.2. New Record
  • III.2.1. General
  • III.2.3. Classification
  • III.2.4. Credits
  • III.2.5. Traffic
  • III.2.6. Additional
  • III.3. Options
  • III.3.1. General
  • III.3.2. Grid
  • III.3.4. Default Values
  • III.3.5. Export/Import
  • III.4. Media Types
  • III.5. Qualities
  • III.6. Classification
  • III.7. Credits
  • III.8. Print
  • III.9. Media Folders
  • LISTBOX
  • I. GETTING STARTED
  • II.1. Toolbar
  • II.2. Playlist Grid
  • II.3. Status Bar
  • III.1. File Menu
  • III.2. Edit Menu
  • III.3. Playlist Menu
  • III.4. Tools Menu
  • TITLEBOX
  • II.1. Preview Area
  • II.2. Toolbar
  • II.3. Object Palette
  • II.4. System Bar
  • II.5. Status Bar
  • III.3. Network Menu
  • III.4. Object Menu
  • III.4.1. Creating Objects
  • III.4.2. Object List
  • III.4.3. Object Properties
  • III.4.3.1. Still Picture Properties
  • III.4.3.2. Roll/Crawl Properties
  • III.4.3.3. Text Template Properties
  • III.4.3.4. Analog Clock Properties
  • III.4.3.5. Animation Properties
  • III.4.3.6. Digital Clock Properties
  • III.4.3.7. Direct Show Media Properties
  • III.4.3.9. Chat note objects
  • III.4.4. Scheduler
  • III.4.4.1. Scheduler Commands
  • III.4.4.2. Object’s Settings
  • III.4.4.3. Objects List
  • An Example:
  • III.5. Project Menu
  • III.5.1. General Options:
  • III.5.2. Network Options
  • III.5.3. Output Options
  • CLIP TRIMMER
  • I. USER INTERFACE
  • I.1. Preview Screen
  • I.2. Trimmer Control
  • I.3. Volume Control
  • I.4. Status Bar
  • II. TRIMMER PAGES
  • II.1. Video Clip Info
  • II.2. Clip Zones
  • II.3. Clip Shots
  • II.4. Clip Streams
  • II.5. Extra
  • II.6. Clip Filters
  • APPENDIX 1 - AIRBOX GPI
  • APPENDIX 2 – MPEG2 ENCODING
  • APPENDIX 3 – MPEG2 DECODING
  • APPENDIX 4 – TYPICAL MPEG2 (PAL)
  • APPENDIX 5 – INTEGRATION OF AIRBOX WITH TITLEBOX
  • APPENDIX 6 – TROUBLESHOOTING
  • GENERAL
  • GLOSSARY
  • INDEX

USER’S MANUAL

(User’s manual version: 6.10 from August 2005)












Current software versions:
AirBox: 3.96 (Build 530)
CaptureBox: 2.5 (Build 239)
CaptureBox ME: 0.1.0 (Build 13)
FinishBox LE: 2.7 (Build 61)
DataBox: 2.1 (Build 224)
TitleBox: 2.0 (Build 344)
ListBox: 1.2 (Build 191)
SafeBox 1.0 (Build 42)
Clip Trimmer 2.1 (Build 125)

2
Legal notice
________________________________
The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only. No
part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the prior written
permission of DMT Ltd.
The software described in this manual is owned by DMT Ltd. It is protected
by Bulgarian Copyright Law as well as by international copyright treaties and
may be used or copied only in accordance with the license agreement.
DMT Ltd. provides this manual “as is” without any warranty, either express
or implied.
This publication may contain typographical errors or technical inaccuracies.
While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, DMT
Ltd. assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Nor is any liability
assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; they will be
incorporated in new versions of the manual. Please check the PlayBox website
regularly for User Manual updates.
DMT Ltd. may introduce changes or improvements in the products described
in this manual at any time without any special notice.
Please address your comments or questions to:
Digital Media Technologies Ltd.
49 Shipchenski prohod Blvd., fl. 1
Sofia 1111
Bulgaria
Tel.: 359 2 9703050
Fax: 359 2 9717700
playbox@playbox.tv
www.playbox.tv

3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
USER’S MANUAL .......................................................................................... 1
LEGAL NOTICE .................................................................................................... 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................... 3
PREFACE.......................................................................................................... 9
STYLE CONVENTIONS ................................................................................ 10
GENERAL INFORMATION .......................................................................... 11
I. PLAY BOX MODULES........................................................................... 11
II. COMMON CONFIGURATIONS......................................................... 13
III. SOFTWARE UPDATES AND PROTECTION.................................... 13
IV. WORKFLOW BASICS......................................................................... 14
AIRBOX............................................................................................................. 17
I. GETTING STARTED............................................................................... 17
I.1. INSTALLATION.................................................................................... 17
I.2. QUICK START ..................................................................................... 18
II. USER INTERFACE.............................................................................. 19
II.1. TITLE BAR.......................................................................................... 19
II.2. STATUS BAR....................................................................................... 19
II.3. VIDEO OVERLAY WINDOW................................................................. 20
II.4. PLAYBACK CONTROL BUTTONS ......................................................... 21
II.5. PLAYLIST AND CLIP BUTTONS............................................................ 22
II.6. PLAYLIST GRID................................................................................... 23
III. MENU BAR.......................................................................................... 26
III.1. FILE MENU UPDATED ........................................................................... 26
III.2. LIST MENU ......................................................................................... 29
III.2.1. Add ......................................................................................... 29
III.2.2. Insert ...................................................................................... 30
III.3. VIEW MENU........................................................................................ 32
III.4. EVENTS MENU.................................................................................... 34
III.5. OPTIONS MENU .................................................................................. 41
III.5.1. Settings ................................................................................... 41
III.5.2. Colors..................................................................................... 44
III.5.3. Modules.................................................................................. 45
III.5.4. Module Options...................................................................... 50
III.5.5. Logo Options.......................................................................... 53
III.5.6. Media Folders ........................................................................ 54
III.5.7. Log Options............................................................................ 55
III.5.8. StartUp Options .................................................................... 56

4
III.5.9. TC Options ............................................................................. 58
III.5.10. Filename Parser................................................................... 58
III.5.11. SubtitleBox .......................................................................... 61
III.5.12. Mirror Mode......................................................................... 62
III.5.13. Admin…................................................................................ 64
III.6. COMMANDS MENU ............................................................................. 65
III.7. HELP MENU........................................................................................ 66
IV. VDCP MANAGER................................................................................... 68
CAPTUREBOX ................................................................................................. 71
I. GETTING STARTED............................................................................... 71
I.1. INSTALLATION.................................................................................... 71
I.2. QUICK START ..................................................................................... 72
I.3. CAPTURE SETTINGS UPDATED ............................................................ 73
II. USER INTERFACE.............................................................................. 78
II.1. CAPTURE MODE ................................................................................. 78
II.1.1. Batch Grid Updated ................................................................ 78
II.1.2. Clip Data fields ....................................................................... 82
II.1.3. Capturing ................................................................................ 84
II.2. PRINT-TO TAPE................................................................................... 85
II.2.1. SDTI Compilation ................................................................... 85
II.2.2. Print-to-Tape........................................................................... 86
II.3. SCHEDULE .......................................................................................... 88
II.3.1. Schedule Grid.......................................................................... 88
II.3.2. Clip Data Fields...................................................................... 89
II.4. RS-422 CONTROLLER......................................................................... 91
II.5. AUDIO CONTROL ................................................................................ 92
III. MENU BAR.......................................................................................... 93
III.1. FILE MENU ......................................................................................... 93
III.2. VIEW MENU........................................................................................ 94
III.3. CAPTURE MENU ................................................................................. 95
CAPTUREBOX ME.......................................................................................... 96
I. GETTING STARTED............................................................................... 96
I.1. INSTALLATION.................................................................................... 96
I.2. QUICK START ..................................................................................... 97
II. USER INTERFACE.............................................................................. 98
II.1. CAPTURE GRID................................................................................... 99
II.2. CAPTURE CONTROL BUTTONS............................................................ 99
II.3. MENU BAR ....................................................................................... 100
II.3.1. File Menu .............................................................................. 100

5
II.3.2. Capture Menu........................................................................ 100
II.3.3. Help Menu............................................................................. 102
FINISHBOX LE............................................................................................... 103
I. GETTING STARTED............................................................................. 103
I.1. INSTALLATION.................................................................................. 103
I.2. QUICK START ................................................................................... 104
II. USER INTERFACE............................................................................ 104
II.1. STANDARD........................................................................................ 104
II.2. FOLDER WATCH ............................................................................... 107
DATABOX....................................................................................................... 109
I. GETTING STARTED............................................................................. 109
I.1. INSTALLATION.................................................................................. 109
I.2. QUICK START ................................................................................... 110
II. USER INTERFACE............................................................................ 111
II.1. TREE VIEW....................................................................................... 111
II.1.1.CLASSIFICATION SCHEME AND CREDITS........................................ 111
II.1.2.SEQUENCES NODE........................................................................ 112
II.1.3.TEMPLATES NODE........................................................................ 113
II.1.4.EXPIRED NODE ............................................................................ 114
II.2. SEARCH FIELDS ................................................................................ 114
II.3. DATA GRID....................................................................................... 116
III. MENU BAR........................................................................................ 120
III.1. GRID................................................................................................. 120
III.2. NEW RECORD ................................................................................... 120
III.2.1.GENERAL ................................................................................... 121
III.2.2.INSTANCES ................................................................................. 122
III.2.3.CLASSIFICATION......................................................................... 125
III.2.4.CREDITS..................................................................................... 126
III.2.5.TRAFFIC..................................................................................... 127
III.2.6.ADDITIONAL............................................................................... 128
III.3. OPTIONS ........................................................................................... 129
III.3.1.GENERAL ................................................................................... 129
III.3.2.GRID.......................................................................................... 130
III.3.3.HOUSEID................................................................................... 131
III.3.4.DEFAULT VALUES....................................................................... 134
III.3.5.EXPORT/IMPORT......................................................................... 135
III.4. MEDIA TYPES ................................................................................... 136
III.5. QUALITIES ........................................................................................ 136
III.6. CLASSIFICATION............................................................................... 137

6
III.7. CREDITS............................................................................................ 138
III.8. PRINT................................................................................................ 138
III.9. MEDIA FOLDERS............................................................................... 139
LISTBOX ......................................................................................................... 140
I. GETTING STARTED............................................................................. 140
I.1. INSTALLATION.................................................................................. 140
I.2. QUICK START ................................................................................... 141
II. USER INTERFACE............................................................................ 141
II.1. TOOLBAR.......................................................................................... 141
II.2. PLAYLIST GRID................................................................................. 142
II.3. STATUS BAR..................................................................................... 143
III. MENU BAR........................................................................................ 144
III.1. FILE MENU ....................................................................................... 144
III.2. EDIT MENU....................................................................................... 145
III.3. PLAYLIST MENU............................................................................... 146
III.4. TOOLS MENU.................................................................................... 147
TITLEBOX ...................................................................................................... 149
I. GETTING STARTED............................................................................. 149
I.1. INSTALLATION.................................................................................. 149
I.2. QUICK START ................................................................................... 150
II. USER INTERFACE............................................................................ 150
II.1. PREVIEW AREA................................................................................. 151
II.2. TOOLBAR.......................................................................................... 152
II.3. OBJECT PALETTE.............................................................................. 155
II.4. SYSTEM BAR .................................................................................... 155
II.5. STATUS BAR..................................................................................... 155
III. MENU BAR........................................................................................ 156
III.1. FILE MENU ....................................................................................... 156
III.2. EDIT MENU....................................................................................... 156
III.3. NETWORK MENU.............................................................................. 156
III.4. OBJECT MENU.................................................................................. 157
III.4.1. Creating Objects .................................................................. 157
III.4.2. Object List ............................................................................ 158
III.4.3. Object Properties ................................................................. 158
III.4.3.1. Still Picture Properties.......................................................... 158
III.4.3.2. Roll/Crawl Properties ........................................................... 159
III.4.3.3. Text Template Properties ...................................................... 164
III.4.3.4. Analog Clock Properties....................................................... 167
III.4.3.5. Animation Properties ............................................................ 168

7
III.4.3.6. Digital Clock Properties Updated ........................................ 170
III.4.3.7. Direct Show Media Properties.............................................. 172
III.4.3.8. Banner Properties Updated .................................................. 173
III.4.3.9. Chat note objects................................................................... 174
III.4.4. Scheduler.............................................................................. 174
III.4.4.1. Scheduler Commands............................................................ 175
III.4.4.2. Object’s Settings ................................................................... 175
III.4.4.3. Objects List ........................................................................... 176
An Example:......................................................................................... 176
III.5. PROJECT MENU................................................................................. 177
III.5.1. General Options:.................................................................. 177
III.5.2. Network Options................................................................... 178
III.5.3. Output Options..................................................................... 178
CLIP TRIMMER............................................................................................. 179
I. USER INTERFACE................................................................................ 179
I.1. PREVIEW SCREEN ............................................................................. 179
I.2. TRIMMER CONTROL.......................................................................... 180
I.3. VOLUME CONTROL........................................................................... 182
I.4. STATUS BAR..................................................................................... 183
II. TRIMMER PAGES............................................................................. 183
II.1. VIDEO CLIP INFO .............................................................................. 183
II.2. CLIP ZONES ...................................................................................... 184
II.3. CLIP SHOTS....................................................................................... 185
II.4. CLIP STREAMS.................................................................................. 185
II.5. EXTRA .............................................................................................. 186
II.6. CLIP FILTERS .................................................................................... 187
SAFEBOX UPDATED.................................................................................... 188
APPENDIX 1 - AIRBOX GPI ....................................................................... 192
APPENDIX 2 – MPEG2 ENCODING.......................................................... 195
APPENDIX 3 – MPEG2 DECODING.......................................................... 197
APPENDIX 4 – TYPICAL MPEG2 (PAL) ................................................... 198
APPENDIX 5 – INTEGRATION OF AIRBOX WITH TITLEBOX............ 199
APPENDIX 6 – TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................... 200
GENERAL..................................................................................................... 200
AIRBOX ........................................................................................................ 202
CAPTUREBOX............................................................................................. 205

8
CAPTUREBOX............................................................................................. 205
DATABOX.................................................................................................... 207
APPENDIX 7 – DEMO VERSIONS LIMITATIONS UPDATED............... 208
APPENDIX 8 – LIGHT EDITIONS LIMITATIONS ................................... 209
GLOSSARY.................................................................................................. 211
INDEX........................................................................................................... 224

9
PREFACE
________________________________
Dear PlayBox customer,
Thank you for purchasing our product! We would like to assure you that you
have chosen the most cost effective and versatile TV automation system on the
market. As always, we are trying to stay close to our customers’ needs, making
sure they all receive adequate support and satisfaction. Your opinion about our
product is an exceptionally valuable source of information to us. The ease of
working with the PlayBox products results mainly from the suggestions and
comments of our current respected customers.
This manual is structured into several sequential chapters, each aiming to
ease the installation, fine tuning and use of our products. We hope you’ll enjoy
working with it, and we are anxiously looking forward to receiving your
feedback.
Pease send your questions, suggestions, and assistance requests to:
support@playbox.tv
General feedback:
playbox@playbox.tv
Helpdesk fax number: +359 2 9717700

10
STYLE CONVENTIONS
________________________________
 File names, software, documents or terms are written in italics
· The data is written in the settings.ini file.
· The file is located in C:\Program Files\DMT\AirBox
· For further information read Shortcuts reference book.
· The VTR is controlled via RS-422.
 Direct quotations from the computer screen are presented as follows:
· Menu Items and commands
· Tab/Page names
· Column names (i.e. in a playlist or another grid)
· Field names, check boxes
· Buttons
· Screen readings are written in [square brackets]
· The keyboard keys are enclosed in < > signs
 The arrows, used in setting procedures mean as follows:
· ¬ A menu item follows;
· = A page(tab) name follows;
· ¬ A field name, a check box name or a value name follows.
Except for arrows, you can distinguish between the relevant menu
categories also by the stiles, listed above.

11
GENERAL INFORMATION
________________________________
I. PLAY BOX MODULES
The PlayBox system consists of several modules dedicated to separate applications
that communicate with each other by proprietary protocols based on TCP/IP and UDP:
AirBox
This is the most important module of the system. It performs on-air playback and
control. The module is designed for uninterrupted 24 hours / 7 days-a-week content
playout from online media storage. It can also be used as a production server with
interactive capabilities such as Next, Jump, Cue, etc.
CaptureBox
It provides sophisticated capturing facilities for many platforms. CaptureBox controls
VTRs via RS-422 and automatically captures batch of scenes or programs. It also allows
transferring a program to a tape precisely, using frame-accurate timecode positioning.
Provided with appropriate platforms it even works 4 times faster than real-time via SDTI
interface. Needless to say, it also provides semi- or completely automated scheduled
capturing, GPI interface, VU/peak audio meters, and a number of other unique tools.
FinishBox LE
This is a simple MPEG2 converter and multiplexer. It allows converting MPEG2 IBP
AVI files from Matrox platforms to MPEG2 program streams suitable for use in AirBox. It
also supports elementary MPEG2 streams such as m2v and mpa/mp2. It allows
multiplexing more than one audio channel for multi-language facilities.
DataBox
DataBox represents the Database for metadata management of all kinds of content –
either permanently available from online media, or temporary available from a removable
media such as videotape or DVD, or archived on a tape or a DVD. The metadata entered
during content description is preserved and sufficient for compiling playlists, even if the
media itself is not available.

12
ListBox
A standalone playlist editor, designed for arranging, previewing and trimming of the
available content without any hardware decoder requirements. It contains useful playlist
features such as text searching, printing, multi-selection editing, undo/redo, etc.
TitleBox
A fully automated or interactive graphics overlay. It can also be synchronized to
AirBox playout sequence. It allows insertion of text and dynamic graphic information in
accordance to external data sources. Text information is received and rendered into high-
quality graphics on-the-fly.
SafeBox
It is a simple content management tool. It allows automated content transfer from
remote locations to a local storage and vice versa. There is an additional facility for
automated content removal from local storage when space is limited.

13

II. COMMON CONFIGURATIONS
PlayBox is a modular system and typically works in a network environment. The
decision where to install a certain module depends on the module specifics and target
application. It is possible to install several modules on a single workstation, since most of
them exchange information through drag-n-dropping. Others exchange information
through IP-based communication, so they can be installed either on the same workstation
or on network-connected workstations.
There are no strict regulations on how to combine the modules. It is possible to
achieve an unlimited number of combinations, according to the specific topology of the
network and all the suites involved. The established workflow is the main factor.
DataBox is the most versatile PlayBox module. Almost all other modules use
metadata from the DataBox. That is because DataBox is the information backbone of the
PlayBox system.
The usual configurations are:
PC1: AirBox + DataBox
PC2: ListBox + DataBox
PC3: TitleBox + DataBox
Or
PC1: AirBox + DataBox
PC2: CaptureBox + DataBox
PC3: TitleBox + DataBox
III. SOFTWARE UPDATES AND PROTECTION
Software Updates
Since all PlayBox modules are liable to constant development and improvement,
please check our web site http://www.playbox.tv regularly for the newest versions. To
make sure there is a reason to renew your current version, please check the What’s New
document online before downloading the new version.
Software Protection
All PlayBox modules are protected by means of hardware USB keys (also referred to
as dongles). You have to possess such a key in order to have a fully functional PlayBox
module.
There are two types of keys – network (solid green body) and standard (transparent
green body):
 The Network keys work with “Network” software versions; they are intended
mainly for resellers. Their serial numbers start either with a “6-“ or with an “8-“.

14
 The Standard keys work with regular versions of the modules; they are intended
for end-users. Their serial numbers start either with a “7-“ or with a “9-“.
It would be good to check the color and transparency type of your WIBU-Key and be
sure that you download the relevant software version. If you install the wrong version, for
example if you install a Network version on a standard dongle, you will get an error
message on startup, reading “Program needs WIBU-Key xxxx: 5259896”.
The PlayBox software installs the needed WIBU-Key drivers automatically. All you
have to do is install any PlayBox module and then plug the WIBU key in the USB port of
the computer. The WIBU key will be installed automatically.
The latest approved version of the WIBU driver is also available on the PlayBox CD.
IV. WORKFLOW BASICS
PlayBox as a TV automation system includes modules that automate particular
processes in a typical TV organization. Most of these processes may coincide in time or
their results may depend on each other, which leads to different PlayBox configurations.
Media Input
There are several methods for content ingesting:
1. Specialized hardware or software MPEG2 or DV encoders and platforms.
AirBox is compatible with almost each MPEG2 stream generated. CaptureBox
provides automated content ingest by batch capturing via RS-422 Sony protocol or
Firewire interface.
2. Non-linear video editing workstation with MPEG2 or DV export.
Some NLE stations export directly into MPEG2 Program or Transport Streams
(MPG), while others (such as Matrox-based) export MPEG2 IBP AVI files that can be
automatically converted into MPG by FinishBox LE. Also the DV export can be used
for producing compatible DV files.
3. Removable and distribution media (CD, DVD, etc.).
It is always better to copy content coming from removable media into the online
storage in order to achieve higher access speed and reliability.
4. External sources (DVB) – satellite feeds, etc.
Most of these sources come in MPEG2 TS bouquets that have to be
demultiplexed in order to extract the desired channel to be recorded. The software
bundled with satellite receivers usually performs this extraction.
Content Management
DataBox is designated for classification and navigation through all the content
available. Once classified content can be quickly searched, sorted and retrieved. All this is
done by various properties such as title, ID, country, keywords, groups, language,
distribution & usage rights, media description, credits, etc. All this metadata is associated
with every piece of visual program in DataBox.

15
Program Schedule Creation
While on-air playlists can be created and edited in AirBox, ListBox is a full blown
playlist editor with sophisticated editing features such as multi-selection, Excel export,
search, print, etc. As opposed to AirBox, ListBox does not require a special hardware
platform in order to preview content and playlist. ListBox is typically used by Program
Editors to create playlists prior to airing time.
Content Playout
AirBox performs content playout. The on-air program can be started manually or
automatically at particular time, changed during the actual playback, interrupted when
switching to other sources and so on. The physical devices that convert content to a video
signal, are called Decoders. Their technical features and functionality depend on the
manufacturer, model and price.

16

PlayBox system is designed to be easily used by everyone. A special
training course or deep knowledge in computers is not strictly required.
Anyone with basic computer knowledge will find using PlayBox modules
as easy as 1-2-3. Moreover, all modules share the same visual and logical
concept in order to minimize mistakes and confusion. Thus, we hope to
make the operator’s learning process even easier – once acquainted with
some of the modules the others should look quite familiar.
In order to fully utilize the system’s potential we recommend you to
read carefully the following subchapters. Each chapter is related to a
particular module and describes its workflow and specifics in detail.
The underlying sections will give you enough information to succeed
in getting all the tasks done. In case something is not clear enough, please
examine the “FAQ” section at PlayBox website: http://www.playbox.tv –
the answers of almost all questions that might arise during operation can
be found there. Our support team will be at your disposal in case you have
specific questions or a non-typical problem. Do not hesitate to contact us
at support@playbox.tv.


17
AIRBOX
__________________________
I. GETTING STARTED
I.1. Installation
Where to Install it?
AirBox is usually installed on the on-air workstation or production server. That station
must have at least one hardware output board installed.
Software License
AirBox LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE WIBU USB KEY. IT WILL NOT
RUN WITHOUT THE KEY INSTALLED ON YOUR USB PORT.
WARNING! Each separate AirBox channel, even on the same workstation, requires an
additional license purchase.
After you launch the
software for the first time, a
“What’s New” window will
pop up. The new functionality
that has been added with the
latest release and, eventually,
some already known issues or
limitations are explained in it.
If you need to view this
document later, you can find it
in Start Menu ¬ Programs
¬ Digital Media
Technologies Ltd.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
18
Minimum System Requirements
CPU: Intel Pentium 4@ 2.4 GHz
RAM: 512 MB
HDD: Depends on the required playout time, number of channels, bandwidth and
reliability. For example, if your content is in MPEG2 format with 8 Mbit/sec
bitrate then for 10 hours playback you will need 36GB of storage space. If you
need higher bandwidth and reliability consider using SCSI or/and RAID array.
VGA: DirectDraw compatible
O/S: Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Home edition
H/W: Compatible hardware platform (see our web site http://www.playbox.tv
for latest information about supported decoders).
NOTE: Before choosing an operating system, please check if there is an appropriate driver
for the chosen decoder. The system requirements are strongly dependant on the used
platform.
Hardware Platform Driver Installation
Please refer to your hardware vendor documentation for instructions on how to install
the appropriate device drivers for your operating system. It is recommended to install driver
versions that have been tested and approved by us in order to avoid potential issues. For
your convenience, we have included tested driver versions and manuals of most of the
AirBox supported platforms on the PlayBox installation CD.

I.2. Quick Start
1. Verify all connections and start the workstation;
2. Make sure that you have suitable content available in the media folders;
3. If you do not have any available, use the sample clips from the PlayBox CD;
4. Launch AirBox;
5. Select the playback module corresponding to your hardware platform;
6. Click the Add button;
7. Select the files you wish to playout and click the Open button;
8. Click the PLAY button.
Congratulations! You have just launched your first AirBox playout session!

AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
19
II. USER INTERFACE
The main interface window is divided into several areas:
II.1. Title Bar
This is the topmost
horizontal bar of the
AirBox window. It reads
the AirBox channel
number and the name of
the currently executed
playlist file. If the playlist
has been changed, but not
saved, there is an asterisk
(*) after the playlist
name.
MENU BAR
The MENU BAR is
described further in this
section (See section III.).
II.2. Status Bar
It is located in the lowest part of the AirBox window.

Total Length field shows the total playlist duration.
End At field shows the time when the playlist will end (if not looped, of course).
A question mark (?) after Total Length and End At means, that there are missing files
in the playlist and their duration is included in the total duration (i.e. the actual total length
of the playlist is smaller and the end-time is earlier than displayed). You can choose
whether the duration of missing files should be included or excluded in the total length by
checking the relevant box in Options ¬ Settings ¬ EShow duration of missing files.
IMPORTANT: In case there is a question mark in the Total Length and End At fields, the
displayed total duration and end-time are NOT the real ones because the missing files will
be skipped during the playback.
An exclamation mark (!) after Total Length and End At means that there are missing
files in the playlist, but their duration is not calculated in the total duration (i.e. the duration
of missing files is regarded as zero duration in the playlist).
The third field of the Status Bar shows the hardware control module that is currently
used. If there is [None], please check whether the appropriate module is selected.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
20
II.3. Video Overlay Window
It shows the currently playing video.
The Video window can be moved outside the main
window by checking “External video window” from the
View Menu. If you accidentally close the window, you
can view it again by checking “Show external video
window” in the View Menu
Some platforms do not provide such video overlay
functionality or it is limited to the first AirBox channel
only. Others depend on the specific brand of VGA card used.
In some cases you might want to disable the window since it consumes additional
resources from the system. Then you will have to uncheck “Show External Video Window”
in the View Menu
PLAYLIST NAME
A double-click over this field, pops up a name-editing
dialog box.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
21
II.4. Playback Control Buttons
· Master counter – shows the elapsed
time of the current playout session.
Pressing the Stop button resets the
counter.
· [Current] – shows the filename of the currently playing clip. This is quite useful in
case the played row is out of the visible grid range.
· Play – starts the playback.
· Delayed Play – starts time-delayed playback.
This function lets you start the playlist at a certain
time or after a certain period. A dialog box appears
to specify the start time .
- If Now is selected playback will start immediately;
- If At: [hour: min: sec] is selected,
playback will start later, after assigned
period of time. After the time is entered and
the GO button is pressed, another dialog
box will appear to show countdown of time
remaining to the program start. Of course,
there is an option for manual start the Start Now button.
· Stop – playback termination.
· Pause/Resume – temporary interruption and resuming of playback. Playback
resumes from the same point on.
· Next – will stop the currently playing clip immediately and will switch to the next
clip in playlist. This happens by a smooth cut without any sound or visual artifacts.
(!) TIP: To view the currently playing clip in the beginning of the Grid, just click the
Master counter. This will “shrink” the playlist and will show only clips after the current
one. If you want to view those before it, use the arrow keys on your keyboard.
Return is a new feature of the AirBox module. It is active only after a Jump has been
executed. Use this button to return to the position before the last Jump.
· Jump – will terminate the currently playing clip immediately and will start playing
the currently selected one regardless of its position in the grid.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
22
II.5. Playlist and Clip Buttons
Most of these buttons actually duplicate the menu actions, which were already
explained in the MENU BAR section. Here is a description of the remaining buttons:
Reset – resets the hardware driver. If
under any circumstances (bad MPEG
media or bad system setup) playback is
distorted so badly that normal PLAY
and STOP commands cannot help, use this function to reset the hardware decoder.
WARNING! This action will interrupt the playback!
EPlaylist Loop – if checked, when the playback of the last clip in the playlist is complete,
playback will continue from the beginning of the playlist again.
EClip Loop – if checked the currently playing clip will continue playing until unchecked.
Besides, if you’re in stop mode, this check will loop the first clip to be played after
resuming the playout.
Arrows – clicking these buttons moves the currently selected clip up (before the previous
clip) or down (after the next clip) accordingly. Thus you can change the order of clips even
during the playlist execution.
# - playlist position reset. If the current playlist has been started and then stopped, the
already played clips are colored in grey and their order cannot be changed. Moreover, next
time you hit the PLAY button, playback will start from the first black (not played yet) clip.
If you hit #, the playlist will be “reset” and next time you hit PLAY, the playback will start
from the very beginning of the playlist. Simply put, it is a kind of “playlist rewinding”.
Cue – the black triangle sign essentially executes Jump + Pause. You can activate it also
by holding down the <Ctrl> key and pressing the Jump button at the same time. Use this
for preparing a clip for playback while showing its first frame on the output. Since this is a
machine-and-decoder-dependent function, you might have to increase the Cue Delay time
in the Settings dialog box (Options¬Setting¬Cue delay).
VOLUME SLIDER
Probably the less
noticeable part of the user
interface, the Volume
slider is situated between
the video window and the
buttons. It is used to
compensate different sound
volume in separate clips.
You can control it with the
[+] and [–] numeric keys
on your keyboard, or just
by dragging the slider.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
23
II.6. Playlist Grid
This is the main part of
the interface dedicated to
the playlist (play order)
visualization. Clips are
played in the sequence
they are shown in the grid.
To activate this part of the
interface press <Alt>+<0> (zero) or just click on it.
· Pink bar – outlines the currently playing clip. It is visible in PLAY and PAUSE
modes only.
· Yellow bar – it is visible only while switching between clips. It shows which clip will
be played next. In that moment, the yellow clip is being actually fed into the decoder
circuit. This happens during the last couple of seconds before the end of the previous
clip. The clip cannot be moved, trimmed or deleted anymore. Just for comparison,
competitive playout solutions tend to permanently lock the clip after the currently
playing one, which reduces on-air flexibility and your last-minute decision freedom.
· Blue bar indicates the currently selected clip – all actions, i.e. Jump, Move
Up/Down will be applied to it.
· Red bar highlights those files in the playlist that are missing/invalid (not supported
from the currently installed hardware). The playback skips such files and plays the next
available clip.
If the file is missing, you can set the time interval for automatic check for missing
files (Options¬Settings¬Missing Files¬Check Missing files every […]
sec).
· Light cyan bar outlines the playlist events when selected.
Drag-n-Drop! One of the main features of the grid is the drag-n-drop functionality. It
allows dragging clips from one grid to another (from DataBox/ListBox to AirBox or from
any folder to AirBox). If <Shift> is being held down during dragging, the executed
operation is Move. If <Ctrl> is being held – the executed operation is Copy. By default,
each internal (in the grid) operation is Move and the operation between two windows
(similar to Windows Explorer) is Copy. Clips that have already been played-back are grey
and cannot be moved and multi-trimmed.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
24
Double-clicking over a clip invokes the Clip Trimmer (if it is enabled from
Options ¬ Settings ¬ EUse clip trimmer). If you trim a clip in the playlist, the
change will not be permanent, but valid ONLY for this playlist. If you add the same clip to
another playlist, it will appear un-trimmed there.
If the use of Clip Trimmer is not enabled, the clip’s properties dialog will open.
A detailed description of Clip Trimmer can be found further in this user’s manual.
Right mouse clicking over a line in the playlist invokes a pop-up menu of Playlist
and Events commands:
- Add… – opens a dialog box for adding
playlist(s) or media file(s) to the end of the
playlist.
- Insert… - opens a dialog box for
inserting playlist(s) or media file(s) before
the currently selected clip.
- Edit… – What will open depends on the
line type. If the line is a clip, then the Clip
Trimmer is invoked. If the line is an event,
then events’ property window is invoked.
- Delete – deletes the selected playlist row.
- Add/Insert Event. There are arrows in the right ends of these two rows
invoking pop-up menus related to different event types. They correspond to the
items in the Events Menu and have already been described there (See section III.4.
of this chapter).
Add/Insert Stop event – adds/inserts a stop event line to playlist.
Add/Insert Stop Cue event – adds/inserts a stop cue event line to playlist.
Add/Insert Wait event – adds/inserts a wait event line to the playlist. A dialog
box appears for defining the wait event.
Add/Insert Logo on – adds/inserts a “logo on” event.
Add/Insert Logo Off – adds/inserts “logo off” event.
Add/Insert Logo preset – adds/inserts a logo preset. A dialog box appears to
set the logo event.
Return event – adds/inserts a Return event in the playlist (see Events menu).
Add/Insert GPI Output event… - adds/inserts a GPI output event to the
playlist. A dialog box appears to define the event.
Add/Insert Kramer Switch event – adds/inserts a Kramer Switch output
event to the playlist.
Add/Insert Kramer Matrix Switcher event – adds/inserts a Kramer Matrix
Switcher output event to the playlist.
Add/Insert TitleBox NetControl output event – adds/inserts a TitleBox
NetControl output events to the playlist.
Add/Insert VikinX Matrix Switcher Output will add/insert such an output
event in the playlist. (See Events menu)
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
25
- Add/Insert Note - adds/inserts a comment line in the playlist.
Pointing with the mouse cursor at a line in the playlist, shows the clip file name
and clip’s IN /OUT timecode values in a pop-up window.
GRID COLUMNS:
The columns’ order can be changed by drag-n-dropping them.
- Start Time - shows each clip’s starting time. During STOP mode, this column
shows the current time for the clip that will be played first when Play is pressed. The
time refreshes every 2 seconds. The following clips hold positive times calculated
according to the current time and the duration of the preceding clips. During PLAY
mode, this column shows the actual starting time for each clip. If there has been a
JUMP command or a clip has been trimmed during PLAY mode, the starting times of
the following clips will be recalculated accordingly.
- Duration - shows the actual duration of each clip. Naturally, if a clip has been
trimmed, its actual duration will be reduced. The duration of the part to be shown will
be displayed in the playlist and will be used for calculation of starting times of the
following clips.
- Type - shows the type (such as MPEG) of the clip – this is quite useful to determine
the major type of compression, since many decoders do not allow different
compression types to co-exist in the same playlist.
- Category - contains category information fed by DataBox. The background color is
the same as the actual category color. You can define another field color for clip
description in AirBox, using DataBox (Options=Default values¬Color to
AirBox).
- Title - shows the clip’s title or filename. If for any reason a file is removed or
renamed after the playlist is loaded, it will be considered missing and hence - colored
in red. AirBox will skip it and will jump to the next available clip. The Start Time
column will be recalculated accordingly.
- Location – shows the file location (full path).
- Star - contains data fed by DataBox, describing the talents in the clip.
- Notes - contains data from fields, specified in DataBox
(Options=General¬Fields to AirBox Notes)
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
26
III. MENU BAR
III.1. File Menu
Contains all playlist file-related commands:
New Playlist – opens a new blank playlist for editing. In fact,
this is the ListBox module.
· Load playlist – loads an existing playlist file (*.ply).
In AirBox you
can also open Dalet
Automation XML
playlists (*.xml).
WARNING! Loading a playlist on the
currently playing AirBox window will
stop the playback. A warning dialog box
will appear each time you try to do so.
· Append playlist – appends
another playlist to the end of the
current playlist.
· Insert playlist – inserts another playlist in the current playlist.
· Save playlist – saves the current playlist file. The saved file contains the names of all
clips arranged by their serial
numbers in the grid, as well as
some additional attributes like
playlist name, loop status, etc.
· Save daily playlist… - saves the
current playlist in compliance with
the naming requirements for daily
playlists. This saving option is not
active if you have not specified a
Daily playlist folder (see Options
menu¬StartUp
Options¬StartUp playlist).
· Save as – saves the current
playlist in a different file.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
27
· Import tab-delimited file… –
COMING SOON. This menu item
allows importing all kinds of tab-
delimited text files. All you have to do is “tell” AirBox
what the different columns of the imported file contain.
The dialog to the right appears at selecting this menu
item. The OK button will not be active until you fill in
all the strings.
Push the More button to create/configure your playlist template. The following dialog
will open:

In the Template Field, enter the template name. Use the Sample File button to select an
example of the text file that will be imported with this template.
In the Number of lines to be skipped cell, enter the relevant figure (here – 4). The
skipped lines will be colored in red.
Comment – fill in a symbol that might appear in the beginning of a row to be skipped from
the playlist.
Delimiter – how are separated the columns in the file to be imported (tabs, semi-colons,
etc.).
Go to the upper most cell of each column, click once in it and “tell” the Template Builder
what does it contain (select from the drop-down list). Use [BULK] for the fields to be
skipped (such as duration, etc.) to comply with the AirBox playlist structure.
When you’re ready, press Save.
Pick – press it to use the current template for the file you are going to import.
If you already have some templates and you select one of them from the drop-down list,
push the Load button to load it (its settings will be displayed in the grid).
Validation – press it if you’d like to be sure that your template is compatible with the file
you’re going to import (a browse dialog will open for you to pint to that file).
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
28
Back in the first dialog, select a template preset from the drop-down list (now you should
have at leas one, built in the Template builder). Press the browse button to point to the
File to Import and click OK.
If you press the Options button, another dialog will open for you to specify the default
template folder and the template itself:

Push the browse button next to each string and point them.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
29
III.2. List Menu

The list menu contains all commands, related to separate clips in the playlist, as well as
some additional playlist functions.
III.2.1. Add
· Add Media Files – adds clips or playlists
at the end of current playlist.
· Dummy clip invokes a special dialog
box for adding ‘virtual’ clips to the end of
the playlist. You can use this option when
you want to build your playlist prior to
receiving a clip whose properties are
already known. AirBox will mark it as
Missing, but when it becomes available,
it could be used right away.
Fill-in the Title, File name and
Location. The IN and OUT points, the
Duration, and the Timecode are also
editable. If you want to, write the
Category, Star and Notes. You make the module remember every last string entry by
checking the box next to its row. If you want to, choose the File type or leave it as
auto.
· Add Incomplete is similar to Add Dummy clip, but the clip you add can be
currently captured. For example, you create such an Incomplete clip entry in the
playlist and check Live (delayed) file. At a given time you start capturing this clip to
the specified location and once there are a few seconds of it available on the storage,
AirBox marks it as valid clip and it can be played immediately. Thus capturing and
playback proceed simultaneously. If you want to predefine the file length despite its
real length, just check ESet out point of live item. With this setting the file will be
played to the exact time you had specified, and if it is longer, it will be trimmed at that
point. See also Using TDIR option in the Matrox
Capture settings section.
· Live Stream. The option of adding live videos
from the network to the playlist. Selecting this item
will open a dialog box to specify the relevant
network information:
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
30
Select the Stream type from the available ones;
E Check the Multicast box if your server is set to multicasting, i.e. allows many users
watch the same stream simultaneously;
Enter the IP address in the Address field and the port number in the relevant field;
You can also set the Duration of the live stream connection.
The Command is generated automatically as you write in the above fields. You could also
enter a command directly in the Command field.
III.2.2. Insert
· Insert Media Files – inserts clips or
playlists BEFORE the currently
selected clip.
· Insert dummy clip will insert a
“virtual” clip BEFORE the selected one in the playlist. See the previous item for
instructions.
· Incomplete Clip will insert an incomplete clip BEFORE the selected row in the
playlist. See the Add Incomplete clip instructions.
· Live Stream inserts a live stream connection before the selected row in the playlist.
The settings are same as those in the Add Live Stream section.
Delete Current from List – removes the currently selected clip from the playlist.
Clear List – removes all clips from the playlist.
WARNING! This will interrupt the playback. A warning dialog box will appear.
Clip Trimmer – invokes the Clip Trimmer. It allows previewing, trimming and
exporting part(s) of the currently selected clip.

AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
31
Properties – opens the clip properties
window. Use the check-boxes next to the
strings to save the last string entries.
The Green rectangle next to the Title
string means that the file is available.
This rectangle will turn red is the file is
missing.
The IN, OUT and Duration strings
contain the IN point, OUT point and clip
duration data. You can change these
values in order to make your clips
shorter. The Duration is calculated
automatically form the IN and OUT
values. Besides, if you change the
Duration, the OUT point will adjust
accordingly. The TC field is necessary when there are subtitles to be displayed together
with the clip, as time code is the reference for displaying them. You should also enter a
TapeID value - read more in the SubtitleBox section, further in this manual.
You can view and edit the File type, Star and Category information in the relevant strings.
The colored square next to the Category string represents the color which will be displayed
in the Category column of the playlist. You can change this color by double-clicking in
the square. If you are going to have live playback, check the Live (delayed) file check-box.
Specify the Duration of this live playback and then check the Set out point of live item
box.
In the Notes section you can write some notes about the clip.
All the properties you set in this window will be displayed in the playlist grid. If you save
the playlist, these values will be saved as well.
Randomize – randomizes the order of all unplayed clips in the playlist. This is a very
useful feature for music video playlists.
Loop – loops the playlist.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
32
III.3. View Menu
· Big Timer
This is a system time clock. It
could be shown as digital or analog
clock. Just double click the timer
and check the option from the context menu, which will appear.
· Clip Timer
It is a clip-related countdown timer. Its
accuracy depends on the MPEG2 decoder used. It
shows exactly how much time remains till the end
of currently playing clip. The Background is black,
and a blue progress bar indicates what part of the
clip has already passed. The color of the progress bar and of the digits can be changed in
Options ¬Colors=Timers by clicking on the relevant field there.
A dropdown menu appears when you right-click in the clip timer. Its last row reads
[-Countdown down]. If you uncheck it, the Clip timer will become an ordinary timer,
showing the elapsed time from the beginning of the clip. The colors of the progress bar and
the digits will reverse.
· Block Timer
This is an event - related countdown timer. It
shows how much time remains until the selected
playlist event: [Stop], [Stop Cue], [Wait], [Wait
Until] or until the [End of the playlist]. If there
are several uniform events in the playlist, they are
shown in a pop-up list, arranged by their playlist
line numbers so you can choose one of them. If
you do not select an event, the timer will show by
default the time remaining till the end of the playlist.
A progress bar indicates how much of the time has already passed. The color of the
progress bar and of the numbers can be set from Options ¬Colors=Timers.
· Log
Pressing this option in the View menu will open a Log View window. It is used to
show the errors that have occurred during the AirBox work.
All windows can be freely resized and moved around the screen, staying on top of
other windows.
<Ctrl>+click on a Timer window will change its appearance. Check it out! Right
clicking on any timer window opens a dropdown menu. Select Can Snap in it to lock the
window position to the main window.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
33
· Logo Presets
This will show/hide an additional window with buttons for fast switching of
available logo presets.
· Timecode Timer
Displays the timecode received from the LTC Reader plug-in, if available, in AirBox.
Daily viewer is a brand new tool in AirBox that will help you in managing your daily
playlists. In the area above, you can view all daily playlists. The number in the brackets in
front of the start time represents the number of days remaining till the start. For example, if
there is a two in the brackets and then 12.00.00, this means that the playlist will start in two
days, twelve hours.

When you click once in a daily playlist row, its items will be displayed in the grid below.
Double-click in a daily playlist will start it immediately.
WARNING! Starting a daily playlist before its scheduled start time while in Daily playlist
mode (Options ¬ StartUp Options ¬ E Auto load daily playlist) may cause playback
jams: at the time when a daily playlist should start according to the schedule, AirBox will
load it and start playing it from the beginning again!
· External video window – -check it to move the video window outside the main
AirBox window. There you can resize it either by pulling its edges with the mouse
pointer or by right-clicking in it (a dropdown menu will suggest several options).
· Show external video window – If you’ve closed the external video window, you
can view it again by -checking this line. Pressing it once again will hide it.
· Arrange windows – auto arranges AirBox’s windows.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
34
III.4. Events Menu
This menu contains commands, related to
play list’s events.
The events that you could possibly add/insert
are:
· Stop event –stops the playlist
playback automatically. This function is
useful for news and other interactive
sessions.
· Wait event – stops the playback temporary. A dialog
box appears to specify the type of “waiting”:
Wait means that playback will stop and standby for a
certain period (hh:mm:ss). For example: 00:01:00 – the
playback will wait for 1 minute;
Wait Until means that playback will stop and
automatically resume at a definite time (hh:mm:ss). For example: 14:00:00 – the
playback will start at 14:00:00 o’clock.
· Wait TC Event – stops the playback automatically
and resumes it at reaching the specified time code
(according to the Master Counter, i.e. time code
since the beginning of the playback). The following
message will be displayed on the AirBox window
and the Master counter will continue running.
· Stop Cue event - automatically stops the playlist playback and shows the first frame
of the next clip.
· Logo On event – starts displaying the logo, set in the preceding Logo Preset
event. If there is no preceding Logo Preset event the first logo preset from the list
(in Options¬Logo Options¬Logo Presets), will be displayed.
· Logo Off event – stops displaying the logo.
· Logo Preset event – sets a logo preset, which will be
displayed after initiating the Logo on event.
The preset number corresponds to its number in the preset list
in Options¬Logo Options¬Logo Presets.
If you check the Activate now box in the event dialog box,
the logo will appear immediately.
You can also choose to display the logo before or after the
beginning of the following clip.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
35
· Return event – this event will return the playback at the position before a previously
executed Jump. For example, if you have a movie in your playlist and at a certain time
you decide to jump to a block of commercials somewhere in the playlist, and then go
back to the same position in the movie, insert a Return event after the commercials
you’d like to play. Thus, the movie playback will resume after the end of the
commercial break from the point before the jump.
· GPI output event – activates the output GPI. A
dialog box appears to define the output GPI
commands. You can select the COM-port from the
available COM-ports listed in the main window
area (Events¬Add Event/Insert Event¬GPI
Output...). By default, COM1 is selected.
The moment at which a GPI event will be executed
is defined using the previous and the next item in
the playlist. Therefore, you could correlate an event
offset using the end of the previous clip (“earlier”
execution) and the beginning of the following one
(“later” execution). Just fill the number of frames
in the Run event field and choose “earlier” or
“later” in the next field.

· Kramer Switch event - activates Kramer
Switch output. A dialog box appears to define the
Kramer Switch commands:
Machine – select the number of the device connected to the COM port (RS-
232). Up to 8 devices could be connected.
Input – select the number of the desired switcher input.
Run event – fill-in the number of frames for “earlier” or “later” command to
the switcher (see the GPI section).
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
36
· Kramer Matrix Switcher event -
activates the Kramer Matrix Switcher
output. A dialog box appears to define the
Kramer Matrix Switcher commands:
There are two main modes:
Command and Online.
In Online mode the user can switch
Inputs/Outputs in real time just by
pressing the desired In/Out combination
field in the Grid (the right part of window) area.
In Command mode the user selects the desired combination for the Matrix and
after pressing OK the event is added to AirBox playlist.
The attached devices are automatically detected, but you can add more manually by
double clicking a row in the list of devices (#1 NONE; #2 NONE; etc.). This window
will appear:
Video and Audio can be switched separately or together. The Device list can be
Saved and Loaded. You can also set time offset in milliseconds .
Leitch Matrix Switcher output event
is another optional plug-in for AirBox.
When you choose to insert a Leitch Matrix
event, the dialog to the left is displayed.
Double-click on the relevant level to
configure it (i.e. to specify the number of
inputs and outputs in it) and click OK.
Then specify the commands in the grid (it
will reflect your Configure settings). If
you choose the Command mode, you’ll have to press OK to insert the event in the playlist.
In Online mode, you can control the matrix switcher in real time. You can also set an offset
of the event, if necessary.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
37
Ocelot Switcher Event - activates the Ocelot Switcher output dialog where you can
define the switcher’s commands.



You can control the device by adding/inserting an event into the AirBox playlist (the
so called OFFLINE mode). Select the ONLINE mode to execute your commands on-the-
fly.
In the Levels field are listed the available matrix levels which refer to digital video,
analog audio and digital audio. Right-clicking over a level invokes a pop-up menu that
enables grouping it with another level or ungrouping the currently selected pairs, or
resetting all of them. Grouping is convenient for simultaneous switching of all levels in a
group.
Double-click over a level will open a dialog where you can define its name, and the
inputs’ and outputs’ numbers. Note that you can not do this in ONLINE mode. While in this
mode the switcher deals only with the existing levels.
To define inputs and outputs of the selected level, mark and unmark the cross cells in
the grid by single mouse-clicking.
Double-clicking on a column/row header invokes a dialog for changing its label. If you
want to delete all current commands (at all levels) use the Clear commands button.
Note that it works only in OFFLINE mode.
If Auto refresh is checked, the grid will automatically reflect the matrix status each
time some of the switcher’s Input/Output buttons is pressed. If not checked, you can update
this information manually by pressing the Refresh button.
When in OFFLINE mode, you can specify the delay/precession of the event in
milliseconds. The corresponding strings are situated in the lower left part of the window. .
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
38
· TitleBox Net Control output
event
This is actually a set of events which is
used to manage objects in TitleBox. It could
be a TitleBox object which you’d like to
control from AirBox; or a command for
controlling a currently open project in
TitleBox; or a combination between them.
For a complete description of AirBox with
TitleBox integration, see Appendix 5.
When you select Events¬Add Event/Insert Event¬TitleBoxNetCtrlOutput…a
TitleBox Control Wizard will appear. It will guide you through creating a TitleBox Net
Control Output event. Follow the instructions and select the TitleBox project and/or object,
and the desired action. You can evoke the Wizard also by right-clicking on a playlist row
and selecting the relevant command from the pop-up menu (Add Event/Insert
Event¬TitleBoxNetCtrlOutput…).
If you press the Advanced button in the left lower corner of the Wizard, the
Configuration dialog box will open. There you can define more sophisticated settings of the
event (offset, duration, color, or even the text of the text objects).
Configuration dialog box:
- Template area Here you can see the commands [General Commands] and a list of
available projects. Only projects that have been previously saved as templates in TitleBox
(Project ¬ Options=Network¬Export) could be
managed from AirBox.
General Commands:
Start - starts displaying the object(s).
Stop - stops (“freezes”) the object(s) on the screen
because of ceasing the exchange of information with the
graphic buffer.
Clear screen - hides all objects from the screen because
of clearing the graphic buffer.
Reset - resets the project. This function would be useful if there have been other TitleBox
events before the one you’d like to insert, but you’re not quite sure about the display status
of some object(s). This command will stop and hide all the previously displayed objects.
After it you can start the TitleBox again and be sure it will display only the newly-set
object(s).
- Property area: When you select a command, it appears in the mid-window field. To
activate a command, check the check box in front of its name.
After selecting the command, press the OK button. The TitleBox command event will
appear in AirBox playlist.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
39
When you select a TitleBox project its objects
appear in the lower property window. You can select one
(or all of them) to be controlled from AirBox by checking
the check box in front the objects. Choose the
Command field (Play, Stop or Update). The
[Update] command is used for text items that have been
changed after their recent use in AirBox. In the following
fields to the right you can see the object’s properties
(duration, offset, effects, etc.). Offset field allows setting
the time for earlier or later start of the object according to
the next video clip.
After selecting the object(s), press the OK button. The TitleBox object event will
appear in AirBox playlist.
- Channels - These correspond to TitleBox channel ID, set in TitleBox/Project
¬Options=Network.
- Text Property area – you can change the text of text objects in it.
Here is an Example: If you want to start Crawl1, Roll1 and Sequence from the
“football” project and after two clips to stop all objects and clear the screen, the playlist
should look like this:
IMPORTANT: To use TitleBox Net Control output event, you have to start your
TitleBox with Net Control function (TitleBox¬ Network¬ Net Control) where
available (the “light” TitleBox version does not support this option).
To control a project (its objects) from AirBox, you have to create that project in
TitleBox first and export it as a template into Template folder (TitleBox/ Network¬
Export project as template). The Template folder is created automatically during
TitleBox installation. If the AirBox module is installed on a different computer or you need
to change the folder’s location, then after the installation of AirBox, you have to start the
TitleBox Net Control Setup (Programs>DMT>AirBox – PLNetInst.exe).
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
40
VikinX Matrix Switcher output
event
Similar to other matrix switchers,
VikinX has two operation modes:
Command and Online. While in
Command mode, you can configure
the combination of the matrix
switcher and push OK to add the
event in the playlist.
In Online mode, you can control the
inputs/outputs in real time, just by
pressing the relevant cell in the
switcher grid.
You can specify the number of inputs/outputs in the grid using the relevant buttons in the
dialog.
In its lower left part, specify the delay/precession of the event in milliseconds.
NOTE: The GPI, Kramer Switchers, Leitch Matrix Switcher, VikinX Matrix Switcher
and TitleBox Net Control Output events are part of the so called AirBox PRO option.
Add Note will add a comment line at the end of your playlist.
Note – inserts a comment line in the playlist, above the currently selected line.

AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
41
III.5. Options Menu
The Options menu contains the most
important settings of the AirBox module.
III.5.1. Settings
The Settings dialog box is divided into
four fields. The upmost field contains
general functionality options :
Use Clip Trimmer – determines
whether AirBox will open Clip Trimmer on double
clicking a clip or not.
Disable trimming while playing – to restrict changes in
the currently playing list.
Enable IP Remote Control – enables or disables
AirBox LAN remote control (using IP address).
Auto popup LogView on error – displays the LogView
window automatically, when an error occurs.
Disable misusable (critical) shortcuts – replaces
regular shortcuts of “dangerous” playback commands
with alternative ones as follows:
Transmit actual file timecode
– AirBox transmits the actual
file timecode embedded in the
clip file. This timecode can be
used by external applications,
such as SubTitle Plus
(www.subtitleplus.com).
Broadcast timecode over
network – If this one is
checked, AirBox will broadcast
the playlist time code, the
current clip timecode, and the
relative timecode (from the
beginning) over the network
(via UDP).
Auto change items in Block Timer list – the block timer will follow the subsequent
events in the playlist (as chosen in the block timer dialog box). If not checked, the timer will
remain fixed at the selected event in the list. After this event is passed, the block timer will
read negative values, because the origin point will remain fixed in the past.
Playback
Command
From To
<Space>
<Alt>+<P> Play
<P>
<F5>
<Alt>+<Y>
Scheduled Play
<Y>
<F6>
double <Esc>
Stop
<T>
<F7>
Pause <Space> <F8>
<Ctrl>+<Space>
<Alt>+<N> Next
<N>
<F9>
<Alt>+<Space>
<Alt>+<J> Jump
<J>
<F10>
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
42
Show progress bar in block timer … sec. – defines the time before a clip’s end for
showing the progress bar inside the block timer (see View¬Block Timer). For instance if
a 15-second value is set, the progress bar will be visible in the last 15 seconds of the total
playout time. During the rest of the time, the progress bar will not be displayed, just the
counter itself.
Auto save playlist – saves the playlist automatically at predefined intervals.
Frame rate…fps – this setting is needed for estimating all kinds of time values (i.e. end
time, playlist duration, etc.) while there is no accessible frame rate of a currently played file
(for example AirBox is in Stop mode).
Video preview aspect ratio – choose the aspect ratio of Video preview window. This is
needed because some decoders can not report the aspect ratio of playing content, so this
must be selected manually in order to preview content properly.
Restart playback after – resets the Hardware counter which is displayed at the Master
(green) counter. This option is necessary due to various platform and format limitations.
For example, MPEG2 stream duration is limited to approx. 26 hours, so you must reset the
counter at least once every 26-th hour. Decoder restarting may cause a few frames delay in
playback.
Cue delay – this option concerns the Cue function (freeze at a first clip frame). It defines
the delay (in milliseconds) before pausing on the first frame, since different decoders have
different behavior regarding the first clip frame. This function is both decoder- and
computer-dependent. You’ll have to find the most suitable one for your setup by testing.
The next field, Network Files Restrictions, is designed
to specify the procedure at inserting files that are not
saved in the AirBox machine. This is a precaution option:
The playback could stop at network failure if all your content is remote; or the playlist could
end earlier – if some of your files are locally stored and the network fails, AirBox will label
all remote files as missing, skip them, and hence the end time of the playlist will be reduced
by the duration of all missing files.
When OWarn is checked, the rows of all network-stored files in the playlist
will become dark-green. A note [Remote file] will appear in the Type
column.
When OAllow is checked, you will not be notified whether your files are remote or locally
stored. Thus, you will take the chance to trust your network.
If OReject is checked, the rows of all network-stored files in the
playlist will become red (brown when selected). A note Rejected
remote file [Remote file] will appear in the Type column. These files are considered
missing and will be skipped during playback. The playlist time will be recalculated
accordingly if you have left the Show duration of missing files flag unchecked (see the
Missing files section below).
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
43
Missing files is the third field in the Settings dialog box.
It refers to handling of missing files.
Show duration of missing files – if there are any
missing files in the playlist, their real duration or zero-
duration in the playlist can be visible. This will affect the
playlist’s total duration and End time that are displayed in the Status Bar. If this Option is
checked, a question mark will appear after [Total Length] and [End at] in the Status
Bar. If the Option is not checked, but there are missing files, an exclamation mark will
appear after [Total Length] and [End at] in the Status Bar.
Log message if missing file exists – check it, to include the list of missing files in the log
window.
Check Missing Files every …sec. – this option is used for checking the playlist for
missing files at a defined time interval. When you prepare your playlist, you can add to it
files that are not available at the online storage yet. They appear in AirBox as red-colored
lines. Check this option to let AirBox auto-check whether the missing files are already
available or not.
Audio alarm if missing file exists, every …sec. - use this option to enable audio alarm if
there are missing files in the playlist. Thus, you will be alerted if there are missing files or if
you accidentally delete a clip related to the current playlist.
The last field in the Settings dialog box provides some
User interface options.
Overlay channel number, first channel is – a big
figure of the AirBox channel will be displayed in the grid
background. You have to set the number of the first
channel. The numbers of all subsequently open channels will be updated automatically. You
just have to check the Overlay channel number box in each AirBox’ Settings if you
want to view it in the grid.
Show frame values in playlist – check it to view the number of frames at the end of the
duration value in the Duration column.
Color entire row by category – fills the entire row in the playlist with the Category-field
color of the relevant clip. This option refers to DataBox’ categories. You can change the
category color in DataBox Options = Default values ¬ Colors to AirBox.
NOTE: You will have to drag-n-drop entries from the DataBox grid into the AirBox grid to
view their category colour.
Row Height – defines the height of the row. It cannot be less than 16 pixels.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
44
III.5.2. Colors
This option allows users to define the colors
used in AirBox’s playlist for color- coding, as
well as for timers.
Playlist colors:
Background – playlist background.
Playing – currently played clip.
Event – event rows.
Cued – a clip prepared for playback.
Missing – missing file rows.
Note – note (comment) line.
You can define colors for Normal and for Selected status of each playlist row.
Timer colors:
Clip timer – colors for the progress bar and letters in the Clip Timer.
Block timer – colors for the progress bar and letters in the Block Timer.
TC (timecode) timer – colors for the progress bar and letters in the TC Timer.
Clicking on the desired color box enables a combo-box for choosing a color or defining a
custom one.
Reset button resets the selected field to default colors.
All the screenshots in this User’s Manual are made with default AirBox colors and all
explanations are accorded to them.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
45
III.5.3. Modules
× Playback
Here you can choose the playback
module to work with, depending on
the installed hardware platform.
Select the desired module from the list
of available modules in the upper
window and assign it to the
corresponding AirBox channel in the
lower window by double clicking the
module or by pressing the Set
button. This option allows you to start
multiple AirBox applications on
different hardware decoders at the same workstation.
NOTE: Depending on the selected module (plug-in), AirBox may recognize some files as
invalid if these files are not supported by the respective hardware decoder.
Look up for the latest list of platforms supported by AirBox in http://www.playbox.tv or
write to playbox@playbox.tv.
If there is no hardware platform installed, there still are two choices:
Software MPEG Playback – Software-based MPEG2 playback. Used mostly for
demonstration purposes, it represents all features available to Hardware playback except the
video signal output. If you have a dual-head video card with TV output, the video overlay
can be monitored through it.
DataPump MPEG Program Dumper – Dumps the playlist into a single MPEG2 file.
Doing this does not require any hardware decoder. This feature can be used for simple cuts
only – splicing, editing and joining of MPEG2 files.
Press the Configure button to configure further the module’s options.
NOTE: This feature works faster than the real-time. For example, a 15-minute playlist
compiles as a single file for less than 10 minutes. The speed depends on the HDD
performance and the input/output stream configuration.

AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
46
IP Pump MPEG Program Dumper – An optional playback plug-in that sends the
playback stream to a network IP address instead to a decoder. The IP Pump uses a standard
UDP mechanism for data transfer. Pressing the Configure… button in Options>Modules
opens the IP Pump Setup window:
In the Address field, enter the IP address of
the remote machine to receive the stream. If
you check Multicast, i.e. streaming to
multiple machines, you will have to enter a
special multicast address in the Address
field. Usually its first three digits are in
between 224 and 239.
In the Port field, define which
communication port will be used for the
streaming. By default it is 1234.
TTL stands for time-to-live for the Internet
packets. The higher the TTL value, the longer the packets will “live” and pass through more
routers. By default it is “1” which is enough for local networks.
Buffer Size field – here you can specify the size of the data packs to be sent along the
network.
Advance time - contains the maximum time for buffering before initiating the streaming.
WARNING! Consult your network administrator prior to changing these settings.
NOTE: There is no VGA Overlay with this plug-in!
NOTE: The IP Pump is an optional plug-in and is not a part of the standard AirBox
module.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
47
× Remote Control
The available modules for remote
control in AirBox are GPI (General
Purpose Interface) Input and
Output, Kramer Switcher Output,
Kramer Matrix Switcher output,
Leitch Matrix Switcher output,
Ocelot Switcher Output, TitleBox
NetControl Output and VikinX Matrix Switcher output.
- GPI Input / Output
You can find detailed information about AirBox GPI plug-ins in Appendix1, further in
this manual.
There are two GPI modes:
GPI Input, where AirBox works as a GPI Slave and
GPI Output, where AirBox works as a GPI Master.
The GPI functionality is optional and is not a standard part of the AirBox module. In
order to use it, you must obtain a relevant license. If you have a licensed GPI option, you
can define which mode to be enabled (or both of them) by double clicking the Enabled
field. You can configure the GPI further by pressing the Configure button:
· GPI Input: The GPI groups are listed in the left column. You can assign a specific
COM port to each group. In the fields to the right you can define the desired AirBox
function (Play, Stop, Pause, Resume, Next, etc.) for the respective GPI.
The Pulse Level field defines the level of the trigger pulse (see Appendix 1)
· GPI Output: Here you have to specify the GPI groups and the respective COM ports,
too.
The Pulse Level field defines the level of the
trigger pulse.
The Pulse duration field defines the duration of
the trigger pulse in milliseconds.
The GPI output is performed via dedicated GPI
output events in the playlist. When the playback
reaches a GPI event, the GPI trigger is activated
for as many milliseconds, as defined in the Pulse
duration field. After that the playback continues. If you don’t want to continue the
playback, just insert a Stop or a Wait event after the GPI event.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
48
- Kramer Switcher Output
The Kramer Switch module allows you to control the Kramer switchers from
AirBox. AirBox supports the following series of Kramer switchers: VS-1201xl, VS-1001xl,
VS-801xl, VS-601xl, VS-401xl and VS-1211, VS-1011, VS-811, VS-611, VS-411. They
provide switching between 12, 10, 8, 6 or 4 video and balanced/unbalanced audio inputs to
one output (video and audio). The switchers may be controlled by a PC, via RS-232 and/or
RS485/422 communication ports. For more information about Kramer switchers see:
http://www.kramerelectronics.com
The Kramer Switch output functionality is not a standard
part of AirBox. If you have a license to use Kramer Switch
output, Enable and Configure it.
In the configuration window, you can define:
- Model –the model of the Kramer Switcher
used. You can select it from the pop-up list of the
available ones.
- Protocol – the protocol used for the respective switcher. You can select it
from the pop-up list.
- COM Port – the COM-port used for connecting to the switcher. You can
select it from the available COM-ports.
- Baud rate – the baud rate of the port.
- Kramer Matrix Switcher Output
Kramer Matrix Switcher module allows you to control
the Kramer Matrix Switchers from AirBox. This plug-in is
also optional. AirBox supports the entire series of Kramer
matrix switchers. They provide switching between 16, 12, 10,
8, 6 or 4 video and balanced/unbalanced audio and video
inputs to 16, 12, 10, 8, 6 or 4 outputs (video and audio). The matrixes are controlled via RS-
232 and/or RS485/422 communication ports. Just select an/the appropriate COM port. For
more detailed information about various Kramer matrix switchers look up in:
http://www.kramerelectronics.com
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
49
- Leitch Matrix Switcher output
Now AirBox can control Leitch Matrix Switchers,
either through the computer COM port or using the IP
address of the matrix (via TCP/IP protocol). The
configuration window is divided into two areas – one per
each mode. For the OCOM port mode you should set::
- COM Port – the COM-port you will use for
connecting to the switcher. All available COM-ports
are listed in the drop-down list.
- Baud rate – set the information carrying capacity
of the port measured in bits/s
- Read delay – the delay between the command
given to the matrix switcher and its execution. By
default it is 50 ms and it is not recommended to
change this value.
- Read timeout – the time for which the switcher reports status.
If you choose to control the matrix via the TCP/IP protocol, check OTelnet Mode and
enter the relevant IP Address in the bottom of the configuration dialog.
- Ocelot Switcher output
Another make of switchers supported by AirBox are the
Ocelot switchers. The only thing you can set in their
configuration window is the COM port used for connecting to
the switcher. You will find the available COM ports in the drop-
down list.
- TitleBox Net Control output
This function allows managing the TitleBox objects
from AirBox. This is done by using external events
(TitleBox net control output events) in AirBox.
Press the Configure button to further configure the
TitleBox control. You can set the connection port and a
default TitleBox channel, to which AirBox control refers.
For a detailed step-by-step guide on how to integrate
TitleBox with AirBox look up in APPENDIX 5 –
Integration of AirBox with TitleBox
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
50
- VikinX Matrix Switcher Output
Pressing the Configure… button while the VikingX Switcher
row is selected will evoke a setup dialog where you can
define:
- COM Port – Use the drop-down list of available COM-
ports to select the one that will be connected to the switcher.
- Read delay – the delay between the command given to
the switcher and its response. By default it is 50 ms and it is
not recommended to change this value.
× Logo
This option allows displaying a logo over the
clips played in AirBox. You may select a logo source
from the list and assign it to the appropriate AirBox
channel.
Pressing the Configure button will open a
Logo configuration dialog box, where you can
define Logo Presets to be used later in AirBox (see
Logo Options, further in the manual).
III.5.4. Module Options
Depending on the currently active plug-in, this window contains information
corresponding to the available hardware and allows its fine-tuning.

Module Options - NetStream 2000:
· Video/Audio – video (brightness; contrast; saturation)
and audio (balance; digital or analogue) settings.
· TV Out - VGA or TV Output activation.
- VGA mode
- TV mode: TV standard, TV output, display mode.
· Overlay - Overlay VGA window adjustment.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
51
Module Options - Stradis:
· Video standard – PAL or NTSC
· Synch Mode – use the system clock or not.
· VITC Enable – enable VITC or not.
· Transparency fix – as is
· Logo Presets – defines the logo
presets.
· GenLock – use of Genlock.
NOTE: As AirBox installs automatically
all needed Elecard filters, we recommend
not installing the Stradis DirectShow filter
during Stradis hardware installation. Make
sure to uncheck the relevant check-box
during installation (It is checked by
default!) – see the screenshot to the right.
Module Options for Matrox DigiServer:
In Matrox DigiServer, there is one analogue video output
which can be used for displaying video or for displaying alpha
channel. Depending on your wish, check the option Use Analog
Video Output or Use Alpha Channel Analog Video output.
If you use Alpha channel output, the alpha key file should
have the same name, size and GOP-structure as the primary video
mpeg file and should be located in the same folder, in order to be
recognized by AirBox. For example: d:\dir\video.mpg and d:\dir\video.key.mpg. If the key-
file is not found, the original MPEG file will be used as an alpha file.
· Use audio monitor – permits using an audio monitor.
· Select audio output – selects audio output.
· Select audio monitoring – selects an audio monitor. It is active, if the box “Use audio
monitor” is checked.
· Restart Matrox hardware on exit – restarts Matrox hardware after the last AirBox
exit.
· Use alpha channel – permits using an alpha channel. It is active, when the first
Matrox device (first Matrox DigiServer channel) from AirBox¬Modules is selected.
NOTE: For proper functioning of Matrox Hardware under Windows OS you should work
with administrator account privileges.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
52
Module Options for Decklink
There are three tabs in this
setup dialog:
General is used for
setting the video standard
(PAL/NTSC) and,
optionally, flipping of
images and/or fields.
In the Logo tab, you can
set the logo fade in / fade out properties.
Module Options for Matrox DigiSuite LX
This setup dialog box contains two pages: Input
properties and Output control.
In the Input Properties tab, you can select the
video input and the Audio pair.
In the Output Control tab, you can adjust the
output settings:
In the Show on Stop area, you can define what will be displayed when AirBox is in
Stop mode.
Last frame will freeze the last frame of the last played clip.
Live input will transmit life input as set in the Input
Properties tab.
Pressing the Logo Presets button will open the
Configure Logo Presets dialog box (see the next
section).
In the Alpha/Key Settings field you can activate
keying (EUse Alpha Channel Mode) and decide
upon the mixing type: Internal or External.
If your key files are not in the same directory as the relevant MPEG files, you can specify
their location in the Key Files Drive field. The two files could be stored on different drives
but their directory paths must be the same. Your alpha file must have the same name as the
video file that is going to be mixed with. Besides, you should insert “.key.” before the
extension of the alpha file.
For example, if the video file is “Sports_Opening.mpg” its key file should be
“Sports_Opening.key.mpg”. .
NOTE: You CANNOT mix files with and files without alpha channel in the same playlist!
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
53
III.5.5. Logo Options

In this configuration dialog, logo
images are set for displaying in AirBox
(their position on the screen,
transparency, etc.).
Logo Preset – shows a list of logo
presets available for use.
To load the preset, press the Load
button and select a file. It will appear
in the Preview area. If you approve it,
press the Apply button to save the logo file in the preset list.
Invert alpha – inverts alpha key.
Matte Color – this is the background color which should be mixed with transparent
colors and thus removed from the logo image.
Position – shows the logo position on the screen.
On startup – these options are used to define the logo appearing in AirBox, after
starting the module.
- No Logo –no logo appears after starting AirBox.
- Last used – If there are no Logo preset events in the playlist, the last used logo
will appear after starting AirBox.
- Logo 1 – If there are no Logo preset events in the playlist number 1 will appear
after starting AirBox.
Display
- Auto show box – shows the logo automatically. It is active during the configuration
session only.
- Show button – shows the logo.
- Hide button – hides the logo.
NOTE: The picture format depends on the decoder. The 32-bit RGBA files are most
preferable, but TGA, JPG and PSD files are widely supported too.

AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
54
III.5.6. Media Folders
This module is intended for relocating file paths.
If you have built a playlist and for some reason the file
locations have been changed, here you can quickly
relocate file paths. It is easily done: fill in the Old
folder field with the original location, and then fill in
the New folder field with the new location. You may
browse for path with the button. There are two
view options: if you check Show only files that exist
in new folder, only files available in the New folder
will be displayed in the list underneath; Show only
missing files displays only those files from the playlist that are Missing.
The selection modes are self-explanatory and give opportunity for fast
selecting/deselecting of all items, inverse and missing only selection.
When the Change button is pressed, the file paths are relocated and this is reflected
in the playlist immediately.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
55
III.5.7. Log Options
AirBox generates two types of log files: System logs and an
AsRun log. A directory Logs is created at AirBox installation.
It contains a System subfolder by default. Errors, System
events, Events and Event type are logged in the System log
regardless of your wish.
In the Log Options dialog box you can choose what Playlist
Entry Information will be included in the logs; should they be
created on a Daily basis or not; and make some log-
management settings. You can add info fields by checking the
relevant check boxes in the list situated in the upper half of the
dialog box. Use the red arrows to change the order in which a
chosen item will be placed in the Log file. Note that this information is clip-related.
Below the list of info fields, there are several selectable options:
If ELog into file is checked, a Log file will be created; otherwise, your AsRun log will not
be generated. When you first check this box, a subfolder AsRun is created in the
AirBox\Logs directory. Your AsRun log files will be saved there.
ELog actual played time – checking this box will include in your log a field displaying
the actually played time, not the original duration.
EFrames will display the number of frames at the end of all time-containing values.
EColumn headers represent a line in the log that displays the log configuration under it.
Thus, any time you change the log configuration (through the check-boxes and red arrows)
and click OK, a new column header line will appear in the logs.
You can also choose the periodicity of log files – Daily log or aggregated files.
If EDaily log is selected, a new AsRun Log file will be created each new day. The System
logs are always daily despite this setting. The Day start at field determines when to start
the new log. This setting is necessary in case you wish to log 24-hour periods that start at
your wish (for example at 2:00 o’clock instead of 0:00)
Delete system logs
every days – this
option will help you in
managing your log files,
deleting the ones older
than the number of days
set using the arrows. You
can choose between 14
and 100 days. Here is an
example of how an
AsRun Log looks:
The Log file is generated
in simple Tab-delimited
text format. It can be easily imported to various applications, text editors, etc.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
56
III.5.8. StartUp Options
Here you can find useful options for setting the
AirBox’ behaviour on startup: StartUp Playlist,
various Playback recovery options, how playlists
will be reloaded and two system options.
StartUp playlist
Here you can choose a startup playlist for
AirBox. New loads blank playlist; Last used
commands AirBox to use the last used one; Open
invokes a query to choose playlist from a location at
will. The Daily playlist folder gives an opportunity
for some simple scheduling of playlists. Choose a
folder in which you will place the daily playlists by
filling-in its path or just browse for it with the
button. There you will save the playlists you want to
schedule. They require specific naming structure in
order to be played on the desired date and time. An example name is
“2003_11_20_14_00_00.ply”. 2003 stands for the year, 11_20 is for MM_DD (month_day)
and 14_00_00 is HH_MM_SS (hour_minutes_seconds). Only files with such naming
structure will be automatically played when AirBox is running in this mode. Now you can
use the Save daily playlist feature in the AirBox File menu to achieve this naming
automatically.
Playback recovery options
Here you can specify what AirBox should do in case of accidental restart /abnormal
termination of the module. The Following options are available:
Last playback status (Play / Pause / Stop) – if chosen, resumes the last playback
status of AirBox depending on the status in which it was before stopping.
Last played item from the last playlist – applies playback status to the last running
object before stopping. This option doubles the first one – and can not be selected without
it.
Last played position in the last played item – functions as of the two previous
options and even more – remembers the position in the last item to resume status exactly at
it. The interval for saving the last position is changeable.
Catch up with schedule according the system clock – this option allows playlist
recovery after a failure and synchronizing it with the system clock.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
57
When setting this option, you should bare in mind that the default start time for all
playlists in AirBox is 00:00:00 hours. Therefore if you have started your playlist manually,
after a power failure AirBox will resume playback from that point in the playlist which
corresponds to the initial time (00:00:00) plus the current system clock time. For example:
you start your playlist manually at 9:00 o’clock; at 9:30 occurs a power failure that persists
till 10:00. After power supply recovery at 10:00 AirBox will resume playback from the
point in the playlist that is 10:00 hours away from its beginning (considering 00:00:00 as
initial start time). In short, AirBox will “forward” the playlist to the time point of power
supply recovery, taking 00:00:00 as initial time.
In order to overcome this, you should compile your playlists starting with wait
events. The wait event’s value should be set in hours from 00:00:00 to the desired start
time of your play list, i.e. for the above example, your playlist should start with a “wait for 9
hours” event.
Thus in case of power failure, AirBox will account for the initial time set by you and
will resume playback from the point that corresponds to the power recovery time. I.e. for
the above example, at 10:00 o’clock AirBox will start from the point which corresponds to
one hour after the beginning of the playlist (set to 9:00 o’clock through a wait event). .
Reload playlist
Here you can adjust settings related to the way AirBox handles playlist reloading.
Auto load daily playlist – this option commands AirBox to auto load the available
daily playlists. If this option is not checked, but StartUp playlist is set to Daily playlist
folder then AirBox will play only the first relevant playlist for this day and will not auto
load the next ones, even if they are available.
Reload playlist on file change – auto reloads the current playlist, if in the meantime
it has been changed and saved by another user.
In the When reload playlist field you can choose how AirBox should reload playlists
when needed. The two options are: Reload playlist immediately or Wait for playing clip
end.
You can choose also between two system options: Launch AirBox on Windows start
and Start minimized.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
58

III.5.9. TC Options
If you have license to use the LTC
reader plug-in module and a DirectSound
compatible sound card, you may use it to
read LTC timecode from your transport
device. The setup of this module is quite
simple. Choose your sound card device
from the list. Choose Sample rate and
Channels and Start the module. Current
timecode is shown in the TC Timer.
III.5.10. Filename Parser
This module will allow AirBox to Parse
names of files and get information from them.
It provides an easy way to use information
included in the file name, without using a
database. You will make the most advantage
of this feature if you have standard naming
structure for your clips.
In this setting dialog box, you have to “tell”
AirBox how you name files, so it will “know”
what do certain parts of your filenames mean.
The dialog box is divided in three zones – the
uppermost zone provides options to
write/browse for a sample filename and to set
general “parsing rules” – presets; in the
middle zone you should “explain” the naming
structure by including metadata fields; and in
the lower zone you can specify the properties
of each metadata field.
Have a look at the following example to make
it clear to yourself.
Let us pick a sample filename like BGMusic-Lime_Biscuit-The_road_to_heaven-live.mpg
– write it in the Filename field. You could also browse for existing files, or choose from
the drop-down list of filenames after pushing the arrow button to the right of the Filename
field. The drop-down list contains all filenames of the currently loaded playlist.
This is a possible way to name music files – create a preset (let us call it Music):
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
59
Push the Plus button situated to the right of the Active file
parser preset Field . A dialog will prompt you to
name the new preset. You can rename it later on by pushing
the Recycle button, or delete it by pushing the Minus
button.
Once you have entered the preset name, you can start “explaining” the naming rules. Let us
go back to the sample filename – you can see that its structure contains (in order of
appearance) an abbreviation (BG), a category name (Music), a separator (-), a name of a
performer/star (Lime_Biscuit), another separator (-), a title (The_road_to_heaven), one
more separator (-) and a note (live), followed of course, by the file format. This is what you
have to “tell” AirBox. Here is how:
In the Metadata options area, use the Plus and Minus buttons to
add/remove parser fields. You can select from the available types of
fields. In our example, you have to enter one by one: Note (it will stand
for the abbreviation BG), Category, SEPARATOR, Star,
SEPARATOR, Title, SEPARATOR, and Note. If you want to skip
some information in the filename, select NONE in the relevant position.
Do not forget to set which symbols are regarded as separators (check the
relevant boxes in the lower left corner). Here, exclude the lower dash from the separators
list, at it represents the space within the separate fields.
To the right of the Metadata fields list you can see a number of checkboxes that provide
some conversion options:
EConvert all underscores to spaces - in our case Lime_Biscuit will become Lime
Biscuit.
EConvert all “%20” to spaces is not applicable in our case, but otherwise you can
use it for downloaded files (their names often happen to contain “%20” instead spaces)
EALL CAPS will turn all letters in the filename in upper case.
EAll first caps – capitalizes the first letter of each word in the relevant metadata field
ECapitalize first only – capitalizes only the first letter of the relevant metadata filed
EInclude letters and EInclude numbers are checked by default. If you uncheck
some of them, the filename parser will ignore the relevant characters (i.e. will not
include them in the field).
You have to set your preferences for each metadata field separately (select it by clicking on
it).
Finally, you have to specify the length of each metadata field.
This is not a problem if you choose to name your files with fixed length per each field –
check the Fixed length flag and specify the number of characters using the arrows. The
corresponding characters in the Filename field will be highlighted in blue so that you can
see your setting.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
60
However setting variable lengths is a little bit trickier.  Check the Variable length flag in
the lower right field and then specify minimum and/or maximum characters to be included
in the relevant metadata field. If you have set a Minimum value, but the relevant metadata
field contains fewer characters, you will need some Pad symbol to fill-in the gab.
If you have set a Maximum value, but the relevant metadata field contains more characters,
you will have to insert a NONE field before the SEPARATOR field, thus telling AirBox
to ignore the remaining symbols to the separator.
Back to our example, Lime_Biscuit contains 12 symbols. If we set minimum value 15 and
Pad symbol (*) for the Star field, the Filename Parser will display Lime Biscuit*** in the
playlist grid. If we set a maximum of 9 symbols for the Star field, the Metadata fields list
should contain “… [Star], [NONE], [SEPARATOR]…” instead of “… [Star],
[SEPARATOR]…”. You can change the positions of the metadata fields by drag-n-
dropping them.
Append … at end field gives an opportunity to add character(s) to the end of a metadata
field.
Some fields, like Title, Category, etc., are displayed directly in the AirBox grid.
Others, like Tape ID for example, may provide information to SubTitle Plus
(www.subtitleplus.com) or SubtitleBox (see below) for proper display of corresponding
subtitles. When you use the filename parser to display subtitles, you have to create a preset
with naming structure [Tape ID] and [SEPARATOR] and the fields’ length should be set to
Variable. In the clip’s properties dialog, fill in the same Tape ID as of the subtitle file.
NOTE: In order to use the potentialities of the Filename parser module, you must set it
first and then add files to the playlist. THE MODULE CANNOT PARSE AN ALREADY
LOADED PLAYLIST because it already contains all the metadata for the relevant clips
included in it.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
61
III.5.11. SubtitleBox
SubtitleBox is an optional plug-in to the AirBox module. It
enables using subtitles together with your running clips. SubtitleBox does not provide any
editing options; it just shows your subtitles synchronized with your clips. The supported
subtitle formats are *.sub (created by our own subtitling software SubTitle Plus –
www.subtitleplus.com), *.pac and *.ebu. It is best to use SubtitleBox with Subtitle Plus
native files. They contain the TapeID (the reference to the corresponding media files), so
SubtitleBox could “know” when to load and display the subtitles for each clip.
Enable the plug-in and configure it. The
only things you need to specify in the
Configure… dialog box are the folder where
your subtitles are (Watch directory), and the
language you are using. Press the Show
filelist button to view all the subtitle files
contained in the Watch directory:

SubtitleBox will take care of broadcasting your subtitles, according to the playlist loaded in
AirBox.
NOTE: Make sure the Filename parser is set to a preset with naming structure [Tape
ID] and [SEPARATOR] before you load the playlist. Check the OVariable length flag. In
the clip’s properties dialog, fill in the same Tape ID as of the subtitle file. Otherwise
AirBox will not display the subtitles.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
62
III.5.12. Mirror Mode
The Mirror mode is another optional plug-in available for AirBox. The Mirror mode
provides options for full duplication of your main playout unit against system failures such
a power loss, broken motherboard or RAM, etc. In order to use this option, you must have
two licenses for AirBox, running on two different workstations with a network connection
between them. For the sake of convenience these are called Master and Backup hereafter.
They communicate via TCP/IP protocol.
To set the Master, start AirBox and check E Enable IP remote control in Options ¬
Settings. Otherwise, the Backup machine will not be able to connect to the Master.
To set the Backup, go to Options¬ Mirror Mode¬ Configure… and do the
following settings in the Mirror connection
setup window:
In the topmost string, point out the Remote
machine by writing its IP address or name.
If needed, some external event can be
executed on connection/disconnection of the
relevant module. This is useful for example if
you want to auto switch your Kramer switcher to
another input/output, when Master unit fails or
recovers.
The lower half of this window concerns the
synchronization between the Backup machine
and the Master machine. Do not forget to check
the E Synchronization box if you need it.
Set the frequency of position enquiries to be
send by the Backup to the Master in the Check
position every…sec cell.
Further, you can set the maximum allowable difference (in seconds) between the
Master and the Backup playback. If the difference goes beyond this value, the Backup
machine will have to resynchronize to the Master.
Playback offset value compensates the delay that may occur because of some
additional factors (e.g. the network delay or Mirror playback reaction time).
Check E Synchronize the playlist also if you want to check the playlists at each
resynchronization. Any changes in the Master playlist will be reflected in the Backup
playlist as well.

AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
63
The Mirror mode has two major sub-modes:
Full Mode:
The Backup and the Master AirBox are always playing the same content
simultaneously.
Benefit: backup channel always runs in perfect sync and you can switch over to it any
time.
Disadvantage: This will double the network traffic since the two AirBox servers will be
transferring data at the same time.
Idle Mode:
The Backup AirBox is staying idle and listening to the master AirBox activity. If the
Master AirBox stops responding, the Backup AirBox will start playing immediately from
the same point at which the Master AirBox was last.
Benefit: No additional network traffic overhead.
Disadvantage: It might take up to a second to start the playback process from the point
it was terminated.
In both modes whenever you change anything in the master AirBox playlist, the
backup AirBox does the same automatically.
Regardless the mode, you will always use content files that are stored either on local or
on network storage.
The easiest approach is to use content ONLY from a redundant network-attached
storage (NAS) or SAN. This means that the Backup AirBox will use the same file path as
Master AirBox to locate the content files.
If you are going to use local content files, or a mixed approach, then you should install
SafeBox (see the SafeBox section for details) on the Backup AirBox machine. Its task will
be to replicate (copy) automatically the new-coming content from the Master AirBox’ local
storage to the local storage of the Backup AirBox.
Failure actions:
There are two possibilities to backup your AirBox: to have one fully functional AirBox
installed on the Master machine and one AB backup (with limited functionality) on the
other machine; or to have two fully functional AirBoxes on both machines, plus one AirBox
backup license on your Backup machine.
According to this configuration, there are two possible scenarios in case an
unrecoverable failure of the Master AirBox occurs (the master AirBox server is down for a
long period, faulty motherboard, CPU, RAM, etc.):
1. In the AirBox – AirBox + AB backup scenario you just have to uncheck the Mirror
mode on the backup machine and continue working with the full AirBox functionality.
2. In the AirBox – AB backup scenario you need to attach the full AirBox dongle to the
backup AirBox server and use the Change Dongles menu command in order to operate
the full functionality on the backup machine. Obviously the master machine does not need a
dongle while faulty.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
64
The Change dongles option will allow you to change the dongle (WIBU-key) of a
currently playing unit without interrupting the work of the AirBox. Thus if your Master
machine is down and you need the full functionality on your Backup machine, you will be
able to change the dongle on the latter without interrupting its playback. After you have
inserted the new dongle, press Options¬ Mirror Mode¬ Change Dongle and the new
dongle will be recognized. Now you can go on working.
III.5.13. Admin…
A brand new menu item, the Admin… aims at raising
the security of AirBox. The idea for password protection of
some settings that might be crucial to playback performance is
already a fact.
The first time you enter
this menu item, you will have
to go to the Change
password row. Clicking in it will open a dialog box
containing three cells – Old password, New password and
Confirm password. As this is the first time you enter this
menu item, leave the first cell empty, then write your password twice – in the second and in
the third cell (in case you’re interested, your password can contain up to 256 symbols).
Click OK.
WARNING! Make sure not to forget the password!
Now you are already logged on. To restrict the access of all other users to the Settings
menu, you just have to log off. Almost all menu items will become inaccessible – at any
attempt to enter, password will be required.
The only exceptions are Colours (as they will not affect playback); Enable SubtitleBox
(but not Configure); and Mirror mode (Full mode, Idle mode, Change dongles, but
without configuring).
If you decide not to use password protection anymore, just go to Change password
and write the old password in the relevant field. Leave the New password and Confirm
password fields empty and click OK.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
65
III.6. Commands Menu

This menu contains commands, related to playback
and logo presets. The available commands are:
· Playback commands: this menu duplicates the
playback control buttons, situated over the master counter
(Play/Stop/Pause/Next/Jump). The commands are executed just by clicking the
appropriate field.
· Logo presets: here you can select logo presets
through clicking them. To your convenience, their
shortcuts are shown besides – Ctrl+#. To switch presets
press and hold down <Ctrl>, enter the desired preset
number and release the <Ctrl>.
· Jump to: Here you can see just a shortcut –
Ctrl+Shift+#. Using it you can jump to a clip at your will. Just press and hold down
<Ctrl+Shift>, enter the desired clip’s number and then release the <Ctrl+Shift>.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
66
III.7. Help Menu
This menu contains useful information about the AirBox module and
the possibilities for getting technical support from us.

PlayBox Help: opens the AirBox context-sensitive
help.
About…: Displays the “About” box of the AirBox
module. It contains useful information such as:
module version, WIBU Box number, mode,
registration, etc. In the bottom is displayed the name
of currently selected platform.
PlayBox Doctor: this module gives
the opportunity to generate easily
complete problem reports. It is
integrated in each PlayBox module. It
can gather almost all the information
needed for PlayBox support team in
order to provide you with the prompt
answers, without too many questions
about your system configuration. The
fields you have to fill-in are self
explanatory and the information is
auto-collected at startup. You must fill
in your name, e-mail, company and
select your country from the list. The
following two fields are filled in
automatically. Choose the hardware
platform you use in this module and
specify the installed driver version. When you have selected the relevant entries from the
drop-down lists to the left, push the Apply button to insert this information in the report.
In the Diagnostics field to the right there is a list of the most common problems - you
can choose one of them or you can describe your situation and queries manually in the
Additional information field. Push the Add button to insert the problem description in the
report.
Press this button to scan the entire system. The PlayBox Doctor will generate
a list of all files stored on your HDD. Include this information in your PlayBox Doctor
report if you suspect that some files might be disturbing the smooth running of the module.
If you scan PlayBox files and add this info to your PlayBox Doctor report,
we could understand whether you have some missing DMT’s files or you have some extra
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
67
files that should not be in this patch on your computer. Sometimes these files could cause
problems.
Using the Get Filter button, will add to your report information about the filters
used in the running module.
When sending us screenshots, please, use the Screenshot button instead of
sending us separately prepared pictures. Just press this button and PlayBox Doctor will
minimize automatically. Then select the window you want to shoot and go on with the
PlayBox Doctor report.
If you have problems with an MPEG file, press this button and browse for the file.
Thus, we will receive information about its structure.
Attach any documents, pictures or files that you would like to send to us. If your
attachments are bigger than 4 MB, please upload your files on our FTP. You will have to
contact us on support@playbox.tv to get an up-loader name and password.
Automatically attaches the log files of the currently selected module. This helps us
trace the history and behaviour of this application.
The “Get Base” button is active only when you choose DataBox in the PlayBox
module field. This provides us with information about the database open in your DataBox
module.
Do not forget to fill in your contact information and send us the generated report either
directly (if internet connection is available) or save it as a single file and send it later.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
68

IV. VDCP Manager
AirBox can now be controlled through peripheral VDCP controllers with the help of
the VDCP Manager. The VDCP Manager is available as an optional license, and could be
purchased separately.
The number of the VDCP controllers that can be connected to the VDCP Manager depends
on the available COM ports. Currently one VDCP unit could maintain up to 127 players
(AirBox) and later will also maintain up to 127 recorders (CaptureBox).
The VDCP Manager interface is quite simple, divided into three fields and a button bar
below them.
In the first field are listed the available COM ports, each with a check box in front. If
the COM port is Echecked, tracking of the relevant connection for availability of such a
controller is activated.
The next field contains list of the AirBox modules,
connected to the VDCP Manager (up to 127 as it was already
mentioned). This network connection is performed through
AirBox network API. Pushing the New AirBox button will
invoke an input dialog box to specify the Machine Address on
the network (the IP address), and the instance number (the number of the AirBox). The
instance number is written after the colon.
The widest field represents a list of the available/visible clips in the network.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
69
You can add new clips by pushing the
Add button (to include existing clips) or
you can activate the Watch Folder function
(to add new-coming clips automatically) in
the Set up dialog box. If you push the
Add button, a dialog box will open to lead
you through the procedure.
Fill in the Associated File field (the file name of the clip); the ID and Long ID fields
are filled-in automatically; and so are the In, Out and Duration fields (values in seconds).
You can trim the clip from here using the arrows next to the relevant field.
The Type of a file determines which players can play it. Type [0] means that all
players can play it.
Pushing the Set Up button opens a setup dialog box.
The Watch Folder page is used for
setting the automated populating of clip
list.
Check the E Use Watch Folder box
to activate this function.
E Process Subfolders is checked if
the watched folder contains any subfolders
that you would like to be watched as well.
ETruncate Long IDs to […] chars.
The VDCP controllers usually support clip
names of 8(standard/short IDs) or 32(long
IDs) chars. This function is used for
controllers that support limited length of long IDs, so you have to truncate them.
Some controllers get “confused” by short-duration clips, therefore you might need the
EOnly clips longer than […] sec. function.
The General page contains some
additional settings:
The set Frame Rate will determine
the TC frame rate.
The Video Outputs field contains a
list of all possible outputs. Check the
available ones.
The Log button will show the log of
the VDCP communication.
E Log Ret will log the responses to
the VDCP commands
E Freq. mess. If not checked will
filter out some frequent VDCP messages.
AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL
70
The View Players button will show all active AirBox
controller windows. Each AirBox controller window
caption contains the AirBox number (1 to 127). In it, you can
see the communication log of the relevant AirBox.
The Execute button, the text field next to it and the
playback control buttons are used for testing the connection
with AirBox.
Pressing the Machine button will bring up the input
dialog box for the network address. The green lights in front of it mean that the connection
with AirBox is established. If the lights are red, the AirBox is not accessible, a sign
[Disconnected] will appear in the status bar.
The New Player button activates a kind of virtual player, used for testing the
execution of commands.

























__________________________

71
CAPTUREBOX
__________________________
I. GETTING STARTED
CaptureBox provides sophisticated DV/MPEG2 capturing.
I.1. Installation

Where to Install it?
CaptureBox is typically installed on workstations with VTRs or other video sources,
from which MPEG2 or DV content will be ingested. Depending on the platform used, it
could be an independent workstation or the AirBox workstation itself.
Previous Versions
Prior to installing CaptureBox, you should uninstall any previous CaptureBox
versions (Control Panel ¬ Add/Remove Programs¬ DMT CaptureBox).
Software License
CaptureBox LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE WIBU USB KEY. IT WILL
NOT RUN WITHOUT THE KEY INSTALLED ON YOUR USB PORT.
Minimum System Requirements
CPU: Intel Pentium IV 2 GHz
RAM: 512 MB
HDD: Depends on the required bandwidth, reliability and platform
requirements. If you want higher bandwidth and reliability consider using SCSI
or/and RAID instead of regular IDE drives.
O/S: Windows Windows XP Professional or Home edition
VGA: DirectDraw compatible
H/W: Supported encoder platform (see the list of the supported hardware
encoders on the web site http://www.playbox.tv)

CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

72
I.2. Quick Start

1. Connect the video source signal to your hardware platform input;
2. Launch CaptureBox;
3. Select the media folder you wish to capture to;
4. Fill in the Tape ID or Channel field;
5. Type the file name you want to capture the content to;
6. Click the Manual Capture button.
Congratulations! You have just captured your first CaptureBox clip!
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

73
I.3. Capture Settings

MATROX DIGISERVER SDTI CAPTURE SETTINGS:
There are two tabs in this setup window – Capture Format and Preview.
× In the Capture Format tab you
can basically specify the Input Type
(SDTI or SDI), and the capture format
(AV or MPEG). If you select AVI, you
will have to further select its format – DV
(the additional settings for it are in the
field below) or MPEG2.
The prevalent part of this tab is dedicated
to MPEG format settings: Bit rate, GOP
type – I or IBP (below, you can also
specify its size and reference period), the
video sampling profile, and the bit rate
type.
The GOP size field represents the interval
between I-frames. The Ref. period field represents the interval between P-frames. The
following field is an example (IBBPBBPBBPBB), showing the selected pattern.
You can set the video resolution in the Dimensions field.
Q-factors- do not use them if you already have set some bit rate. You cannot set Q-factors
and bit rate simultaneously.
The fields below are designed for audio
settings:
Audio Input – enter the relevant input
type.
Audio Group and Channel Pair fields
are active for embedded audio SDI audio
only. The audio group can contain up to 4
channel pairs.
Check Move files to MultiMux watch
folder check it, if you want to move
automatically the captured file to the
MultiMux watch folder, defined in
FinishBox (our multiplexing product).
× In the Preview tab you can set the preview video and audio output. If you check
SDI Embedded, you will have to specify the Out Cable and the Audio Group below.
NOTE: For proper functioning of the Matrox hardware you should work under an
administrator account.

CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

74
Using the Time Delay – Instant Replay option (TDIR)
TDIR is a Matrox released option that can run only with Matrox
DigiSuite LX or DTV platforms. All AVI files are supported.
To use the TDIR option, launch AirBox and right-click over the grid. Choose
Add/Insert Incomplete clip from the context menu. You can also Add/Insert
Incomplete clips from the List menu.
In the Clip Properties dialog, browse and point the location where the clip will be
captured. Type the Filename and copy it (<Ctrl + C>), you will need it later in
CaptureBox. Start the playback.
Next, run CaptureBox and prepare for capturing - make the necessary settings and
fill in the Clip Data fields. Use <Ctrl + V> to paste the filename you copied from AirBox.
There should be at least 5 seconds between the capture start and the start of the incomplete
file’s playback.
Here is an example of setting this function. In it, a clip that is still being captured will be
played back in AirBox for 20 seconds:
1. Open AirBox
2. In the Options ¬ Settings dialog, set Check Missing every [3] seconds and
click OK.
3. Load a playlist; right-click and select Insert/Incomplete clip.
4. In the Clip Properties dialog, type in the title and the filename.
5. Use <Ctrl + C> to copy the file name, you will need it later.
6. Browse for the location to which the clip will be captured. Then set the Duration
to [20] seconds. In the bottom of the Clip Properties dialog, check E Live
(delayed) file and clip and set duration ().
7. Push Play. The incomplete file is marked Missing as it still does not exist.
8. Open CaptureBox and specify the Folder you will capture to,
9. the clip name and the filename (Use Ctrl + V to paste from AirBox)
10. Start manual capturing.
11. A few seconds later the incomplete clip will become available, but it will still be
marked as missing as it was inserted before it was created.
12. It will be played for 20 seconds as specified in its properties.
13. When AirBox starts playing the next clip, you can go to CaptureBox and stop
capturing.
TIP: You could fully automate this process using the CaptureBox scheduler. Prepare your
schedule-capturing list and insert the incomplete (still missing) clips in the AirBox playlist
accordingly. Thus, if you have set the correct timing, CaptureBox will start capturing and
AirBox will start playing back the relevant clips.

WARNING: You must have SCSI attached HDDs for the TDIR option. Otherwise
capturing will fail.
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

75
DECKLINK CAPTURE SETTINGS:
Make the preferred capture
settings for your Decklink
platform in this dialog.
In the first field you can choose
the Video Standard – here are
listed the most popular PAL,
NTSC and HDTV standards.
Then set the file format – it can
be MPEG or AVI.
- For AVI capturing you
can define the AVI format (DV
or uncompressed) and the audio
format (interleaved or non-
interleaved).
- Decklink supports
encoding to both MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files. So, when you capture in MPEG format –
point whether it should be MPEG-1 or MPEG-2.
 For MPEG-1 you can set the bitrate value.
 For MPEG-2 you set the bitrate type (constant or variable), the audio
and video bitrate values, the color sampling and the aspect ratio.
Determine the file structure by setting the GOP size and the
reference period. If you want to divide your file in parts, check Use
File Split and set the Split time (in minutes).
Flip fields and Preview checks are optional. If you select the first one, the fields of the
captured material will be flipped. If you choose the second one, the currently captured
scenes will be shown in the preview window.

MOBIUS CAPTURE
SETTINGS:
There are two setting modes for Mobius –
Advanced and Simple.
In Simple mode, you can check the output
files format (elementary and/or multiplexed).
The section below is related to video settings
– stream type, bitrate, resolution, video input,
aspect ratio, video format, video file type (if it
is MPEG – specify its structure as well). If
you need preview – check the Use Preview
box. In the lowest part of the window you can
set the audio stream properties. You can reset
to the default values using the relevant button.
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

76
Use the Advanced Mode button to “fine-tune” your capture details.
The Advanced setup window is divided in three main sections:
- Multiplexer – this part is dedicated to the MPEG structure. It is recommended not to
change these values unless you are sure that you really know what to do.
- Output files – again, select between elementary or/and multiplexed streams.
- Video reprocessing – this part of the advanced setup is also intuitive enough. Still, do
not make any changes if not sure.
Use the Default button to reset all values back to the most commonly used settings.







CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

77
FIREWIRE CAPTURE SETTINGS:


















In the FireWire Setup dialog, choose the video standard (PAL, NTSC, etc.) and specify the
capture format – AVI or MPEG.
In addition for AVI capturing you can select the AVI format (DV or Uncompressed) and
the Audio Format (Interleaved or Non-interleaved).
For MPEG format there are more settings to precise: the bitrate type (constant or variable),
the color sampling (4:2:0 or 4:2:2), the aspect ratio (4:3 or 16:9) and the relevant values for
the video and the audio bitrate. Here you can also determine the GOP size and the
reference period of the MPEG file.
The “Flip fields” and “Use preview” options have self-explanatory labels.


CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

78
II. USER INTERFACE

II.1. Capture Mode
When the Capture Page is active, the module is in
“record” mode. In this mode, you can choose a batch of scenes
from tapes, collect them in the batch capture list or record every
single scene manually from a VTR.
II.1.1. Batch Grid

The automated batch
capture grid occupies a large
part of the window. Many
people refer to this function as
“batch capturing”. You can
define a list of scenes with
their start and end timecode
values. Then activate batch capturing. CaptureBox captures the desired scenes
automatically from the corresponding tapes. The operator should only change the tapes
when prompted.
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

79
Grid Columns:
· Status column shows the current state of each clip, as follows:
- If the clip has been successfully captured, a green mark -appears.
- If the clip is captured, but there is no option for VTR control, a yellow hand
appears, and the timecode values in the In and Out columns are zeroes.
- If not the whole clip has been captured, or there has been a problem during the
capturing process, a red mark × appears.
- If the clip is not captured yet, a “camera” appears.
- If the clip is included in the next capture session list, a blue dot  appears. The
dot can be removed by clicking that field. This will exclude the clip from the next
capturing session.
- If the clip is not included in the next capture session, the blue dot is missing. The
dot can be added by clicking that field. Thus, you will include the clip in the next
capturing session.
· Tape column shows the ID of the tape, from which the particular clip will be
captured.
· The In column shows the initial timecode, when clip capturing will start.
· The Out column shows the timecode, when clip capturing will stop. If you click on
the grey bar named Out, it will be renamed to Duration and the column will show
the clips’ durations.
· Mode column shows what will be captured for the particular clip – video (V), audio
(A) or both (VA). Currently only VA is supported.
· The Clip Name column shows the clip names. If you click the grey bar named Clip
Name, it will change to File Name and the column will display the destination full
path where the clip will be stored – hard disk name, folder and file.
· Comments column shows the comments (if any) for each clip. You can enter your
comments in the relevant string of the clip data field to the right.
Grid buttons:
· The Blue dot button includes the selected clip in the next capture session.
· The Red X button excludes the selected clip from the next capture session.
· The Sync button synchronizes the list. All clips with “not captured” status are
included in the next capture session.
· The Sort button sorts the list by Tape ID and then by Start Timecode. Thus, the
batch capture process is simplified and optimized.
· The Capture button starts an automated capture session. During this session, all
clips, marked with a blue dot will be captured to the hard drive.
· Delimited List Import button enables loading all types of
tab-delimited text files into the batch grid. You will have to create
templates to “tell” CaptureBox what is the structure of your tab-
delimited file, i.e. what information does each column contain.
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

80
Pressing the Delimited List Import button will open a dialog for you to specify the
template to use when loading your file:
The Template preset drop-down list contains all the
templates stored in the Template Folder (see the
Template Builder description below).
Select the Action you would like to execute from the
drop-down list. You can either Insert, Append or
Load the file. The latter action will delete all
previously loaded entries in the batch grid.
Finally, browse for the file you would like to import using the selected template and click
OK.
NOTE: The OK button will not be active until you fill in all the strings in this dialog.
At opening this dialog for the first time, you will have to create a template first.
Push the More button to open the Template Builder:

First select the Template Folder – all the templates you create will be stored there until
you change it. Besides, the
Type the template name in the Template: string. If the selected Tmpl Folder already
contains some template files, they will be listed in the drop-down list.
Push the Sample File button to open an example file for your template.
If there are some rows in the beginning of the file that you would like to skip, enter their
number in the Number of lines to skip string. The skipped lines will be colored in red.
If there is a symbol in the beginning of each row in the file that you would like to skip,
select it from the Comment: drop-down list. Then, specify the Delimiter from the drop-
down list.
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

81
Now that you have set the basic rules, you will have to “explain” the Template
Builder what information each column contains: Go to a column’s header and click in it.
Then select one metadata category from the drop-down list to assign it to the relevant
column. Once assigned, this category will be checked in the METADATA list to the left.
You can un-assign a category either through un-checking it in the METADATA list or by
selecting [Clear] from the drop-down list.
Select [Bulk] if you wish to skip a column.
When the preset is ready, press the Save button to store it in the Templates folder.
Press the Validate button to check if the current template matches a specific file.
To load the currently selected template in the Template preset string, press the Pick
button.
If you already have some templates and you select one of them from the drop-down list,
push the Load button to load it (its settings will be displayed in the grid).
Back in the Import Tab Delimited
Playlist dialog; push the Options button to
set a default template folder and a default
template. All you have to do is browse for the
folder and select the template from the drop-
down list (See the dialog to the right).
The button next to the Default template string
will open the Template Builder to create a new template or modify the selected one.
· The Folder button allows loading a list, preliminary prepared in CaptureBox with
clips ready for capturing (*.cap file). The name of the current list is written in the title
bar of the module, right after CaptureBox. If the list has been changed and not saved,
an asterisk (*) appears after its name.
· The Diskette button saves the current capture list to a file, which can be used later.
· The Clone button “clones” the selected clip. Its data (title, file name, in/out point,
duration) are copied in the right-hand panel for use in the next entry of the batch
capture list. This functionality could save time for entering almost the same data for
each row. Just change the different points and there it is!
· The Edit button allows changes in the description of a clip. The clip data are loaded
into the Data Fields and you can edit them. During editing, the Edit button transforms
to Cancel and the Add to List button transforms to Apply. By pressing the
Apply button, your changes are applied in the list.
You can also edit a clip by double-clicking it.
· The Delete button removes the selected clip from the list.
· The Compensation button – invokes a dialog box for defining the capturing delay
compensation (in frames), when you capture from video recorder. On some stations
you must manually compensate for some delays when capturing to different formats
(DV, MPEG2 AVI, MPG).
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

82
· The Setup button – shows a window for setting up Inputs/Outputs of device,
capturing format and specific settings.
NOTE: The setup dialog box may vary, according to the platform type. See the
Capture Settings section above for description of some platforms’ setting dialog
boxes.
· The Device select button – allows choosing the capture device or software
simulation of capturing (Sample Driver).
· The Abort button – it activates during the capture preparing only. Press it to stop the
capture.
The Speed field shows the speed of capturing.
· The Timecode field – shows the timecode during capturing.
II.1.2. Clip Data fields
This field is designated for clip description. It is not
possible to include the clip in the batch capture list if you
have not specified the clip location on the hard drive, the
tape ID, the initial and the final timecode, as well as the
clip name.
· Folder – this field describes the folder in which
files will be captured. Pressing the browse button
next to it opens a browse dialog box where you can
specify a hard disk and a folder for storing the
captured clip.
Under the field you can see information about
the free disk space at the selected disk.
· Tape ID – In this field you must type the ID of the
source tape from which will be captured the
footage. This is very important if you work with more than one tape or the tape
timecode is not continuous. Later, during the batch capture session, you will be asked
for tapes by their IDs.
· In and Out fields specify the initial and the final timecode respectively. If you choose
to fill-in the information manually, you could use either of the following separators:
colon ( : ), semi-colon (;), dot (.) or comma (,). Of course, you do not need to enter
the leading zeros in any field. For example, if you enter 1.2.3 this will be translated to
00:01:02:03.
If you don't enter any disjunctive symbols in the timecode, this will be interpreted
as a number of frames. For example, if you enter "100", this will be interpreted as 4
seconds (00:00:04:00).
· Duration – Its value is automatically calculated by subtracting In from Out values. It
is possible to type a value only in the In field and define Duration. The value of Out
field will be calculated automatically.
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

83
To the right of In, Out and Duration fields are situated buttons that function as
follows:
- Pressing the black arrow, pointing left, will insert the current timecode
from the VTR in the corresponding field
- Pressing the red arrow, pointing down, will rewind the tape exactly to the
timecode, written in the corresponding field
- Pressing the Clear button clears all values in the In, Out and Duration
fields.
· In the Comment field you could enter a description or a comment, concerning the
particular scene sequence. Your comment will be displayed in the relevant Grid
column.
· Title represents the name of the clip. If left empty, the field will be automatically
filled-in with the corresponding File name.
· Lock button is used for locking the Title to the File name, i.e. any changes in
the clip name will affect the file name and vice versa.
· File Name stands for the name under which the captured clip will be saved. If left
empty, the field will be automatically filled-in with the Title.
For your convenience, the filename is automatically increased by pressing the
Plus button or Add to List button. If the last clip name was [Capture001], the
next filename would be [Capture002], and so on. If the filename does not end with
a number, but with a letter, the letter will change in alphabetical order, i.e. if the last
clip name was [Sofia], the new filename will be [Sofib], then [Sofic] and so on. Of
course, there is an option to enter a new name manually.
· Plus button increases the File name.
· Add to List button - transfers the clip data into the batch capture list (on the left)
and most of the clip fields are cleared except Tape ID and Folder. The File name
increases.
· Clear Clip button - clears all clip data.
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

84
II.1.3. Capturing

There are three methods to start capturing:
· Manual Capture –this mode can be applied only if Tape ID, File Name and
Folder fields are filled-in. If the timecode field In is
empty, pressing this button will open a window for
manual start of the capturing. If the In field contains timecode, CaptureBox will start
counting down for the same amount of time before commencing the capture. Press
Finish button to stop the capture.
· Auto Capture (automated single capture) – this mode can be started only if the
Tape ID, In, Out, File Name and Folder fields are filled-in. When capturing is
finished, the clip data is automatically moved into the batch list and marked as
captured. There is no need of re-capturing, except when a blue dot is set in front of it.
To stop the capturing manually, press the Abort button. Clip data will be moved to
the batch list, but the clip will be marked as not fully captured.
· The Batch Capture is in fact automated capturing of a series of scenes. Activate it
with the Capture button, which is situated under the clip list. All the clips from the
list that are marked with a blue dot will be captured in ascending sequence of the
timecodes and tape IDs. During this process, no special attendance is necessary– one
should only take care of changing the tapes when prompted.
There are several ways to preview the incoming material. You can select one in
the Preview field. Each of the available outputs can be used for preview control.
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

85
II.2. Print-to Tape
This CaptureBox page takes care of the “playback” (“print-to-tape”) mode. In this
mode, you can choose scene sequences from the hard drive and record them to a VTR. An
option for SDTI stream compilation is also included in case a 4xSDTI transfer to tape is
needed.
II.2.1. SDTI Compilation
As the SDTI interface transfers data 4 times faster than the real-time, (i.e. 1 hour is
transferred for 15 minutes) it is not possible to generate such a stream from footage, which
contains real-time effects. It is necessary to compile such effects as a single stream video.
Therefore we have created a compilation method, which works in real-time (it requires
DigiSuite DTV and DigiServer both installed simultaneously on the system). Just follow
these simple steps:
- Press Get from Incite button (it is located in
the upper left area).
- A dialog box will appear to guide you through the
procedure.
- Start the project playback from Incite and press
Start button.
- The compilation begins.
- When the Incite project has ended, press the
Stop button.
- The compiled file is positioned automatically and ready for recording to a SDTI
VTR. By default, these files are named “InciteXXXXX”, as XXXXX is a consecutive
number, which increases automatically on every new compilation.
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

86

II.2.2. Print-to-Tape
· Clip In and Clip Out fields are automatically filled-
in with [00:00:00:00] and [XX:XX:XX:XX]
respectively, where the second one stands for
timecode position of the last clip frame. To change
the values in these fields, use the numeric keypad,
or the black-arrow buttons to the right. Pressing the
latter will enter the timecode of the current position
in the file. Pressing a red-arrow button will position
the file play head to the corresponding timecode,
defined in the field.
· The value in the Duration field is calculated
automatically (Duration = Clip Out – Clip In)
· When a file has been selected for printing to tape,
its name is displayed in the Video File field. To
change the file, press the browse button next to it.
To clear the field, press the C button.
· If there is an audio file (.WAV) corresponding to the video file, its name is
automatically entered in the Audio File field.
· The Tape In field shows where the tape recording will start. You can fill the field in
either by entering a timecode value or by pressing the black-arrow button on the right.
Pressing the latter will enter the current timecode from the VTR. If the tape is blank,
enter [00:00:00:00] in this field. To preserve a record that already exists on the tape
and to continue recording from a particular tape position, enter the timecode of this
position in the field and press the red-arrow button. The VTR will automatically
rewind the tape to the corresponding position. To enter a timecode value manually
you could use either of the following separators – colon (:), semi-colon (;),a period (.)
or a comma (,).You do not need to enter the leading zeroes in any field. For example,
typing “15...” will automatically be translated to “00:15:00:00”.
· Tape Out field shows where the tape recording will end.
· The REC button starts simultaneously the file playback and VTR recording. If the
Tape In field is empty, recording will start from the current VTR position.
· The Play, Still and Stop buttons at the bottom are used for file playback control,
preview or start playback to tape when there is no VTR remote control.
· The Compensation button invokes the Capturing Delay Compensation dialog
box. Usually there is some delay between a command (start or stop) and its actual
execution. It depends on both the platform and the system configuration . Besides,
different file types can cause different delays. These settings should be determined
after the Trial And Error method and are expressed in frames.
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

87
· The Setup button invokes different setting
windows for the different devices.
For example, the Matrox DigiServer settings
are video output, audio output, audio monitoring and
speed of recording.




In the DeckLink settings dialog you can select the
Video standard, as well as whether to Flip image
and/or Fields. Pressing the Decoder Setup button
invokes a dialog for specifying the recording quality by
setting the Decoding resolution (full, half, quarter or DC
PAL/NTSC formats).
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

88
II.3. Schedule

When the Schedule page is active, the module is in “schedule” mode. In this mode,
you can define a capturing schedule and start capturing later.
The Schedule mode interface is similar to the Capture mode interface. There are
several differences in Clip description and Grid buttons.
II.3.1. Schedule Grid
The grid occupies a large part of the window. In it, you can create a list of scenes that
will be captured after activating the scheduling. This feature is used mainly for capturing
TV and satellite signals, but of course, you can capture VTR signals as well.
Grid Columns:
· Type – shows the schedule type: daily, weekly, etc.
· Channel – the TV channel which will be captured.
· Date – the starting date of each capture item.
· Start – shows the initial time, when clip capturing will start.
· End – shows the time, when clip capturing will end. If you click on the grey bar
named End, it will change to Duration and the column will display clip durations.
· Mode – shows what will be captured for the particular clip – video (V), audio (A) or
both (VA).
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

89
· Clip Name – contains clip names. If you click the grey bar called Clip Name it
will change to File Name and the column will display the destination pull path
where the clip will be stored – hard disk name, folder and file.
· Comments – shows the comments for each clip.
Grid buttons:
· Show days field – here you can define how many days in advance (counting
from today) you will see in the schedule list.
· Press the Arm button after creating the schedule list. This will activate the
schedule capturing mode. The capturing will automatically start and stop, according to
the “Start time” and “End time” values entered in the list.
· Clone “clones” the selected clip. Its data (type, channel, in/out point, duration) is
copied for use in the next clip to be included in the schedule list.
· Edit button changes the description of the clip. The clip data are loaded into the Data
Fields and you can change them. During editing, the Edit button transforms to
Cancel and Add to List button transforms to Apply. The changes you’ve made
will be applied in the list by pressing the Apply button.
You can also edit a clip in the list by double-clicking it.
· Delete button removes the selected clip from the list.
· If you select a grid entry and press the Tomorrow button a new entry to the list will
be created. It will have the same data as that of the selected entry, but its starting day
will be on the following day. In short, this button performs a kind of “tomorrow
cloning”.
II.3.2. Clip Data Fields
· The Folder field contains information about the
file location of the captured clip. Pressing the
browse button next to it opens a browse dialog
box, where you can specify a hard disk and a
folder for storing the clip.
Under the field, you can see information
about the free disk space on the selected hard
drive.
· The Channel field contains information about the
TV channel which will be captured. You can
select it from the list of available channels in the
left string or create it in the field next to it.
· Pressing the satellite button, opens a dialog
box in which you can create the list of up to 16
channels. You can add a new channel by double
clicking in an empty line and typing the channel
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

90
name.
· Start time/End time - specify the initial and the final time respectively.
· Duration – Its value is automatically calculated by subtracting Start from End
values.
· Date – the capture starting date.
· Type – defines the frequency of capturing – once, every day, or every week.
· Comment - contains a description or a comment, concerning the particular scene
sequence.
· The Clip Name field contains the name of the clip you’re going to capture. If you
leave the field empty, it will be automatically filled-in with the corresponding file
name.
· The Lock button is used for locking the Clip name to the File name. Any
changes you make in either field will automatically occur in the other.
· In the File Name field you can enter a name for the captured file. If the field is left
empty, it will be automatically filled with the Clip name.
· Add to List button transfers the clip data into the schedule capture list.
· Clear Clip button clears all clip data.
· Crash Capture button begins capturing of the available channel immediately and
without confirmation, irrespective of the entered schedule list.
· Prepare Capture – opens a dialog box asking for confirmation to begin capturing
of the available channel instantly, independent of the entered schedule list.
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

91
II.4. RS-422 Controller

Each VTR with RS-422 SONY protocol
can be used in CaptureBox. Switching the
active window between the main and this one
is done by pressing the <Insert> key. It is
possible to attach this window to the main one by moving it close to any of its edges. Thus,
the VTR control panel will move together with the main window. Here is a short
description of the VTR control panel:

· The VTR brand is displayed in the window’s caption. If there is no connection, the
text [Not Connected] will appear.
· Display Indicators:
- TCR has three possible states – TCR (normally read timecode), T*R (corrected
timecode), TCG (generated timecode, red).
- RecInh a record-protected tape is inserted in the VTR.
- Local indicates that the VTR is in local control mode and the remote
control is not possible.
- Tape indicates that there is a tape in the VTR.
- EOT (End-Of-Tape) alarms that the tape is about to end or that the tape end
has actually been reached.
- Indicator >> or << - shows the tape roll direction.
- Preroll indicator informs that the VTR is executing a preroll command.
- Servo indicator shows that playback is running stable.
- CueUp indicator – shows that the timecode positioning command has been
successfully completed.
· Tape/AutoEE and Full EE – depending on VTR’s model and its settings, a
combination of these keys opens the E-E
circuitry.
· Config button – opens a Configuration
Dialog box, where you can define:
- Com port – the port to which the
recorder is connected.
- Timecode type – the type of the
timecode: LTC, VITC, etc.
- Play Delay – the delay (in frames) of
the video recorder start towards the capturing start.
This setting refers to the Capture mode.
- REC Delay – the delay (in frames) of the clip start towards the video recording
start. This setting refers to the Print-to-tape mode.
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

92
- REC Latency – the frame offset of the record’s beginning toward the clip’s IN
point. This setting refers to the Print-to-tape mode.
The REC Delay and REC Latency fields are accessible only when the Editing
VCR box is checked.
- Always on top – check it, if you want to see the RS422 window always on
top.
- Editing VCR – it should be checked, if you use an editing video recorder.
If the box is checked you can set the REC delay and REC latency fields and
the Video recorder edit mode.
- Video recorder edit mode – you can choose between Insert and Assemble.
· RecInh box– allows or forbids the REC button in order to protect the tape from
accidental mistakes.
· The “Shuttle” slider – allows shuttling within the particular VTR capabilities. If the
VTR allows it, you could achieve variable speed by shifting this button left or right.
· The “Jog” slider allows frame-accurate positioning.
II.5. Audio Control

This is an additional window, which appears nearby the main
window, if the capture device supports audio volume control. It is
possible to resize the window or attach it to the main one by moving
it close to any of its edges.
The colored field in the window is a volume & peak meter.
The green band shows the peak levels and the black line inside it,
shows the actual sound volume.
Right mouse clicking on the Volume Meter area opens a
context menu, in which you can select the direction of the green
bands (Vertical, Horizontal or Auto) as well as the scale range
(in dB).
The next field - Volume slider - is designed to control the
actual captured audio volume.
Delay field refers to audio delaying in milliseconds. It is used to compensate the
delay between what you hear and what you see on the VU meter. It does not affect the
audio itself, just the display.
Speed field you can define the sampling speed in milliseconds.
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

93

III. MENU BAR

III.1. File Menu
· Open – opens a previously created Capture list (*.cap) or Schedule list (*.lst). You
could also open text files, as long as their structure
· Save – saves the current Capture list (*.cap) or Schedule list
(*.lst).
· Kramer Config – In Schedule mode, you can list up to
16 channels to be captured. Use a Kramer device to switch
between them automatically. You can also switch the channels
manually via the Manual Channel Switch. In the Machine
field, enter the number of the Kramer switcher used (there could
be up to 8 switchers connected to the PC).
If you press the Advanced button, the following dialog will open for you to specify the
interface settings:
Select your Kramer switcher model from the drop-down Model list.
In the Protocol field, specify what is the protocol it uses.
Assign the COM port for the switcher using the drop-down list of
available COM ports.
Set the Baud rate according to the Kramer switcher manual.
· GPI Config – the capture process can be initiated or stopped
from an external GPI device. This option is valid for manual capture
only. You can connect up to 8 GPI-devices. Each of them can send up to 4 GPI commands.
Each device must be associated with an available COM port on the computer.
To assign a device, select it from the list to the
right and specify to which COM port you will
connect it.
In the Pulse Level field to the left, you can
specify the type of the trigger pulse. Below, set
the GPI commands from the relevant drop-down
lists.
The pins involved in CaptureBox GPI are the
same as of AirBox GPI. For more information
about the GPI interface and pins involved, look
up in Appendix 1 further in this manual.
· Preferences – opens a preferences dialog
box, which consists of two pages:
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

94
In the General page you can check the current video standard which depends on the
selected plug-in. The video standard can be changed in the specific set up form of the plug-
in (if the relevant plug-in supports this functionality). The current video standard is also
displayed in the second cell of status bar.
In the Schedule page, you can define Naming Type for the captured files. They are
AUTOMATICALLY formed using the original filename entered in the File Name field
(while in Schedule mode) plus some kind of index to distinguish them from one another:
- Increment name (Zero Based) –the consequent file names will be formed by adding
increasing numbers to the original file name. The number in the original file name is
always zero; therefore, this naming type is called “Zero-based”. In the Zero Based Settings
field, you can specify the number of digits to be displayed.
- Increment name (Calendar Based) – the names of consequent files will be formed by
adding the subsequent calendar number of the capturing day to the original file name (this
number may vary from 1 to 365/366 – in leap years).
- Insert date – inserts the capturing date in the filename. If you choose this, the Date
position (choose position before or after the file name) and Date format fields will become
active.
· Audio Mixer – shows the volume mixer of the available audio device.
· Exit – close CaptureBox.
III.2. View Menu
Use this menu to open some additional windows to the main CaptureBox window:
· Preview Window – shows the currently captured video material.
· Sony transport – shows the RS422 controller window. The RS422 controller is
described profoundly above, in the User Interface section.
· Fire Wire transport – shows the FireWire
controller window.

· Volume Meter – shows the volume & peak
meter for the currently captured audio. Volume & peak Meter is described in more
details in the User Interface section above.
· Timer – shows the system time window.
· CPU Monitor. Capturing on some
hardware platforms is quite CPU-intense. To prevent poor encoding and frame-
dropping, CaptureBox has an automatic protection which will stop the
capture if the CPU usage goes above 85%. This monitor will help you
predict such possible situations and set your PC prior to starting the
capture.
A drop-down menu activates on right-clicking in this window. In it, you
can select which CPU to view (if there is more than one). Besides, you can view all
CPUs simultaneously, or an average value of the CPUs’ usage.
(!) TIP: You can arrange all windows together by pressing <Ctrl+F12>
CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

95
III.3. Capture Menu
· Compensation - invokes a dialog box for defining the capturing delay
compensation (in frames).
· Setup – opens a setting dialog box. The dialog box is different, according to the
encoder used. See the Capture Settings section to view the description of some
encoders’ setting dialogs.
· Device select – opens a dialog box for choosing the capture device.
· Capture – It is active, when you work in Capture mode.
- Batch – starts batch capturing (following a predefined list)
- Auto - starts auto capturing – the program will control the VTR
- Manual – starts manual capturing from the currently available source. A
dialog box will appear asking for your confirmation.
· Print to tape – It is active, if you work in Print to tape mode.
- REC - starts simultaneously the file playback and VTR recording.
- Play, Stop, Pause – commands for file playback control. They are used
when there is no VTR remote control.
· Schedule – It is active, only when you are working in Schedule mode.
- Arm – activates scheduling.
- Prepare – activates Manual capturing from the currently available source. A
dialog box will appear asking for your confirmation..
- Crash – immediately starts capturing from the currently available source,
without asking any further confirmation.








__________________________

96
CAPTUREBOX ME
__________________________

I. GETTING STARTED
Each TV station is required by law to keep a record of its own programming for 3 or
more months; the so called “Monitoring”. CaptureBox Monitoring Edition (ME) is a
simplified version of the CaptureBox module, designed for archiving purposes only.
Currently it can be assigned to one channel and runs on BlackMagic Design’s DeckLink
cards. The resulting files can be either MPEG1 or MPEG2, depending on the customer’s
needs.
I.1. Installation

Where to Install it?
CaptureBox ME is typically installed on BlackMagic Design DeckLink monitoring
workstations.
Software License
CaptureBox ME LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE WIBU USB KEY. IT
WILL NOT RUN WITHOUT THE KEY INSTALLED ON YOUR USB PORT.
Minimum System Requirements
CPU: Intel Pentium 4 2 GHz
RAM: 1 GB
O/S: Windows XP, Service Pack 2
HDD: Depends on the required bandwidth, reliability and platform
requirements. If you want higher bandwidth and reliability consider
using SCSI or/and RAID instead of regular IDE drives.
VGA: DirectDraw compatible
H/W: Currently only BlackMagic Design DeckLink.
NOTE: You must install DeckLink Driver version 1.1.1.62 or latter – CaptureBox ME
does not support older versions.
CAPTUREBOX ME: USER’S MANUAL
97
I.2. Quick Start

1. Launch CaptureBox ME.
2. Go to Capture menu, Open the Settings item, press the Create New Channel
Button and select the DeckLink Driver (click here to view the detailed
description of this dialog). Click OK.
3. Specify the Root folder where captured files will be stored.
4. Specify the Naming structure for your files (if you skip this step, your files will
be named after the default naming structure).
5. Close the settings dialog and Push the Capture button in the upper right corner of
the user interface.
6. That’s all – you’re already using the CaptureBox ME module!

NOTE: While CaptureBox Me is running, the Windows taskbar will be hidden. The only
way to switch between applications is the Task Manager (<Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Del>).
Here is a comparison between CaptureBox 2.5 and CaptureBox ME 1.0
Feature CaptureBox 2.5 CaptureBox ME 1.0
Batch capturing Yes -
Auto capturing Yes -
Scheduled capturing Yes -
Print-to-tape Yes -
Switcher control Yes -
VTR control Yes -
DeckLink support Yes Yes
Other platforms support Yes -
MPEG2 capturing Yes Up to 3 Mbit/sec
MPEG1 capturing Yes Yes
DV capturing Yes -
VU/Peak meter Yes Yes
Video preview window Yes Yes
CPU monitor Yes -
Multi-channel capturing - Coming soon
Multi-audio capturing Yes -
Date-based file naming - Yes
Multi-file splitting (MPEG) Yes Yes

CAPTUREBOX ME: USER’S MANUAL
98
II. USER INTERFACE
The CaptureBox ME interface occupies the entire PC display. As it should perform non-
stop capturing, you’d better designate a separate PC for the Monitoring of your program.
The interface is divided into several sections: Menu bar; Capture History grid; Start and
Stop Button; Summary of the current channel’s settings; Preview pane; Audio Volume
meter; and a Stats Bar. In the Preview pane, a counter displays the time elapsed since
the beginning of the current session. Under it, there is an indicator of the free space
available on the root disk (see Capture Setup). If the free disk space goes under the one set
in the setup page, the bar will become red and error messages will appear after each chunk
in the capture grid. A red X mark will appear in the Status column.
The Status bar is divided into four sections. The first section to the left contains
information about the currently selected capturing driver. The second section displays the
current time and date. The next cell contains the channel number, and the last to the right
indicated the current CPU usage. If there are more than one channels captured, their
numbers will be listed in the third cell, separated by commas.
CAPTUREBOX ME: USER’S MANUAL
99
II.1. Capture Grid
The prevalent part of the interface is occupied by the Capture History grid. Each row
represents an element of the capture process:
In the Channel column
are recorded all the
events that occur during
capturing.
A new Session will be
initiated each time you
push the Start button
and will end on pushing
the Stop button.
Each session can contain
numerous Chunks (separate parts of the captured program) that depend on your settings
(see the Setup description further below). If the capture process has been interrupted for
some reason, a separate line below the relevant chunk will note that is marked as partial
(i.e. incomplete).
The Status column contains information about each element in the Channel column.
The status of the Channel can be either Capturing (as in the picture above) or Stopped ( ).
The Green tick-mark means that the capturing of the relevant element has completed
successfully.
A Yellow exclamation mark means that some problem occurred during capturing. The
line under the relevant element contains its description.
The Now capturing icon appears in the lines of both the current session and the
currently archived Chunk.

II.2. Capture Control Buttons
There are three buttons in the upper-right corner of the CaptureBox ME window – Start,
Stop and Setup. When in capturing mode, the Start button becomes inactive (grey). When
in stop mode, the Stop button is not active (grey).
NOTE: If the free disk capacity (indicated under the preview pane) goes below the one
specified in the capture settings, the Start button will become inactive. The blue bar
indicating the free disk space will become red.
The Setup button is actually a shortcut to the Capture settings dialog described
further below.

CAPTUREBOX ME: USER’S MANUAL
100
II.3. Menu Bar
The menu bar is quite simple and contains three menus – File, Capture, and Help.
II.3.1. File Menu
There are two menu items in the File menu – Save Log as… and Exit,
the latter needing no explanations.
The events occurring during the capture session (start, stop, and errors) are recorded in a
tab-delimited log file, one per each day. It is saved in the CaptureBox ME Program
directory, in the Logs folder. Besides, you can save Channel Session logs that will contain
tab-delimited text description of the current log window. Go to the File menu, select Save
Log as… and specify the directory to which your Channel Session logs will be saved. If
you do not specify other, it will be saved in the default folder (Logs) in CaptureBox ME
Program directory.
NOTE: The Channel Session Log concerns only the events currently displayed in the
history grid. Each time you want to save such a log, you will have to go to File ¬ Save
Log as…
II.3.2. Capture Menu
This menu contains the core of the CaptureBox ME functionality.
The First four menu items are
self-explanatory enough and
hence not discussed here.
The Setup item invokes a
dialog in which you can make virtually all settings
allowable in this module:
You could choose whether to E Launch CaptureBox
ME on Windows start-up or not (E).
In case of power failure or some other unexpected event,
it would be good to E Remember last capturing
status on application restart, and thus to minimize the
missed archiving time.
Under these two check
boxes, there is a list of the
available channels and
several buttons to the right.
Pressing the Add new
channel button will open a dialog containing several channel-
describing fields (see left). Select a driver from the list of
available drivers, enter the Channel name (up to twelve
characters) and Short Channel name (up to three characters), and click the Update
channel button.
CAPTUREBOX ME: USER’S MANUAL
101
You can edit these settings later, by selecting the relevant channel and pressing the Edit
Channel button.
The next button deletes the currently selected channel from the list.
You can set the output for a selected channel by pressing the Setup Output button .
This will open the following dialog:
In it, you can select the MPEG type, the Video and
Audio bit rates, and the Video Standard of the
output. In the File Split field, check the E Use File
Split box to have your output divided into multiple
files at intervals as specified in the spin-box below.
Next to the Video Standard field, there are two
additional check-boxes –the first for flipping the
output fields, and the second – to enable the preview pane in the main CaptureBox ME
window.
If you want to use the settings of the current channel for all other channels in the list, check
E Keep all channels with same settings.
The Root Folder string displays the location in which the captured files will be stored.
Press the Setup Root button to select another location. By default, all captured materials
will be stored on the System disk
C:\.
The following string contains the
naming structure for captured files.
Press the Filename Pattern
button to change it. A dialog will
open containing a list of available
naming options (to the right) and a
list of the currently selected options
(to the left). To add new entry in
your file names, select it from the
list to the right and press the Add
button . To remove an entry
from the naming structure, select it
in the list to the left and press the
remove field button . You can
change the order of the relevant
data in the file name by selecting
them and pressing the up/down arrows in the middle of the window. Below, in the
Script Line, you will see a description of the currently selected file name configuration.
Under it, an example filename is displayed to illustrate your choice.
TIP: Double-clicking in a row of Selected Options will remove it from the naming
pattern. Double-clicking in a row of Available Options will add it to the naming pattern.
CAPTUREBOX ME: USER’S MANUAL
102
There is a spin-box in the lower right corner of the Options dialog box. In it, you can set
some minimum allowable disk space at which you will be notified. This option is
necessary, as most HDDs need at least 10% to operate properly.
Last in the Capture menu is the Admin password item. At
selecting it for the first time, the dialog to the right will open for
you to enter your password.
WARNING: Clicking OK will lock all operations in
CaptureBox ME, so be sure not to forget your password!
If you want to remove the password protection, go to Capture Admin password once again,
type your old password and enter nothing in the New Pass string.
II.3.3. Help Menu
There are two items in this menu. About… displays the information about the current
software version, etc.
The PlayBox Doctor is a very useful engine for gathering all the information needed by
our support team if any problem occurs during the operation of our software. See detailed
description of the PlayBox Doctor features in the AirBox section.


103
FINISHBOX LE
__________________________

I. GETTING STARTED
FinishBox LE (previously known as MultiMux) allows multiplexing elementary
video streams (such as Matrox OpenDML MPEG2 AVI or m2v files) with elementary
audio streams (mpa, m2a, uncompressed wav) to standard ISO-13818-compliant MPEG2
Program Stream (*.mpg) containing MPEG Audio layer 1 or 2 at different bitrates.
FinishBox LE comes free with every PlayBox module.
I.1. Installation

Where to Install it?
FinishBox LE (previously known as MultiMux) is typically installed on Matrox
DigiSuite DTV/LX or RT2000/2500 non-linear editing workstations.
Previous Versions
Prior to installing FinishBox LE, you should uninstall any previous FinishBox LE
versions (Control Panel ¬ Add/Remove Programs¬ DMT FinishBox LE).
Software License
FinishBox LE LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE WIBU USB KEY. IT WILL
NOT RUN WITHOUT THE KEY INSTALLED ON YOUR USB PORT.
Minimum System Requirements
CPU: Intel Pentium III 500 MHz
RAM: 128 MB
O/S: Windows 2000 Professional/Windows XP.

FINISHBOX LE: USER’S MANUAL
104
I.2. Quick Start

1. Make sure that you have some content available in the input audio/video folders;
2. If you do not have any available, export some from your NLE platform’s editing
software;
3. Launch FinishBox LE;
4. Click the top button with a folder picture;
5. Select an exported AVI or m2v file and click the Open button;
6. The sound file with the same name will automatically appear in the next empty
box;
7. If there is no MPA or WAV file with the same name in your audio folders, you
have to select manually the corresponding sound file;
8. Choose a name for the output MPG file (this is not obligatory);
9. Click the Multiplex Now button;
Congratulations! You have just multiplexed your first FinishBox LE file.
II. USER INTERFACE
FinishBox LE always starts up in the last used mode. There are two FinishBox LE
modes – Standard and Folder Watch.
II.1. Standard
Working with FinishBox LE is very simple and easy. The Standard interface is used
for one-time multiplexing of video and audio streams:
· In the Source streams fields, you need to select the video.avi file and the
audio.wav file, by using the folder icon or by drag-n-dropping the files. When you
select a video file and in
the same folder, there is an
audio file with the same
name, it is loaded in
FinishBox LE
automatically. If you use
two mono audio files
instead of one stereo audio
file, you have to keep the
following naming
convention for the left and
the right channels
respectively:
FINISHBOX LE: USER’S MANUAL
105
<filename>.a1.wav/<filename>.a2.wav, or
<filename>.a3.wav/<filename>.a4.wav, or
<filename>_1.wav/<filename>_2.wav, or
<filename>_3.wav/<filename>_4.wav
In case you use two mono audio files, you have to select only the first one; the second
file will be loaded automatically.
FinishBox LE allows creating an MPEG2 file from up to five streams inside the
multiplex.
· In the Output program stream field, you have to select the output file name and its
location by using the folder icon.
· Press the Multiplex Now button to start multiplexing the currently specified source
streams. You can see the multiplex progress in the bottom of the window:

During multiplexing, the Multiplex now button is replaced with a Stop button.
· New is used for clearing of all Source streams fields and to add new source files.
· In the Batch List area, you can build a list for multiplexing more than one group of
streams. Create your batch list by selecting the desired source streams and locations
and pressing the Add>> button or by drag-n-dropping them from the explorer
window. The name of the Output Program Stream, followed by the names of source
stream files in brackets, will appear in the Batch list. If there is a batch containing an
uncompressed audio stream, the program will encode it first (Audio Encoder Options)
and then will multiplex the batch.
· Add>> is used for adding the files from Source streams fields in the Batch List.
· <<Edit is used for moving the selected item from Batch list back to Source
streams fields and edit their order or number.
· Remove removes the SELECTED item from the Batch list.
· Clear removes ALL items from the Batch list.
· Run Batch – starts multiplexing the items in the Batch list. They will be processed
one by one, following their order in the list.
FINISHBOX LE: USER’S MANUAL
106
· Folder Watch – pressing this button will open a dialog box to specify the relevant
locations for automatic multiplexing. (See the Folder Watch section further in this
manual).Auto Muxrate. It often happens that the declared bitrate of a file differs from
the actual one. This function will command the program to detect the actual bitrate
and hence – to determine automatically the Muxrate of the multiplexed program
stream.
· Force Mux Rate – check this box, if you want to define a specific mux rate for all
multiplexed files and select the mux rate value [Kbits/s] in the next field. This option
comes handy when the declared video bitrate is not the same as the actual bitrate.
This is usually the case with most VBR files, ripped from a DVD-Video. If not using
the Force Mux Rate option, FinishBox LE would produce an unnecessary big MPG
file, based on the fake high bitrate. Using Force Mux Rate, the user can specify a
mux rate close to the actual bitrate.
WARNING! Be careful when using this option: it
may produce undesirable results if you choose
lower mux rate than the actual video bitrate.
· Audio Encoder options. If the source
stream contains an uncompressed audio file
(*.wav), the program will automatically
encode it in MPEG1, layer 1 or 2. Use this
button to determine the encoding conditions:
Compression; Data rate;
Psychoacoustics; Stereo Mode; De-
emphasis for decoder.
Information flags – you can add some
information in the encoded audio stream, by
checking the relevant box: Error protection, Copyrighted material or Original
material.
The Throttle is a kind of process “accelerator”. The higher you set it, the less the
process prolongs, but the CPU usage will go higher.
FINISHBOX LE: USER’S MANUAL
107
II.2. Folder Watch
This function allows running FinishBox in the background, watching over a particular
folder or list of folders for incoming files. When video and audio files arrive at the watched
folders, FinishBox automatically starts multiplexing them into MPEG file format and
saves the new file to a predefined output folder.

Pressing the Folder Watch button in the Standard window will open the dialog box
you see below:
- Video Folder – select the main folder
to be watched over for video files. Use the
browse button or type the path in the
field.
- Audio Folder - select the folder to be
watched over for audio files.
E Same as Video – check it
when the audio stream is located in the same
folder as the video stream.
E Process Sub Folders – if the
selected source folder contains any sub
folders, they will also be “watched”, i.e. if the
subfolders contain any stream files, they will
also be processed and sent to the destination
folder.
E Recreate Subfolder Structure will keep the directory structure of the Source
location in the Destination location.
- Output folder - select an output folder for the multiplexed file(s).
- After processing – select how to proceed with the source files after the
multiplexing:
- Delete – deletes the source files.
Rename – renames the source files, by adding an extension .done (for example,
sofia.avi is renamed to sofia.avi.done).
Move in – moves the source files to the folder, specified in the corresponding path
field.
- Additional Folders – folders to be watched in addition to the source streams.
NOTE: The video and audio streams for additional watch should be in ONE folder.
FINISHBOX LE: USER’S MANUAL
108
When you press the button, FinishBox LE will minimize and will appear as an
icon in the system tray. Right-clicking on it and selecting the Show item from the pop-up
menu will invoke the following window:

The tray icon becomes a thermometer when FinishBox LE is processing.
The Throttle slider is used for accelerating/slowing the multiplexing process. Note
that multiplexing is quite CPU-intense, so it could slowdown other applications running on
the machine: the higher the multiplexing speed, the higher CPU capacity needed.
While in Folder Watch mode, you will not be able to see the Standard interface
window. When starting FinishBox LE it will appear in the last used mode.












__________________________

109
DATABOX
__________________________
I. GETTING STARTED
DataBox is an SQL-based database for media & content management. Content is
classified using many indices such as type, category, genres, keywords, credits, media, etc.
The Other PlayBox modules obtain information about the visual content from DataBox.
I.1. Installation

WHERE TO INSTALL IT?
DataBox should be installed on every workstation in the PlayBox complex which
requires access to the metadata. In order to transfer content directly (drag-n-drop) from
DataBox to AirBox or ListBox, you should have DataBox installed on the AirBox or
ListBox workstations.
PREVIOUS VERSIONS
Prior to installing DataBox, you should uninstall any previous DataBox versions
(Control Panel ¬ Add/Remove Programs ¬ DMT DataBox).
SOFTWARE LICENSE
DataBox LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE WIBU USB KEY. IT WILL NOT
RUN WITHOUT THE KEY INSTALLED ON YOUR USB PORT.
MINIMUM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
CPU: Intel Pentium III 500 MHz
RAM: 128 MB
O/S: Windows 2000 Professional/Windows XP
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
110
I.2. Quick Start

1. Launch DataBox;
2. Activate the Grid by pressing the GRID button;
3. Select a file from your media folder and drag-n-drop it in the grid.
4. A record appears in the grid, with the same name as the media file name.
Congratulations! You have just created your first record in the PlayBox database!
DataBox user’s interface is divided in two main parts – Menu and Grid. The Grid
represents the database content. It is activated by pressing the Grid button in the Menu
bar.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
111

II. USER INTERFACE
The main part of the interface is dedicated to database visualization. It consists of
three areas: TREE VIEW, SEARCH FIELDS and GRID.

II.1. Tree View
This area contains a dendroid chart of the Classification scheme, the Credits
(Persons, Companies, and Countries), the Sequences, the Templates and the
Expired entries.
You can add, delete or change elements in Tree View by using the right mouse
button.
II.1.1. Classification scheme and Credits
Here you can see the classification scheme and credits as they are defined in the
relevant managers.
When a particular Type, Keyword, Group or Credit is selected, only the entries
that correspond to the selected criteria are displayed in the GRID.
You can add some entry to a specific classification element or credit, by drag-n-
dropping it to that element.



DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
112
II.1.2. Sequences node


This node displays the sequences. You can add a new sequence by right mouse
clicking on the node and selecting [New] from the context menu. A dialog box window
appears to fill-in the sequence’s properties:
Sequence name the relevant name of the
sequence.
Color – color for color coding.
First episode – the number of the first
episode.
Last episode – the number of the last
episode.
The first episode number could not be higher than that of the last episode.
Templates – the template record name for this sequence. You could choose it from
the list, create a new template record or not set a template. By default, it is not set
[NONE].
After setting the episode numbers and the template record for a sequence, press the
OK button to create as many records as the defined number of episodes. The data in these
records will be the same as in the template record.
To delete a sequence, right-click on it and then click [Delete] in the context menu.
To change the sequence’s properties or to add new episodes, right-click the sequence
name and choose [Properties] from the context menu. A Property dialog box will appear
and you will be able to change the number of episodes or the template record.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
113
II.1.3. Templates node

This node is used for viewing and editing the templates. Templates are used as
models for creating new records. Using templates saves efforts for entering uniform data in
multiple records. They are very useful for creating sequences that consist of many records
with the same data.
You can create a new template record in New Record=General¬ ETemplate
record, or by right-clicking over the Templates node in Tree View and then selecting
[New] in the context menu.
If the record is set as template, the following fields are inaccessible:
=General¬House ID and Episode No.; =Instances¬[Media] Notes and
Location.
IMPORTANT: If the template record is designed for a sequence and there are any
series created for this sequence, you can not edit the template record anymore!
Templates do not appear in the Grid of ordinary records.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
114

II.1.4. Expired node

This node is used to show the records that have expired instances. You have to
decide how to proceed with these instance – delete them or change their kill dates.

NOTE: The expired instances are automatically displayed in this node only if you
have assigned [notify] in Options=General¬ After kill date expired
II.2. Search Fields



The search fields’ area could be shown or hidden in the GRID by pressing <Ctrl> +
F .as well as by right mouse clicking on the grid and checking [Search] from the context
menu.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
115
A search inquiry line consists of the following cells:
- Field – a field from the entry description– Title, Type, Genre, etc.
- Operator:
is – means that the search result should be exactly the same as the keyword;
doesn’t - the search result should not be exactly the same as the keyword;
contains - the result should contain the keyword;
does not contain - the result should not contain the keyword
begins with – the result should begin with the keyword;
ends with - the result should end with the keyword;
before – the result should be before the keyword (when the keyword is a date);
after - the result should be after the keyword (when the keyword is a date).
- Value – it is a keyword for searching. If the keyword is a date, it must be in:
yyyy.mm.dd (year.month.day) format.
- Operand - defines Boolean operands (OR or AND) between the search lines to
refine or limit your search.
- Add button adds a new search inquiry line.
- Remove button removes the selected line from the inquiry.
- Search button starts the search.
- Clear button clears the search inquiry.
- Global search – If this flag is checkedE the search proceeds in the entire
database. If it is not checkedE, the search proceeds only in the previous search result.
The Search procedure is not case-sensitive.
After performing a search , the grid will display only the records that match this
inquiry. If you want to see all records, clear the search inquiry and click All in the Tree
View.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
116
II.3. Data Grid


The database list of entries is displayed in the GRID. The grid columns correspond to
the fields from entry’s description. You can define which columns to be visible in
Options=Grid¬[double click on the relevant column visibility status to change it]. The
column position in the grid could be changed by drag-n-dropping the column name. Right
mouse clicking on a column’s name will resize the column.
The records are arranged by the succession of their registration in the database. You
can define a default field to serve as a sorting filter for the entries in Options=Default
values¬AutoSort by. Clicking on any column name will arrange the records according
to the relevant feature. Clicking the same name once again will invert the arrangement.
Thus clicking on Title will arrange the records in alphabetical order; and clicking it once
again will rearrange them in reverse order.
If you click a field that contains figures once, the records will be arranged in
descending order. If you click it twice, they will be arranged in ascending order.
A Black bar marks the currently selected entry. Clicking twice over it, invokes the
entry properties.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
117
Pressing the right mouse button in the GRID invokes the following context menu:
- New Record – opens an empty New Record dialog box.
NOTE: If a specific classification element or credit from the Tree View is selected at the
same time, the new record will be automatically added to this element. The relevant fields
in the New Record dialog box will be automatically filled-in with the corresponding
information.
- Delete Record deletes the selected record.
- Edit Record opens the selected record’s properties for editing.
- Options – opens the Options menu.
- Update – updates the database. Thus, the changes you’ve made will take
effect.
- Print current table – opens a dialog box for printing the database.
- Preview – invokes the Clip Trimmer for clip preview, if there is an MPEG
file connected to the record.
- Search – shows/hides the search area in the GRID.
- Check files – starts checking the availability of the files connected to the
records. This procedure updates the information on missing files.
- Export to MS Excel – opens a dialog box for exporting records to MS
Excel.

Target file – the Excel file name to which you want to export the data. Use it, if you
have a previously created Excel file. For example, you could prepare a template form in
MS Excel to be filled with records from DataBox.
If you leave the Target file field empty or type a non-existing file name, a new Excel
file will be created (book1.xls, by default).
Sheet name – enter the name of a sheet in the Excel file. If you don’t, the data will
be exported to the first sheet in the file.
In the following fields, you can define the export details:
DataBox’s details:
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
118
- Field – which field from the record description in DataBox should be exported.
Excel details:
- Cell type – the type of the cell (text, number, etc.);
- Start cell – the number of the first cell in MS Excel, from which on will be
placed the exported data;
- Increment – the cell’s increment;
- Direction – the direction of filling the cells in the MS Excel’s table (down or
right)
Options:
- Crop - defines the number of symbols from DataBox field content that will be
exported.
- Pad to – the number of symbols, which should appear in Excel’s table for the
respective field. It is used, if you select cropping, but the DataBox’s field does not contain
enough symbols. In such cases, you can complete it with some symbol (a padding
symbol).
- Pad type – the pad type (symbol or number).
- Symbol – the padding symbol.
Each DataBox field you want to export should be entered at a new line in the Export
dialog box. Enter new line by pressing the Plus button. To delete a line, select it and press
the Minus button.
If you want to export only the selected records from the DataBox grid, you have to
checkE the Export Selection only box.
Press the Export button to start exporting the records.
WARNING! If you haven’t entered a Start cell, the exported data will overwrite any
existing data in the Excel sheet, as the default start cell is A1.
- Export to/Import from XML. These features will allow you to exchange
metadata with other applications.
Grid Features:
- Drag-and-drop – It allows dragging clips from one grid to another (from
DataBox to AirBox or from DataBox to ListBox) or from the Grid to a specific Tree
View node.
- Multi-selection – allows simultaneous manipulation of many clips – move,
delete, edit, etc. You can add clips to the selection by holding <Shift> or <Ctrl> key
while clicking. <Shift> selects from-to, while <Ctrl> adds a single clip to the selection.
- Multi-editing – This feature allows you to edit data in several records
simultaneously. Select the records, right-click them and choose [Edit] from the context
menu. A NewRecord window opens. It shows only the data that are identical for all the
records., Different data appear as “Various” in the data fields.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
119
During multi-editing, some check boxes appear grey in New
Record=Traffic¬Properties.
New Record=Instances fields and New Record=Traffic¬Requirements
fields do not subject to multi-editing.
After multi-editing, click OK and the changes you’ve made will take effect in all the
selected records.

- Sorting – by clicking over a field (column) name, you can sort the Grid
according to the data in that field.
- Filtering – by writing a word in the row under a column’s name, you can filter
the Grid by this word in the relevant field. The way of updating the filter result (after
<Enter> or after every key-stroke) is defined in Option=Grid¬Filter options:.
You can sort by one field and filter by another field at the same time.
When filtering is being made, in the grid are shown only the records that correspond
to this inquiry. If you want to see all records, delete the filtering word from the line.

DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
120
III. MENU BAR


III.1. Grid
Pressing this icon invokes the database grid. It has already been described in details
above. (See Section II.3.)
III.2. New Record
A new record can be created either by drag-n-dropping a file from local or network
devices or by invoking and filling up New Record dialog box. You can drag-n-drop
several files simultaneously and create records for
them.
During drag-n-dropping, a Multi-Drag
window will appear to confirm entering and
describing of each file. There are three columns in
the Multi-Drag list: File name, File path and
Status. Double click on a file to create a record
in the database. The New Record dialog box will appear. After entering the file, its status
becomes “SAVED”.
During the next drag-n-drop, you will see the Multi-Drag list with all previously
dragged files that haven’t been saved. To remove a file from the list, right-click it and
choose [delete] from the context menu. To remove the whole list, choose [clear list]
from the context menu.
NOTE: The Multi-Drag list is not a default option. If you want to see it during drag-
n-dropping, you will have to activate it by un-checking the Use Auto insert box
(Options=General¬EUse Auto insert)
If you do not want to describe each entry separately during drag-n-dropping, check
Options=General¬EUse Auto insert box and select a template record or Default
options for describing the files. Thus, most of the data will be filled-up automatically.
If a specific category from the Tree View is selected during drag-n-dropping (or
during pressing the New Record button), the new record will be automatically added to
this element.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
121
After pressing the New Record button in the Menu bar, a New Record dialog
box appears. It consists of six pages: General, Instance, Classification, Credits,
Traffic, and Additional.

III.2.1. General
This is the main information form about
the new entry:
- Title string contains the entry’s name.
If the entry has been created by drag-n-
dropping, this string is automatically filled
with the filename, without its extension.
- Template record – if you check it, the
record will become a template record.
Template records are very useful for creating
sequences that comprise of many records
with the same data. When the record is a
template, the following fields in this page are
not editable: House ID, Episode No.,
Instances’ notes and Instance’s location.
NOTE: If the template record is
intended for a sequence and there are any
series created to this sequence, you cannot edit the template record anymore!
- House ID – Typically the House ID is a unique identification of production house,
including some extra data, such as production date and/or version, etc. The House Id can
be entered manually or generated automatically, depending on your settings
(Options=HouseID). See the appropriate user’s manual section for detailed
description.
- Generate button – you can press it if the HouseID Automatic generation
option has been activated beforehand (Options=HouseID¬EAutomatic generation).
Use it, if you want to regenerate a House ID.
- Sequence this string is designed for description of content that participates in
certain types of sequences – music album, TV series, Mini Series, etc. You can define the
sequence properties in advance from the Tree View.
- Episode – a unique number of the entry in the selected sequence. This field is not
active when there is no sequence selected.
- Season – Many TV Series usually are made in batches, called Seasons. For
example, a typical TV series is made of up to 20 seasons, each containing up to 20
episodes. This field is not active when there is no sequence selected.
- Duration displays the total duration of the entry. It is calculated automatically.
- Star – Usually this is the name of the main talent of the program. It corresponds to
the “Star” category in New Record=Credits=People.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
122
- Creator – Usually this is the main producing company. It corresponds to the
“Creator” category in New Record=Credits=Company.
- Country – As a rule it should contain the Country of Origin. It corresponds to
“Country of origin” in New Record=Credits=Countries/Locations.
- Language – Describes the original language of the entry.
- Group – Generally used to classify a program in a group, other than the standard
classification scheme – Type/Category/Genre. To choose a group, select it from the list. To
add a new group, choose “Add new group…” from the list and enter a new group name.
- RecDate stands for the date, when the entry was recorded in the database or
received at the TV facility. By default, this field is filled-in with the current date.
- ProdDate usually stands for the program production date or year. By default, this
field is set to current date.
- Notes – Used for storing useful notes about the program. It is a text field, limited to
255 symbols (including spaces and punctuation).

III.2.2. Instances
Here are described the separate instances
(copies) of each entry. It is possible to have
several copies of the same program. Each copy
might contain several streams (video/audio/text)
and they could be recorded or split on separate
media.
MAIN INSTANCE
It is the default name of the first (original)
copy. Its description appears in the right half of
the window:
- Name – name of the instance. By default,
the name is “main”.
- Quality – subjective measurement of the instance’s quality. It can be chosen from a
list, previously prepared in the Qualities Manager from the Main Menu.
- Main – Determines whether the instance is the main one or not. Only one program
instance could be “main instance”. If there is only one instance, it will be named “main”
by default.
The main instance is used in calculating the program duration, displayed in the Grid
and in New Record=General. When you have more than one instances, the main one is
transferred to AirBox via drag-and-dropping the clip.
- Duration contains the Program duration. If the instance consists of several parts,
their durations are cumulated.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
123
- Kill date – The expiration date, when the particular instance (copy) has to be
deleted. It appears if an Expiry period has been defined beforehand in Options=Default
Values. You can change the Kill date later. When the Kill date comes, there are two
possibilities, definable in Options= General – deleting the instance without notification
or notifying for expired instances and showing them in Expired node in the Tree View.
- Notes – Used for storing useful notes about the instance. It is a text field, limited to
255 symbols.
To add a new Instance, right-click in the left window and select [New instance]
from the context menu.
To delete an Instance, right-click it and then click [Delete].
- Part - It appears only when the entry
has parts – it has been divided (and recorded)
in several parts or trimmed (split) in separate
sections with the Clip Trimmer.
If you want to add a new part, right-click
on the Main Instance and select [New part]
from the context menu. If you trim the file, the
parts are created automatically, according to
the succession of the trimmed sections.
To delete a part, right-click it and then
click [Delete].
Under one part you can define Streams
and Media.
MAIN STREAM – automatically set, if
the entry was created through drag-n-dropping
a file.
The description form to the right contains:
- Name – Stream name.
- Stream Type – describes the stream type. It can be a Program, Video, Audio,
Subtitles, etc stream.
- File Name contains the stream filename and path. You can enter a file name using
the browse button next to the field or by typing the file name manually. After typing the
file name, you have to press <Enter>, in order to save the changes.
- Audio Level –describes the absolute audio level of an audio stream. Currently this
value should be entered manually. Defining it helps AirBox to determine the average audio
level of each program in order to avoid annoying audio level discrepancies when switching
from one program to another while on-air.
- IN Point – By default it is 00:00:00:00. It can be changed by pressing the button in
the right of the field. It invokes the Clip Trimmer and a new IN Point can be defined.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
124
- OUT Point – By default it contains the latest available timecode, depending on the
program duration. It can be changed by pressing the button in the right of the field. It
invokes the Clip Trimmer and a new OUT Point can be defined.
- Width the Video Image width in pixels. This field is not available when describing a
tape.
- Height – the Video Image height in pixels. This field is not visible when describing
a tape.
- Video Bit Rate – the Video bitrate extracted from the stream properties. This field
is not visible when a tape instance is being created.
- Sample Rate – the Audio sampling rate.
- Audio Bit Rate – Audio bitrate extracted from the stream properties. This field is
not available when a tape instance is being created.
- Channels – The number of audio channels found in the audio stream. This field is
used only when describing files.
- Frame Rate – The actual video frame rate of the stream.
- Video Compression – the type of video stream compression.
- Audio Compression – the type of audio
stream compression.
- Notes – Used for storing useful notes
about the stream. It is a text field, limited to 255
symbols.
- Part – The number of the part. By default,
this field contains a zero, i.e. there are no parts.
When the instance (copy) is not a file, the
Main Stream fields are not applicable, except
the Stream Name, Stream Type, Note and
Part.
To add a new Stream, right-click Main
Instance and select [New stream] from the
context menu.
To delete a Stream, you should right-click
it and then click [Delete] in the context menu.
MAIN MEDIA
- Label – Media label (CD or partition label, tape user bits, etc.).
- Media Type – It is selected from a list, previously drawn in MEDIA TYPES
manager. You can also add new Media types in this field by selecting [Media type
manager] from the pop-up list. This will invoke the Media Types dialog box. Right-
click on any row of the list and select [New] from the context menu; then specify the
name, the prepare time, the color for color-coding, and the properties. See also the Media
Types section (III.4.)
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
125
- IN Point – This field is visible if the media is a video tape (Betacam, DVCam,
DVCPro, etc.). It shows the program’s initial time-code on the tape (HH:MM:SS:FF). A
media type is considered a videotape if its Random Access flag is not set (Media
Types¬ERandom Access).
- OUT Point – This field is visible if the media is a video tape (Betacam, DVCam,
DVCPro, etc.). It shows the program’s final time-code on that media (HH:MM:SS:FF). A
media type is considered a videotape if its Random Access flag is not set (Media
Types¬ERandom Access).
- Archive describes the physical location of the copy (building, floor, room). The
Archives are defined in Classification¬Archive¬right-click ¬[New archive].
- Location – this is the exact position of the copy. It may be a shelf number, a
barcode number, etc. If the copy is a file, this will be its location on the local or network
devices.
- Notes – Used for storing useful notes about the media. It is a text field, limited to
255 symbols.
To add a new Media, right-click the respective Stream and choose [New media]
from the context menu.
To delete a Media, right-click it and then click [Delete].
III.2.3. Classification
In this tab, you can classify an entry,
using the classification scheme created in
CLASSIFICATION manager in the Main
Menu.
- Type this field describes the type of
content – cinema, news, sport, etc. When you
choose a Type, only the relevant Category
and Genre will appear.
For example, for Type [cinema],
Categories are [movie film],
[documentary], [animation], etc.; and
Genres are [action], [comedy], [drama],
etc.
- Category –a category of the selected
type. You can select only one category from
the pop-up list.
- Genre – all the genres of a type. Select a genre from the left-hand field and move it
to the right-hand field. You can do this in three ways: by double clicking it; by pressing the
right-arrow >> button; or by right clicking on it and then choosing [Assign] from the
context menu. Discarding a genre from the list is done in much the same manner as adding
– using the left arrow << button, or double clicking.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
126
To add/delete a Genre from the list, right-click it and choose [Add/Delete] from the
context menu.
- Keywords – any keywords for the entry. They are managed in the same way as
Genres.
III.2.4. Credits
These are the program creation factors:
Countries, Locations, Companies and
People.
This tab contains three pages with
identical structure: each of them consists of two
fields. In the left field are described some
activities. For example, the activities for
Countries might be country of origin,
target country, etc.; the activities for
People – can be star, director, editor,
etc.
In the right field are listed the names of
credits. For Countries – countries names, for
Companies – companies names, etc.
To make a choice, you have to drag-and-
drop a credit’s name to some activity (i.e. from right to left).
To create a new element (activity or name), right-click and choose [Add new] from
the context menu. To change/delete an element, right-click it and choose
[Properties/Delete] from the context menu.
It is also possible to create lists of activities and names in advance – just open the
CREDITS manager in the Main Menu.
- Countries/Locations – here are described the countries that have taken part in
the making of content . Several countries could be added to each activity, except to
Country of origin. The selected Country of origin is displayed in New
Record=General¬Country.
- Companies – companies took part in content creation. Several companies could
be added to each activity, except to Company: creator. The selected Company:
creator is displayed in New Record=General¬Company.
- People – artists that have participated in the making of content. Several people
could be added to each activity, except to Star. The Star is displayed in New Record=
General¬Star.

DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
127
III.2.5. Traffic
The Data in this page concern the clips
playback in AirBox.
Properties – Check the boxes in
front the desired properties properties:
- Program Enabled – allows clip
playback. If this box is not checked, the
clip playback in AirBox will not be
allowed.
- Logo Enabled – allows displaying a
logo over the clip.
- Overlay Enabled – allows graphic
overlaying of the clip.
- Break Enabled – allows breaking
(interrupting) the clip during its playback.
- Truncation Enabled – allows
truncation (trimming) of the clip.
- Significant Content – allows including the clip in an automatically generated
electronic program guide.
- Auto fill available – allows using the clip as auto fill material. When there is gab in
the TV schedule, it can be automatically filled with short clips.
- Protection needed – check it, if the clip has to be protected.

Priority – defines the playback priority of the clip. Priorities would help the system to
determine whether to break, truncate or wait until the end of the currently running clip
automatically. This could happen for example, when the initial and the start times of the
clips are overlapped.
Priority could be Normal, Low, High or Highest.
Age Rate – if the clip has some age restrictions, you can register that by using this
option. Click on the black arrow to the right of the field to choose age rate or to Add New
Age Rate.
Requirements – The clip’s playback requirements are set here:
- Daily mask – not implemented yet. This feature will allow observing some time-
slot restrictions
- Runs remaining – displays how many times the clip has been played in AirBox
and how many runs remain for playing.
- Runs per hour/day/week/month/year – you can define limitations for clip
playback in an hour/day/week/month or year.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
128
When a figure is entered in the “from” hour field, the figures in from day, week,
month and year fields, are calculated automatically, if the relevant boxes in front of them
are checkedE. The “until” fields are not calculated from each other.
- Valid from – the date from which
on the clip is available for playback.
- Valid until – the date until which the
clip is available for playback.
III.2.6. Additional
This page contains additional
information about the entry’s content. It is
used mainly when describing movies.
- Rating – the rating level.
- Plot Outline – the subject-
matter/plot of the clip content.
- Taglines – the essence/moral of the
clip content.
- Comments Summary – comments
to the clip content.
- Trivia – here you can enter
interesting, curious information about the
clip production. Each new line (after
pressing the <Enter>key) in the field is accepted as a new trivia.

DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
129
III.3. Options

Options dialog box allows defining useful settings, as well as defining some
defaults. It contains several pages: General, Grid, HouseID and Default Values.
III.3.1. General
Data Base – displays the currently active
database. If you want to change it, press the
browse button to the right.
IMPORTANT: The "server" station,
which will host the database (*.GDB) file
should have the hard-drive shared as a single
letter (d, c, etc.).
For example, if your GDB file is on drive
D, it should be shared EXACTLY as "D".
Windows XP tends to make the default share
names explanatory, so you have to be careful
with that.
Auto insert – check it E to make auto
insertion of files into the database, when creating new records through drag-n-dropping
files.
- Template – you can choose Default options for describing the inserted files
as well as a template record.
Date format – defines a format for entering and viewing dates.
- General – Check  the preferred format (year; year/month,
year/month/day, year/day/month, day/month/year, month/day/year, month/year)
and define the separator sign. By default, the date format is DD/MM/YYYY and the
separator is a dot.
- Production date – You can define a separate format for the Production
date which can differ from the other dates. By default, the production date format is
YYYY.
Settings - It is used to save the settings made in a file.
- The Export button sends the settings into a file (*.dbs).
- The Import button opens an already created file (*.dbs) and adopts the
settings.
After kill date expired determines how DataBox should proceed with expired
instances. There are two possibilities:
- delete the instances (if these are files) without notification.
- notify for expired instances and show their records in Expired node in the Tree
View.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
130
Fields to AirBox Notes – here you can define which fields should appear in the
Notes field in AirBox.
To add a field, press the Plus button to the right of the window and choose a field
from the list. To delete a field, select it and press the Minus button.
III.3.2. Grid
In the left of this page are listed all
available data fields.
Data Fields List
Name - the name of the data field
Language – the default language
of the field. Mostly used for non-Latin
languages. It defines which keyboard
locale will be used when entering data in
the particular field.
Visible – Each field could be
visible [Yes] or not [No] in the Grid. To
switch the visibility status of a field, just
double-click it.
Buttons
These buttons are valid only for to the fields’ area.
- Select All button – sets all fields visible.
- Select None button – sets all fields to invisible.
- Reset Grid button – resets the fields’ settings as defined in the program.
- Invert selection button – inverts all settings.
Check boxes:
- Show only archive media type – shows the records whose Media type is
Archive.
- Color coding color fill entire row – fills the entire grid row with the field’s color,
selected for color coding in Options¬Default values and previously set in the relevant
Main menu item.
Filter Options
This field defines how the Grid will be refreshed during grid column filtering.
- Update on Enter – the Grid will be refreshed after pressing <Enter>.
- Update on every key press – the Grid will be refreshed after each key stroke.
NOTE: Use this option with caution – it may take a long time to refresh a large database.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
131
Tree View Options:
The Tree view displays the classification scheme of records as a tree (similar to
Windows’ Explorer). You can define various classification criteria and enter their
representatives in advance, such as countries, persons, keywords, etc. If you want to see all
these entries (no matter if they are assigned to any record or not) in the Tree View, check
E the corresponding boxes in Options=Grid ¬Tree View. If you want to view only the
entries, that are assigned to some record, do not check the boxes E.
A more detailed description of the Tree View and the Classifications can be found
further in this manual.
III.3.3. HouseID
The House ID is a unique
identification number. It can be entered
manually or generated automatically. This
Options submenu helps you create your
own pattern for auto-generating House
IDs.
· Automatic generation – check it
to perform auto-generation of House ID.
· Insert field button – inserts a
new field to the House ID.
· Delete field button – deletes
the selected field from the House ID.
· House ID fields – this area shows
the House ID sequential.
By default, the House ID consists of
two fields, separated by a hyphen. The first field contains three symbols from the entry’s
Title and the second field contains a Random number
between 0 and 10000.
Double clicking in the white House ID fields area
(E Automatic generation - checked), invokes a
context menu with the following items:
- [Insert field] – invokes a dialog box for
choosing a field.
- [Insert separator] – inserts a separator. The Default separator is hyphen.
- [Delete field] deletes the selected field.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
132
To change a House ID field, double click on it. A list of possible fields (a text-
containing field from entry’s description, a separator or a number) will appear.
o Choosing a text-containing field opens the following property window:
Field type – shows the field name.
Crop at – check it E, if you want to use
only a part of the field’s content in the House
ID number. Define the number of symbols
to be included.
For example: Field type [Title],
crop at [3], means that only the first three symbols from the field Title will be
included in the House ID number.
Pad to – check itE, if you want to fill the missing symbols from field’s content
with a specific symbol. This option is applied, when the number of symbols in the text
field is less than the number in the Crop at box.
For example, if you define Crop at [4] symbols, but the concrete entry’s field
contains only 3 symbols, it is one symbol short. The missing symbol could be filled-up
with a specific symbol or left empty, depending on the E/E status of the Pad to box. The
padding symbol is the same for all fields and is defined in Options=HouseID¬Text
padding symbol.
o Choosing a number-containing field,
opens the following property window:
Field type – shows the field name. It could
be a random or a sequential number.
Pad to – check it, if you want to fill-up the
random/sequential number with a specific symbol and define the number of symbols. This
option is used, when you want to visualize numbers with equal length.
For example, if you define a Random number between 0 and 100, it will appear in
House ID like that: 2, 34, 98, 5, etc. If you check E the Pad to box, define pad to [3] and
the previously set padding symbol is [zero] (it is defined in
Options=HouseID¬Number padding symbol), the numbers will appear like that:
002, 034, 098, 005, etc.
o Choosing [separator] opens a property
window, where you can define the separator sign. By
default, the separator sign is a slash.
· Text padding symbol here you can define a symbol for filling-up missing
characters, when the Pad up box is checked. By default, it is an interval.
· Number padding symbol – symbol for filling-up missing digits, when Pad up
box is checked. By default, it is zero.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
133
· Sequential numbers – this field contains the sequential number features,
presented in two pages:
Local
This page concerns the generation of sequential numbers
when the computer is in local mode, i.e. the records are created
by one user. The sequential numbers are stored in the registry. If
you want to use such a number in the House ID, select
[Sequential number] from the pop-up menu that appears after
double-clicking in the House ID fields.
- Current value this field displays the current sequential number on a local
machine.
- Reset type – By default, the sequential number is never reset [None]. If
you want to reset the sequential number, specify the reset period: daily, weekly,
monthly or annually.
- Reset now button – press it to reset the sequential
numbering immediately.
DB Global
This page is used when many users work simultaneously
on the database. The sequential numbers are generated according
to the moment of creating the record (i.e. at opening the New
record dialog box). The numbers are saved in the database. If you want to use such a
number in the House ID, select [DB sequential number] from the dialog box that
appears after double-clicking in the House ID fields.
- Current value displays the sequential number in the data base
- Reset now and Apply value buttons are self-explanatory.
· Random number the random number features are described in this field:
- Minimum set the minimum value of the random number. By default, it is zero.
- Maximum – set the maximum value of the random number. By default, it is
10000.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
134
III.3.4. Default Values
You can define values for the
most used record’s fields in this tab. By
default, they are not defined.
- Media type - the default Media type set
in New Record= Instances ¬
Media Type.
- Country - the default Country of origin
set in New Record=General
¬Country.
- Stream name - the default stream
name set in New Record=
Instances¬[Stream] Name.
- Instance name – the default name of
the instance set in New Record =Instances¬ [Instance] Name.
- Quality – the default instance visual quality set in New Record=
Instances¬[Instance] Quality.
- Color-coding – in this cell you can define which grid column will be color-coded.
- Color to AirBox – defines which field’s color will be transferred during drag-n-dropping
to AirBox.
- Auto sort by – defines a field which will be used for Grid sorting by default.
- Expiry period – the number of days after an instance (copy) was created, whereupon the
instance (copy) will be considered expired. If it is set to zero, no expiration will take
place. It corresponds to the Kill date in New Record= Instances¬ Main
Instance.
- Priority – the default priority set in New Record=Traffic¬Priority.
- Properties – the default properties set in New Record= Traffic¬ Properties.
Clicking on the field to the right opens a window to define properties.
- Age rate – the default Age rate set in New Record=Traffic¬Age Rate.
- Rating – the default Rating set in New Record=Additional¬Rating.
- Total runs – the total number of runs set in New Record=Traffic¬Runs remaining.
- Original Language – the language of the record’s content
- Stream Language – the language of the main stream.

DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
135
III.3.5. Export/Import
This feature will help you in
exchanging metadata and instances. It
will create automatically an *.xml file
containing all the metadata for an
instance and will attach it to the instance
file. Thus you can transfer not only
instances, but all the metadata related to
them.
- E Exclude files from
import/export will not include the stream
links (file paths to instances) from the
exported metadata as they will probably
not be the same at the destination
workstation.
- E Exclude notes from
import/export will not include the note fields in the *.xml file. Since generally the notes
are related to personal opinion and workstation-specific matters, checking this field will
prevent notes from exporting and you-from importing such information.
- E Multi-file export When you have selected more than one file for export at
the same time, this feature will create a separate *.xml file for each instance exported. If
the box is not checkedE, the metadata for all exported instances will be saved in one *.xml
file. Thus, the recipient will not be able to forward, or process these files independently
from each other without losing their metadata.
- When importing existing record – Choose  the appropriate action for such
cases.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
136
III.4. Media Types

It defines the types of media that are
typically used in a TV facility – CD, DVD,
DVCAM, DVCPro etc.
There is a list of predefined media types in
the left area of the window.
To add new Media type, right-click in the
left area and then click [New] from the context
menu. A dialog box appears to enter the name
of the new media type.
To rename a Media Type, right-click on it and select [Rename]. To delete a Media
Type, right-click it and then click [Delete].
When you select a Media Type from the list, its properties are displayed to the right
and you can edit them:
Name – media name.
Prepared time – the time needed to start playback from this media type. This time
should account for the time needed to bring it (out) from an archive and upload it to the
online storage.
Color – chose color for media type color-coding;
Properties – define if the media is Rewritable, Random Access, and/or
Archive.
When EArchive is checked, the Archive field in New Record=Instances¬
Media becomes editable. This field describes the physical location of the program
instance.
When ERandom Access is checked, the fields InPoint and OutPoint in New
Record=Instances¬ Media become non-editable.
NOTE: DO NOT set Random access for video tapes.
III.5. Qualities

This Main menu item allows you to define a subjective
measuring of the visual quality of an instance. Different quality
levels can be user-defined. If a new instance with different
quality is received later, this data field will help you determine
which instance is better.
A New Quality is added by pressing the New icon
from the menu-bar or by right-clicking and selecting [New]
from the context menu. Doing so will open a dialog box where
you can enter the name of the new quality and define a color for it.
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
137
To change the name or the color of a Quality level, select
it and press the Property icon in the menu-bar. You
can also do that by right-clicking on it and choosing
[Properties].
To delete a Quality level, select it and press the Delete icon in the menu-bar or
right-click it and then click [Delete].
The Up and Down arrows in the menu-bar are used for changing the
Qualities’ order.
III.6. Classification

· This is the classification structure of entries. The
available classification criteria are Type, Keyword and
Group. Type describes the content type (cinema, news,
sport, music etc.). This criterion has two sub-branches:
- Category – defines categories for each Type.
For example, for Cinema these are Children film,
Making, Series, etc.
- Genres – defines genres for each Type. For
example, for Cinema these are Action, Drama,
Comedy, etc.
· Keywords – specific, keywords, assigned to the
entry that are used for easier search.
· Groups – despite their type, entries may pertain to
the same group. For example, it may be a special (gold)
fund or Christmas/New Year programs, etc.
· Archive – describes the physical location of the copy (building, floor, room, etc).
To add a new classification criterion (such as Type, Category, Genre, Keyword or
Group) or Archive, you have to right-click an existing element and choose [New] from
the context menu. This will open a dialog box to enter the name of the new element (type,
category, etc.) and define a color for color-coding. The default color is white, i.e. there is
no color.
To change an element’s feature (name or color), right-click it and choose
[Properties] from the context menu.
To delete an element, right-click it and choose [Delete].
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
138
III.7. Credits

This is a manager for description of video-content
creators divided in three pages: Countries, Companies
and People. Each page contains two lists: list of
activities/positions and list of names.
For example, the activities for Countries might be
country of origin, target country, shooting location, etc.;
the activities/positions for People might be star, director,
editor, etc.
The lists of names in the relevant pages contain country
names, company names and personal names.
To add a new activity or a new name, right-click the
relevant list and then click [New] from the context menu. Enter a name and define a color
for color-coding in the dialog box.
To change the name or the color of a credit entry (name or activity) – right-click on it
and choose [Properties] from the context menu.
To delete a credit entry, right-click it and then click [Delete].
III.8. Print

The print-preview window opens after pressing the Print button in the Main menu.
It shows the database grid and the records listed in it – the entire database, or a search
result, etc.
The columns’ size and order are the same as in the grid.

The following fields and buttons are situated along the upper panel of the window:
- Name of the printer (it may be local or network connected printer).
DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL
139
- Font type and Font size
- Button Print - hit this button to start printing the list.
- Page Orientation buttons – choose Portrait or Landscape
- Button Selection – hit it to print only the selected grid rows.
- Button First page - go to the first page
- Button - go to the previous page
- Button Last page - go to the last page
- Button - go to the next page
- Button Refresh table – refreshes the table if the content has been changed
in the meantime.
III.9. Media Folders

This option is used for searching for
files, described in the database, but not
presented in the respective folders. The
search concerns only the main instances of
the records.
In the Media Folder window you can
create a list of search locations.
Path – the searching location, double
click in the field to open the browse window.
Active – -check this cell to permit
searching in the selected folder.
SubFolders – -check it, to search in the subfolders as well.
Media Type – which Media Type to be assigned to the record’s instance.
To add a new line in the window, i.e. a new searching location, press the Plus
button. To delete a line, select it and press the Minus button.
Check Scope – it is used to define the scope of records within which search will be
carried out: All records in the database, All visible in the grid records or only the
Selected records.
Log search progress – If this box is checked E, the search progress will be
shown in the bottom area
of the window.
Press Check to
start the search..
_____________________________

140
LISTBOX
__________________________
I. GETTING STARTED
ListBox is dedicated to creating and editing playlists. It allows preparing playlists in
advance for the AirBox module and playing them on-air later.
ListBox doesn’t need any special workstation or platform.
I.1. Installation

Where to Install it?
ListBox is mostly used by schedule editors. In order to transfer content directly (drag-
n-drop) from DataBox to ListBox, DataBox should be also installed on ListBox
workstations.
Previous Versions
Prior to installing ListBox, you should uninstall any previous ListBox versions
(Control Panel ¬ Add/Remove Programs ¬ DMT ListBox).
Software License
ListBox LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE WIBU USB KEY. IT WILL NOT
RUN WITHOUT THE KEY INSTALLED ON YOUR USB PORT.
Minimum System Requirements
CPU: Intel Pentium III 500 MHz
RAM: 128 MB
O/S: Windows 2000 Professional / Windows XP
LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL
141
I.2. Quick Start

1. Launch ListBox;
2. Click the Playlist button;
3. Select Append Element;
4. Select the files you want to insert in the playlist and click the Open button.
Congratulations! You have just created your first PlayBox playlist!
II. USER INTERFACE
II.1. Toolbar


The Toolbar has a set of buttons that provide access to the most commonly used
Playlist functions. All commands from the Toolbar can also be found in the Menu Bar.
Some particular buttons on the Toolbar will appear enabled or disabled depending on
the selection made. For example, the Find File button is enabled only when a missing
file is selected.
The Toolbar contains the following command buttons that are described below in the
relevant menu sections: New, Open, Save, Save as, Print, Find Text, Append
Element, Insert Element, Delete Selection, To Top, Up, Down, To Bottom,
Shift, Reverse, Randomize, Trim, Options, Show Grid, Find File and Folder
View.
LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL
142

II.2. Playlist Grid
This area is dedicated to playlist visualization. It looks the same as the AirBox
Playlist Grid.
The order of Grid columns can be changed by drag-n-dropping them to the left or to
the right.


ListBox Grid Features:
- Dark Blue bar shows the currently selected clip – all actions, i.e. Move
Up/Down are applied to it.
- Red text rows – show clips, which are not currently available.
- Pink rows – these are the event rows. They are the same as those in AirBox
module.
- Light cyan rows – these are the rows between Logo On and Logo Off events. A
logo will appear over these clips during the playback. It is useful, when you have to hide
the logo over a certain block of clips, i.e. commercials.
- Drag-n-Drop – It allows dragging clips within the grid or from one grid to another
(from/to DataBox or to AirBox). If Shift is pressed during dragging, the executed
operation is Move. If <Ctrl> is pressed, the operation is Copy. By default, each internal
operation is Move and the operations between two windows (similar to Windows
Explorer) is Copy
LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL
143
- Multi-selection – allows simultaneous manipulation of many clips– move,
randomize, etc. Clips can be added to the selection by holding <Shift> or <Ctrl> key. The
<Shift> key selects from-to, while the <Ctrl> adds a single clip to the selection.
- Double-clicking over a clip invokes the Clip Trimmer. A detailed description
of the Trimmer can be found further in the manual.
- Right-clicking the grid opens the grid context menu. It contains commands from
the Edit menu and the Playlist menu that have already been described above in the
manual.
Columns description:
- Start Time – shows the start time of each clip.
- Duration – shows the actual duration of each clip. Of course, if a clip has been
trimmed, its actual duration is reduced.
- Type column shows the type (MPEG) of the clip.
- Category column contains category information fed by DataBox. The background
is colored with the predefined category color.
- File Name – shows the clip’s filename.
If you have a file, stored at different locations, you can change the file path displayed
in List Box for this file. Just press <F8> to open a dialog box for changing the file
location.
If the file is missing, after the playlist is loaded in AirBox it will skip that file and will
jump to the next available clip.
- Title, ClipID, Star columns contain data fed by DataBox, describing the clip
name, clip ID and the performing artists.
- Notes – displays trimming notification if trimmed files come from DataBox; and
data from the fields, defined in DataBox¬Options=General¬Fields to AirBox
notes.
II.3. Status Bar

The Status bar is located along the lowest part of the ListBox window.
The First cell – Total Length – shows the playlist duration. The figure in parenthesis
shows the number of lines in the list.
The Second field – End at – shows when the playlist will end.
The third cell – Full Path: – displays the location of a currently selected file (line)

LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL
144
III. MENU BAR
The Menu Bar is at the top of the window and
contains the following menus:
III.1. File Menu

Contains all playlist’s file-related commands:
· New – allows creating a new playlist.
· Open – opens an existing playlist and loads it for
editing.
· Save – saves the current playlist in the open file.
· Save as… – saves the current playlist to a specified file.
· Print… – prints the current playlist.
After choosing the Print command, a Print-Preview window opens and displays the
current playlist. The columns and their order of appearance are the same, as in the grid.
You can change the
column size in the
Preview window.
On the top of it, you
can see:
- The Name of the
printer (it may be a
local or network-
connected printer).
- Page Orientation –
Portrait or Landscape
.
- EAuto size check box
- Reset Column size button – resets to the initial column size.
- Restore button
- Column Size - percent of the real size (zoom).
- Print button - hit this button to start printing the playlist.
- Font type and Font size
- First page - go to the first page / Last page - go to the last page
- Button - go to the previous page / Button - go to the next page
- Button All – hit it to print the whole document.
- Button Selection – hit it to print only the rows that have been previously selected in
the grid.
LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL
145
III.2. Edit Menu

This menu contains commands related to playlist editing.
· Undo – undo function.
· Redo – redo function.
· Cut – removes selected rows from the playlist and
keeps them in the buffer memory (clipboard).
· Copy – saves a copy of selected rows from the
playlist in the buffer memory without removing them
from their original location.
· Paste – pastes the clipboard content in the list before the selected row.
· Delete – deletes the selected rows from the current playlist.
· Select All – selects the whole playlist.
· Invert Selection – inverts the selection.
· Find Text – a search function. You can search through the content of all fields
in the ListBox. After choosing this command, an inquiry-window opens. There
you can specify the fields to search in, the search options and scope:

- Text to Find –fill-in the
search inquiry.
- Search In – contains a
list of the grid’s fields.
The checked fields will be
searched through.
- Options – you can limit
the search to Case
Sensitive or to Whole
Words, by checking the relevant box.
- Direction – sets the search direction. By default, it is [down].
- Origin – it defines where to start the search– from the Current selection (up or down) or
throughout the Entire scope.
- Scope – defines the search scope. It may be the entire list (All) or the selected rows only
(Selection). The scope is active only if there is some selection made in the playlist.
- Find First – click to it to start the search
- Find Next – click it to find the next search result of the same inquiry
During search, the bar under the Find Next button is green. When search reaches the end
of the search area, the bar becomes red.
LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL
146

III.3. Playlist Menu
· Append Element – adds a file to the end of the
playlist.
· Inset Element – inserts a file in the playlist, above the
currently selected row.
· Append Playlist – appends another playlist to the end
of the current playlist.
· Insert Playlist – inserts another playlist in the current
playlist, above the currently selected row.
· Delete Selection – deletes the selected rows from the
current playlist.
· Clear All- deletes all lines from the current playlist.
· Add/insert Events – adds/inserts one of the following
events:
- Stop – automatically terminates the playlist playback.
- Stop Cue - automatically terminates the playlist playback and shows the first
frame of the next clip.
- Wait – stops playback temporarily for a certain amount of time (hh:mm:ss)
- Wait Until – stops playback and resumes it automatically at certain time
(hh:mm:ss).
- Logo Preset – allows displaying a logo file over the clips in AirBox.
- GPI – activates the GPI functionality.
- Kramer Switcher – activates the Kramer Switch output.
- Kramer Matrix Switcher – activates the Kramer Matrix Switch output.
- TitleBox NetControl Output – inserts TitleBox Output associated events.
· Notes - adds/inserts Note line in the playlist. It is used for inserting comments in
the playlist.
· One Down – moves the selection one row down in the list.
· One Up – moves the selection one row up in the list.
· Top – goes to the top of the list.
· Bottom – goes to the end of the list.
· Shift – shifts the positions of the selected rows. If there are more than two rows
selected, their positions will be shifted ascending. The second selected will become
first, the first selected will become last, etc.
· Reverse – reverses the order of the selected rows.
· Randomize – arranges the selected rows in a random pattern.
The Shift, Reverse and Randomize commands are active only if a multi-selection
is made.
LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL
147
· Change Directory – changes the file path for the selected entry.
· Find File – searches for missing file(s) (red color text).
· Refresh List – updates the list.
III.4. Tools Menu
· Options:
- Playlist Name – give name/rename the
playlist. The name appears in the relevant
field in AirBox.
- Start time – the time when the playlist
playback should begin.
- Loop – corresponds to the Playlist Loop box in AirBox. If it is checked,
the current playlist will be looped during playback in AirBox.
· Edit – starts the Clip trimmer.
· Folder View – it is active if you have a Folder View application installed. This
application helps you arrange your media files.
· Edit – starts the Clip trimmer.
· Folder View – it is active if you have a Folder View application installed. This
application helps you arrange your media files.







- Media File IN – this line displays the media folders that contain input media
materials. In the window to the right are displayed the folders’ properties:
Active – shows whether the folder is active or not;
Subfolders – shows whether the folder has subfolders or not;
Removable – shows whether the folder is removable or not;
Read only – shows whether the folder is write-protected or not
ID – shows the folder ID.
Path – shows the folder path.
To change a property, just double click on it.
- Media File OUT– this line displays the media folders, where the output
materials will be saved. In the window to the right, you can see the folders’ properties.
LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL
148
- Playlists – this line shows the folders that contain playlists. In the
window to the right are displayed the folders’ properties.
To reload the information hit the icon in the toolbar.
To apply changes hit the icon in the toolbar.
To add a new folder hit the icon in the toolbar
To delete a folder, select the properties line and hit the icon in the toolbar.
Pressing icon in the toolbar invokes a form to define your own folder
icons, appearing in ListBox.
· Time Format – specify the time format for displaying the [start time] and the
[duration] in the current playlist. The time could be displayed in Frames,
Seconds, Minutes, etc. In order to view a correct 24-hour cycle in the playlist,
select the option “24 hour cycle”.
· Show Grid – shows the grid lines.
· Save Last Path – if checked -, saves the last file path.

· Column Properties – choosing it invokes
the column properties window. Here are listed
the names of playlist grid columns. The
column will be visible if the check box in front
of it is checked.
- The UP and Down buttons are used for
changing the columns order.
- The Show button – shows the selected
column in the Playlist Grid.
- The Hide button – doesn’t display the
selected column in the Playlist Grid.
- The Reset button – resets the order of
columns in the Playlist Grid.
· Entire row color – fills the entire row in the playlist with the Category-field
color.






__________________________

149
TITLEBOX
__________________________
I. GETTING STARTED
TitleBox module is an on-air graphics manager. You can create different static or
dynamic objects in TitleBox, such as rolls, crawls, still pictures, clocks, etc. and save them
in projects.
In TitleBox you can also start objects from previously created project(s) at different
times, thanks to its Scheduler.
TitleBox works synchronously with the AirBox playout. Separate objects in TitleBox
can be started or stopped via AirBox, by inserting TitleBox Net control events in an
AirBox playlist.
I.1. Installation

WHERE TO INSTALL IT?
TitleBox is typically installed at on-air CG workstations, equipped with character
generator frame buffer hardware.
PREVIOUS VERSIONS
Prior to installing TitleBox, you should uninstall any previous TitleBox versions
(Control Panel ¬ Add/Remove Programs ¬ DMT TitleBox).
SOFTWARE LICENSE
TitleBox LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE WIBU USB KEY. IT WILL NOT
RUN WITHOUT THE KEY INSTALLED ON YOUR USB PORT.
MINIMUM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
CPU: Intel Pentium 4 2.4 GHz
RAM: 512 MB
O/S: Windows Windows XP Professional or Home edition
H/W: Compatible CG hardware (see the list of hardware CG boards supported at the
PlayBox site: http://www.playbox.tv).
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
150
I.2. Quick Start

1. Launch TitleBox;
2. Click the Crawl button;
3. Draw a rectangle in the Preview Area;
4. Type a text in the Properties dialog box and press OK;
5. Press the two Play buttons – one in the bottom of the window and one in the
third row of the taskbar.
Congratulations! You have just created your first TitleBox crawl!
II. USER INTERFACE

TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
151
II.1. Preview Area
The Preview area is the main part of the TitleBox interface. It shows the objects,
their positions, types and status.


Objects can be moved and resized in this area. If an object is too complex and is not
rendered yet, a yellow/black sign saying “Rendering” will appear on the screen. This
sign will automatically disappear when the rendering is
complete.
The little signs on the upper-left corner of the objects, show
their type and/or status. As seen in the example, the object below is
a Picture and it is locked for moving. The upper one is an
Animation and has In and Out events assigned.

TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
152
II.2. Toolbar
The Toolbar is designed to facilitate the project management, individual object control, as
well as object ordering and alignment:
The New, Open and Save buttons correspond to the relevant commands in File
Menu.
The Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete buttons correspond to the relevant commands in
Edit Menu.
The Select Display device button opens the list of available hardware
drivers, from which you can select the one to work with. See also the corresponding
section in the Project Menu description.
The Objects list button shows a window with a list of all objects available in
the current TitleBox project.
The Properties buttons are object-related. They allow viewing or
changing the properties of the currently selected object.
There are two types of properties: Standard Properties, that provide the standard
object options, and Property Tools, which provide an additional set of properties. The
Property Tools are active only for texts, rolls and crawls.
IMPORTANT: The properties can be interactively changed at any moment, even
when the object is running on-air.
The Play, Pause Stop, and Toggle Play/Stop buttons control the
play status of any particular object. They correspond to the relevant commands in the
Object Menu.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
153
(!) TIP: While a project is in play mode, you can control the separate objects in it
through the Short Action function.
Press and hold <F4> while setting the desired action:
¯ Enter the name of the object in the Name Mask field
(it corresponds to the Name displayed in the second row of
the toolbar).
¯ Select the action [Play/ Pause/ Stop/ Play Toggle/ Select/ None] using
the left and right arrow keys on the keyboard. The default action is [Play].
¯ Release the <F4> key to execute the selected action.
The [Play Toggle] command will switch to Play or Stop, depending on the current
status of the object: you just have to write the name of a currently playing object and
release the <F4> key to stop it, and vice versa.
If you apply a unified naming system for your objects, you could control them
simultaneously (using the wild card functionality).
For example, if your objects are named using a letter and a number (i.e. c1, c2, c3, etc.),
you can activate an action for all of them by writing [*c] in the Name Mask field
Group and Ungroup buttons are intended for grouping and ungrouping a
selection of objects.
Lock and Visible buttons define the object status. It could be locked for
moving and resizing or not. It could also be visible in the preview area or not.
Schedule buttons concern project scheduling. The scheduling function
allows starting each object in a project at a specific time/day of week, with specific
parameters.
Schedule window button – opens the schedule window.
Add to Schedule button – adds the selected object to the schedule.
Remove from Schedule button – removes the selected object from the
schedule list.
Mix object button defines the draw mode of the object. If the button is pushed,
two or more overlapping objects will be blended.
(!) TIP: When in Mix object mode, you can switch between the overlapping objects
using the <Alt> + click combination. The name of the currently selected object will
appear in the Name field and will be highlighted in the Object list window. You can
activate this window from within the Object menu.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
154
Name field – contains the name of the object. The default names are [Type]_[#], i.e.
[Crawl 1], [Roll 3], etc. You can change them at your will. Names are most important
when you use Objects list window, where only names and properties are displayed.
Delay field –you can specify a delay for each individual object. A three-second delay
means that the object would start three seconds after you have pressed the Show object
button.
Duration field – here you can specify duration for an object, if needed. The duration
determines how long the object will be displayed after pressing the Show object
button.
Order buttons - allow defining the objects’ order in case they
overlap. Overlapping dynamic objects is not desirable.
Alignment buttons - allow aligning objects to each
other. Those buttons work when more than one object is selected.
Lock buttons - used for locking the horizontal or vertical (or both) sizes
of the object.
X and Y numeric fields - stand for X and Y positions of the selected object in the 2D
space.
W and H numeric fields - stand for Width and Height of the selected object.
IMPORTANT: You cannot change the object size during its running on air.
IN and OUT fields – define the effects for objects appearance/disappearance. The
possible choices are Cut (None), Cross Fade, Fly and Wipe. They are active for Text
templates, Still pictures, Rolls and Crawls.
In the fields next to the IN/OUT fields, you can define the speed of
appearance/disappearance.
IMPORTANT: Increasing the figures in these fields will decrease the speed.
Speed field - controls the speed of dynamic objects, such as animations, crawls and
rolls. Its value can be positive (right-to-left movement) or negative (left-to-right
movement). If zero, the object is frozen.
IMPORTANT: The speed can be interactively changed at any moment, even
when the object is running on-air.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
155

II.3. Object Palette
The Object palette contains buttons for all supported graphics objects for insertion in
the project:
Select one or several objects by dragging a rectangle around them.
Create a Still picture object.
Create a Text Template object (with background).
Create a Roll object (vertically running text).
Create a Crawl object (horizontally running text).
Create an Analogue Clock object (with custom background and clock hands).
Create an Animation object (from a sequence of 32-bit TGA files).
Create a Digital Clock object (with custom background and font).
Insert Direct Show Media Source
Insert Banner
Create a Chat note object.
Create a Unicode Digital Clock object – this allows using Chinese, Hindi, and Arabic
characters
II.4. System Bar
The System Bar is situated along the bottom of the Interface window. It contains
buttons for hardware control:

Clear is used for clearing the graphics frame buffer (the whole project).
Play shows all existing objects in the preview/output.
Pause stops all existing objects, but they remain on the preview/output.
Stop hides all existing objects from the preview/output.
Setup invokes a dialog box for hardware setup, which depends on the currently
installed hardware.
II.5. Status Bar
The status bar displays information about the currently selected driver:



TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
156
III. MENU BAR
III.1. File Menu
Contains project’s file related commands:
- New – allows creating a new project.
- Open – opens an existing project (*.tbd).
- Reopen – shows a list of the ten recently open projects.
NOTE: If you reopen a file while working on another project, the latter will be
closed without preserving any unsaved changes.
- Merge – merges the current project with another
- Save – saves the current project to the open file (*.tbd).
- Save as – saves the current project to a specified file (*.tbd).
III.2. Edit Menu
Contains object’s related commands:
- Undo – undoes Move, Size, Create, and Delete.
- Cut – removes the selected object(s) and keeps them in the buffer-memory.
- Copy – saves a copy of the selected object in the buffer-memory.
- Paste – pastes the buffer content into the project.
- Delete – deletes the selected object.
- Select All – selects all objects in the preview area.

III.3. Network Menu
It concerns the connection between AirBox and
TitleBox. This menu item is a feature of the full version
only – it is not available in the light version.
For detailed step-by-step guide how to integrate
TitleBox with AirBox look up in APPENDIX 5 –
Integration of AirBox with TitleBox
- Export Project as Template – exports the currently open project as a template.
It will be saved in the special Template folder. This folder is created automatically
during TitleBox installation.
IMPORTANT: The project must be exported as a template, so that it could be
controlled through AirBox.
- Net control – shows the connection status between AirBox and TitleBox.
IMPORTANT: The Net control function must be started to perform the network
control.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
157
III.4. Object Menu
This menu contains object-related commands:
- Play- shows and runs the selected object on the graphics frame buffer.
- Pause- freezes the object, but it remains displayed on the graphics frame buffer.
- Stop – hides the object from the graphics frame buffer.
- Add to Scheduler – Adds the selected object to the Schedule.
- Remove From Scheduler – Removes the selected object from the Schedule
- Scheduler Properties – Shows the properties of the schedule
- Order – This function is active when there are overlapped objects. You can move the
selected object under or over the others.
- Alignments – This function is active when more than one object is selected. It allows
aligning the objects to each other.
- Objects list – shows a window with a list of all objects available in the current
TitleBox project.
- Property – opens an object properties window.
- Property Tools – opens additional properties windows for objects (text, rolls and
crawls).
The commands from this menu are also displayed in the toolbar (the second uppermost
row).
III.4.1. Creating Objects
STEP BY STEP
All objects are created in a similar way:
1. Select the appropriate object button from the Object Palette.
2. Draw a rectangle in the Preview Area where you wish to place it.
3. A Properties dialog box will appear allowing fine-tuning of non-text objects (Still
picture, Analog clock, Animation, Digital Clock, DirectShow media, and Banner).
4. Pressing OK inserts the created object in the project.
You can edit the properties of text-containing objects either by using the special toolbars
that appear when (double-) clicking the relevant object or the Properties buttons .
For details, see the relevant sections below.
EDITING OBJECTS
You can edit objects by invoking the object properties dialog box (for non-text objects) or
using the special toolbars (for text objects). Do this by double-clicking on the object or by
clicking on the Properties buttons.
Animations and Clocks can not be resized in TitleBox, whereas Pictures and Text
templates with graphics background already can.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
158
Crawls, Rolls and Text Templates without graphics background can be resized
even while on-air. You can resize all dimensions of Text objects, Crawl’s width and text
size, and Roll’s height and text size. However, resizing Crawl’s height and Roll’s width
should be done while the objects are stopped.
DELETING OBJECTS
An object can be deleted by selecting it and clicking the Delete button from the
Main Toolbar. It can also be deleted by using the <Delete> key on your keyboard.
All objects can be deleted by clicking on the New Project button. A dialog box
will appear, asking for confirmation.
III.4.2. Object List
The Object list is intended for fast
switching and reviewing of objects and their
properties, such as Left and Top side
positions, Duration and Delay. Here you
can easily Group/Ungroup objects, change
their Order (z-order) and control their playout
and visibility status.
III.4.3. Object Properties
The Object Properties dialog boxes look different according to the object type. All
buttons have specific pictures and provide hints, when you slide the mouse pointer over
them.
III.4.3.1. Still Picture Properties
The Picture Properties dialog box looks like the
one to the left.
The Toolbar allows you to Open and Save the
image, Load and Invert the mask (the alpha
channel), and Flip the image horizontally and/or
vertically. If your picture does not have an alpha
channel, you can import one separately, by using
the Open mask button .
The Draw Alpha Only button provides a
new, interesting option. Push this button to create a
Picture object over other objects in the project.
Thus, you will overlay its alpha over all underlying
objects. Try to make effects this way!
In the right part of the window, now you can adjust
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
159
the object’s Contrast, Brightness and change its Color Balance. You can choose to Blur
the object and set the blur radius using the slider below.
The Anti-flicker option is designed for smoothing the high-contrast computer graphics
when overlaying it over video. Change the Vertical Value to prevent flickering of the
graphics edges.
III.4.3.2. Roll/Crawl Properties
There are three groups of properties for these objects: common text attributes; continuity
mode and queue options; and dynamic speed properties. The first two are controlled
through object-specific toolbars, while the third one can be set in the specially designated
dialog box.
Continuity and Queue mode.
When a crawl/roll object is selected (single click) the following string appears in the last
row of the toolbar: .
The gear-wheel button opens the Embedded Objects list. This list
refers to pictures/OLE objects, inserted in the Crawl/Roll (see the
common attributes description below). You can set an auto refresh
period using the arrows. Press the clock button in the upper left
corner to activate this function. Thus, if you update the original file
(picture/OLE), it will be refreshed automatically in your TitleBox
project. In addition, clicking the right mouse button on an object in
the list will invoke a context menu containing several useful options:
Update – OLE only;
Size… - you can set custom size to your embedded object;
Full size – display the original size of the object;
Invert Alpha – inverts object’s alpha channel;
Update from file – for picture objects only.
In the following two cells you can define the object’s Speed and number of Loops. If the
value in the Loop field is [0], the object will be displayed endlessly.
The next three buttons refer to the object’s background continuity mode. The
first one means that background will be displayed only while text is running. The second
one will “glue” the texts one after another, without any space in between. The third button
will display the background continuously.
The last two buttons in this toolbar concern the Queuing functionality. After
pressing one of these buttons, Title Box will “remember” all new changes (background
colors, dimension, texts, and text colors) and will play them one after another, i.e. you will
be able to make a queue of changes (loops). If none of them is pressed, TitleBox will show
only the latest change. You can choose how to switch between changes (loops) while in
play mode:
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
160
Use if you want to display the subsequent loops one by one, i.e. to leave some
space between them (empty or with background colour, depending on your settings – see
the previous paragraph). In addition, use if you do not want any space between the
successive loops in the object. TitleBox will generate one loop out of all loops in the
queue.
Text and Background Properties
You can edit the common text attributes (such as font selection, size, color, blur, shadow,
etc.) and background attributes from another object-specific toolbar:

It appears in the last row of the TitleBox toolbar when you double-click a Roll/Crawl
object. Another way to invoke it is by pressing the Property button (in the second row
of the toolbar) while a Crawl/Roll object is selected (single click).
Write the new texts directly in the object!
NOTE: There is no possibility for inserting images as background, but still you can insert
images and OLE objects in the Roll/Crawl objects.
Pressing invokes the Font-formatting
window. Here you can find all the formatting
options, as known from other windows-based
editing applications.
Use the Fill Effect drop-down list to modify
gradient colours for your text:
In the Font Formatting dialog box, click the
Fill Effect button.
Select Gradient colour from the drop-down
list.
In the Gradient properties dialog, fix the
desired settings:

Choose a Style for the gradient from the drop-
down list.
In the square field to the left, drag the cursor
to change the gradient positioning.
In the rectangle below, define the gradient colours and their initial points:
Place the plus-sign cursor in the desired position and click. A black triangle will appear in
that position to mark the currently selected point. All other marks will become white.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
161
Double-click on the black triangle to invoke the Colour setting dialog.
Modify the colour for this colour-change point at your will and click OK.
Back in the Gradient properties dialog, you can change the position of the point by
dragging it. Besides, you can add as many colour-change points in the gradient as you like.
Finally, click OK.
Pressing invokes the Paragraph-formatting dialog box,
where you can set all paragraph-formatting options.
The two buttons to the right concern the background. Press
to view a transparency background during editing in the
preview area.
The following fields in the toolbar provide general text-
formatting options (font, font size, bold, italics, underlined,
text alignment, font color).
The last three buttons are related to inserting object links in
the Roll/Crawl. Push the button to insert a still picture
object link, and the button to insert OLE compatible
objects. Use the drop-down list to fix their position in the
Roll/Crawl object.
Import OLE-compatible
objects using the button. The
standard Windows OLE dialog
box appears after pressing it:
If you choose OCreate
New, the relevant application
opens and you will be able to
create the desired object. Any
changes in the relevant OLE
object will be visible in
TitleBox, when saved (see the
Roll/Crawl Property section
above).
If you choose O Create from File, you
will be prompted to browse for it. You can
create a link, or display it as icon through
checking the relevant box.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
162
Dynamic Speed Properties
Pushing the Property tools button while a Roll/Crawl object is selected will open the
Dynamic properties dialog box:

This property dialog box allows you to specify different speeds of Roll’s and Crawl’s
movement.
The movement is represented graphically and you can define speed for each point of
the graphics. The horizontal axis of the graphics represents the position of the Crawl/Roll
on the screen. The vertical axis represents the speed multiplier (0; 1; 2; etc.) to the default
speed, which is set in the main screen (see Toolbar). The Zero value means 0xdefault
speed, i.e. the object does not move; one means 1xdefault speed, i.e. the object moves with
the default speed; two means 2xdefault speed, i.e. the object moves twice faster than the
default speed, etc.
On the top of the graphics, you can
see the object (Roll/Crawl) text. By
moving the mouse pointer over the grid
(the blue lines) or using the arrow keys,
you can select the position in the text,
where you’d like to change the speed.
The text section which will be shown at the selected “speed change” point is enclosed in a
dark blue frame.
By default, the first point is in the beginning of the graphics. A new point is added by
pressing the Add button or by double-clicking in the yellow-squared area.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
163
When you select a position to change its speed, a green point will appear at the grid
and its properties (speed and position) will be displayed in the Point Properties area to
the right. The position’s coordinates are also displayed in the status bar.
If you set a speed “0” for any position, then you will have to define a delay period.
This is the period (in seconds) during which the object will remain stopped. The wait-time
appears in a red square under the zero-point.
All points are shown in the Point list to the right of the graphics. Their names are
[Point #], where the # stands for the sequenced number of the point.
Align buttons allow aligning the selected point toward the previous,
the next or the first point in the graphics.
The Default speed field shows the default speed, as it was defined in the main
TitleBox window (see Toolbar).
In the Point Properties area are shown the properties of the selected point: speed,
position and time (for zero-speed points only).
Point list - shows the list of all “speed change” points in the object.
Add button – adds a new “speed change” point in the object’s graphics.
Delete button – deletes the selected “speed change” point in the object’s
graphics.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
164
III.4.3.3. Text Template Properties
The Text Template objects, similar to rolls and crawls, have three groups of settings
options:
Embedded objects and picture background
If you click once in a text object, the following object-specific toolbar appears in the last
line of TitleBox’ toolbar: .
The first button opens the Embedded Objects list. This list refers to
pictures/OLE objects, inserted in the text object (see the Property
description below). You can set an auto refresh period using the
arrows. Press the clock button in the upper left corner to activate this
function. Thus, if you update the original file (picture/OLE), it will
be refreshed automatically in your TitleBox project. In addition,
clicking the right mouse button on an object in the list will invoke a
context menu containing several useful options:
Update – OLE only;
Size… - you can set custom size to your embedded object;
Full size – display the original size of the object;
Invert Alpha – inverts object’s alpha channel;
Update from file – for picture objects only.
If you want to open an image as a background, push the Open image button . Use
the drop-down list to the right to fix its layout in the object (Normal, Stretch, Tile or
Center).
Delete the background image by pushing the button.
Text and Background Properties
You can edit the common text attributes (such as font selection, size, color, blur, shadow,
etc.) and background attributes from another object-specific toolbar:
It appears in the last row of the TitleBox toolbar when you double-click a Text template
object. Another way to invoke it is by pressing the Property button (in the second row
of the toolbar) while a Text object is selected (single click).
Write the new texts directly in the object!
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
165
Pressing invokes the Font-formatting
window. Here you can find all the formatting
options, as known from other windows-based
editing applications.
Pressing invokes
the Paragraph-
formatting dialog
box, where you can
set all paragraph-
formatting options.
The two buttons to
the right concern the
background. Press
to view a
transparency
background during editing in the preview area.
The following fields in the toolbar provide general text-
formatting options (font, font size, bold, italics, underlined,
text alignment, font color).
The last three buttons are related to inserting object links in the Text. Push the button
to insert a still picture object link, and the button to insert OLE compatible objects.
Use the drop-down list to fix their position in the Text object.
Import OLE-compatible objects using the button. The standard Windows OLE dialog
box appears after pressing it.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
166
If you choose OCreate New, the relevant
application opens and you will be able to
create the desired object. Any changes in
the relevant OLE object will be visible in
TitleBox, when saved (see the Text
Property section above).
If you choose O Create from File, you
will be prompted to browse for it. You can
create a link, or display it as icon through
checking the relevant box.
Text Template Property Tools
The property dialog box for text objects
allows displaying different texts
consequently, for specified periods in
seconds. The different texts are shown as a
list of texts (separate lines) in the Text
Template window – press the button
to view it.
You can prepare texts in advance or create them online.
New button – opens a new text template.
Open button – You can open a previously prepared text file, using the open button .
Each paragraph in the text appears as a separate line in the Text Template window.
Save button – saves the entered text as a file.
Play button – starts displaying the text lines in the preview/output window.
Stop button - stops displaying the text lines in the preview/output window.
Time field – defines the frequency of changing the text lines.
Edit item button – opens a dialog box for editing the selected text line.
You can change the text by double-clicking on a text string as well.
Add item button – adds a text line. A dialog box opens for typing the text in.
Insert item button – inserts a text line. A dialog box opens for typing the text.
Delete item button – deletes the selected text line.
Moving up – moves the selected text line up.
Moving down - moves the selected text line down.
EAuto refresh box – automatically displays the changes made in the currently loaded text
file, even during its play-out.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
167
III.4.3.4. Analog Clock Properties
The Analog Clock
properties dialog box looks
like the one to the right.
New button – opens an
empty clock property object.
Open button – loads a
previously created clock object
(*.clc).
Save button – saves the
current clock image into a file
(*.clc).

There are different pages
for each clock layer –
background (clock plate), hour, minute and second hands, as well as a preview page of the
overall clock layout.
All pages have identical structure: a settings area and a preview area.
Settings:
- Load Image – loads the relevant image (for the background, hour, minute or
second hands).
- E/E Enable – enables/prohibits displaying the relevant element.
- E/E Key Color – key color for the image. If the image does not have a mask,
you can select the key color.
- E Lock position – locks the X/Y position of the image.
- Transparency – set the image transparency
Preview area – It is used for previewing the relevant clock element.
(!) TIP: To achieve most satisfactory result, use a picture-editing application to create four
square images with equal dimensions. Save them in separate files – one per each element
of the clock (background, hour hand, minute hand, and second hand). Be sure to place the
hands’ ends on the exact centres of the relevant images. Bear in mind that the clock object
will be the same size as the image in the file. It cannot be resized!
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
168
III.4.3.5. Animation Properties
The Animation Property dialog box looks like this:

- New button - allows creating a new sequence.
- Open button - loads a file (*.seq) or a sequence of files (*.jpg; *.jpeg; *.tga;
*.bmp) for an animated logo:

TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
169
Besides, you can load animated *.gif files. If you use the Add button, TitleBox will load
only the first picture of the file. If you use the Open button, TitleBox will load the entire
range of *.gif images.
NOTE: We do not recommend using *.gif sequences for high quality applications,
because they have only 256 indexed colours and do not have 8-bit transparency (just one
colour can be either entirely transparent or entirely solid).
If you want to load only à part of the files, enter the numbers of the first and of the
last file of the sequence in the Load from and Load to fields respectively. Use the blue
arrows to the right to enter the number of the currently selected file in the relevant field. If
you are loading an interlaced animation, specify the first field – A or B.
Click Open. The sequence is displayed in the animation property window. The
currently selected file from the sequence is shown in the preview area to the right.
- Export button - saves the current sequence as a file (*.seq).
- Add button - adds a new file to the sequence.
- Delete button - deletes a selected file from the sequence.
- Insert button - inserts a file into the sequence.
- Invert alpha button - inverts the alpha channel of the selected file.
- Move Up/Down buttons – moves the selected file up/down the list.
- Reverse button - reverses the files’ order
- View buttons are used for changing the sequence files’ view – list or
thumbnail mode.
If the animation files do not have an alpha channel, you can select a key color by using the
Key color tool:
Underneath the key-color setting kit are situated the Range- and
Loop-related boxes. Select the Range of frames that will be used
in the sequence – enter the values you wish in the From and To
fields. The names of the frames that are out of this range will
become red, and their background – gray. The background of the working range will
remain white. If you want to loop between two frames in this working range fill-in the
Start and End fields, and the number of loops. The frames included in the loop will be
highlighted in pale yellow. A blue arrow to the right of them will mark the final and the
initial frame of the loop.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
170
After adding your animation to the preview area, an additional toolbar appears active.
To see it, click on the animation object:

Select the desired Speed and how many times you want to Loop the animation.
This taskbar duplicates the range and loop setting in the Properties dialog box. You can
change those here as well: choose a Range of animation frames to be displayed or
activate/deactivate the Loop option (it enables leader-loop-trailer functionality). CheckE
it and select the range of frames within which you want to loop. If this option is selected,
animation will start from the beginning, run to the End frame and loop between Start and
End frames. If you want the animation to run as regular again, just uncheck E the Loop
option.
NOTE: The From and Start fields represent the first frame that will be shown, and the To
and End fields represent the first frame that will NOT be shown. Thus, the difference
between the To and From (and between the End and Start) values will equal the number
of frames that will be shown in your sequence. These numbers will be displayed in the
status bar of the sequence properties dialog box: [Count] stands for the total number of
frames in the list; [Used] stands for the number of frames in the working Range; and
[Loop] stands for the number of frames that will be looped.
III.4.3.6. Digital Clock Properties
The Digital Clock Properties dialog box looks like this:


It appears after you have drawn the rectangle to create this object, or when you press
the Property button while the object is selected, or at double-clicking the object.
In it, you can define common text attributes (such as font, size, color, blur, shadow,
etc.) and background attributes. After you have made your choice, press OK and the
Digital clock will be created (or updated) automatically.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
171
After creating your Digital clock more options will become available via an
additional toolbar, which appears beneath the standard ones. If you do not see it, just click
on the Digital clock object and it will appear:

You can select two modes for the Digital clock – to run as a clock or as a counter.
While in clock mode, it runs as an ordinary digital clock. You can choose the time
format through the 12/24 hours clock button . The twelve-hour time format is
active when the button is pressed, and the twenty-four hours format – when it is not
pressed.
The background color is changeable through the button.
Select a mask for the clock in the box. Update the mask
using the green arrows button. If you have changed the mask, you will have to press this
button to update it.
In the counter mode, some additional options are available – select the type of your
counter – Countdown or Regular through the button. If pushed, the counter will
count from an Initial time to a Stop time, if Stop checked. If not pushed, counter will
count up. After selecting the counter type, the Initial and Stop times and a Mask, you are
ready to run your counter. Run your project and show your object using the well-known
Play button. Then Prepare your counter and Start it.
After pressing the Prepare button your counter sets to Initial time and waits for a
Start command. Stop the counter with the button. Pushing the Intermediate
button will “freeze” the counter. During freeze, the counter is running in the background,
but you see a still frame displaying the time when the Intermediate button was pressed.
When you push the Intermediate button once more, the counter starts showing current
time again.
There are two common buttons for the clock and counter modes – Properties
and Visible . Pressing Properties invokes the Digital Clock Properties dialog
box. Visible determines if the clock/counter will be visible on the monitor or not. It does
not stop the clock/counter, but just hides/shows it.

TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
172
III.4.3.7. Direct Show Media Properties
TitleBox allows inserting all kinds of media supported in the Direct Show standard:
File shows any files that are supported by the
Direct Show standard. Use the Load button to
browse for them.
Capture Device displays video streams from
any capture device compatible with the direct show
standard. Select the capture device from the drop-
down list.
Virtual Channel is a DMT standard that helps
external programs (as AirBox, Graph Edit, or any
Direct Show-compatible player) to transfer video
information, which to be inserted in the object.
You can crop the image Width and Height using
the relevant spin boxes under the preview window.
When a direct show object is selected in the TitleBox
preview area, an object-specific toolbar appears under
the standard ones:

Check E Alpha to use the video’s alpha channel. Adjust it using the percentage spin box
to the right.
In this toolbar, there are two drop-down lists: one to select the display Mode (Stretch or
Center), and another one for the scaling quality. In it, you can select the picture re-scaling
algorithm. The faster the mode, the lower CPU usage.
Enter the loop number to repeat the video as much times, as you want. Loop = [0] means
that the video will be repeated incessantly; Loop = [1] means that the video will be played
once and so on.
Any loop number different from zero represents how many times will the object be looped.
When in [Center] mode, you can EUse Alpha matte to fill-in the space between the
edges of the video and the object’s borders. Select its Color from the palette to the left of
the Use Alpha check box.
The last two spin boxes control the image offset in relation to the object’s centre. Use them
to move the video vertically or horizontally within the object boundaries.

TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
173
III.4.3.8. Banner Properties
Pushing the Insert Banner button invokes a dialog box for you to create a list of
picture files. They will be displayed as a slide show in this object:

Use the well-know buttons to add, insert and delete pictures from the list; invert their alpha
and move them up and down, and reverse their order.
When you select a picture from the gallery to the right, it is displayed in the preview
window to the left. The buttons above it are relevant to the currently selected picture. By
pushing the button, you can choose a background colour for it. Specify how long it
will be displayed and the transition pattern and duration, as well as the picture’s layout (in
the drop-down list in the upper right corner).
If you would like to set the same parameters for all pictures included in
the banner, just press the Set As Default button . Thus, the
settings you have already made will affect all other pictures in this
object.
For your convenience, there is a new feature in the banner properties – the Watch
Directory option. When you check this option, a browser opens automatically for you to
specify a folder that contains picture files. Opening it will activate a kind of slide show in
the banner and there will be no need to insert each picture from this folder manually.

TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
174
III.4.3.9. Chat note objects
The last object is the object palette is the Chat note object . It can be considered as
a Text template object, but when you enter a text in it, text is always shown as a new line
coming from the bottom and the old text is rolling to the top. This kind of objects is
suitable for use together with some SMS applications. You can also insert a file link
(Project¬Plugins¬File Link) to a text and/or a picture file. The chat note will be
updated at each save of the relevant file. The object’s properties are controlled as those of
the other objects (See the Text template properties section).
When you click this object once, an additional object-specific toolbar appears
underneath the standard ones. Specify the desired speed for changing the text lines in the
chat note:
III.4.4. Scheduler
The Schedule mode allows creating a schedule for playing the objects.
To add an object to the Schedule, press the Add to Schedule button from the
TitleBox’ Toolbar. A Schedule window will appear. It consists of Schedule commands,
Object’s settings and Object list.


TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
175
III.4.4.1. Scheduler Commands
Activate – press it to activate the schedule for the current project.
Log File – press it, if you want to create a log file. A browse window will open for
defining a log file.
Default – sets the default settings. You can create your own default settings as well.
Del – deletes a selected object from the Object’s list.
Clone – “clones” the settings of the selected object. A new line for the same object will
appear in the Object’s list. Then you can modify its settings. This feature is useful, when
you want to define a different behavior of the object in the different days or hours, for
example.
Reset – resets the Schedule.
III.4.4.2. Object’s Settings
Here are the available settings for scheduling of objects.
You should select an object from the list below to make the settings for it.
- Date – defines the Start and/or Stop date. By default, the Start day is today. The Stop
date is not mandatory.
- Start by – defines the starting trigger. It could be a specific time, an event (for example
GPI) or CMD.
- Duration – defines the duration of the object appearance through:
Loop – the number of loops. This field is active only for dynamic objects.
Stop Time – the stop time within the relevant day.
Duration – duration within the relevant day.
Loop Until – a stop event (GPI for example).
- Type - defines the frequency of the object appearing – only once, every day, every
week, every month or in a more sophisticated pattern (Advanced).
- Cycling – defines the period of repeating the object appearance in minutes.
It is possible to define the end time of the object appearance within the day
(Until).
- Advanced – to get access to these settings, you have to check the Advanced box in
the Type field. Here you can define a specific day of the week or a date for
showing the object.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
176
III.4.4.3. Objects List
The Schedule Objects list occupies the lower part of the Scheduler window. All the
scheduled objects and their settings are displayed in it.
In front of each object in the list, there is a check box. It is used for Eactivating/E
deactivating the particular object in the schedule.
A right-mouse click in the Objects list opens a context menu for copying and pasting
the object’s settings.
An Example:
If you want to:
- Start object1 (picture1) at 10 o’clock on November, 18th and put it on schedule till
December, 31st;
- Display it for 15 minutes every hour;
- Display the object on Tuesdays and Saturdays (i.e. an advanced displaying),
The schedule settings for this object will look like this:




TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
177

III.5. Project Menu
This menu contains project-related commands. Some of them (Play, Pause, Stop, Clear)
are also operated through buttons, situated along the bottom of the window.
- Play – shows (plays) all existing objects.
- Pause – stops all existing objects
- Stop – hides all existing objects.
- Clear Buffer – clears the graphics frame buffer.
- Scheduler – Displays the schedule window.
- Mix Objects – Blends two or more overlapping objects.
- Driver Select – opens the list of available hardware drivers, from which you can
select the one to work with. If you have no devices installed, the list will contain [Simple
Preview Output Driver], which is used for previewing the TitleBox project in the
AirBox preview window. Graphics is fed to AirBox through the Mapped Memory
Driver. The assigned module in AirBox must support “Use Graphic layer” option
(AirBox¬Options=Playback¬Assigned modules).
- Driver Setup – invokes a dialog box for hardware setup, which depends on the
currently installed hardware.
- Plugins – shows the available plugins.
× File link - Creates an object containing information from an external file
and observes the changes in real time. The file content could be an image or a text.
× Active Event - This function keeps you informed any time whether a
TitleBox object is being played or not. If there is an object that is being played, the a
high pulse is sent to the COM port. When there are no objects played, the pulses are
low. Thus, the computer “knows” when an object is being played. In this menu item,
you can select the desired COM port or [None] if you do not want any pulses at all.
- Options – invokes the Project Options window. It contains three pages –
General options, Network options and Output options.
III.5.1. General Options:

These options allow defining the colors, the safe
area and grid usage for the Preview area:
- Workspace – set a color for the entire
workspace.
- Back Color – set a color for the working
background.
- Back image – you can select an image for
background as well.
- Work Area – set the color for frame line of the
work area.
TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL
178
- Safe Frame –the size of the safe area in
percentage.
- Safe frame color – color for safe area frame
line.
- View Grid/ Grid color – check the box for
setting the grid view and select the grid color.
The grid is very useful when you size up the
objects.
- Snap to Grid – the size of a grid element.
III.5.2. Network Options
These options are used for interaction between
TitleBox and AirBox.
- TitleBox Channel ID – TitleBox’s channel
ID; it corresponds to AirBox¬ Options¬Modules = Remote control
[TitleBox Net Control] ¬Configure [Channels].
- Port – select a network port.
III.5.3. Output Options
Here you can set the aspect ratio of the output. The
default setting is [Square pixel]
IMPORTANT: To use TitleBox Net Control
output event in AirBox, you have to start your TitleBox
with Net Control function (TitleBox-> Network -
> Net Control), where available.
To control a project (its objects) from AirBox, you
have to create that project in TitleBox first and export it
as a template in the Template folder (TitleBox ->
Network -> Export project as template). The
Template folder is created automatically during TitleBox installation. If the AirBox
module is installed on another computer or you need to change the folder’s location, then
after installing AirBox, you have to start the TitleBox Net Control Setup
(Start\Programs\Digital Media Technologies Ltd.\TitleBox Net Control Setup). For
example if you have AirBox and TitleBox installations on different workstations, you need
to run TitleBox Net Control Setup on both and select the same folder.



__________________________

179
CLIP TRIMMER
__________________________
The Clip Trimmer is used for previewing and trimming clips in ListBox, DataBox
and AirBox modules. You can preview clips even during the on-air playback in AirBox.
The Trimmer uses software decoding of MPEG2 files, so you do not need any
specialized hardware equipment to use it.
NOTE: Trimming is GOP accurate! IN points can be positioned only on I-frames, while
OUT points can be positioned on I- or P-frames. Depending on the stream’s GOP size, this
may lead to a slight inaccuracy, limited to half a GOP for the IN points and 1-3 frames for
the OUT points. If the stream’s GOP size is one (I-frames only, 4:2:2 P@ML), then
trimming will be frame accurate.

I. USER INTERFACE
It combines a VGA preview screen
and tools for editing the In and
Out points of MPEG clips.
Clips are loaded into the Trim
Window by double-clicking on
them in ListBox, DataBox or
AirBox modules.
The trimmer window has a
number of keyboard shortcuts that
are listed in the shortcuts leaflet in
the PlayBox customer’s package.
I.1. Preview Screen
The Preview screen occupies the largest part of the Trim Window. It
shows the video clip which is being trimmed.
Pressing the right mouse button on the Preview screen, invokes a
context menu with the most frequently used commands in Trimmer
(See the screenshot to the left).
CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL

180
I.2. Trimmer Control
Once a clip is loaded, you can navigate and edit it, using the Clip Trimmer controls.


The following Boxes are situated under the preview window:
- In box – displays the In point timecode
- Out box – displays the Out point timecode
- Duration box – displays the clip duration. It is equal to the difference between In
and Out points.
After entering the In and Out timecodes, the Duration value will be calculated
automatically. Moreover, after entering the In and Duration values, the Out point
timecode will be calculated automatically. It is possible to lock the In, Out or
Duration value (but not all the three of them, of course) by clicking on the lock
icon to the right of the box. Thus, you can protect their values from changing (by
mistake, for example).
To enter values in the In, Out or Duration box, you can use the arrows beside
them or type numbers in the boxes.
- Position box contains the timecode of the currently selected point in the clip. If you
type another timecode in this box and press <Enter>, the marker will move to the
relevant position.
- Total Duration box – displays the original, untrimmed duration of the clip.
- Details box – it shows the part of the clip, enclosed in the zoom frame.
The Trim bar visualizes the clip length and the clip markers.
The Zoom frame is a yellow square in the trim bar. It defines what part of the
clip is being shown in the Detail View. It is quite useful for long clips. You can move or
resize the zoom frame, by mouse dragging. You can define a new Zoom area by drawing a
rectangle through dragging the mouse while holding its right button.
CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL

181
· SPLIT button - splits the clip and thus defines separate sections in the clip. After
splitting the clip, each new clip section appears as a separate row in the play list. You
can play them separately, change their order, insert other clips between them, etc.
You can define In/Out points for each section of the split clip. The In, Out and
Duration boxes display information about the selected section. Multiple In/Out
definitions are used for skipping some parts of the clip during its playback. Thus, you
can exclude existing commercials, titles, etc. from the original clip.
You can create separate sections also by pressing repeatedly the In/Out buttons.
Pressing the In button after an existing Out point, creates a new section after the
existing one. Pressing the Out button before an existing In point, creates a new section
before the existing one.
· IN button – marks the In point for start of playback in AirBox. The IN point marker
is colored green and by default it is at the beginning of the clip.
· OUT button – marks the Out point for end of playback in AirBox. The OUT point
marker is colored red and by default it is at the end of the clip.
You can set an In/Out point, by dragging the IN/OUT marker on the trim bar or by
entering timecode directly into the IN/OUT box.
The IN/OUT markers show the frame before/after (i.e. if the marker is on the Out point,
you actually see the next frame, but not the last frame of the trimmed part.).
· Play button starts playing the clip. Then it transforms to pause/resume.
If you want to play only the trimmed part (i.e. between the IN and OUT points), press
<Shift> + Play.
· Stop button stops the playback and “rewinds” the clip to its beginning.
· Pause /Resume button. It stops and resumes the clip playback from the
same timecode position.
· Button - skips one frame forward
· Button - reverts to one frame backward
· Button - fast forward (if it is possible)
· Button - rewind (if possible)
· Button - moves to the next mark point (in/out/bookmark)
· Button - moves to the previous mark point (in/out/bookmark)
CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL

182
· Add Zone button - marks the beginning of a zone. A yellow point appears in the
trim bar.
· Delete Zone button - deletes the selected zone point.
· Open button will load a clip in the Trimmer window.
· Export button - opens a dialog box for exporting the
trimmed clip as a file.
If you have divided the clip into several sections, they will
appear in the Export list as different parts. Select which of them
to export by checking the checkboxes in front the relevant
section. Besides, you can change their order using the up and
down arrows.
If you choose to export several parts at a time, you have to
specify the way they should be exported: as separate files
(Export selection(s) as multiple files) or as a single file
(Export selections as a single file).
Pressing the Export button in this dialog opens another dialog
box for you to specify the file name and store location and to
begin the export.
To delete a clip section, select it and press <Ctrl>+<D>.
To reset the original clip length, press <Ctrl>+<BkSp>.
The Throttle has three levels – Low, Normal and High. Each of them “tells” the CPU
what priority to give to the export process.
The higher the priority, the slower the other simultaneously running processes on the
machine, and the quicker the export made.

I.3. Volume Control
You can change the audio volume and audio balance of the clip, using the relevant
sliders in the Clip Trimmer. The new values will not take effect in AirBox playback. These
sliders are used for convenience during the trimming process.
- Volume box – shows the volume level of the clip
playback. There is a reset button beside the slider to restore the
default value.
- Balance box – shows the clip playback L-R balance. There is a reset button
beside the slider to restore the default value.

CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL

183
I.4. Status Bar
It is located along the lowest part of Trimmer window.

- The first field [Position] – shows the current timecode, when dragging over the
trim bar.
- The second field [Zoom Frame] – shows the scale of the Zoom zone.
- The third field [Version] – displays the current Trimmer version.
- The last field shows the clip’s filename and location.
II. TRIMMER PAGES
There are six pages on the right side of the Trimmer Window: Info, Zones, Shots,
Filters, Stream and Extra.

II.1. Video Clip Info
This page shows important system stream information,
extracted from the file. It contains:
- Filename
- Video compression type
- Video stream information: number of streams; image width
and height in pixels; video frame rate; video bitrate.
- Audio stream information: number of streams; audio
compression type; audio sampling rate; audio channels; audio
bitrate.
- Type of MPEG packages
- Type of PES (packetized elementary stream)
- Mux rate (the multiplexing rate in bps)
- Duration of the clip in HH:MM:SS.ms (hours:minutes:seconds.miliseconds)

CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL

184
II.2. Clip Zones
This page is used for registering a set of timecodes (points) in
the clip. Thus, you can mark an initial or final timecode of an
important zone in the clip. For example, in each movie there are
predefined commercial break points that might be used later for
automated commercial slot insertion. Those breakpoints can be
defined in Clip Trimmer as single split points or zones (blank/stills)
that will be skipped, and a commercial slot will be inserted instead.
To add a Zone, set the cursor at the appropriate point and
press the Add Zone button in the page or in the main
window. A yellow point appears in the trim bar, showing the
beginning of the zone. You can define different zone types,
pressing the black arrow of the Add Zone button. It opens a button menu:
- Bookmark – creates a single split point at the current playhead position. You can
change the Zone name (Bookmark by default) and timecode manually.
- Simple skip zone – creates a two-point zone. The first point is the current
playhead position; and the second is 5 seconds later, by default. You can change the Zone
name and timecodes manually.
- Advanced skip zone – creates a four-point zone. The first point is set at the
current playhead position. By default the second point is 1 second later, the third point is 5
seconds later and the fourth point is 6 seconds later. You can change the Zone name
(Advanced Zone by default) and timecodes manually.
To add a next marker in the Zone, press the Add Zone marker button. It will
add a marker 10 seconds after the last marker in that zone, by default.
To delete a marker from the Zone, select it and press the Delete Zone marker
button. It will delete all markers, except the first one, which can be deleted only by
deleting the whole zone.
To delete a Zone, select it and press the Delete Zone button from the page or
from the main window.
By pressing the Clock buttons, you can choose a display mode of the markers:
- Time – shows exact timecodes in HH:MM:SS:FF format
- Offset value – shows the interval between the current marker and the first
one.
- Duration – shows the time difference between two consecutive zone
markers.

CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL

185
II.3. Clip Shots
Use this page to extract shots from the video clip.
To create a shot, stop the playhead at the desired frame and
press the Add button. The shot, as a thumbnail and its time-
code are displayed in the tab. You can change the shot’s name
(Scene No., by default) manually.
To delete a shot, select it and press the Delete button.
To extract a shot to a file, select it and press the Export
button. A browse window appears to select the file name, type
(*.jpg or *.bmp) and location.
To set a shot as thumbnail of a file, press the Thumbnail
button.
II.4. Clip Streams
This feature is applicable in case the file contains more than
one video and/or audio stream. Here you can choose which of them
to view/listen during playback.
The check boxes E in front the relevant streams show their
playback status. The checked streams will be loaded in the playlist
after clicking and will be played in their turn.
The green ticks serve for previewing the desired streams
– if you click on the single tick, you will preview only the selected
stream. If you click on the double tick, you will preview all the
streams simultaneously. If you preview several audio streams, they
will be mixed-up. If the streams are video, the preview window
will split according to the number of streams (up to 32).
Use the blue arrows to move streams up and down the list.
CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL

186
II.5. Extra
This “extra” will
help you in managing
multiple monitor video
wall systems of up to 16
monitors. The files that
are usually used for
video walls end in
*.c#.mpg or *.c#.avi (for
example *.c1.mpg or
*c3.avi). Just load the
first file in the playlist.
AirBox will detect the
others automatically.
The trim bar and the
buttons above the list of
files are designed for
control of the entire
bunch. The trim bar and
the buttons under the preview window are used for control of the currently selected
monitor (the one in the red dotted-line frame).
This feature will help you in synchronizing the video wall and will allow you to
control each monitor separately. You can also rearrange the display positions of files by
drag-and-dropping the relevant squares in the preview window (i.e. file #1 can be
displayed on monitor#3, etc.) or by using the blue arrows above the file list. The files in the
preview window are arranged horizontally, in up to 4 rows of up to 4 files each. This
means that if there are 16 files in the bunch (the most possible), the first row will contain
files #1 to #4, the second one will contain files #5 to 8#, etc.
The ECreate TC file check box is situated at the bottom of the file list. If you check
this box, a TC file will be created automatically, saving you settings, such as In and Out
points, file order, etc. Thus you will be able to use your settings again the next time you
open the relevant file.
CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL

187
II.6. Clip Filters
This tab provides information about the filters that participate in playing the current
clip and an opportunity for changing the filters’ settings.
The Windows Registry contains a key
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Digital Media Technologies
Ltd.\PlayBox\2.0\DXPresets] in which you could create your own
string values, containing groups of preferred filters (presets). All
filters of the currently selected preset are displayed in Filters page.
There is a legend at the bottom of the page:
The sign marks all filters from the preset.
The sign marks filters that are included in the preset, but do
not participate in executing the current particular file.
There is a Property button right under the tab name.
Pushing it will open the property page (if any) of the selected filter.
You could change the filter’s setting there.

__________________________

188
SAFEBOX
__________________________
SafeBox is another module from the PlayBox suite, which serves as utility for file
management. SafeBox takes care of moving, copying or deleting your files, automatically
or manually. This is done following a number of pre-definable locations, priorities and
rules. The user interface is quite simple: it is divided into two major parts – your Source
and Destination locations:

Typically, the Destination is the location, from which AirBox is playing clips, but
SafeBox can be used for copying all kinds of content you have – not only clips and
playlists. The Destination location can be either on the local storage (from the point of
view of AirBox, for example) or somewhere on the network, but a local one is advisable.
In short, these are permanently accessible storage destinations.
SAFEBOX: USER’S MANUAL

189
The Source locations are locations, where your files are stored or where files appear if you
use some kind of removable storage or network connection. In short, these are temporary
accessible locations. You can add to the list as many Source locations as you wish. This is
done by simple browsing after pressing the Add button to the far left.
You can give priorities for each Source location. This is done by right-clicking on the
relevant location and selecting the desired Priority.
NOTE: Priorities are valid only in Automatic mode! The highest priority is [10].
Along the upper part of the main window are situated the control buttons. The first pair of
plus and minus signs is used for adding/deleting Source locations. The second pair
is designed for the Destination locations.
Further on are situated the transfer control buttons. They provide hints at pointing at them.
A -sign in front of a given Source location means that it is currently accessible.
A × sign in front of a Source location means that it is currently inaccessible. When a
source location is being transferred, a symbol representing the currently executed action
appears in front of it. A colored bar in its line displays the progress of transfer.
Along the lower mid-window is situated a colored bar that represents the distribution of the
storage (Destination location) space. The blue section stands for Used space; the yellow
one – the space needed for transfer of the selected offline content; and the green one
represents the free space, which will remain after the transfer.
SafeBox could perform all necessary actions manually or
automatically. Set this in the Options menu after pressing the
Options button . The supported General options are self-
explanatory; in automatic mode, simultaneous jobs are
performed only for locations with equal priorities.
ERemove read-only flag will allow you to edit the
content after its ingestion. If this box is not checked, the
ingested content will not be editable; you will not be able to
delete it, either.
EPerform checksum verification will check for
identical files in the destination location and will not transfer
them from the source location. Thus, you can avoid saving the
same files several times.
EDo not copy incomplete files will not transfer files in which another
program/user is currently writing.
EBuild source directory tree in destination. When ingesting content that
contains folders and subfolders, SafeBox could proceed in two ways: preserve the tree-
structure of the source location (if checked); or save all files from the source in a single
folder (if not checked).
SAFEBOX: USER’S MANUAL

190
EPlayList mode. In this mode, SafeBox will search the Source
directory only for playlist files (.ply) and will copy/move them to the
Destination directory. Besides, it will search for, and copy/move all the
files contained in the playlist following their file paths. After copying/moving the files to
the Destination folder, SafeBox will change their file paths in the playlist to match the
Destination location, so that there is no need to change them manually.
NOTE: The playlist(s) and their related files will be copied/moved to the same
Destination directory.
In the Max simultaneous jobs field you can set the number of transfers to be
performed at a time.
NOTE: The higher this number is the slower transfer (for a separate file) will proceed.
Check the ESpeed limit box if you wish to change the process duration. Below, you
can either use the spin-boxes to set the transfer rate, or type it directly in the relevant field.
The values in the Mbps filed will be converted into KB/s automatically and vice-versa.
NOTE: The higher you set the transfer rate values, the higher
CPU usage will occur.
In the Removal options tab, you can specify the way SafeBox
maintains file removal in the Destination directories. These
options can be turned Off if not needed. If Approval
needed is selected, you will have to go to the Removal list
and delete the files you want from there. In the following field,
you can set the expiry criteria for content removal.
If you check the EDelete files older than…box, all files will
be deleted when the period you have specified is over. If you
check the box underneath as well, only the files larger than the
specified size will be deleted.
You could also manage files according to the free disc space
on your computer:
EMaintain at least […] MB free space will delete any files, regardless their type, in
order to achieve the required space.
EDo not delete files, used in non-expired playlist will check if the non-expired *.ply
files contain paths of files that are to be deleted according to the previous settings. If this
box is checked, such files will not be deleted.
Now you can move all expired files to a specified folder. Just check E
Move expired files to and browse for the folder’s location or enter its
path in the string below.
The last check box concerns the management of playlist files (*.ply) that fit the expiration
criteria. If E Delete expired playlist files is checked, all playlist files in the Destination
directory that fit the expiration criteria will be deleted without notification. If not checked,
the playlist files will not be deleted even if they have expired according to the criteria set
above.
SafeBox allows multiple assignments, i.e. you can transmit a given source content to more
than one destination location: select a Source location (it will be marked in dotted-line
SAFEBOX: USER’S MANUAL

191
frame) then select the desired online location in the list to the right. Press the
Assign/Decline button. The assigned destination line will become green. You can
view the assigned destination(s) of a source location by selecting its row. All destinations
will go green. You can decline a destination location by pressing the Assign/Decline
button once again.
Now you can already export OML files from SafeBox. Thus, you will be
able to export information about the media stored on selected directories
into a file (OML file). Push the Export media list button and
then specify the directories you would like to scan:
Use the PLUS sign button to add directories to the list,
and the MINUS if you want to remove the currently
selected directory from it.
Enter the name of the file to which information will be
exported or browse for it.
Push the Gear button to check the selected directories and export the information to the
specified file.
If you wish to delete the transfer log, push the Delete Log button situated to the far
right.
Beneath the Destination locations list you can view detailed information about the
currently selected entry. Its path is displayed in the Current location string and below are
listed all sub-directories contained in it.
There are three buttons to the right of the Current location string. To browse for a new
destination location, use the first one. Push the second one to go one level up the current
directory. The third button will erase all the content from the selected Destination
location.






__________________________

192
APPENDIX 1 - AIRBOX GPI
(GENERAL PURPOSE INTERFACE)

GPI in AirBox
GPI (General Purpose Interface) is implemented in AirBox as a set of triggers,
associated to certain pins on the standard PC RS-232 Serial Ports (COM1, COM2, etc.). In
order to function, the COM port should be correctly installed in the Windows environment
(See Device Manager -> Ports).
GPI-IN can be used to slave AirBox to 4 triggers from external devices or simple
contact switches.
GPI-OUT can be used to slave external equipment to events taking place in AirBox,
2 triggers per port.
GPI Pinout
Each COM port accommodates 4 GPI-IN pairs and 2 GPI-OUT pairs, but not at the
same time. A particular COM port can be assigned as either IN, OUT or Unused.
GPI-IN pairs are located at output pins DTR&RTS and input pins DSR, CTS, RI, CD.
You can use any of the output pins for supplying voltage to the GPI circuit.
GPI-OUT pairs are located at output pins DTR&RTS, the first GPI trigger generates a
pulse on DTR, and the second GPI trigger generates a pulse on RTS.
GPI-IN Implementation
The simplest triggering device would be a pair of wires running from the COM port
GPI pair, soldered to a momentary contact switch. This switch can be either Push Button
Normally Open (PBNO) or Push Button Normally Closed (PBNC). The trigger type is
configured in AirBox GPI Settings Panel as High or Low pulse. Many external devices
like switchers or mixers have dedicated GPI connectors or screw terminals with a
description of what GPI trigger type (low or high pulse) was implemented. Depending on
the trigger setup, a trigger can be a temporary closing or opening of the GPI circuit. High
pulse means the GPI trigger is activated when the circuit is temporary closed. Low pulse
means the GPI trigger is activated when the circuit is temporary opened.
According to the number of installed COM ports, AirBox supports up to 32 GPI-IN
triggers (up to 8 COM ports with 4 GPI-IN triggers per port).
GPI-OUT Implementation
In order to control external devices by GPI, a simple 12V contact relay should be
used. It should be connected to the corresponding COM port pin pair (4-6 or 7-8) and it
should close or open the GPI circuit of the external device. Depending on the AirBox
setup, the GPI trigger will generate a pulse (low or high, user-defined) to the
corresponding output pin for a short user-defined period (pulse duration).

193
According to the number of installed COM ports, AirBox supports up to 16 GPI-
OUT triggers (up to 8 COM ports with 2 GPI-OUT triggers per port).
AirBox as a GPI Slave
A wide variety of AirBox actions can be associated to a GPI trigger:
o Start playback
o Pause/Resume playback
o Stop playback
o Jump to next clip
o Jump to specific clip (predefined playlist index)
o Jump to specific location in the clip/playlist (predefined timecode)
o Playlist reset (during stop mode only)
o Hardware reset (terminates the playback!)
o Turn logo on
o Turn logo off
AirBox as a GPI Master
These AirBox events can activate a GPI trigger:
o Dedicated GPI event
o Playback start
o Playback stop
o Playback pause/resume
o Playback jump
o Clip start
o Clip end
o Logo On event
o Logo Off event
o Stop event
o Wait event start
o Wait event end
AirBox GPI Settings Panel
All GPI-IN triggers can be assigned to a specific AirBox action. From AirBox
Options -> Modules -> Remote Control, select “GPI Input” enabled, to allow the GPI-IN
trigger. Press the Generate button, to invoke a table for setting the COM ports, GPI groups
and the available actions for them.
All GPI-OUT triggers can be activated by specific AirBox event. From Options ->
Modules -> Remote Control, select “GPI Output” enabled, to allow the GPI OUT trigger.
After that you can Add/Insert GPI Output event in the playlist, by right mouse clicking.

194
RS232 9-pin D-SUB pinout reference

Pin Name Description Direction
1 CD Carrier Detect In
2 RXD Receive Data In
3 TXD Transmit Data Out
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready Out
5 GND System Ground -
6 DSR Data Set Ready In
7 RTS Request to Send Out
8 CTS Clear to Send In
9 RI Ring Indicator In


195
APPENDIX 2 – MPEG2 ENCODING


CAPTUREBOX
GENERAL
It is quite hard to pick out the most appropriate MPEG2 coder for your needs and
conditions . It is next to an art… Anyway, we will try to share with you our knowledge,
regarding thit question in brief:
PROBLEM
The ISO-13818 standard, together with all its supplements defines a very flexible
format, which rules unfortunately are hardly understood by some particular manufacturers
of MPEG2 coders. The truth is simple – companies with traditions on that market like
Optibase or Vela for example, are working hard to qualify their development teams well
enough, which helps them to provide stable and standard coders, naturally at higher prices.
There are too many cheap MPEG2 encoders on the market lately, which however are not
created with the idea for a complete compatibility with the standard. They allow
inaccuracy in their work, which may cause plenty of troubles later during the playback of
some particular MPEG2 content. There are too many examples for that! You can now buy
a hardware (!!!) MPEG2 encoder for less than $500... How qualitative the picture will be
and to what extent the generated stream will be compatible with MPEG2 decoders is an
entirely different question.
SOLUTIONS
 Hardware MPEG2 encoder – for example Movie Maker 200, Argus etc.
 Non-linear editing hardware (NLE) – for example DigiSuite DTV/LX etc.
 Software MPEG2 coder – i.e. Ligos LSX Encoder, DVMPEG, etc.
MPEG2 HARDWARE ENCODERS – PROS & CONS
+ They encode the video signal in MPEG2 in real-time.
+ They do not require an extremely powerful computer station.
+ They can be used as a fast connection with the old analogue equipment.
─ They cost relatively expensive.
─ The picture examination algorithms are fixed and are not subject to further
development.
NLE HARDWARE – PROS & CONS
+ They do not require additional investments.
+ They do not require an extremely powerful computer station.
+ They allow preliminary processing of MPEG2 content.
─ They convert the edited material in MPEG2 comparatively slow (from 1:4 up to
1:8), if they are not equipped with the appropriate export modules.
MPEG2 SOFTWARE ENCODERS – PROS & CONS
+ They are not expensive.

196
+ They allow a wide range of options and variants.
+ The examination and compression algorithms are regularly updated with more
effective ones.
─ They need a fast computer station (faster is better).
─ They work relatively slow (from 1:4 up to 1:20) depending on the processor’s
speed.
CHEAP VS EXPENSIVE
Once again, we come to the particular needs... If you need decent quality, which in
the same time will take less disk space, your only choice is to buy something high-grade!
We are talking about VBR encoding at 3-4 Mbit/sec with dual pass and control of the
feeding VTR. If the disk space is not a problem for you, you may save from the encoder
and work at 8-9 Mbit/sec with a similar quality. Of course, if you have requirements for
higher-quality inputs like YUV or SDI, you may double or triple the amount. Another
aspect of the cheap encoders is the incorrect multiplexing of the program stream, which
may distract seriously the final decoder! To your relief, the AirBox re-multiplexing
algorithm takes care of eliminating this sort of mistakes, but there are isolated cases when
even God won’t be able to help you...
MPEG2 TYPES
Multimedia-orientated MPEG2 products work mainly with MPEG2 program streams.
They can contain up to 8 video streams, 8 audio streams and up to 32 streams with sub-
titles. One way or another, the program stream is used for transporing a single program.
The transport stream on its part carries large quantity of television programs inside. It has
wider application in transport of MPEG2 programs (satellite, etc.). Besides, the stream is
described on different levels and profiles, depending on its application. Transport streams
contain exceptionally and only MP@ML program streams. 4:2:2P@ML is used for post-
production, equally with D9 and DVCPRO50. Those differences must play the leading role
in picking up the MPEG2 encoder, because encoders often work with limited sub-
multitude of profiles and multiplexes.

197
APPENDIX 3 – MPEG2 DECODING

AIRBOX
GENERAL
In contrast to MPEG1, there is no integrated support in Windows for MPEG2
decoding of encoded materials. This automatically brings up the need of additional
MPEG2 decoder, either software or hardware, depending on the particular need.
PROBLEM
Due to the specifics of ISO-13818 standard, viewing MPEG2 content involves
demultiplexing of audio/video stream, followed by decoding. While each common PC with
Windows can manage with MPEG1 decoding, the decoding of MPEG2 stream is very
difficult computing task, which requires specific conditions.
SOLUTIONS
 Hardware MPEG2 decoder – for example NetStream2000 or VideoPlex
OR
 Fast processor – Pentium III at 500 MHz at least + additional software.
MPEG2 HARDWARE DECODERS – PROS & CONS
+ They decode MPEG2 data into a video signal in real-time.
+ They do not bring about CPU overhead.
+ They have a standard video output, which can be used either for recording to video
tape or for broadcasting.
─ They are relatively expensive.
─ The cheapest ones have some serious limitations, which often cannot be
surmounted by means of software methods.
MPEG2 SOFTWARE DECODERS – PROS & CONS
+ They are cheap.
+ They allow simultaneous decoding of more than one MPEG2 stream.
─ They create additional CPU overhead.
─ They drop frames or bother other critical processes on slower workstations.
─ They do not have an output video signal (i.e. you can preview the video only on the
VGA screen).

198
APPENDIX 4 – TYPICAL MPEG2 (PAL)

Depending on the MPEG2 encoders and decoders used, you may be enforced to
observe some rules in creating your MPEG2 programs. The rules are simple:
 The cheaper your decoder is, the stricter you have to stick to a single range of
MPEG2 parameters.
 The cheaper your encoder is, the higher Bit rate you must use for the encoding,
in order to be able to meet the visual quality.
 The cheaper encoder you have, the more problems you may expect when using
expensive decoder for playback.
Some simple examples – you cannot buy a cheap encoder for $2,000 and expect that
an expensive decoder for $2,000 will take the created MPEG2 content without a problem.
There is a single reason: the more expensive your MPEG2 equipment is, the stricter it will
stick to the standard and every single diversion from it will cause a problem. On the
contrary, cheaper decoders cannot even detect the diversion from the standard and run riot.
This, of course, leads to different problems – loss of lip sync, etc.
WARNING! This is not a theoretical conclusion! This is a conclusion based on our
experience with numerous problems we have met and solved. Although the re-multiplexed
AirBox algorithm attends precisely this kind of problems, there are things, which in deed
cannot be eliminated by any means...
Here are the typical parameters for MPEG2 at PAL, which should advisably be
observed in most cases:
1. Video Bitrate: 4 – 9 Mbit/sec (bit rates > 10 Mbit/sec cause problems to NetStream
decoders)
2. Frame size: 720 õ 576 – Fukk-D1 (352 õ 576 – Half-D1 is also allowed)

3. GOP structure: IBBPBBPBBPBB – 12 frames, 3 P frames
4. Closed GOP – only the first GOP in the stream has to be closed
5. InitialSCR – between 1 and 5 (this is a multiplexing parameter)
6. field/frame – you have to select fields and upper field first
7. CBR/VBR – it depends mainly on the encoder (in principle VBR gives better quality)
8. Audio Bitrate – between 192 and 384 gives satisfactory results – “ MPEG1 Layer 2”
9. Audio Frequency – it is recommended to use 48kHz to escape incompatibilities

199
APPENDIX 5 – INTEGRATION OF AIRBOX WITH
TITLEBOX
TitleBox settings:
1) Run Programs>DMT>TitleBox PLNetInst.exe and select a folder for your
TitleBox templates.
2) Create your TitleBox projects.
3) Export them via Network >Export project as template, giving them respective
names.
4) *.tmpl (template) files are exported in the templates folder.
5) Go to Project\Options, look at Network tab. Remember the TitleBox channel ID
and Port values. Confirm any changes.
6) Go to Network>Net control. Run it.
That's all for TitleBox. Now it stays in standby mode and executes the commands coming
from AirBox. Please note that it is not possible to edit objects in TitleBox while in this
mode.
AirBox settings:
1) Go to Options>Modules, then to Remote control tab. Enable TitleBoxNetCtrl
Output setting with Yes. Click Configure.
Enter same Channel ID and Port values as in TitleBox settings. Confirm.
2) Go to Events ¬ Add/Insert event ¬ TitleBoxNetCtrl Output
3) There are two modes for event insertion - 'Wizard' or 'Advanced' (selectable through the
Advanced button). You are recommended to choose the 'Wizard' mode for now. The
functions are self-explanatory, but since this module is still under development, some of
them are not functioning as desired...
4) In 'Wizard' mode you can choose between Template Control and Play Project - the
first one is for global TitleBox control commands; the second one is for project/objects
control commands.
5) If you have entered Play Project mode, further you can select your project by list - all
exported template projects should appear in this list. Select a whole project or some objects
from it.
6) Click Finish. That’s it!
Run AirBox. When the time for a TitleBox event approaches, respective commands are
being sent to TitleBox and it runs the appropriate objects.

200
APPENDIX 6 – TROUBLESHOOTING
GENERAL

Problem: When launching a PlayBox module, it goes into DEMO version mode.
Possible Cause: This means you have installed a wrong module version (demo version) or
you have no permission for running this module.
Solution: Verify the following:
1. Did you install the "normal" module (not a Demo version)?
2. Did you install everything under Windows Administrator account?
3. Do you have license for this particular module?
Please, download the standard version from the Updates/Patches section of the
PlayBox site (http://www.playbox.tv). This is a restricted area and you should login with
your password there.
Problem: When launching a PlayBox module, an error message appears: “Program
needs WIBU-BOX with 250525: 5259896”.
Possible Cause:
1. The program does not find its license hardware USB key (WIBU-
BOX).
2. The WIBU driver is installed improperly or not installed at all; or
the library wibukey.dll is not registered.
3. The PC USB port, where the key is plugged, is not recognized by the
operating system (Windows) or it does not work.
Solution: 1. Plug the hardware key (dongle) into the PC USB port.
2.1. Install the WIBU driver. The WIBU drivers are available under
Microsoft Windows 2000 Pro/ XP Pro. You can download the drivers from
the WIBU site: http://www.wibu.com
Be sure you work under Windows administrator account.
2.2. Register the Wibukey.dll:
Press Start button¬Run command. Type "regsvr32 <file path>
\Wibukey.dll”, where < file path > is the location of Wibukey.dll (it should
be <device>\Program Files\WIBUKEY\Bin).
3. Use another USB port or use a PCI USB controller.


201
Problem: When launching PlayBox module, an error message appears:
“Program needs WIBU-BOX with 2466:5259896”.
Possible Cause: You are trying to run a Network version of PlayBox module with a
“normal” (end-user) hardware USB key. These keys are for local use only.
Solution: You have to install a “normal” module if you have an end-user, local key
(transparent-green key).
Please, download the standard version from the Updates/Patches section of the
PlayBox site (http://www.playbox.tv). This is a restricted area and you should login with
your password there.
Problem: We cannot start a PlayBox module from the network. (We use a network
hardware key).
Possible Cause:
1. You have not configured your WIBU- server machine (where the
hardware USB key is plugged in) properly.
2. You have reached the maximum number of permitted PlayBox
users/ modules.
Solution: 1. Configure your WIBU-server:
Go to Control Panel¬WIBU-KEY¬ Server and check “Access FSB”
box.
From other computers – go to Control Panel¬WIBU-
KEY¬Network¬ ServerName/IPaddress and select the name of your
WIBU-server.
In the “WIBU-KEY subsystems” field, order the subsystems like that:
“WkNet”; “WkLAN”; “Local (Kernel)”.
Restart the WIBU-Network Server (from Start ¬Programs¬ WIBU-
KEY ¬Network Server) so that changes can take effect.
2. Check the number of users connected to the server:
Start¬Programs¬ WIBU-KEY ¬Server monitor, select View¬ User View
and check the number of connected users.

202
AIRBOX

In case you have some difficulties with the system, before looking for technical
support, please consult with the table below. It contains the most common problems,
explanations of the reasons, as well as possible solutions:
Problem: When we start AirBox for the second time (a second AirBox channel) a
message appears: "Reached maximum running instances".
Possible Cause: You have no permission for starting a second AirBox channel. Probably
you have purchased only one AirBox license.
Solution: This is a licensing issue. Each separate instance (channel) of AirBox is
licensed separately. This means that if you need to run 2 AirBox instances
(channels) at the same time, you need to purchase 2 AirBox licenses.
Contact our Sales Department for more information (sales@playbox.tv).
Problem: After plug-in the hardware USB key, AirBox freezes. The video window
of AirBox does not refresh properly. (PCs with AMD processors).
Possible Cause: It is caused by a problem with the USB key and the USB port appearing
on the KT-133 VIA chip set. This particular problem shouldn’t arise with
newer VIA chip sets.
Solution: Add a PCI USB controller card at your machine.
Problem: Sometimes the video jerks and the audio volume is slightly changed.
(NetStream decoders).
Possible Cause: The only reason for this problem is that you use MPEG files with
different audio frequency (32, 44.1 or 48 kHz) or a different television
system (PAL or NTSC) in the same program. This limitation comes from
the NetStream decoders.
Solution: Please, avoid such combinations of MPEG content, especially if you use
NetStream 2000.
Problem: Sometimes the playback freezes for a long period of time. (Only for
NetStream 2000).
Possible Cause: This is probably caused by a combination of MPEG1 and MPEG2 files in
the same program.
Solution: Please, avoid using MPEG1 and MPEG2 files simultaneously in the same
program.

203
Problem: Sometimes the clips are starting with wrong audio or audio/video
asynchrony.
Possible Cause: You have included in the program a file, which does not contain an audio
stream.
Solution: Please, avoid using such files.
Problem: It is possible to get flickering in the hardware playback when starting
MPEG editor. (NetStream decoders).
Possible Cause: This usually happens if the Elecard MPEG2 software decoder is not
installed properly.
Solution: Install the Elecard software MPEG2 decoder again. It can be found at
http://www.elecard.com. For your convenience, we have included it in the
PlayBox distribution CD.
Problem: When launching AirBox, there is a number of failure messages, which
blockades the computer’s work. (Only Windows 2000 and NetStream
2000).
Possible Cause: NetStream 2000 driver is not properly installed.
Solution: Check if you can play MPEG2 materials in Microsoft Media Player. If not,
you must install the driver properly. It is important to see NetStream 2000
in the upper left angle of the screen.
Problem: Sometimes the playback starts with no audio and this problem can be
fixed only after Reset. (Only NetStream 2000).
Possible Cause: This comes from a driver limitation. It happens when the first MPEG file
does not contain audio data in the first 128 KB.
Solution: Increase the DirectShow buffer size to 256 KB – this can be done in Settings
¬ Module Options ¬ DirectShow.

Problem: When launching AirBox, the Status bar says, "AirBox (DEMO)". In
Options¬ Modules, the “VideoPlex playback module” doesn’t exist.
(Only with VideoPlex)
Possible Cause: You have installed AirBox with “Custom settings”, not with “Typical
settings”. The typical installation does NOT install the VideoPlex plug-in.
Solution: You just have to reinstall AirBox over the old one, but this time with
“Custom install”.

204
Problem: The playback stops after 26 hours
Possible Cause: This is caused by addressing limitation of MPEG2. It is 33-bit at 90 kHz
per second, which means that playback could not long more than 26
continuous hours. This is because each clip in the playlist is included in a
continuous non-stop MPEG2 stream, sent to the decoder.
Solution: Go to AirBox¬ Options ¬ Settings and set "Restart after XX hours" to 24.
This means that the green counter will be reset at approximately 24 hours;
thus, the playback will not stop at 26 hours.
Problem: During the playback, VGA overlay does not work. (Matrox RT2500).
Possible Cause: You need to use a Matrox VGA card (G450, G550) in order to have VGA
video overlay. It will not work with any other VGA cards.
Solution: Check what is the VGA card you use. Install Matrox VGA card.
Problem: GPI-Output/GPI-Input function does not work.
Possible Cause: You do not have permission for using that function.
Solution: The GPI function is a paid option to AirBox. Contact our Sales Department
for more information (sales@playbox.tv).
Problem: Sometimes after pressing the CUE button, a black frame appears,
instead of the first frame of the clip.
Possible Cause: 1. The clip begins with black frames.
2. At some hardware configurations, the CUE function doesn’t always
work properly. It is machine-dependent.
Solution: 1. Make sure, that the clip’s first frame is not black. Edit the clip with Clip
Trimmer, to trim the black frames from the clip beginning.
2. Go to Options¬ Settings dialog box ¬ Cue Delay. This option defines a
small delay before pausing on the first frame. Please, try to find the best one
for your case.
Problem: The HDV files inserted in the playlist are marked as unsupported file
format.
Possible Cause: Probably your dongle does not have a HDV flag
Solution: The HDV support is a paid option to AirBox. Please contact our Sales
Department for further information (sales@playbox.tv).


205
CAPTUREBOX

In case you have some difficulties with the system, please consult with the
section bellow before contacting us. It contains the most common problems, explanations
for the reasons, as well as possible solutions:
Problem: When launching CaptureBox, we receive a message “Preview Not
Available” (only if using Matrox DigiServer/SDTI).
Possible Causes: There is only one reason for this – the hardware driver does not function
properly. This occurs in the following cases:
1. The driver is not started yet (it needs 5-10 sec after the initial launching).
2. The driver has blockaded.
3. There is no driver installed.
4. The hardware is missing.
5. The hardware does not function.
Solutions: First determine your case:
1. The problem occurs only during the initial launching of the system.
Wait for 20 seconds and launch CaptureBox again. If you don’t get the
same message, you may continue with your work.
2. Reboot the workstation. If you don’t get the same message, you may
continue with your work.
3. Check if Control Panel ¬ DigiSuite exists. If not, ask help for
installation of the needed driver.
4. And (5): launch DigiSuite. If you receive error messages, this means
that the hardware is missing or not functioning properly. Ask for help.
Problem: When capturing from VTR, the recorded material does not contain
video (only for Matrox DigiServer/SDTI).
Possible Cause: DigiServer’s input is not properly commutated.
Solution: Make sure the VTR’s SDTI Out is connected to the DigiServer’s SDI/SDTI
In.
Problem: When launching print-to-tape function, VTR does not start recording
and shows error E-03 (only for Matrox DigiServer/SDTI).
Possible Cause:
1. VTR’s input is not properly commutated.
2. Both devices are not properly connected into a closed circle
(VTR¬DigiServer and DigiServer¬VTR).
Solution: 1. Make sure that the DigiServer’s SDI/SDTI Out is connected to VTR’s
SDTI In.
2. Make sure the DigiServer’s In is not commutated.

206
Problem: VTR is not reacting to the commands from CaptureBox control panel.
Possible Cause:
1. VTR’s control cable is not commutated.
2. RS-422 / RS-232 converter is not supplied.
3. The VTR is in local control mode (Local indicator is on).
Solution: 1. Make sure the control cable is properly connected to both the VTR and
computer.
2. Make sure the intermediate converter device is power-supplied (its
adapter should be connected to the electrical network).
3. Switch the VTR control to Remote.
Problem: Video preview window in Capture Box doesn't work. (Matrox RT2500)
Possible Cause: You don’t use a Matrox VGA card.
Solution: You have to install a Matrox VGA card (G450 or G550) in order to see the
video preview window on a VGA screen. It will not work with any other
VGA card.

207
DATABOX
In case you have some difficulties with the system, please consult with the
section bellow, before contacting us. It contains the most likely problems, explanations for
the reasons, as well as possible solutions:

Problem: If we create a new record to the database from a PC over the LAN, a
windows message appears: "Unable to complete network request to
host. Failed to locate host machine. The specified name was not found
in the host file or Domain Name Services".
Possible Cause: This happens when the drive which contains the database file
(DataBox.GDB) is not shared as a single letter coinciding with the logical
device letter. This is a requirement of the Interbase engine.
Solution: Make sure that the drive which contains the database file (DataBox.GDB) is
shared as a single letter coinciding with the logical device letter. For
example, if the database file is on C:\ProgramFiles\DMT\DataBox, the
share name of this drive should be "c". Then the remote station will find the
database.



















IMPORTANT: If you have problems different from the ones listed above, please
describe them and send them to the following e-mail address: support@playbox.tv
Thank you in advance!

208
APPENDIX 7 – DEMO VERSIONS LIMITATIONS

AIRBOX
1. Playlist can not contain more than 10 entries.
2. Clip duration will be truncated to 90 seconds.
3. No playlist loading or saving.
4. Demo version messages are going to pop-up regularly.
5. No LAN control.
6. No multi-channel playout.
7. No TitleBox integration.
8. GPI & Kramer events are not functional.

CAPTUREBOX
1. Only the first 90 seconds of each clip are captured.
2. A "DEMO" logo is superimposed on the clip (DigiSuite LX/DTV).
3. No MPEG-2 capturing on DeckLink Extreme through Firewire.

FINISHBOX LE
1. No multiplexing will take place unless registered & activated.

LISTBOX
1. Playlist Save function does not work.
2. Cut/Copy does not work.
3. Print function is not available.

DATABOX
1. Only 50 database records can be made.

TITLEBOX
1. No project loading or saving;
2. No object loading or saving;
3. Cut/Copy/Paste not available;
4. DEMO word is automatically inserted in text objects;
5. Command line parameters not accepted;
6. Demo version messages are going to pop-up regularly;
7. No network control from AirBox.
Elecard MPEG2 Player
1. The Elecard logo is superimposed on the output.

209
APPENDIX 8 – LIGHT EDITIONS LIMITATIONS
AIRBOX LE
1. No ListBox bundled
2. No MultiMux bundled
3. No Clip Trimmer (it is still possible to enter or change trim points)
4. Sigma Designs (Xcard or NetStream) playback only (no
Stradis/Matrox/DeckLink support)
5. No Elecard MPEG2 Decoder bundled
6. No GPI/Kramer/Live MPEG2 Stream
7. No TitleBox integration
8. Only 1 logo preset (as opposed to 16 logo presets in the full version)
9. No Remote IP control
10. No Timecode support

FINISHBOX LE
1. No audio decoding from MPEG Audio layer 1&2;
2. No audio upsampling for DVD and DVB/ATSC compliance: 32 or 44.1 kHz ->
48 kHz;
3. No MPEG Stream analysis and validating;
4. No multiplexing errors correction and remultiplexing;
5. No trimming with saving the trimmed portion into a new file;
6. No clip splicing/joining;
7. No simple GOP-accurate cut editing;
8. No program Stream to Transport Stream remultiplexing (and vice versa);
9. No Audio/Video stream resynching with custom offset;
10. No audio normalizing for equal audio levels in all processed clips;
11. No Automated / batch / mixed mode operations for a single-click complex
processing. For example, in the full version, when unifying all content clips to
48kHz, all existing 44 kHz clips will be demultiplexed, decoded, upsampled to
48 kHz, encoded and multiplexed in just a single user operation, or totally
automatically (with a watch folder).
DATABOX LE
1. Up to 5,000 records;
2. Up to 5 network clients;
3. No Advanced Boolean Search engine;
4. No Sequence description;
5. No grouping & linking;
6. Single instance, stream, part & media per record;
7. No advanced credits;
8. No Traffic Rules;
9. No Additional info (description, rating, trivia, etc.).

210

TITLEBOX LE
1. No object transitions such as fades, wipes, etc.
2. No advanced scheduling
3. No Network control mode








211

GLOSSARY

Abbreviation Description
4:2:2@ML 4:2:2 Profile at Main Level – High quality, higher bit rate
encoding used in professional video. It has more chroma
information than 4:2:0 (the color sampling is in 4:2:2 format),
a constrained version of which is used by BetacamSX using a
2-frame (IB) GOP producing a bitstream of 18 Mb/s, and I-
frame only IMXVTRs with 50 Mb/s. It is a fully editable
profile.
Synonyms: SP@ML
A Audio – Relating to sound or its reproduction; used in the
transmission or reception of sound.
AES/EBU The Audio Engineering Society (AES) and the EBU (European
Broadcasting Union) together have defined a standard for
Digital Audio, now adopted by ANSI (American National
Standards Institute). Commonly referred to as ‘AES/EBU’, this
digital audio standard permits a variety of sampling
frequencies, for example CDs at 44.1 kHz, or digital VTRs at
48 kHz. 48 kHz is widely used in broadcast TV production.
AVI Abbreviation for Audio-Video Interleaved; the algorithm
created by Microsoft for synchronizing and compressing
analogue audio and video signals. AVI is also the file format
used by Video for Windows
AVI2MPG AVI-to-MPEG Software Converter
BDE Borland Database Engine
B-frames Bi-directional predictive frames composed by assessing the
difference between the previous and the next frames in a
television picture sequence.
As they contain only predictive information they do not make
up a complete picture and so have the advantage of taking up
much less data than the I-frames. To see the original picture,
one has to decode information from a whole sequence of
MPEG frames that includes an I-frame.

212
Abbreviation Description
BNC A connector for coaxial cable such as that used for some video
connections and RG58 "cheapernet" connections. A BNC
connector has a bayonet-type shell with two small knobs on
the female connector which lock into spiral slots in the male
connector when it is twisted on.
Different sources expand BNC as Bayonet Navy Connector,
British Naval Connector, Bayonet Neill Concelman, or
Bayonet Nut Connection.
CBR Constant Bit Rate
CD Compact Disc – A 4.72 inch disc developed by Sony and
Philips that can store, on the same disc, still and/or moving
images in monochrome and/or colour; stereo or two separate
sound tracks integrated with and/or separate from the images;
and digital program and information files.
Closed GOP Closed Group Of Pictures – A GOP whose last B-frames do
not refer to the following I-frame, but only to the preceding P-
frame.
CPU Central Processing Unit – The part of a computer (a
microprocessor chip) that does most of the data processing
(interprets and executes instructions); the CPU, together with
the memory, form the central part of a computer to which the
peripherals are attached
CVBS Composite Video Broadcast Signal – analogue composite
video
D1 A format for digital video tape recording working in 4:2:2
standard using 8-bit sampling. The tape is 19 mm wide and
allows up to 94 minutes to be recorded on a cassette. As a
component recording system, it is ideal for studio or
postproduction work for its high chrominance bandwidth
allowing excellent chroma keying. Also multiple generations
are possible with very little degradation of quality. The D1
equipment can integrate without transcoding to various digital
effects systems, disk recorders, telecines, graphics devices, etc.
Despite the advantages, D1 equipment is not extensively used
in general areas of TV production due to its high cost.

213
Abbreviation Description
D9 Previously known as Digital-S, this is a half-inch digital tape
format for video data recording at rate of 50 Mb/s. The tape
can be shuttled and searched up to x32 speed. Video sampled
at 4:2:2 is compressed at 3.3:1 using intra-frame compression.
Two audio channels are recorded at 16-bit, 48 kHz sampling;
each is individually editable. The format also includes two cue
tracks and four further audio channels in a cassette housing
with the same dimensions as VHS.
DAT Video CD Media File
DCT Discrete Cosine Transform - widely-used as the first stage
of compression of digital video pictures. DCT operates on
blocks of the picture (usually 8 x 8 pixels) resolving them into
frequencies and amplitudes. DCT itself may not reduce the
amount of data but it prepares it for following processes that
will do so.
JPEG, MPEG and DV compression depend on DCT.
Desktop Windows Desktop – The area of the screen in graphical user
interfaces against which icons and windows appear
Synonyms: background; screen background
DirectDraw The DirectDraw feature for Microsoft Windows CE .NET is
the component of the DirectX application programming
interface (API) that allows you to directly manipulate display
memory, the hardware blitter, hardware overlays, and surface
flipping.
DirectShow DirectShow is an architecture for streaming media on the
Microsoft Windows platform. DirectShow provides for high-
quality capture and playback of multimedia streams. It
supports a wide variety of formats, including Advanced
Systems Format (ASF), Motion Picture Experts Group
(MPEG), Audio-Video Interleaved (AVI), MPEG Audio
Layer-3 (MP3), and WAV sound files.
DTS Decoding Time Stamp

214
Abbreviation Description
DV Digital Video – This digital VTR format is a co-operation
between Hitachi, JVC, Sony, Matsushita, Mitsubishi, Philips,
Sanyo, Sharp, Thomson and Toshiba. It uses quarter-inch wide
tape in a range of products to record 525/60 or 625/50 video
for the consumer (DV) and professional markets (Panasonic’s
DVCPRO and Sony’s DVCAM). All models use digital intra-
field DCT-based ‘DV’ compression (about 5:1) to record 8-bit
component digital video based on 13.5 MHz luminance
sampling. The consumer versions and DVCAM sample video
at 4:1:1 (525/60) or 4:2:0 (625/50) video and provide two 16-
bit/48 or 44.1 kHz, or four 12-bit/32 kHz audio channels. The
recording rate is 25 Mb/s.
DVB Digital Video Broadcasting, the group, with over 200 members
in 25 countries, which developed the preferred scheme for
digital broadcasting in Europe. The DVB Group has put
together a satellite system, DVB-S, that can be used with any
transponder, current or planned, a matching cable system,
DVB-C, and a digital terrestrial system, DVB-T.
DVB-C A transmission scheme for CABLE digital television.
DVB-S A transmission scheme for SATELLITE digital television
DVB-T The DVB-T is a transmission scheme for TERRESTRIAL
digital television. Its specification was approved by ETSI in
February 1997 and DVB-T services started in the UK in
Autumn 1998.
As with the other DVB standards, MPEG-2 sound and vision
coding are used. It uses Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division
Multiplexing (COFDM), which spreads the signals over a large
number of carriers to enable it to operate effectively in very
strong multipath environments. The multipath immunity of this
approach means that DVB-T can operate an overlapping
network of transmitting stations with a single frequency. In the
areas of overlap, the weaker of the two received signals is
rejected.
DVCPRO Panasonic's development of native DV which records an 18-
micron track on metal particle tape. DVCPRO uses native DV
compression at 5:1 from a 4:1:1, 8-bit sampled source. It uses
12 tracks per frame for 625/50 sources and 10 tracks per frame
for 525/60 sources. The video data rate is 25 Mb/s. It includes
two 16-bit digital audio channels sampled at 48 kHz and an
analogue cue track. Both Linear (LTC) and Vertical Interval
Time Code (VITC) are supported.

215
Abbreviation Description
DVCPRO50 In many ways this is a x2 variant of DVCPRO with a video
data rate of 50 Mb/s and using 3.3:1 video compression, it is
aimed at the studio/higher quality end of the market. Sampling
is 4:2:2 to give enhanced chroma resolution, useful in post
production processes (e.g. chroma keying). Four 16-bit audio
tracks are provided.
DVD Digital Versatile Disk – a high-density development of the
compact disk. It is the same size as a CD but stores upwards
from 4.38 GB of actual data (seven times CD capacity) on a
single-sided, single-layer disk. DVDs can also be double-sided
or dual-layer – storing even more data. The capacities
commonly available at present:
DVD-5 Single-side, single-layer 4.38 GB
DVD-9 Single-side, dual-layer 7.95 GB
DVD-10 Double-sided, single-layer 8.75 GB
DVD-18 Double-sided, dual-layer 15.9 GB
DVD-5 and DVD-9 are widely used.
The double-sided disks are quite rare, partly because they are
more difficult to make and they cannot carry a label.
DVD-Video This combines the DVD optical disk with MPEG-2 video
compression for recording video on a CD-sized disk and has
multi-channel audio, subtitles and copy protection capability.
To maximise quality and playing time DVD-Video uses
variable bit rate (VBR) MPEG-2 coding where the bit rate
varies with the demands of the material.
Field One half of a complete picture (or frame) interval, containing
all of the odd or even scanning lines of the picture.
Frame Video: The combination of two sucessive "fields". Therefore
two fields equal a frame
Film: One image or picture on a motion picture film; The
single complete image of motion picture film: the area
occupied by one such image.
Full-D1 Standard Definition with 720 (h) x 576 (v) pixels resolution
Genlock Synchronizing of the video signal clock of a devise with that of
an external device in order to achieve equal frequencies and
phases of the clock signals.

216
Abbreviation Description
GOP Group Of
Pictures. In an
MPEG signal the
GOP is a group of
pictures or frames
between successive
I-frames, the others
being P and/or B-
frames.
In the widest application, television transmission, the GOP is
typically 12 frames in a 25 fps signal and 15 frames in a 30 fps
signal (i.e. about half a second) but this can vary.
GPI General Purpose Interface – The generation of electrical pulses
to act as triggers for something.
The generation may vary from simple contact closure to
electronically generated pulses.
H/W Hardware – A computer and the associated physical equipment
directly involved in the performance of data-processing or
communications functions.
Half-D1 Standard Definition with 352 (h) x 576 (v) pixels resolution
HDD Hard Disk Drive – A disk drive used to read and write hard
disks.
HDTV High Definition Television. A television format with higher
definition than SDTV. While DTV at 625 or 525 lines is
usually superior to PAL and NTSC, it is generally accepted
that 720- line and upward is HD. This also has a picture aspect
ratio of 16:9. There are many picture formats proposed and
several in use, but there is increasing consensus that 1080 x
1920/24P is a practical standard for global exchange.
IDE Integrated Drive Electronics (presently ATA). A disk drive
interface standard based on the IBM PC ISA 16-bit bus but
also used on other personal computers. The ATA specification
deals with the power and data signal interfaces between the
motherboard and the integrated disk controller and drive. The
ATA "bus" only supports two devices - master and slave.
Synonyms: ATA, AT Attachment

217
Abbreviation Description
IEEE-1394 A standard for a peer-to-peer serial digital interface which can
operate at 100, 200, or 400 Mb/s.
IEEE 1394 is recognized by SMPTE and EBU as networking
technology for transport of packetized video and audio. Its
isochronous data channel can provide guaranteed bandwidth
for frame-accurate real-time (and faster) transfers of video and
audio, and its asynchronous mode can carry metadata and
support I/P. Both modes can be run simultaneously.
Synonyms: FireWire, I-Link
I-frames Intra-frames - these contain all required data to reconstruct a
whole picture - very similar to JPEG.
LAN Local Area Network. A system that links together electronic
office equipment, such as computers and word processors, and
forms a network within an office or building.
LOG Logging – the process of creating a record, as of the
performance of a machine or the progress of an undertaking.
M/B The PC Motherboard – It contains the bus, the microprocessor,
and integrated circuits used for controlling any built-in
peripherals such as the keyboard, text and graphics display,
serial ports and parallel ports, joystick, and mouse interfaces.
Mini-DIN A type of Multi-Purpose Connector, often used for S-video
signals
MP@ML Main Profile at Main Level covers broadcast television formats
up to 720 pixels x 576 lines and 30 fps so includes 720 x 486
at 30 fps and 720 x 576 at 25 fps. The economy of 4:2:0
sampling is used and bit rates vary from as low as 2 Mb/s on
multiplexed transmissions, up to 9 Mb/s on DVD-video.
Synonyms: 4:2:0@ML

Profile: a defined sub-set of the entire bitstream syntax.

Level: a defined set of constraints imposed on parameters in
the bitstream. For details, check ISO/IEC JTC1/SC29/WG11
Standard of the International Organization for Standardization
MPA MPEG Audio File
MPEG Motion Pictures Expert Group of the International
Organization for Standardization (ISO) that has defined
multiple standards for compressing audio and video sequences.
MPEG is also referred to as both a type of compression and a
video format.

218
Abbreviation Description
MPEG1 The international compression standard for the conversion of
analogue motion video to digital motion video that includes
both video and audio data. MPEG meets the needs of CD-
ROM and video-on-demand applications. Actual compression
over uncompressed digital video is about 100:1. MPEG-1 was
initially designed to deliver near-broadcast quality video
through a standard speed CD-ROM. Playback of MPEG-1
video requires either a software decoder coupled with a high-
end computer or a hardware decoder.
Its quality is not sufficient for TV broadcast.
ISO-11172
MPEG2 A family of inter- and intra-frame compression systems
designed to cover a wide range of requirements from ‘VHS
quality’ all the way to HDTV through a series of compression
algorithm ‘profiles’ and image resolution ‘levels’. With data
rates from below 4 to 100 Mb/s, the family includes the
compression system that delivers digital TV to the home and
that puts video onto DVDs. Coding the video is very complex,
generally producing I, P and B-frames, and is designed to keep
the decoding at the reception end as simple, and therefore
cheap, as possible.
MPEG-2 generally uses very high compression rates and can
offer better quality pictures than JPEG for a given bit rate, but
is less editable. It uses intra-frame compression to remove
redundancy within frames as well as inter-frame compression
to take advantage of the redundancy contained over series of
many pictures. This creates long groups of pictures (GOPs).
ISO-13818
MPG MPEG Program Stream File
MS Microsoft
NLE Non-Linear Editing. Random-access editing of video and
audio on a computer, enabling edits to be processed and
reprocessed at any point in the timeline, at any time.
Traditional videotape editors are linear because they require
editing video sequentially, from beginning to end.
The term is widely used in association with off-line editing
systems storing highly compressed pictures but on-line non-
linear systems are increasingly available. There is a wide range
of systems claiming on-line quality – many using video
compression.

219
Abbreviation Description
NTSC Abbreviation for the National Television Standards Committee
that standardized the NTSC color broadcasting system
currently used in the United States.
This video format standard is also called composite because it
combines all the video information, including color, into a
single signal.
The bandwidth of the NTSC system is 4.2 MHz for the
luminance signal and 1.3 and 0.4 MHz for the I and Q colour
channels.
O/S Operating System. The low-level software which handles the
interface to peripheral hardware, schedules tasks, allocates
storage, and presents a default interface to the user when no
application program is running.
OpenDML OpenDML AVI (DirectShow)
OSD On-Screen-Display used for graphics overlay
PAL Phase Alternating Line. The colour coding system for
television widely used in Europe and throughout the world,
almost always with the 625/50 line/field system. It was derived
from the NTSC system but by reversing the phase of the
reference colour burst on alternate lines (Phase Alternating
Line) is able to correct for hue shifts caused by phase errors in
the transmission path.
Bandwidth for the PAL-I system is typically 5.5 MHz
luminance, and 1.3 MHz for each of the colour difference
signals, U and V.
P-frames Used from Main Profile upwards, these contain only predictive
information (not a whole picture) generated by looking at the
difference between the present frame and the previous one. As
with B-frames they hold less data than I- frames and a whole
GOP must be decoded to see the picture.
PID Program ID
PL Playlist
plug-ins Plug-in modules
PTS Presentation Time Stamp
RAM Random Access Memory. The most common computer
memory which can be used by programs to perform necessary
tasks while the computer is on; an integrated circuit memory
chip allows information to be stored or accessed in any order
and all storage locations are equally accessible.
Synonyms: random-access memory, random memory,
read/write memory

220
Abbreviation Description
RCA A connector for Unbalanced Audio
ROM Read-Only Memory. Memory hardware that allows fast access
to permanently stored data but prevents addition to or
modification of the data.
RS-232 A standard for serial data communications defined by EIA
standard RS-232 and is designed for short distances only - up
to 10 metres. It uses single-ended signalling with a conductor
per channel plus a common ground, which is relatively cheap,
easy to arrange but susceptible to interference - hence the
distance limitation.
RS-422 Not to be confused with 4:2:2 sampling or 422P MPEG, this is
a standard for serial data communications defined by EIA
standard RS-422. It uses current-loop, balanced signalling with
a twisted pair of conductors per channel, two pairs for bi-
directional operation. It is more costly than RS232 but has a
high level of immunity to interference and can operate over
reasonably long distances - up to 300m/1000 ft.
S/W Software. The instructions executed by a computer, as opposed
to the physical device on which they run (the "hardware").
The term was coined by the eminent statistician, John Tukey.
Programs stored on non-volatile storage built from integrated
circuits (e.g. ROM or PROM) are usually called firmware.
Synonyms: "computer program", "program", "code"
SCR System Clock Reference
SCSI The Small Computer Systems Interface is a very widely used
high data rate, general purpose parallel interface. A maximum
of eight devices can be connected to one bus (16 for Wide
SCSI), for example a controller, and up to seven disks or
devices of different sorts – hard disks, optical disks, tape
drives, scanners, etc. – and may be shared between several
computers. The SCSI interface is used by manufacturers for
high performance drives while ATA is popular for lower
performance drives.

221
Abbreviation Description
SDI Serial Digital Interface. The standard digital televsion studio
connection based on a 270 Mb/s transfer rate. This is a 10-bit,
scrambled, polarity-independent interface, with common
scrambling for both component ITU-R BT.601 and composite
digital video and four groups each of four channels of
embedded digital audio. Most new broadcast digital equipment
includes SDI which greatly simplifies its installation and signal
distribution. It uses the standard 75 ohm BNC connector and
coax cable as is commonly used for analogue video, and can
transmit the signal over 200 metres (depending on cable type)
SDK Software Developers Kit. Typically a software and
documentation package to facilitate the development of
applications to run on a given operating system or other
application. It provides another layer on top of an API, often
including shortcuts and pre-built routines to make development
easier and final operation faster.
SDTI Serial Digital Transport Interface (SMPTE 305M). Based on
SDI, this provides real-time streaming transfers. It does not
define the format of the signals carried but brings the
possibility to create a number of packetised data formats for
broadcast use. There are direct mappings for SDTI to carry
Sony SX, HD-CAM, DV-DIFF (DVCAM, DVCPRO 25/50,
Digital-S) and MPEG TS.
SDTV Standard Definition Television. A digital television system in
which the quality is approximately equivalent to that of
analogue 525/60 or 625/50 systems.
shortcut File Shortcut
SPDIF Serial Digital Audio interface
Trim Trimming. Editing a clip on a frame-by-frame basis, or editing
clips in relationship to one another.
TV Television
V Video. A means for reproducing moving visual images by
representing them with an analog electronic signal. The images
are decomposed into a series of horizontal scan lines. In this
way the signal can be stored, transmitted and reproduced.
There are various standards that define this signal (NTSC,
PAL, SECAM, RGB). Referring to the NTSC composite video
standard, this is a widespread standard such that the video in of
one machine is compatible with the video out of another.

222
Abbreviation Description
VBR Variable Bit Rate. While many video compression schemes are
'constant bit rate' – designed to produce fixed data rates
irrespective of the complexity of the picture, VBR offers the
possibility of fixing a constant picture quality by varying the
bit-rate according to the needs of the picture. This allows the
images that require little data, like still frames in MPEG-2, to
use little data and to use more for those that need it, to
maintain quality. The result is an overall saving in storage – as
on DVDs – or more efficient allocation of total available bit-
rate in a multi-channel broadcast multiplex.
VGA Video Graphics Array. A display standard for IBM PCs, with
640 x 480 pixels in 16 colours and a 4:3 aspect ratio. There is
also a text mode with 720 x 400 pixels.
IBM technical references define the *product name* of their
original VGA display board as "Video Graphics Array", in
contrast to the preceding boards, the "Color Graphics Adapter"
(CGA) and "Enhanced Graphics Adapter" (EGA).
VideoCD Video Compact Disc
VOB DVD-Video Object / Video OBject file
WAN Wide Area Network
WAV An audio file format developed by Microsoft that carries audio
that can be coded in many different formats. Metadata in WAV
files describes the coding used. To play a WAV file requires
the appropriate decoder to be supported by the playing device.
Synonyms: .WAV
Windows MS Windows (2000, XP)
XLR A Connector for Balanced Audio
Y/C Analogue S-Video. Short for Super-video, a technology used
for transmitting video signals over a cable by dividing the
video information into two separate signals: one for luminance
and one for chrominance. (S-Video is synonymous with Y/C
video). S-video is a consumer form of component video used
primarily with Hi8 and S-VHS equipment.

223
Abbreviation Description
YUV Convenient shorthand commonly – but incorrectly – used to
describe the analogue luminance and colour difference signals
in component video systems. Y is correct for luminance but U
and V are, in fact, the two sub-carrier modulation axes used in
the PAL colour coding system. Scaled and filtered versions of
the B-Y and R-Y colour difference signals are used to
modulate the PAL sub-carrier in the U and V axes
respectively. The confusion arises because U and V are
associated with the colour difference signals but clearly they
are not the same thing.


224
INDEX

AIRBOX
big timer ....................................... 30
Block Timer.................................. 30
Clip Properties.............................. 28
Clip Timer .................................... 30
color options................................. 42
commands menu........................... 63
events............................................ 32
events - GPI.................................. 33
events – Kramer switcher ............. 33
events - logo ................................. 32
events - Return.............................. 33
File Menu ..................................... 26
filename parser ............................. 56
help menu..................................... 64
Installation.................................... 17
list menu....................................... 27
log options.................................... 53
log view........................................ 30
logo options.................................. 51
module options…......................... 48
modules ........................................ 43
options/settings............................. 39
playback control ........................... 21
playback modules ......................... 43
playback remote control ............... 45
playlist and clip buttons................ 22
playlist grid................................... 23
remote control - GPI..................... 45
startup options .............................. 54
Status Bar ..................................... 19
tc options ...................................... 56
Timecode Timer ........................... 31
TitleBox net control...................... 36
user interface ................................ 19
Video Overlay Window................ 20
View Menu................................... 30
VikinX Matrix Switcher ............... 38
volume control.............................. 22
CAPTUREBOX
audio control................................. 87
batch table (grid) ...........................75
capture...........................................75
capture settings - Digiserver ..........71
capturing........................................79
installation.....................................69
menu bar........................................88
printing to tape ..............................81
RS-422...........................................86
schedule.........................................83
SDTI compilation..........................80
VTR control...................................86
CAPTUREBOX ME.........................91
Installation.....................................91
Quick Start ....................................92
CLIPTRIMMER
clip shots......................................180
clip zones.....................................179
pages............................................179
preview screen.............................175
Status bar.....................................178
trimmer control............................176
user interface ...............................175
video clip info..............................179
volume control.............................178
DATABOX
classification................................132
credits ..........................................133
default values...............................129
expired node................................109
grid ..............................................111
installation...................................104
media folders ...............................134
media types..................................131
menu............................................115
multi-editing................................114
new record – additional ...............123
new record – credits ....................121
new record – general ...................116
new record - instances .................117
new record – traffic .....................122
options.........................................124

225
print ............................................ 133
qualities ...................................... 131
searching..................................... 109
sequences.................................... 107
templates..................................... 108
tree view..................................... 106
DEMO VERSION LIMITATIONS
AirBox........................................ 203
CaptureBox................................. 203
DataBox...................................... 203
FinishBox LE ............................. 203
ListBox....................................... 203
TitleBox...................................... 203
FINISHBOX LE .............................. 98
installation.................................... 98
watch folder................................ 102
GLOSSARY................................... 206
GPI.................................................. 187
LIGHT EDITIONS LIMITATIONS
.................................................... 204
LISTBOX
column properties ....................... 143
edit menu.................................... 140
file menu..................................... 139
finding text ................................. 140
installation.................................. 135
playlist grid................................. 137
playlist menu .............................. 141
toolbar ........................................ 136
tools menu .................................. 142
MPEG2
decoding ..................................... 192
encoding ..................................... 190
typical encoding options............. 193
QUICK START
CaptureBox....................................70
DataBox.......................................105
FinishBoxLE .................................99
ListBox........................................136
TitleBox.......................................145
TITLEBOX
analog clock.................................163
animation properties ....................164
banner..........................................169
chat note ......................................169
creating objects............................152
digital clock.................................166
Direct Show media ......................168
editing objects .............................152
general options ............................173
installation...................................144
menu bar......................................151
network control ...........................151
object palette ...............................150
roll&crawl properties ..................155
Schedule mode ............................170
still picture properties..................154
system bar....................................150
text field properties......................160
toolbar .........................................147
user interface ...............................145
TROUBLESHOOTING
AirBox.........................................197
CaptureBox..................................200
DataBox.......................................202
General ........................................195
VDCP MANAGER
Adding new clips...........................67
Set Up............................................67
User Interface ................................66
TitleBox...................................... 122

226
NOTES:









































Legal notice

________________________________
The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the prior written permission of DMT Ltd.

The software described in this manual is owned by DMT Ltd. It is protected by Bulgarian Copyright Law as well as by international copyright treaties and may be used or copied only in accordance with the license agreement. DMT Ltd. provides this manual “as is” without any warranty, either express or implied. This publication may contain typographical errors or technical inaccuracies. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, DMT Ltd. assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Nor is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained herein. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; they will be incorporated in new versions of the manual. Please check the PlayBox website regularly for User Manual updates. DMT Ltd. may introduce changes or improvements in the products described in this manual at any time without any special notice. Please address your comments or questions to: Digital Media Technologies Ltd. 49 Shipchenski prohod Blvd., fl. 1 Sofia 1111 Bulgaria Tel.: 359 2 9703050 Fax: 359 2 9717700 playbox@playbox.tv www.playbox.tv

2

TABLE OF CONTENTS
USER’S MANUAL .......................................................................................... 1 LEGAL NOTICE .................................................................................................... 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................... 3 PREFACE .......................................................................................................... 9 STYLE CONVENTIONS ................................................................................ 10 GENERAL INFORMATION .......................................................................... 11 I. PLAY BOX MODULES ........................................................................... 11 II. COMMON CONFIGURATIONS ......................................................... 13 III. SOFTWARE UPDATES AND PROTECTION.................................... 13 IV. WORKFLOW BASICS......................................................................... 14 AIRBOX ............................................................................................................. 17 I. GETTING STARTED............................................................................... 17 I.1. INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 17 I.2. QUICK START ..................................................................................... 18 II. USER INTERFACE .............................................................................. 19 II.1. TITLE BAR .......................................................................................... 19 II.2. STATUS BAR ....................................................................................... 19 II.3. VIDEO OVERLAY WINDOW ................................................................. 20 II.4. PLAYBACK CONTROL BUTTONS ......................................................... 21 II.5. PLAYLIST AND CLIP BUTTONS ............................................................ 22 II.6. PLAYLIST GRID ................................................................................... 23 III. MENU BAR .......................................................................................... 26 III.1. FILE MENU UPDATED ........................................................................... 26 III.2. LIST MENU ......................................................................................... 29 III.2.1. Add ......................................................................................... 29 III.2.2. Insert ...................................................................................... 30 III.3. VIEW MENU........................................................................................ 32 III.4. EVENTS MENU .................................................................................... 34 III.5. OPTIONS MENU .................................................................................. 41 III.5.1. Settings ................................................................................... 41 III.5.2. Colors..................................................................................... 44 III.5.3. Modules.................................................................................. 45 III.5.4. Module Options...................................................................... 50 III.5.5. Logo Options.......................................................................... 53 III.5.6. Media Folders ........................................................................ 54 III.5.7. Log Options............................................................................ 55 III.5.8. StartUp Options .................................................................... 56

3

III.5.9. TC Options ............................................................................. 58 III.5.10. Filename Parser................................................................... 58 III.5.11. SubtitleBox .......................................................................... 61 III.5.12. Mirror Mode......................................................................... 62 III.5.13. Admin…................................................................................ 64 III.6. COMMANDS MENU ............................................................................. 65 III.7. HELP MENU ........................................................................................ 66 IV. VDCP MANAGER ................................................................................... 68 CAPTUREBOX ................................................................................................. 71 I. GETTING STARTED............................................................................... 71 I.1. INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 71 I.2. QUICK START ..................................................................................... 72 I.3. CAPTURE SETTINGS UPDATED ............................................................ 73 II. USER INTERFACE .............................................................................. 78 II.1. CAPTURE MODE ................................................................................. 78 II.1.1. Batch Grid Updated ................................................................ 78 II.1.2. Clip Data fields ....................................................................... 82 II.1.3. Capturing ................................................................................ 84 II.2. PRINT-TO TAPE ................................................................................... 85 II.2.1. SDTI Compilation ................................................................... 85 II.2.2. Print-to-Tape........................................................................... 86 II.3. SCHEDULE .......................................................................................... 88 II.3.1. Schedule Grid.......................................................................... 88 II.3.2. Clip Data Fields...................................................................... 89 II.4. RS-422 CONTROLLER ......................................................................... 91 II.5. AUDIO CONTROL ................................................................................ 92 III. MENU BAR .......................................................................................... 93 III.1. FILE MENU ......................................................................................... 93 III.2. VIEW MENU........................................................................................ 94 III.3. CAPTURE MENU ................................................................................. 95 CAPTUREBOX ME .......................................................................................... 96 I. GETTING STARTED............................................................................... 96 I.1. INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 96 I.2. QUICK START ..................................................................................... 97 II. USER INTERFACE .............................................................................. 98 II.1. CAPTURE GRID ................................................................................... 99 II.2. CAPTURE CONTROL BUTTONS ............................................................ 99 II.3. MENU BAR ....................................................................................... 100 II.3.1. File Menu .............................................................................. 100

4

..................................... 110 II.......1....CREDITS ............................................................................. 104 II...............1...............INSTANCES ...... INSTALLATION .2.....................................................................2............... QUALITIES .......... 112 II....................GRID ................................................................1....4....................1.ADDITIONAL .................................... 111 II....... 114 II.......................... 116 III..2.............................II....... 109 I...3.......GENERAL ................... 121 III........................................ 104 II......... GETTING STARTED..................... 127 III.........................1........................ 122 III.................TEMPLATES NODE ... 134 III....... NEW RECORD ...3.. 111 II.............. 125 III.............................2.............................3...........................................DEFAULT VALUES ............................................ 135 III..............4..........................................2....2.................................. USER INTERFACE ....3...................... 103 I..............................................2......................................... FOLDER WATCH ........................CLASSIFICATION ..........................................................................................................5......................................CLASSIFICATION SCHEME AND CREDITS ....2.....EXPIRED NODE ............... MENU BAR .................2........SEQUENCES NODE...3........................ 120 III...........................................6......... 130 III............................................. 136 III......... 109 I.....................................3......5.......................... MEDIA TYPES .......... 129 III.......................................... DATA GRID ...............................2................ 113 II.......................................................... 104 II..........................................................3............ 100 II...... GRID .................. GETTING STARTED.......2............................................................................... 114 II.......... 129 III..... INSTALLATION ............. CLASSIFICATION ......1........HOUSEID..........3........................................GENERAL ..............................5.................4........................................................... Help Menu................................................................................. USER INTERFACE ....................... 136 III................................... 120 III................ QUICK START ........................................................................................................................................................ 103 I... 126 III....................................................... 128 III............... OPTIONS .................. 102 FINISHBOX LE...................1...............................................................................3.............2............................. 120 III......................................................... 107 DATABOX ........TRAFFIC .4................................................... Capture Menu....3.................2............1..........................3............................................................................................................1............................................................................ 111 II...................1.............. 137 5 ....6................. STANDARD.......................3..................................1................... QUICK START ................................................. TREE VIEW ......................2..... 131 III........................................... 109 I..............1.......... SEARCH FIELDS ....2..................................................... 103 I.3.......................................EXPORT/IMPORT......

................ EDIT MENU ........3.............8........4........................................ MEDIA FOLDERS ....1. 155 II........................... 149 I............ MENU BAR .................... 159 III..1.......................5......2.......................... 164 III................................................................................4..7..................... SYSTEM BAR ................. TOOLS MENU ............... 158 III....... PLAYLIST GRID ............... Animation Properties .. 151 II......................................................................2......................... 141 II................................. FILE MENU ...... 158 III....................................... 144 III......................... 140 I.....4..........................................................................................................3.... QUICK START ....... Roll/Crawl Properties ................................................................................................................3........................................................................ FILE MENU .............................................1.............. 156 III..................................................................................................................................................... 144 III................................................... 146 III................... 152 II...................................................................................3..............1.4.... 150 II........... STATUS BAR ......... GETTING STARTED........ 138 III...... NETWORK MENU .....2............ 155 II..............2...... 168 6 ........ TOOLBAR .................................... 156 III.. 158 III............2................ Object List ................. Creating Objects ....................................3.................. 150 II.........................................1............................................................................ QUICK START .................. PRINT ........... 138 III.. 139 LISTBOX ......................III............................. Text Template Properties .......... GETTING STARTED........ 149 I....................... MENU BAR .............3........ OBJECT MENU ............................................................................................................. 141 II.......... 156 III........................ STATUS BAR ...... PREVIEW AREA ...........................................3....................................... INSTALLATION ........................4.....................................................4......................... USER INTERFACE ....................1.......................................... OBJECT PALETTE ..........9......2................................................................................................................... USER INTERFACE ..................................................................................................... INSTALLATION ........... 140 I.........1. 157 III...............................................................3....................................................... Analog Clock Properties .............2.............3........... 167 III.....................1............ 149 I................................................... 142 II..............................................................5....... 156 III......... 145 III.................. PLAYLIST MENU ..................... 140 I.......4.................. 155 III.................2....... TOOLBAR ............................4.......4.....4.......................................................4.....3...................................................................3.......... 143 III. 147 TITLEBOX .......................................................... Object Properties ...4..................................... CREDITS............................... EDIT MENU ............................................................................................... 157 III................. 141 II....... Still Picture Properties.

3...................... EXTRA ...4...................................... 184 II...........................AIRBOX GPI ........................... 172 III.............................. 188 APPENDIX 1 ...........5...............3...................................................... Scheduler Commands............. 173 III.....................6...........................................1...............................................................4................. 183 II..................4....................................... Direct Show Media Properties...................................... PROJECT MENU.................................................................................................................III.........................................4........................... 179 I....................................................... VIDEO CLIP INFO ....................................................4................ Object’s Settings .................................... 185 II..........4............................................ 182 I.......................................... 197 APPENDIX 4 – TYPICAL MPEG2 (PAL) ......................................................6.... 205 7 ............................................. Chat note objects.. 178 III............................................2...............................................................................3................4........................................4..........2.............. 200 GENERAL ...... General Options:............... 200 AIRBOX ..................................................................................................... 195 APPENDIX 3 – MPEG2 DECODING ............... TRIMMER PAGES ..... 187 SAFEBOX UPDATED....................1.... 186 II........................................ 183 II................................... 180 I........... 183 II...............1................................... 177 III.............7.... 202 CAPTUREBOX .2...4................................ 179 I.........................................4...........5.......... 199 APPENDIX 6 – TROUBLESHOOTING ... PREVIEW SCREEN .................................. 175 III..............4.. Objects List . 198 APPENDIX 5 – INTEGRATION OF AIRBOX WITH TITLEBOX ................3................. Network Options... 192 APPENDIX 2 – MPEG2 ENCODING ........................................... CLIP SHOTS...... 174 III......................... CLIP ZONES ......................... TRIMMER CONTROL...........5.....................5......................................................................................... 185 II............. Digital Clock Properties Updated ..........................................3.... STATUS BAR .............4........................ 170 III..................5................ 179 I...3........ 178 CLIP TRIMMER..... 176 III.............. 176 An Example:................................................ Scheduler...................................8......................................3..................... Output Options ...............................3.. 175 III........................................................................................... 174 III........................................4....... 177 III..... Banner Properties Updated .........................9... CLIP FILTERS .................... USER INTERFACE............................................................................ VOLUME CONTROL ..................4...........................1....................... CLIP STREAMS .................................2..........................

....... 207 APPENDIX 7 – DEMO VERSIONS LIMITATIONS UPDATED ............................................... 224 8 ............................................................................................ 209 GLOSSARY.......................................................................................................................................CAPTUREBOX ......................................................................................... 205 DATABOX ............... 208 APPENDIX 8 – LIGHT EDITIONS LIMITATIONS ........................................ 211 INDEX........................

tv General feedback: playbox@playbox. making sure they all receive adequate support and satisfaction. fine tuning and use of our products.PREFACE ________________________________ Dear PlayBox customer. This manual is structured into several sequential chapters. and we are anxiously looking forward to receiving your feedback. we are trying to stay close to our customers’ needs. We hope you’ll enjoy working with it.tv Helpdesk fax number: +359 2 9717700 9 . The ease of working with the PlayBox products results mainly from the suggestions and comments of our current respected customers. each aiming to ease the installation. Your opinion about our product is an exceptionally valuable source of information to us. Thank you for purchasing our product! We would like to assure you that you have chosen the most cost effective and versatile TV automation system on the market. As always. Pease send your questions. suggestions. and assistance requests to: support@playbox.

  A field name.   A page(tab) name follows. in a playlist or another grid) Field names. you can distinguish between the relevant menu categories also by the stiles. Except for arrows.ini file.e. a check box name or a value name follows. The file is located in C:\Program Files\DMT\AirBox For further information read Shortcuts reference book.  Direct quotations from the computer screen are presented as follows: Menu Items and commands Tab/Page names Column names (i. The VTR is controlled via RS-422. listed above. software.STYLE CONVENTIONS ________________________________  File names. 10 . documents or terms are written in italics            The data is written in the settings. check boxes  Buttons Screen readings are written in [square brackets] The keyboard keys are enclosed in < > signs The arrows. used in setting procedures mean as follows:   A menu item follows.

PLAY BOX MODULES The PlayBox system consists of several modules dedicated to separate applications that communicate with each other by proprietary protocols based on TCP/IP and UDP: AirBox This is the most important module of the system.or completely automated scheduled capturing. It allows converting MPEG2 IBP AVI files from Matrox platforms to MPEG2 program streams suitable for use in AirBox. or archived on a tape or a DVD. It can also be used as a production server with interactive capabilities such as Next. It also allows transferring a program to a tape precisely. The metadata entered during content description is preserved and sufficient for compiling playlists. CaptureBox It provides sophisticated capturing facilities for many platforms. GPI interface. Needless to say. and a number of other unique tools. Cue. using frame-accurate timecode positioning. Provided with appropriate platforms it even works 4 times faster than real-time via SDTI interface. etc. The module is designed for uninterrupted 24 hours / 7 days-a-week content playout from online media storage. VU/peak audio meters. It allows multiplexing more than one audio channel for multi-language facilities. Jump. It performs on-air playback and control. FinishBox LE This is a simple MPEG2 converter and multiplexer. it also provides semi. CaptureBox controls VTRs via RS-422 and automatically captures batch of scenes or programs. or temporary available from a removable media such as videotape or DVD. 11 . It also supports elementary MPEG2 streams such as m2v and mpa/mp2. DataBox DataBox represents the Database for metadata management of all kinds of content – either permanently available from online media. even if the media itself is not available.GENERAL INFORMATION ________________________________ I.

There is an additional facility for automated content removal from local storage when space is limited. SafeBox It is a simple content management tool. designed for arranging. It can also be synchronized to AirBox playout sequence. It allows automated content transfer from remote locations to a local storage and vice versa. 12 . previewing and trimming of the available content without any hardware decoder requirements. It allows insertion of text and dynamic graphic information in accordance to external data sources. multi-selection editing.ListBox A standalone playlist editor. undo/redo. printing. Text information is received and rendered into highquality graphics on-the-fly. TitleBox A fully automated or interactive graphics overlay. etc. It contains useful playlist features such as text searching.

please check the What’s New document online before downloading the new version. Others exchange information through IP-based communication.playbox. There are two types of keys – network (solid green body) and standard (transparent green body):  The Network keys work with “Network” software versions. The established workflow is the main factor. Their serial numbers start either with a “6-“ or with an “8-“. 13 . SOFTWARE UPDATES AND PROTECTION Software Updates Since all PlayBox modules are liable to constant development and improvement. COMMON CONFIGURATIONS PlayBox is a modular system and typically works in a network environment. It is possible to achieve an unlimited number of combinations. they are intended mainly for resellers.tv regularly for the newest versions. Software Protection All PlayBox modules are protected by means of hardware USB keys (also referred to as dongles). according to the specific topology of the network and all the suites involved. DataBox is the most versatile PlayBox module. The decision where to install a certain module depends on the module specifics and target application. Almost all other modules use metadata from the DataBox. please check our web site http://www. so they can be installed either on the same workstation or on network-connected workstations. That is because DataBox is the information backbone of the PlayBox system. It is possible to install several modules on a single workstation. The usual configurations are: PC1: AirBox + DataBox PC2: ListBox + DataBox PC3: TitleBox + DataBox Or PC1: AirBox + DataBox PC2: CaptureBox + DataBox PC3: TitleBox + DataBox III. since most of them exchange information through drag-n-dropping. You have to possess such a key in order to have a fully functional PlayBox module.II. There are no strict regulations on how to combine the modules. To make sure there is a reason to renew your current version.

keywords. language. for example if you install a Network version on a standard dongle. Most of these processes may coincide in time or their results may depend on each other. The PlayBox software installs the needed WIBU-Key drivers automatically. media description. 4. 14 . groups. DVD. while others (such as Matrox-based) export MPEG2 IBP AVI files that can be automatically converted into MPG by FinishBox LE. All this is done by various properties such as title. etc. Once classified content can be quickly searched. Media Input 1. country. Content Management DataBox is designated for classification and navigation through all the content available. AirBox is compatible with almost each MPEG2 stream generated. Most of these sources come in MPEG2 TS bouquets that have to be demultiplexed in order to extract the desired channel to be recorded. etc.).The Standard keys work with regular versions of the modules. Non-linear video editing workstation with MPEG2 or DV export. Also the DV export can be used for producing compatible DV files.  IV. It is always better to copy content coming from removable media into the online storage in order to achieve higher access speed and reliability. reading “Program needs WIBU-Key xxxx: 5259896”. you will get an error message on startup. which leads to different PlayBox configurations. 2. they are intended for end-users. There are several methods for content ingesting: Specialized hardware or software MPEG2 or DV encoders and platforms. It would be good to check the color and transparency type of your WIBU-Key and be sure that you download the relevant software version. The software bundled with satellite receivers usually performs this extraction. The latest approved version of the WIBU driver is also available on the PlayBox CD. All you have to do is install any PlayBox module and then plug the WIBU key in the USB port of the computer. Removable and distribution media (CD. Their serial numbers start either with a “7-“ or with a “9-“. etc. ID. The WIBU key will be installed automatically. distribution & usage rights. sorted and retrieved. credits. All this metadata is associated with every piece of visual program in DataBox. If you install the wrong version. WORKFLOW BASICS PlayBox as a TV automation system includes modules that automate particular processes in a typical TV organization. 3. External sources (DVB) – satellite feeds. CaptureBox provides automated content ingest by batch capturing via RS-422 Sony protocol or Firewire interface. Some NLE stations export directly into MPEG2 Program or Transport Streams (MPG).

15 . The on-air program can be started manually or automatically at particular time. ListBox is typically used by Program Editors to create playlists prior to airing time. Content Playout AirBox performs content playout. As opposed to AirBox. Excel export. changed during the actual playback. ListBox does not require a special hardware platform in order to preview content and playlist. search. print. The physical devices that convert content to a video signal. are called Decoders. interrupted when switching to other sources and so on. etc. model and price. Their technical features and functionality depend on the manufacturer. ListBox is a full blown playlist editor with sophisticated editing features such as multi-selection.Program Schedule Creation While on-air playlists can be created and edited in AirBox.

Do not hesitate to contact us at support@playbox. Thus. please examine the “FAQ” section at PlayBox website: http://www.tv – the answers of almost all questions that might arise during operation can be found there.playbox. 16 . The underlying sections will give you enough information to succeed in getting all the tasks done. all modules share the same visual and logical concept in order to minimize mistakes and confusion. Moreover. Each chapter is related to a particular module and describes its workflow and specifics in detail. Anyone with basic computer knowledge will find using PlayBox modules as easy as 1-2-3. In case something is not clear enough.tv. In order to fully utilize the system’s potential we recommend you to read carefully the following subchapters. we hope to make the operator’s learning process even easier – once acquainted with some of the modules the others should look quite familiar. Our support team will be at your disposal in case you have specific questions or a non-typical problem. A special training course or deep knowledge in computers is not strictly required.PlayBox system is designed to be easily used by everyone.

1. even on the same workstation. Installation Where to Install it? AirBox is usually installed on the on-air workstation or production server. a “What’s New” window will pop up. GETTING STARTED I. some already known issues or limitations are explained in it. eventually. If you need to view this document later. Software License AirBox LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE WIBU USB KEY.AIRBOX __________________________ I. After you launch the software for the first time. you can find it in Start Menu  Programs  Digital Media Technologies Ltd. requires an additional license purchase. The new functionality that has been added with the latest release and. WARNING! Each separate AirBox channel. That station must have at least one hardware output board installed. 17 . IT WILL NOT RUN WITHOUT THE KEY INSTALLED ON YOUR USB PORT.

tv for latest information about supported decoders). It is recommended to install driver versions that have been tested and approved by us in order to avoid potential issues. 7. The system requirements are strongly dependant on the used platform. 8. If you do not have any available. NOTE: Before choosing an operating system. Hardware Platform Driver Installation Please refer to your hardware vendor documentation for instructions on how to install the appropriate device drivers for your operating system. if your content is in MPEG2 format with 8 Mbit/sec bitrate then for 10 hours playback you will need 36GB of storage space. For your convenience. please check if there is an appropriate driver for the chosen decoder. 4. 6.2. Quick Start 1. I.4 GHz RAM: 512 MB HDD: Depends on the required playout time. bandwidth and reliability. VGA: DirectDraw compatible O/S: Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Home edition H/W: Compatible hardware platform (see our web site http://www. Click the PLAY button. use the sample clips from the PlayBox CD. Congratulations! You have just launched your first AirBox playout session! 18 . Select the playback module corresponding to your hardware platform. Launch AirBox. we have included tested driver versions and manuals of most of the AirBox supported platforms on the PlayBox installation CD. Make sure that you have suitable content available in the media folders. 2. Select the files you wish to playout and click the Open button. 5. Click the Add button. number of channels. 3. For example.playbox. If you need higher bandwidth and reliability consider using SCSI or/and RAID array. Verify all connections and start the workstation.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL Minimum System Requirements CPU: Intel Pentium 4@ 2.

there is an asterisk (*) after the playlist name. of course). please check whether the appropriate module is selected. the displayed total duration and end-time are NOT the real ones because the missing files will be skipped during the playback. Title Bar This is the topmost horizontal bar of the AirBox window.e. An exclamation mark (!) after Total Length and End At means that there are missing files in the playlist. The third field of the Status Bar shows the hardware control module that is currently used. 19 . USER INTERFACE The main interface window is divided into several areas: II. A question mark (?) after Total Length and End At means. End At field shows the time when the playlist will end (if not looped. If the playlist has been changed.2. Status Bar It is located in the lowest part of the AirBox window.). Total Length field shows the total playlist duration. II. It reads the AirBox channel number and the name of the currently executed playlist file. the actual total length of the playlist is smaller and the end-time is earlier than displayed). but not saved. but their duration is not calculated in the total duration (i. You can choose whether the duration of missing files should be included or excluded in the total length by checking the relevant box in Options  Settings  Show duration of missing files.1. MENU BAR The MENU BAR is described further in this section (See section III.e. If there is [None].AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. the duration of missing files is regarded as zero duration in the playlist). IMPORTANT: In case there is a question mark in the Total Length and End At fields. that there are missing files in the playlist and their duration is included in the total duration (i.

In some cases you might want to disable the window since it consumes additional resources from the system. Others depend on the specific brand of VGA card used. pops up a name-editing dialog box. The Video window can be moved outside the main window by checking “External video window” from the View Menu. Video Overlay Window It shows the currently playing video. you can view it again by checking “Show external video window” in the View Menu Some platforms do not provide such video overlay functionality or it is limited to the first AirBox channel only. Then you will have to uncheck “Show External Video Window” in the View Menu PLAYLIST NAME A double-click over this field. If you accidentally close the window.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. 20 .3.

Return is a new feature of the AirBox module.If Now is selected playback will start immediately. 21 . after assigned period of time. After the time is entered and the GO button is pressed. It is active only after a Jump has been executed. just click the Master counter.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. there is an option for manual start the Start Now button. Next – will stop the currently playing clip immediately and will switch to the next clip in playlist. another dialog box will appear to show countdown of time remaining to the program start. Of course. . Stop – playback termination. [Current] – shows the filename of the currently playing clip. Playback resumes from the same point on.4. Pause/Resume – temporary interruption and resuming of playback.  Jump – will terminate the currently playing clip immediately and will start playing the currently selected one regardless of its position in the grid. A dialog box appears to specify the start time . This will “shrink” the playlist and will show only clips after the current one. Playback Control Buttons  Master counter – shows the elapsed time of the current playout session.If At: [hour: min: sec] is selected. Delayed Play – starts time-delayed playback. playback will start later.       (!) TIP: To view the currently playing clip in the beginning of the Grid. Play – starts the playback. This is quite useful in case the played row is out of the visible grid range. use the arrow keys on your keyboard. . This happens by a smooth cut without any sound or visual artifacts. Use this button to return to the position before the last Jump. If you want to view those before it. Pressing the Stop button resets the counter. This function lets you start the playlist at a certain time or after a certain period.

You can activate it also by holding down the <Ctrl> key and pressing the Jump button at the same time. If you hit #. Playlist and Clip Buttons Most of these buttons actually duplicate the menu actions. Simply put. Thus you can change the order of clips even during the playlist execution. # . the playback will start from the very beginning of the playlist. Moreover.playlist position reset. If the current playlist has been started and then stopped. it is a kind of “playlist rewinding”. this check will loop the first clip to be played after resuming the playout.5. use this function to reset the hardware decoder. Besides. Arrows – clicking these buttons moves the currently selected clip up (before the previous clip) or down (after the next clip) accordingly. VOLUME SLIDER Probably the less noticeable part of the user interface. You can control it with the [+] and [–] numeric keys on your keyboard. Cue – the black triangle sign essentially executes Jump + Pause. playback will continue from the beginning of the playlist again. Clip Loop – if checked the currently playing clip will continue playing until unchecked. Since this is a machine-and-decoder-dependent function. It is used to compensate different sound volume in separate clips. the Volume slider is situated between the video window and the buttons. If under any circumstances (bad MPEG media or bad system setup) playback is distorted so badly that normal PLAY and STOP commands cannot help. 22 . which were already explained in the MENU BAR section. Use this for preparing a clip for playback while showing its first frame on the output. next time you hit the PLAY button. the already played clips are colored in grey and their order cannot be changed. the playlist will be “reset” and next time you hit PLAY. when the playback of the last clip in the playlist is complete.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. WARNING! This action will interrupt the playback! Playlist Loop – if checked. if you’re in stop mode. playback will start from the first black (not played yet) clip. you might have to increase the Cue Delay time in the Settings dialog box (OptionsSettingCue delay). Here is a description of the remaining buttons: Reset – resets the hardware driver. or just by dragging the slider.

23 . the executed operation is Move. competitive playout solutions tend to permanently lock the clip after the currently playing one. It is visible in PLAY and PAUSE modes only. The playback skips such files and plays the next available clip. Playlist Grid This is the main part of the interface dedicated to the playlist (play order) visualization. Just for comparison.6. If <Shift> is being held down during dragging. Jump. Move Up/Down will be applied to it.  Yellow bar – it is visible only while switching between clips. It shows which clip will be played next.  Light cyan bar outlines the playlist events when selected. If <Ctrl> is being held – the executed operation is Copy. In that moment.  Blue bar indicates the currently selected clip – all actions. The clip cannot be moved. the yellow clip is being actually fed into the decoder circuit. This happens during the last couple of seconds before the end of the previous clip. you can set the time interval for automatic check for missing files (OptionsSettingsMissing FilesCheck Missing files every […] sec). If the file is missing. By default.e.  Pink bar – outlines the currently playing clip. Clips are played in the sequence they are shown in the grid. Clips that have already been played-back are grey and cannot be moved and multi-trimmed. trimmed or deleted anymore. It allows dragging clips from one grid to another (from DataBox/ListBox to AirBox or from any folder to AirBox). i. Drag-n-Drop! One of the main features of the grid is the drag-n-drop functionality.  Red bar highlights those files in the playlist that are missing/invalid (not supported from the currently installed hardware). which reduces on-air flexibility and your last-minute decision freedom. To activate this part of the interface press <Alt>+<0> (zero) or just click on it.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. each internal (in the grid) operation is Move and the operation between two windows (similar to Windows Explorer) is Copy.

A detailed description of Clip Trimmer can be found further in this user’s manual. If you add the same clip to another playlist. Add/Insert Kramer Matrix Switcher event – adds/inserts a Kramer Matrix Switcher output event to the playlist. Add/Insert Logo preset – adds/inserts a logo preset. then the Clip Trimmer is invoked. Add/Insert TitleBox NetControl output event – adds/inserts a TitleBox NetControl output events to the playlist. A dialog box appears for defining the wait event.  Add/Insert Event. If the use of Clip Trimmer is not enabled. of this chapter).  Edit… – What will open depends on the line type.adds/inserts a GPI output event to the playlist. Add/Insert Kramer Switch event – adds/inserts a Kramer Switch output event to the playlist. Add/Insert Wait event – adds/inserts a wait event line to the playlist. Return event – adds/inserts a Return event in the playlist (see Events menu). Add/Insert Logo Off – adds/inserts “logo off” event. (See Events menu) 24 . If the line is an event.opens a dialog box for inserting playlist(s) or media file(s) before the currently selected clip. Add/Insert GPI Output event… . then events’ property window is invoked. Add/Insert Stop Cue event – adds/inserts a stop cue event line to playlist. Right mouse clicking over a line in the playlist invokes a pop-up menu of Playlist and Events commands:  Add… – opens a dialog box for adding playlist(s) or media file(s) to the end of the playlist. it will appear un-trimmed there. Add/Insert Stop event – adds/inserts a stop event line to playlist. Add/Insert VikinX Matrix Switcher Output will add/insert such an output event in the playlist. Add/Insert Logo on – adds/inserts a “logo on” event. If you trim a clip in the playlist. They correspond to the items in the Events Menu and have already been described there (See section III.  Insert… . A dialog box appears to set the logo event.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL Double-clicking over a clip invokes the Clip Trimmer (if it is enabled from Options  Settings  Use clip trimmer). There are arrows in the right ends of these two rows invoking pop-up menus related to different event types. A dialog box appears to define the event. the clip’s properties dialog will open.4. but valid ONLY for this playlist.  Delete – deletes the selected playlist row. If the line is a clip. the change will not be permanent.

contains data fed by DataBox. GRID COLUMNS: The columns’ order can be changed by drag-n-dropping them. if a clip has been trimmed. Naturally. shows the clip file name and clip’s IN /OUT timecode values in a pop-up window. Location – shows the file location (full path). If there has been a JUMP command or a clip has been trimmed during PLAY mode. Pointing with the mouse cursor at a line in the playlist. The Start Time column will be recalculated accordingly. The background color is the same as the actual category color. If for any reason a file is removed or renamed after the playlist is loaded.adds/inserts a comment line in the playlist. Duration . its actual duration will be reduced. The time refreshes every 2 seconds.shows the actual duration of each clip. describing the talents in the clip. During STOP mode. the starting times of the following clips will be recalculated accordingly. The duration of the part to be shown will be displayed in the playlist and will be used for calculation of starting times of the following clips. AirBox will skip it and will jump to the next available clip. Category . Start Time . Title .contains data from fields.shows each clip’s starting time. Star . You can define another field color for clip description in AirBox.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL  Add/Insert Note . Type . since many decoders do not allow different compression types to co-exist in the same playlist. this column shows the current time for the clip that will be played first when Play is pressed. Notes . The following clips hold positive times calculated according to the current time and the duration of the preceding clips.shows the clip’s title or filename.contains category information fed by DataBox. this column shows the actual starting time for each clip. using DataBox (OptionsDefault valuesColor to AirBox).colored in red. specified in DataBox (OptionsGeneralFields to AirBox Notes) 25 . it will be considered missing and hence . During PLAY mode.shows the type (such as MPEG) of the clip – this is quite useful to determine the major type of compression.

AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. This saving option is not active if you have not specified a Daily playlist folder (see Options menuStartUp OptionsStartUp playlist). In AirBox you can also open Dalet Automation XML playlists (*. WARNING! Loading a playlist on the currently playing AirBox window will stop the playback.  26 .1.  Load playlist – loads an existing playlist file (*. In fact. The saved file contains the names of all clips arranged by their serial numbers in the grid.saves the current playlist in compliance with the naming requirements for daily playlists. A warning dialog box will appear each time you try to do so.xml). File Menu Contains all playlist file-related commands: New Playlist – opens a new blank playlist for editing. Save as – saves the current playlist in a different file. as well as some additional attributes like playlist name. etc.  Save daily playlist… . loop status.ply). MENU BAR III. Save playlist – saves the current playlist file. this is the ListBox module.    Append playlist – appends another playlist to the end of the current playlist. Insert playlist – inserts another playlist in the current playlist.

Use [BULK] for the fields to be skipped (such as duration. Comment – fill in a symbol that might appear in the beginning of a row to be skipped from the playlist. 27 . Pick – press it to use the current template for the file you are going to import. When you’re ready. enter the template name.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL  Import tab-delimited file… – COMING SOON. In the Number of lines to be skipped cell. The skipped lines will be colored in red. Go to the upper most cell of each column. This menu item allows importing all kinds of tabdelimited text files. Use the Sample File button to select an example of the text file that will be imported with this template. All you have to do is “tell” AirBox what the different columns of the imported file contain. The OK button will not be active until you fill in all the strings. The dialog to the right appears at selecting this menu item. etc. Validation – press it if you’d like to be sure that your template is compatible with the file you’re going to import (a browse dialog will open for you to pint to that file). Delimiter – how are separated the columns in the file to be imported (tabs. click once in it and “tell” the Template Builder what does it contain (select from the drop-down list). Push the More button to create/configure your playlist template. enter the relevant figure (here – 4). If you already have some templates and you select one of them from the drop-down list. etc. push the Load button to load it (its settings will be displayed in the grid). The following dialog will open: In the Template Field.) to comply with the AirBox playlist structure. press Save.). semi-colons.

built in the Template builder). Press the browse button to point to the File to Import and click OK. 28 .AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL Back in the first dialog. another dialog will open for you to specify the default template folder and the template itself: Push the browse button next to each string and point them. select a template preset from the drop-down list (now you should have at leas one. If you press the Options button.

At a given time you start capturing this clip to the specified location and once there are a few seconds of it available on the storage. See also Using TDIR option in the Matrox Capture settings section. and if it is longer. Thus capturing and playback proceed simultaneously. The option of adding live videos from the network to the playlist. and the Timecode are also editable. as well as some additional playlist functions.   Add Add Media Files – adds clips or playlists at the end of current playlist. With this setting the file will be played to the exact time you had specified. it will be trimmed at that point. Live Stream. List Menu The list menu contains all commands.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III.2. choose the File type or leave it as auto. Star and Notes.1. You make the module remember every last string entry by checking the box next to its row. just check Set out point of live item. related to separate clips in the playlist. Selecting this item will open a dialog box to specify the relevant network information:   29 . Dummy clip invokes a special dialog box for adding ‘virtual’ clips to the end of the playlist. You can use this option when you want to build your playlist prior to receiving a clip whose properties are already known. The IN and OUT points. If you want to. III. Add Incomplete is similar to Add Dummy clip. it could be used right away. the Duration. AirBox marks it as valid clip and it can be played immediately. For example.2. but when it becomes available. File name and Location. AirBox will mark it as Missing. If you want to. If you want to predefine the file length despite its real length. but the clip you add can be currently captured. you create such an Incomplete clip entry in the playlist and check Live (delayed) file. Fill-in the Title. write the Category.

WARNING! This will interrupt the playback. You could also enter a command directly in the Command field. See the previous item for instructions. The settings are same as those in the Add Live Stream section. trimming and exporting part(s) of the currently selected clip. You can also set the Duration of the live stream connection. Clip Trimmer – invokes the Clip Trimmer. Clear List – removes all clips from the playlist. 30 .   Incomplete Clip will insert an incomplete clip BEFORE the selected row in the playlist.  Check the Multicast box if your server is set to multicasting.2. It allows previewing. Enter the IP address in the Address field and the port number in the relevant field. allows many users watch the same stream simultaneously.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL Select the Stream type from the available ones. i. Live Stream inserts a live stream connection before the selected row in the playlist. A warning dialog box will appear. III.  Insert dummy clip will insert a “virtual” clip BEFORE the selected one in the playlist. Delete Current from List – removes the currently selected clip from the playlist.e.2. See the Add Incomplete clip instructions. The Command is generated automatically as you write in the above fields.  Insert Insert Media Files – inserts clips or playlists BEFORE the currently selected clip.

The TC field is necessary when there are subtitles to be displayed together with the clip. This is a very useful feature for music video playlists. OUT and Duration strings contain the IN point. The Duration is calculated automatically form the IN and OUT values. 31 . The Green rectangle next to the Title string means that the file is available. You can change this color by double-clicking in the square. Loop – loops the playlist. check the Live (delayed) file check-box.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL Properties – opens the clip properties window. Besides. The colored square next to the Category string represents the color which will be displayed in the Category column of the playlist. If you are going to have live playback. The IN. these values will be saved as well. Specify the Duration of this live playback and then check the Set out point of live item box. If you save the playlist. if you change the Duration. This rectangle will turn red is the file is missing. In the Notes section you can write some notes about the clip. You can view and edit the File type. Randomize – randomizes the order of all unplayed clips in the playlist. All the properties you set in this window will be displayed in the playlist grid. You can change these values in order to make your clips shorter. OUT point and clip duration data. as time code is the reference for displaying them. You should also enter a TapeID value . the OUT point will adjust accordingly.read more in the SubtitleBox section. Use the check-boxes next to the strings to save the last string entries. Star and Category information in the relevant strings. further in this manual.

and a blue progress bar indicates what part of the clip has already passed.  Block Timer This is an event . they are shown in a pop-up list. A dropdown menu appears when you right-click in the clip timer. <Ctrl>+click on a Timer window will change its appearance. If there are several uniform events in the playlist.  View Menu Big Timer This is a system time clock. It is used to show the errors that have occurred during the AirBox work. If you uncheck it. Select Can Snap in it to lock the window position to the main window. arranged by their playlist line numbers so you can choose one of them. The color of the progress bar and of the digits can be changed in Options ColorsTimers by clicking on the relevant field there.3. the Clip timer will become an ordinary timer. [Wait Until] or until the [End of the playlist]. showing the elapsed time from the beginning of the clip. The Background is black. If you do not select an event.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III.related countdown timer. which will appear. It could be shown as digital or analog clock. The colors of the progress bar and the digits will reverse.  Clip Timer It is a clip-related countdown timer. Its accuracy depends on the MPEG2 decoder used.  Log Pressing this option in the View menu will open a Log View window. It shows how much time remains until the selected playlist event: [Stop]. A progress bar indicates how much of the time has already passed. staying on top of other windows. All windows can be freely resized and moved around the screen. [Stop Cue]. It shows exactly how much time remains till the end of currently playing clip. Check it out! Right clicking on any timer window opens a dropdown menu. The color of the progress bar and of the numbers can be set from Options ColorsTimers. the timer will show by default the time remaining till the end of the playlist. [Wait]. Its last row reads [Countdown down]. Just double click the timer and check the option from the context menu. 32 .

00. its items will be displayed in the grid below.00. Daily viewer is a brand new tool in AirBox that will help you in managing your daily playlists. There you can resize it either by pulling its edges with the mouse pointer or by right-clicking in it (a dropdown menu will suggest several options). if available. Arrange windows – auto arranges AirBox’s windows.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL   Logo Presets This will show/hide an additional window with buttons for fast switching of available logo presets. WARNING! Starting a daily playlist before its scheduled start time while in Daily playlist mode (Options  StartUp Options   Auto load daily playlist) may cause playback jams: at the time when a daily playlist should start according to the schedule. Timecode Timer Displays the timecode received from the LTC Reader plug-in. you can view all daily playlists. When you click once in a daily playlist row. AirBox will load it and start playing it from the beginning again!    External video window – check it to move the video window outside the main AirBox window. twelve hours. Double-click in a daily playlist will start it immediately. For example. Show external video window – If you’ve closed the external video window. In the area above. Pressing it once again will hide it. The number in the brackets in front of the start time represents the number of days remaining till the start. in AirBox. if there is a two in the brackets and then 12. this means that the playlist will start in two days. you can view it again by checking this line. 33 .

will be displayed.  Stop Cue event .  Wait event – stops the playback temporary. This function is useful for news and other interactive sessions. set in the preceding Logo Preset event.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III.  Logo Off event – stops displaying the logo.automatically stops the playlist playback and shows the first frame of the next clip. time code since the beginning of the playback). A dialog box appears to specify the type of “waiting”: Wait means that playback will stop and standby for a certain period (hh:mm:ss). The preset number corresponds to its number in the preset list in OptionsLogo OptionsLogo Presets. Wait Until means that playback will stop and automatically resume at a definite time (hh:mm:ss). 34 . which will be displayed after initiating the Logo on event.4. i. For example: 14:00:00 – the playback will start at 14:00:00 o’clock.  Wait TC Event – stops the playback automatically and resumes it at reaching the specified time code (according to the Master Counter.  Logo Preset event – sets a logo preset. If you check the Activate now box in the event dialog box. related to play list’s events.e. You can also choose to display the logo before or after the beginning of the following clip.  Logo On event – starts displaying the logo. For example: 00:01:00 – the playback will wait for 1 minute. The events that you could possibly add/insert are:  Stop event –stops the playlist playback automatically. Events Menu This menu contains commands. the logo will appear immediately. If there is no preceding Logo Preset event the first logo preset from the list (in OptionsLogo OptionsLogo Presets). The following message will be displayed on the AirBox window and the Master counter will continue running.

). Input – select the number of the desired switcher input. and then go back to the same position in the movie. For example. if you have a movie in your playlist and at a certain time you decide to jump to a block of commercials somewhere in the playlist. The moment at which a GPI event will be executed is defined using the previous and the next item in the playlist. insert a Return event after the commercials you’d like to play. Run event – fill-in the number of frames for “earlier” or “later” command to the switcher (see the GPI section). COM1 is selected. A dialog box appears to define the Kramer Switch commands: Machine – select the number of the device connected to the COM port (RS232).. A dialog box appears to define the output GPI commands. Up to 8 devices could be connected. By default. Thus.  35 .. Just fill the number of frames in the Run event field and choose “earlier” or “later” in the next field. the movie playback will resume after the end of the commercial break from the point before the jump.activates Kramer Switch output. You can select the COM-port from the available COM-ports listed in the main window area (EventsAdd Event/Insert EventGPI Output.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL   Return event – this event will return the playback at the position before a previously executed Jump. Kramer Switch event . you could correlate an event offset using the end of the previous clip (“earlier” execution) and the beginning of the following one (“later” execution). Therefore. GPI output event – activates the output GPI.

You can also set time offset in milliseconds . etc. When you choose to insert a Leitch Matrix event.). The Device list can be Saved and Loaded. Leitch Matrix Switcher output event is another optional plug-in for AirBox. #2 NONE. In Online mode the user can switch Inputs/Outputs in real time just by pressing the desired In/Out combination field in the Grid (the right part of window) area. if necessary. You can also set an offset of the event. In Online mode. Then specify the commands in the grid (it will reflect your Configure settings). but you can add more manually by double clicking a row in the list of devices (#1 NONE. If you choose the Command mode. A dialog box appears to define the Kramer Matrix Switcher commands: There are two main modes: Command and Online.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL  Kramer Matrix Switcher event activates the Kramer Matrix Switcher output. to specify the number of inputs and outputs in it) and click OK. Double-click on the relevant level to configure it (i. the dialog to the left is displayed. you can control the matrix switcher in real time. 36 . In Command mode the user selects the desired combination for the Matrix and after pressing OK the event is added to AirBox playlist.e. This window will appear: Video and Audio can be switched separately or together. The attached devices are automatically detected. you’ll have to press OK to insert the event in the playlist.

and the inputs’ and outputs’ numbers. While in this mode the switcher deals only with the existing levels. Right-clicking over a level invokes a pop-up menu that enables grouping it with another level or ungrouping the currently selected pairs. If Auto refresh is checked. you can specify the delay/precession of the event in milliseconds. you can update this information manually by pressing the Refresh button. If not checked.activates the Ocelot Switcher output dialog where you can define the switcher’s commands. In the Levels field are listed the available matrix levels which refer to digital video. If you want to delete all current commands (at all levels) use the Clear commands button. 37 . the grid will automatically reflect the matrix status each time some of the switcher’s Input/Output buttons is pressed. . You can control the device by adding/inserting an event into the AirBox playlist (the so called OFFLINE mode). analog audio and digital audio. Grouping is convenient for simultaneous switching of all levels in a group. or resetting all of them. Note that you can not do this in ONLINE mode. When in OFFLINE mode. To define inputs and outputs of the selected level. Double-click over a level will open a dialog where you can define its name. Select the ONLINE mode to execute your commands on-thefly. Double-clicking on a column/row header invokes a dialog for changing its label.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL Ocelot Switcher Event . Note that it works only in OFFLINE mode. The corresponding strings are situated in the lower left part of the window. mark and unmark the cross cells in the grid by single mouse-clicking.

It will guide you through creating a TitleBox Net Control Output event. After selecting the command.stops (“freezes”) the object(s) on the screen because of ceasing the exchange of information with the graphic buffer. There you can define more sophisticated settings of the event (offset.resets the project. The TitleBox command event will appear in AirBox playlist. Only projects that have been previously saved as templates in TitleBox (Project  OptionsNetworkExport) could be managed from AirBox. If you press the Advanced button in the left lower corner of the Wizard. press the OK button. duration.starts displaying the object(s). color. When you select EventsAdd Event/Insert EventTitleBoxNetCtrlOutput…a TitleBox Control Wizard will appear. the Configuration dialog box will open. and the desired action. For a complete description of AirBox with TitleBox integration. To activate a command. 38 . see Appendix 5. or a command for controlling a currently open project in TitleBox. Configuration dialog box: . or a combination between them. General Commands: Start .hides all objects from the screen because of clearing the graphic buffer.Property area: When you select a command. Follow the instructions and select the TitleBox project and/or object. it appears in the mid-window field. Stop . or even the text of the text objects). This command will stop and hide all the previously displayed objects. It could be a TitleBox object which you’d like to control from AirBox.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL  TitleBox Net Control output event This is actually a set of events which is used to manage objects in TitleBox. You can evoke the Wizard also by right-clicking on a playlist row and selecting the relevant command from the pop-up menu (Add Event/Insert EventTitleBoxNetCtrlOutput…). Reset . After it you can start the TitleBox again and be sure it will display only the newly-set object(s). .Template area Here you can see the commands [General Commands] and a list of available projects. This function would be useful if there have been other TitleBox events before the one you’d like to insert. Clear screen . but you’re not quite sure about the display status of some object(s). check the check box in front of its name.

The [Update] command is used for text items that have been changed after their recent use in AirBox.Text Property area – you can change the text of text objects in it. Offset field allows setting the time for earlier or later start of the object according to the next video clip. Choose the Command field (Play. you have to create that project in TitleBox first and export it as a template into Template folder (TitleBox/ Network Export project as template). . etc. Here is an Example: If you want to start Crawl1.Channels .). 39 . Roll1 and Sequence from the “football” project and after two clips to stop all objects and clear the screen. The Template folder is created automatically during TitleBox installation. you have to start the TitleBox Net Control Setup (Programs>DMT>AirBox – PLNetInst. . You can select one (or all of them) to be controlled from AirBox by checking the check box in front the objects. the playlist should look like this: IMPORTANT: To use TitleBox Net Control output event. set in TitleBox/Project OptionsNetwork.These correspond to TitleBox channel ID. offset. To control a project (its objects) from AirBox. you have to start your TitleBox with Net Control function (TitleBox Network Net Control) where available (the “light” TitleBox version does not support this option).exe). effects. Stop or Update). press the OK button. then after the installation of AirBox.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL When you select a TitleBox project its objects appear in the lower property window. In the following fields to the right you can see the object’s properties (duration. If the AirBox module is installed on a different computer or you need to change the folder’s location. After selecting the object(s). The TitleBox object event will appear in AirBox playlist.

AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL VikinX Matrix Switcher output event Similar to other matrix switchers. Kramer Switchers. specify the delay/precession of the event in milliseconds. NOTE: The GPI. above the currently selected line. While in Command mode. Add Note will add a comment line at the end of your playlist. Note – inserts a comment line in the playlist. VikinX has two operation modes: Command and Online. you can control the inputs/outputs in real time. just by pressing the relevant cell in the switcher grid. 40 . You can specify the number of inputs/outputs in the grid using the relevant buttons in the dialog. Leitch Matrix Switcher. In Online mode. VikinX Matrix Switcher and TitleBox Net Control Output events are part of the so called AirBox PRO option. you can configure the combination of the matrix switcher and push OK to add the event in the playlist. In its lower left part.

AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III.5. AirBox will broadcast the playlist time code. the block timer will read negative values. 41 . Auto popup LogView on error – displays the LogView window automatically. Enable IP Remote Control – enables or disables AirBox LAN remote control (using IP address). III. After this event is passed.com). the current clip timecode. the timer will remain fixed at the selected event in the list. Disable misusable (critical) shortcuts – replaces regular shortcuts of “dangerous” playback commands with alternative ones as follows: Playback From To Command <Space> Play <F5> <Alt>+<P> <P> <Alt>+<Y> Scheduled Play <F6> <Y> double <Esc> Stop <F7> <T> Pause <Space> <F8> <Ctrl>+<Space> Next <F9> <Alt>+<N> <N> <Alt>+<Space> Jump <F10> <Alt>+<J> <J> Transmit actual file timecode – AirBox transmits the actual file timecode embedded in the clip file. Disable trimming while playing – to restrict changes in the currently playing list.5. because the origin point will remain fixed in the past.subtitleplus. The upmost field contains general functionality options : Use Clip Trimmer – determines whether AirBox will open Clip Trimmer on double clicking a clip or not. If not checked.1. Options Menu The Options menu contains the most important settings of the AirBox module. This timecode can be used by external applications. such as SubTitle Plus (www. Auto change items in Block Timer list – the block timer will follow the subsequent events in the playlist (as chosen in the block timer dialog box). when an error occurs. Broadcast timecode over network – If this one is checked. Settings The Settings dialog box is divided into four fields. and the relative timecode (from the beginning) over the network (via UDP).

) while there is no accessible frame rate of a currently played file (for example AirBox is in Stop mode). It defines the delay (in milliseconds) before pausing on the first frame. the rows of all network-stored files in the playlist will become red (brown when selected). This is a precaution option: The playback could stop at network failure if all your content is remote. Decoder restarting may cause a few frames delay in playback. you will take the chance to trust your network. and hence the end time of the playlist will be reduced by the duration of all missing files. Restart playback after – resets the Hardware counter which is displayed at the Master (green) counter. the progress bar will be visible in the last 15 seconds of the total playout time.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL Show progress bar in block timer … sec. Auto save playlist – saves the playlist automatically at predefined intervals. or the playlist could end earlier – if some of your files are locally stored and the network fails. The next field. just the counter itself. If Reject is checked. Frame rate…fps – this setting is needed for estimating all kinds of time values (i. When Warn is checked. MPEG2 stream duration is limited to approx. This is needed because some decoders can not report the aspect ratio of playing content. This option is necessary due to various platform and format limitations. When Allow is checked. The playlist time will be recalculated accordingly if you have left the Show duration of missing files flag unchecked (see the Missing files section below). 26 hours. – defines the time before a clip’s end for showing the progress bar inside the block timer (see ViewBlock Timer). For instance if a 15-second value is set. Cue delay – this option concerns the Cue function (freeze at a first clip frame). For example. You’ll have to find the most suitable one for your setup by testing. skip them. end time. so you must reset the counter at least once every 26-th hour. etc. so this must be selected manually in order to preview content properly. A note [Remote file] will appear in the Type column. you will not be notified whether your files are remote or locally stored. During the rest of the time. This function is both decoder. Video preview aspect ratio – choose the aspect ratio of Video preview window. AirBox will label all remote files as missing. 42 . is designed to specify the procedure at inserting files that are not saved in the AirBox machine. Network Files Restrictions.e. since different decoders have different behavior regarding the first clip frame. These files are considered missing and will be skipped during playback. the progress bar will not be displayed. Thus.and computer-dependent. A note Rejected remote file [Remote file] will appear in the Type column. playlist duration. the rows of all network-stored files in the playlist will become dark-green.

It refers to handling of missing files. They appear in AirBox as red-colored lines. their real duration or zeroduration in the playlist can be visible.use this option to enable audio alarm if there are missing files in the playlist. This option refers to DataBox’ categories. you can add to it files that are not available at the online storage yet. If the Option is not checked. Check Missing Files every …sec. This will affect the playlist’s total duration and End time that are displayed in the Status Bar. every …sec. but there are missing files. If this Option is checked. You just have to check the Overlay channel number box in each AirBox’ Settings if you want to view it in the grid. The numbers of all subsequently open channels will be updated automatically. first channel is – a big figure of the AirBox channel will be displayed in the grid background.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL Missing files is the third field in the Settings dialog box. Overlay channel number. Thus. The last field in the Settings dialog box provides some User interface options. When you prepare your playlist. Color entire row by category – fills the entire row in the playlist with the Category-field color of the relevant clip. Log message if missing file exists – check it. You can change the category color in DataBox Options  Default values  Colors to AirBox. Audio alarm if missing file exists. an exclamation mark will appear after [Total Length] and [End at] in the Status Bar. It cannot be less than 16 pixels. NOTE: You will have to drag-n-drop entries from the DataBox grid into the AirBox grid to view their category colour. – this option is used for checking the playlist for missing files at a defined time interval. Show frame values in playlist – check it to view the number of frames at the end of the duration value in the Duration column. 43 . Row Height – defines the height of the row. to include the list of missing files in the log window. . Show duration of missing files – if there are any missing files in the playlist. you will be alerted if there are missing files or if you accidentally delete a clip related to the current playlist. Check this option to let AirBox auto-check whether the missing files are already available or not. You have to set the number of the first channel. a question mark will appear after [Total Length] and [End at] in the Status Bar.

Missing – missing file rows. Playing – currently played clip.5. Cued – a clip prepared for playback. Block timer – colors for the progress bar and letters in the Block Timer. Playlist colors: Background – playlist background. 44 . Note – note (comment) line. Colors This option allows users to define the colors used in AirBox’s playlist for color. Event – event rows. Clicking on the desired color box enables a combo-box for choosing a color or defining a custom one. Timer colors: Clip timer – colors for the progress bar and letters in the Clip Timer. You can define colors for Normal and for Selected status of each playlist row. All the screenshots in this User’s Manual are made with default AirBox colors and all explanations are accorded to them. Reset button resets the selected field to default colors.2. TC (timecode) timer – colors for the progress bar and letters in the TC Timer. as well as for timers.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III.coding.

AirBox may recognize some files as invalid if these files are not supported by the respective hardware decoder. it represents all features available to Hardware playback except the video signal output. DataPump MPEG Program Dumper – Dumps the playlist into a single MPEG2 file.3. a 15-minute playlist compiles as a single file for less than 10 minutes. NOTE: This feature works faster than the real-time.  Playback Modules Here you can choose the playback module to work with. depending on the installed hardware platform. If you have a dual-head video card with TV output.tv. there still are two choices: Software MPEG Playback – Software-based MPEG2 playback.5. The speed depends on the HDD performance and the input/output stream configuration. editing and joining of MPEG2 files. the video overlay can be monitored through it. Press the Configure button to configure further the module’s options.playbox. 45 .AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. Doing this does not require any hardware decoder. Select the desired module from the list of available modules in the upper window and assign it to the corresponding AirBox channel in the lower window by double clicking the module or by pressing the Set button. If there is no hardware platform installed. For example. Used mostly for demonstration purposes. Look up for the latest list of platforms supported by AirBox in http://www.tv or write to playbox@playbox. This option allows you to start multiple AirBox applications on different hardware decoders at the same workstation. NOTE: Depending on the selected module (plug-in). This feature can be used for simple cuts only – splicing.

streaming to multiple machines. define which communication port will be used for the streaming.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL IP Pump MPEG Program Dumper – An optional playback plug-in that sends the playback stream to a network IP address instead to a decoder. i.e. If you check Multicast. TTL stands for time-to-live for the Internet packets. The IP Pump uses a standard UDP mechanism for data transfer. WARNING! Consult your network administrator prior to changing these settings.contains the maximum time for buffering before initiating the streaming. Usually its first three digits are in between 224 and 239. you will have to enter a special multicast address in the Address field. The higher the TTL value. enter the IP address of the remote machine to receive the stream. 46 . NOTE: There is no VGA Overlay with this plug-in! NOTE: The IP Pump is an optional plug-in and is not a part of the standard AirBox module. In the Port field. By default it is “1” which is enough for local networks. Pressing the Configure… button in Options>Modules opens the IP Pump Setup window: In the Address field. Buffer Size field – here you can specify the size of the data packs to be sent along the network. By default it is 1234. Advance time . the longer the packets will “live” and pass through more routers.

. In the fields to the right you can define the desired AirBox function (Play. If you have a licensed GPI option. In order to use it. Ocelot Switcher Output. where AirBox works as a GPI Slave and GPI Output.GPI Input / Output You can find detailed information about AirBox GPI plug-ins in Appendix1. The GPI functionality is optional and is not a standard part of the AirBox module. TitleBox NetControl Output and VikinX Matrix Switcher output. too. Stop. The Pulse duration field defines the duration of the trigger pulse in milliseconds.  47 . Pause. The Pulse Level field defines the level of the trigger pulse (see Appendix 1) GPI Output: Here you have to specify the GPI groups and the respective COM ports. Kramer Matrix Switcher output. You can assign a specific COM port to each group. further in this manual. When the playback reaches a GPI event. etc. The Pulse Level field defines the level of the trigger pulse. Next.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL  Remote Control The available modules for remote control in AirBox are GPI (General Purpose Interface) Input and Output. The GPI output is performed via dedicated GPI output events in the playlist. Leitch Matrix Switcher output. as defined in the Pulse duration field. You can configure the GPI further by pressing the Configure button:  GPI Input: The GPI groups are listed in the left column. just insert a Stop or a Wait event after the GPI event. the GPI trigger is activated for as many milliseconds. where AirBox works as a GPI Master. There are two GPI modes: GPI Input. If you don’t want to continue the playback.) for the respective GPI. Resume. you can define which mode to be enabled (or both of them) by double clicking the Enabled field. you must obtain a relevant license. After that the playback continues. Kramer Switcher Output.

12. 6 or 4 outputs (video and audio).AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL . 8. They provide switching between 12. VS-601xl.com 48 . 10. Just select an/the appropriate COM port. They provide switching between 16. You can select it from the pop-up list of the available ones. This plug-in is also optional. VS-611. 6 or 4 video and balanced/unbalanced audio and video inputs to 16.Kramer Switcher Output The Kramer Switch module allows you to control the Kramer switchers from AirBox. 12.com The Kramer Switch output functionality is not a standard part of AirBox. 6 or 4 video and balanced/unbalanced audio inputs to one output (video and audio). VS-801xl. 10.Baud rate – the baud rate of the port. In the configuration window. For more information about Kramer switchers see: http://www.kramerelectronics. The switchers may be controlled by a PC. You can select it from the available COM-ports. VS-811. 8.Model –the model of the Kramer Switcher used.COM Port – the COM-port used for connecting to the switcher. . AirBox supports the following series of Kramer switchers: VS-1201xl. VS-411. . AirBox supports the entire series of Kramer matrix switchers. The matrixes are controlled via RS232 and/or RS485/422 communication ports. . You can select it from the pop-up list.Protocol – the protocol used for the respective switcher. . VS-1011.Kramer Matrix Switcher Output Kramer Matrix Switcher module allows you to control the Kramer Matrix Switchers from AirBox. 8.kramerelectronics. For more detailed information about various Kramer matrix switchers look up in: http://www. If you have a license to use Kramer Switch output. you can define: . VS-1001xl. VS-401xl and VS-1211. 10. via RS-232 and/or RS485/422 communication ports. Enable and Configure it.

check Telnet Mode and enter the relevant IP Address in the bottom of the configuration dialog. For a detailed step-by-step guide on how to integrate TitleBox with AirBox look up in APPENDIX 5 – Integration of AirBox with TitleBox 49 . You can set the connection port and a default TitleBox channel.Read timeout – the time for which the switcher reports status. For the COM port mode you should set:: . either through the computer COM port or using the IP address of the matrix (via TCP/IP protocol). If you choose to control the matrix via the TCP/IP protocol. .Read delay – the delay between the command given to the matrix switcher and its execution. The configuration window is divided into two areas – one per each mode. The only thing you can set in their configuration window is the COM port used for connecting to the switcher. .Ocelot Switcher output Another make of switchers supported by AirBox are the Ocelot switchers.COM Port – the COM-port you will use for connecting to the switcher. All available COM-ports are listed in the drop-down list. By default it is 50 ms and it is not recommended to change this value. This is done by using external events (TitleBox net control output events) in AirBox.Baud rate – set the information carrying capacity of the port measured in bits/s .Leitch Matrix Switcher output Now AirBox can control Leitch Matrix Switchers.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL .TitleBox Net Control output This function allows managing the TitleBox objects from AirBox. Press the Configure button to further configure the TitleBox control. . to which AirBox control refers. . You will find the available COM ports in the dropdown list.

.Read delay – the delay between the command given to the switcher and its response.VGA or TV Output activation.NetStream 2000:  Video/Audio – video (brightness.  Overlay . Pressing the Configure button will open a Logo configuration dialog box.  Logo This option allows displaying a logo over the clips played in AirBox. where you can define Logo Presets to be used later in AirBox (see Logo Options. .AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL .VikinX Matrix Switcher Output Pressing the Configure… button while the VikingX Switcher row is selected will evoke a setup dialog where you can define: . By default it is 50 ms and it is not recommended to change this value.  TV Out .VGA mode . You may select a logo source from the list and assign it to the appropriate AirBox channel. saturation) and audio (balance. III.5.4.COM Port – Use the drop-down list of available COMports to select the one that will be connected to the switcher. display mode.Overlay VGA window adjustment. 50 . this window contains information corresponding to the available hardware and allows its fine-tuning.TV mode: TV standard. Module Options . further in the manual). TV output. digital or analogue) settings. Module Options Depending on the currently active plug-in. contrast.

51 . in order to be recognized by AirBox.mpg. Transparency fix – as is  Logo Presets – defines the logo presets. NOTE: For proper functioning of Matrox Hardware under Windows OS you should work with administrator account privileges. the alpha key file should have the same name. when the first Matrox device (first Matrox DigiServer channel) from AirBoxModules is selected.  Use audio monitor – permits using an audio monitor. For example: d:\dir\video. Make sure to uncheck the relevant check-box during installation (It is checked by default!) – see the screenshot to the right. It is active. we recommend not installing the Stradis DirectShow filter during Stradis hardware installation. there is one analogue video output which can be used for displaying video or for displaying alpha channel.key. It is active. check the option Use Analog Video Output or Use Alpha Channel Analog Video output. NOTE: As AirBox installs automatically all needed Elecard filters. the original MPEG file will be used as an alpha file. Depending on your wish.mpg and d:\dir\video. if the box “Use audio monitor” is checked. If you use Alpha channel output.  Restart Matrox hardware on exit – restarts Matrox hardware after the last AirBox exit. size and GOP-structure as the primary video mpeg file and should be located in the same folder. Module Options for Matrox DigiServer: In Matrox DigiServer. If the keyfile is not found.Stradis:     Video standard – PAL or NTSC Synch Mode – use the system clock or not.  Select audio monitoring – selects an audio monitor.  Select audio output – selects audio output.  Use alpha channel – permits using an alpha channel.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL Module Options . VITC Enable – enable VITC or not.  GenLock – use of Genlock.

In the Logo tab. The two files could be stored on different drives but their directory paths must be the same.” before the extension of the alpha file. optionally. you can select the video input and the Audio pair. Live input will transmit life input as set in the Input Properties tab. you can specify their location in the Key Files Drive field.mpg”. you can set the logo fade in / fade out properties. In the Alpha/Key Settings field you can activate keying (Use Alpha Channel Mode) and decide upon the mixing type: Internal or External. Pressing the Logo Presets button will open the Configure Logo Presets dialog box (see the next section).key. Your alpha file must have the same name as the video file that is going to be mixed with. In the Output Control tab. If your key files are not in the same directory as the relevant MPEG files.mpg” its key file should be “Sports_Opening. NOTE: You CANNOT mix files with and files without alpha channel in the same playlist! 52 . you should insert “. .key. For example. flipping of images and/or fields. if the video file is “Sports_Opening. you can adjust the output settings: In the Show on Stop area. In the Input Properties tab.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL Module Options for Decklink There are three tabs in this setup dialog: General is used for setting the video standard (PAL/NTSC) and. Module Options for Matrox DigiSuite LX This setup dialog box contains two pages: Input properties and Output control. Besides. Last frame will freeze the last frame of the last played clip. you can define what will be displayed when AirBox is in Stop mode.

On startup – these options are used to define the logo appearing in AirBox. press the Load button and select a file. Matte Color – this is the background color which should be mixed with transparent colors and thus removed from the logo image. after starting the module.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III.Show button – shows the logo.).Last used – If there are no Logo preset events in the playlist. Invert alpha – inverts alpha key. It is active during the configuration session only. Display . . but TGA. logo images are set for displaying in AirBox (their position on the screen. . JPG and PSD files are widely supported too. NOTE: The picture format depends on the decoder. the last used logo will appear after starting AirBox. If you approve it.5. transparency. press the Apply button to save the logo file in the preset list.Auto show box – shows the logo automatically. etc. Logo Options In this configuration dialog. To load the preset. Logo Preset – shows a list of logo presets available for use. Position – shows the logo position on the screen. 53 . The 32-bit RGBA files are most preferable.Hide button – hides the logo.Logo 1 – If there are no Logo preset events in the playlist number 1 will appear after starting AirBox. .No Logo –no logo appears after starting AirBox. . .5. It will appear in the Preview area.

You may browse for path with the button. and then fill in the New folder field with the new location. If you have built a playlist and for some reason the file locations have been changed. There are two view options: if you check Show only files that exist in new folder. the file paths are relocated and this is reflected in the playlist immediately. Media Folders This module is intended for relocating file paths. here you can quickly relocate file paths.5. 54 .AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. It is easily done: fill in the Old folder field with the original location. only files available in the New folder will be displayed in the list underneath. When the Change button is pressed.6. Show only missing files displays only those files from the playlist that are Missing. The selection modes are self-explanatory and give opportunity for fast selecting/deselecting of all items. inverse and missing only selection.

Thus. and make some logmanagement settings. If Daily log is selected. should they be created on a Daily basis or not. your AsRun log will not be generated. Your AsRun log files will be saved there. System events. You can choose between 14 and 100 days. a new column header line will appear in the logs. Frames will display the number of frames at the end of all time-containing values. Below the list of info fields. Note that this information is clip-related. a subfolder AsRun is created in the AirBox\Logs directory. any time you change the log configuration (through the check-boxes and red arrows) and click OK. Here is an example of how an AsRun Log looks: The Log file is generated in simple Tab-delimited text format. This setting is necessary in case you wish to log 24-hour periods that start at your wish (for example at 2:00 o’clock instead of 0:00) Delete system logs every days – this option will help you in managing your log files. Column headers represent a line in the log that displays the log configuration under it. text editors. A directory Logs is created at AirBox installation.7. In the Log Options dialog box you can choose what Playlist Entry Information will be included in the logs.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III.5. Events and Event type are logged in the System log regardless of your wish. deleting the ones older than the number of days set using the arrows. You can add info fields by checking the relevant check boxes in the list situated in the upper half of the dialog box. The System logs are always daily despite this setting. a new AsRun Log file will be created each new day. otherwise. not the original duration. 55 . You can also choose the periodicity of log files – Daily log or aggregated files. When you first check this box. It can be easily imported to various applications. there are several selectable options: If Log into file is checked. It contains a System subfolder by default. a Log file will be created. The Day start at field determines when to start the new log. Errors. etc. Log actual played time – checking this box will include in your log a field displaying the actually played time. Log Options AirBox generates two types of log files: System logs and an AsRun log. Use the red arrows to change the order in which a chosen item will be placed in the Log file.

ply”. The Daily playlist folder gives an opportunity for some simple scheduling of playlists. 2003 stands for the year. The interval for saving the last position is changeable.8.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. Choose a folder in which you will place the daily playlists by filling-in its path or just browse for it with the button. Last played item from the last playlist – applies playback status to the last running object before stopping. 56 . Last used commands AirBox to use the last used one. StartUp Options Here you can find useful options for setting the AirBox’ behaviour on startup: StartUp Playlist. Only files with such naming structure will be automatically played when AirBox is running in this mode. They require specific naming structure in order to be played on the desired date and time. how playlists will be reloaded and two system options. Last played position in the last played item – functions as of the two previous options and even more – remembers the position in the last item to resume status exactly at it. There you will save the playlists you want to schedule. resumes the last playback status of AirBox depending on the status in which it was before stopping. 11_20 is for MM_DD (month_day) and 14_00_00 is HH_MM_SS (hour_minutes_seconds). Playback recovery options Here you can specify what AirBox should do in case of accidental restart /abnormal termination of the module. StartUp playlist Here you can choose a startup playlist for AirBox. This option doubles the first one – and can not be selected without it. An example name is “2003_11_20_14_00_00. Now you can use the Save daily playlist feature in the AirBox File menu to achieve this naming automatically. New loads blank playlist. various Playback recovery options. Catch up with schedule according the system clock – this option allows playlist recovery after a failure and synchronizing it with the system clock.5. Open invokes a query to choose playlist from a location at will. The Following options are available: Last playback status (Play / Pause / Stop) – if chosen.

I. After power supply recovery at 10:00 AirBox will resume playback from the point in the playlist that is 10:00 hours away from its beginning (considering 00:00:00 as initial start time). at 9:30 occurs a power failure that persists till 10:00. after a power failure AirBox will resume playback from that point in the playlist which corresponds to the initial time (00:00:00) plus the current system clock time. The wait event’s value should be set in hours from 00:00:00 to the desired start time of your play list. Reload playlist Here you can adjust settings related to the way AirBox handles playlist reloading. The two options are: Reload playlist immediately or Wait for playing clip end.e. you should compile your playlists starting with wait events. for the above example. you should bare in mind that the default start time for all playlists in AirBox is 00:00:00 hours. Thus in case of power failure. Reload playlist on file change – auto reloads the current playlist. even if they are available.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL When setting this option. but StartUp playlist is set to Daily playlist folder then AirBox will play only the first relevant playlist for this day and will not auto load the next ones. your playlist should start with a “wait for 9 hours” event. If this option is not checked. For example: you start your playlist manually at 9:00 o’clock. In the When reload playlist field you can choose how AirBox should reload playlists when needed. Auto load daily playlist – this option commands AirBox to auto load the available daily playlists. taking 00:00:00 as initial time. AirBox will account for the initial time set by you and will resume playback from the point that corresponds to the power recovery time. Therefore if you have started your playlist manually. In order to overcome this. In short. at 10:00 o’clock AirBox will start from the point which corresponds to one hour after the beginning of the playlist (set to 9:00 o’clock through a wait event). AirBox will “forward” the playlist to the time point of power supply recovery. 57 . . if in the meantime it has been changed and saved by another user. You can choose also between two system options: Launch AirBox on Windows start and Start minimized. for the above example.e. i.

Current timecode is shown in the TC Timer. and in the lower zone you can specify the properties of each metadata field. Choose Sample rate and Channels and Start the module.5. You could also browse for existing files. without using a database. In this setting dialog box. Filename Parser This module will allow AirBox to Parse names of files and get information from them. Let us pick a sample filename like BGMusic-Lime_Biscuit-The_road_to_heaven-live. The setup of this module is quite simple. Have a look at the following example to make it clear to yourself. you have to “tell” AirBox how you name files.9.10.5. The dialog box is divided in three zones – the uppermost zone provides options to write/browse for a sample filename and to set general “parsing rules” – presets. You will make the most advantage of this feature if you have standard naming structure for your clips. or choose from the drop-down list of filenames after pushing the arrow button to the right of the Filename field. you may use it to read LTC timecode from your transport device. III.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. so it will “know” what do certain parts of your filenames mean. This is a possible way to name music files – create a preset (let us call it Music): 58 . The drop-down list contains all filenames of the currently loaded playlist.mpg – write it in the Filename field. It provides an easy way to use information included in the file name. in the middle zone you should “explain” the naming structure by including metadata fields. Choose your sound card device from the list. TC Options If you have license to use the LTC reader plug-in module and a DirectSound compatible sound card.

you can start “explaining” the naming rules. another separator (-). This is not a problem if you choose to name your files with fixed length per each field – check the Fixed length flag and specify the number of characters using the arrows. at it represents the space within the separate fields. If you want to skip some information in the filename. In our example. SEPARATOR. will not include them in the field).AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL Push the Plus button situated to the right of the Active file parser preset Field . exclude the lower dash from the separators list.in our case Lime_Biscuit will become Lime Biscuit. SEPARATOR. and Note. You can rename it later on by pushing the Recycle button. a name of a performer/star (Lime_Biscuit). Once you have entered the preset name. To the right of the Metadata fields list you can see a number of checkboxes that provide some conversion options: Convert all underscores to spaces . The corresponding characters in the Filename field will be highlighted in blue so that you can see your setting. Category. the filename parser will ignore the relevant characters (i. one more separator (-) and a note (live). Title. Here. 59 . This is what you have to “tell” AirBox.e. You have to set your preferences for each metadata field separately (select it by clicking on it). you have to specify the length of each metadata field. If you uncheck some of them. a separator (-). but otherwise you can use it for downloaded files (their names often happen to contain “%20” instead spaces) ALL CAPS will turn all letters in the filename in upper case. Star. select NONE in the relevant position. A dialog will prompt you to name the new preset. a title (The_road_to_heaven). Do not forget to set which symbols are regarded as separators (check the relevant boxes in the lower left corner). by the file format. a category name (Music). use the Plus and Minus buttons to add/remove parser fields. All first caps – capitalizes the first letter of each word in the relevant metadata field Capitalize first only – capitalizes only the first letter of the relevant metadata filed Include letters and Include numbers are checked by default. followed of course. Finally. or delete it by pushing the Minus button. Let us go back to the sample filename – you can see that its structure contains (in order of appearance) an abbreviation (BG). SEPARATOR. Convert all “%20” to spaces is not applicable in our case. you have to enter one by one: Note (it will stand for the abbreviation BG). Here is how: In the Metadata options area. You can select from the available types of fields.

Append … at end field gives an opportunity to add character(s) to the end of a metadata field. the Filename Parser will display Lime Biscuit*** in the playlist grid. Some fields. Category. may provide information to SubTitle Plus (www. 60 . you will need some Pad symbol to fill-in the gab.subtitleplus. You can change the positions of the metadata fields by drag-ndropping them. thus telling AirBox to ignore the remaining symbols to the separator. Lime_Biscuit contains 12 symbols. [SEPARATOR]…” instead of “… [Star]. [SEPARATOR]…”. When you use the filename parser to display subtitles. you must set it first and then add files to the playlist. If you have set a Minimum value. you will have to insert a NONE field before the SEPARATOR field. fill in the same Tape ID as of the subtitle file.  Check the Variable length flag in the lower right field and then specify minimum and/or maximum characters to be included in the relevant metadata field. the Metadata fields list should contain “… [Star]. [NONE].. THE MODULE CANNOT PARSE AN ALREADY LOADED PLAYLIST because it already contains all the metadata for the relevant clips included in it. are displayed directly in the AirBox grid. NOTE: In order to use the potentialities of the Filename parser module.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL However setting variable lengths is a little bit trickier. like Tape ID for example.com) or SubtitleBox (see below) for proper display of corresponding subtitles. In the clip’s properties dialog. but the relevant metadata field contains more characters. If we set a maximum of 9 symbols for the Star field. etc. Back to our example. If we set minimum value 15 and Pad symbol (*) for the Star field. like Title. If you have set a Maximum value. Others. but the relevant metadata field contains fewer characters. you have to create a preset with naming structure [Tape ID] and [SEPARATOR] and the fields’ length should be set to Variable.

sub (created by our own subtitling software SubTitle Plus – www. It is best to use SubtitleBox with Subtitle Plus native files.11. Enable the plug-in and configure it. it just shows your subtitles synchronized with your clips. Otherwise AirBox will not display the subtitles. according to the playlist loaded in AirBox. and the language you are using. fill in the same Tape ID as of the subtitle file. so SubtitleBox could “know” when to load and display the subtitles for each clip.subtitleplus. They contain the TapeID (the reference to the corresponding media files). SubtitleBox SubtitleBox is an optional plug-in to the AirBox module.pac and *. Press the Show filelist button to view all the subtitle files contained in the Watch directory: SubtitleBox will take care of broadcasting your subtitles. NOTE: Make sure the Filename parser is set to a preset with naming structure [Tape ID] and [SEPARATOR] before you load the playlist. In the clip’s properties dialog.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. 61 .ebu. It enables using subtitles together with your running clips. *.com). Check the Variable length flag. The only things you need to specify in the Configure… dialog box are the folder where your subtitles are (Watch directory). The supported subtitle formats are *. SubtitleBox does not provide any editing options.5.

To set the Master. running on two different workstations with a network connection between them. Further. Playback offset value compensates the delay that may occur because of some additional factors (e. In order to use this option. Check  Synchronize the playlist also if you want to check the playlists at each resynchronization. This is useful for example if you want to auto switch your Kramer switcher to another input/output. start AirBox and check  Enable IP remote control in Options  Settings. The lower half of this window concerns the synchronization between the Backup machine and the Master machine. Do not forget to check the  Synchronization box if you need it.12. go to Options Mirror Mode Configure… and do the following settings in the Mirror connection setup window: In the topmost string. The Mirror mode provides options for full duplication of your main playout unit against system failures such a power loss. To set the Backup. the Backup machine will not be able to connect to the Master. For the sake of convenience these are called Master and Backup hereafter. 62 . Mirror Mode The Mirror mode is another optional plug-in available for AirBox. the Backup machine will have to resynchronize to the Master. you can set the maximum allowable difference (in seconds) between the Master and the Backup playback. etc. They communicate via TCP/IP protocol. when Master unit fails or recovers.g.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. point out the Remote machine by writing its IP address or name. the network delay or Mirror playback reaction time). Otherwise. Set the frequency of position enquiries to be send by the Backup to the Master in the Check position every…sec cell. If the difference goes beyond this value. broken motherboard or RAM. you must have two licenses for AirBox. some external event can be executed on connection/disconnection of the relevant module.5. Any changes in the Master playlist will be reflected in the Backup playlist as well. If needed.

RAM. In the AirBox – AirBox + AB backup scenario you just have to uncheck the Mirror mode on the backup machine and continue working with the full AirBox functionality. etc. there are two possible scenarios in case an unrecoverable failure of the Master AirBox occurs (the master AirBox server is down for a long period. faulty motherboard. Obviously the master machine does not need a dongle while faulty. or a mixed approach. Benefit: backup channel always runs in perfect sync and you can switch over to it any time. then you should install SafeBox (see the SafeBox section for details) on the Backup AirBox machine. Idle Mode: The Backup AirBox is staying idle and listening to the master AirBox activity. Failure actions: There are two possibilities to backup your AirBox: to have one fully functional AirBox installed on the Master machine and one AB backup (with limited functionality) on the other machine. According to this configuration.): 1. In both modes whenever you change anything in the master AirBox playlist. If the Master AirBox stops responding. The easiest approach is to use content ONLY from a redundant network-attached storage (NAS) or SAN. Disadvantage: It might take up to a second to start the playback process from the point it was terminated. the backup AirBox does the same automatically. 63 . Disadvantage: This will double the network traffic since the two AirBox servers will be transferring data at the same time.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL The Mirror mode has two major sub-modes: Full Mode: The Backup and the Master AirBox are always playing the same content simultaneously. 2. In the AirBox – AB backup scenario you need to attach the full AirBox dongle to the backup AirBox server and use the Change Dongles menu command in order to operate the full functionality on the backup machine. you will always use content files that are stored either on local or on network storage. CPU. or to have two fully functional AirBoxes on both machines. plus one AirBox backup license on your Backup machine. Regardless the mode. If you are going to use local content files. Benefit: No additional network traffic overhead. Its task will be to replicate (copy) automatically the new-coming content from the Master AirBox’ local storage to the local storage of the Backup AirBox. This means that the Backup AirBox will use the same file path as Master AirBox to locate the content files. the Backup AirBox will start playing immediately from the same point at which the Master AirBox was last.

To restrict the access of all other users to the Settings menu. you just have to log off. III. The idea for password protection of some settings that might be crucial to playback performance is already a fact. password will be required. then write your password twice – in the second and in the third cell (in case you’re interested. and Mirror mode (Full mode. the Admin… aims at raising the security of AirBox. New password and Confirm password. you will have to go to the Change password row. The only exceptions are Colours (as they will not affect playback). Idle mode. After you have inserted the new dongle. Almost all menu items will become inaccessible – at any attempt to enter. WARNING! Make sure not to forget the password! Now you are already logged on. If you decide not to use password protection anymore.13. press Options Mirror Mode Change Dongle and the new dongle will be recognized. Clicking in it will open a dialog box containing three cells – Old password. just go to Change password and write the old password in the relevant field. but without configuring).5. 64 .AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL The Change dongles option will allow you to change the dongle (WIBU-key) of a currently playing unit without interrupting the work of the AirBox. your password can contain up to 256 symbols). Thus if your Master machine is down and you need the full functionality on your Backup machine. Admin… A brand new menu item. Now you can go on working. Leave the New password and Confirm password fields empty and click OK. Click OK. Change dongles. As this is the first time you enter this menu item. The first time you enter this menu item. leave the first cell empty. you will be able to change the dongle on the latter without interrupting its playback. Enable SubtitleBox (but not Configure).

situated over the master counter (Play/Stop/Pause/Next/Jump). enter the desired clip’s number and then release the <Ctrl+Shift>.  Logo presets: here you can select logo presets through clicking them. Using it you can jump to a clip at your will. 65 .AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. The commands are executed just by clicking the appropriate field. To switch presets press and hold down <Ctrl>. related to playback and logo presets.  Jump to: Here you can see just a shortcut – Ctrl+Shift+#. The available commands are:  Playback commands: this menu duplicates the playback control buttons. Commands Menu This menu contains commands. To your convenience. Just press and hold down <Ctrl+Shift>.6. their shortcuts are shown besides – Ctrl+#. enter the desired preset number and release the <Ctrl>.

AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. registration. company and select your country from the list. It can gather almost all the information needed for PlayBox support team in order to provide you with the prompt answers.7. Press this button to scan the entire system. The PlayBox Doctor will generate a list of all files stored on your HDD. Include this information in your PlayBox Doctor report if you suspect that some files might be disturbing the smooth running of the module. PlayBox Doctor: this module gives the opportunity to generate easily complete problem reports. PlayBox Help: opens the AirBox context-sensitive help. When you have selected the relevant entries from the drop-down lists to the left.you can choose one of them or you can describe your situation and queries manually in the Additional information field. The following two fields are filled in automatically. Push the Add button to insert the problem description in the report. In the bottom is displayed the name of currently selected platform. mode. WIBU Box number. If you scan PlayBox files and add this info to your PlayBox Doctor report. we could understand whether you have some missing DMT’s files or you have some extra 66 . etc. You must fill in your name. About…: Displays the “About” box of the AirBox module. Help Menu This menu contains useful information about the AirBox module and the possibilities for getting technical support from us. without too many questions about your system configuration. The fields you have to fill-in are self explanatory and the information is auto-collected at startup. It contains useful information such as: module version. push the Apply button to insert this information in the report. In the Diagnostics field to the right there is a list of the most common problems . e-mail. Choose the hardware platform you use in this module and specify the installed driver version. It is integrated in each PlayBox module.

When sending us screenshots. pictures or files that you would like to send to us. Using the Get Filter button. If your attachments are bigger than 4 MB. Do not forget to fill in your contact information and send us the generated report either directly (if internet connection is available) or save it as a single file and send it later. Automatically attaches the log files of the currently selected module. This helps us trace the history and behaviour of this application. please. You will have to contact us on support@playbox. If you have problems with an MPEG file. we will receive information about its structure. 67 .AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL files that should not be in this patch on your computer.tv to get an up-loader name and password. please upload your files on our FTP. Thus. will add to your report information about the filters used in the running module. Then select the window you want to shoot and go on with the PlayBox Doctor report. Sometimes these files could cause problems. Attach any documents. press this button and browse for the file. This provides us with information about the database open in your DataBox module. use the Screenshot button instead of sending us separately prepared pictures. Just press this button and PlayBox Doctor will minimize automatically. The “Get Base” button is active only when you choose DataBox in the PlayBox module field.

The VDCP Manager is available as an optional license. divided into three fields and a button bar below them. connected to the VDCP Manager (up to 127 as it was already mentioned). Currently one VDCP unit could maintain up to 127 players (AirBox) and later will also maintain up to 127 recorders (CaptureBox). The widest field represents a list of the available/visible clips in the network. and could be purchased separately. each with a check box in front. The next field contains list of the AirBox modules. tracking of the relevant connection for availability of such a controller is activated. If the COM port is checked. In the first field are listed the available COM ports. 68 . This network connection is performed through AirBox network API. and the instance number (the number of the AirBox). Pushing the New AirBox button will invoke an input dialog box to specify the Machine Address on the network (the IP address). The instance number is written after the colon. The VDCP Manager interface is quite simple. The number of the VDCP controllers that can be connected to the VDCP Manager depends on the available COM ports.AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL IV. VDCP Manager AirBox can now be controlled through peripheral VDCP controllers with the help of the VDCP Manager.

AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL

You can add new clips by pushing the

Add button (to include existing clips) or
you can activate the Watch Folder function (to add new-coming clips automatically) in the Set up dialog box. If you push the Add button, a dialog box will open to lead you through the procedure. Fill in the Associated File field (the file name of the clip); the ID and Long ID fields are filled-in automatically; and so are the In, Out and Duration fields (values in seconds). You can trim the clip from here using the arrows next to the relevant field. The Type of a file determines which players can play it. Type [0] means that all players can play it. Pushing the Set Up button opens a setup dialog box. The Watch Folder page is used for setting the automated populating of clip list. Check the  Use Watch Folder box to activate this function.  Process Subfolders is checked if the watched folder contains any subfolders that you would like to be watched as well. Truncate Long IDs to […] chars. The VDCP controllers usually support clip names of 8(standard/short IDs) or 32(long IDs) chars. This function is used for controllers that support limited length of long IDs, so you have to truncate them. Some controllers get “confused” by short-duration clips, therefore you might need the Only clips longer than […] sec. function. The General page contains some additional settings: The set Frame Rate will determine the TC frame rate. The Video Outputs field contains a list of all possible outputs. Check the available ones. The Log button will show the log of the VDCP communication.  Log Ret will log the responses to the VDCP commands  Freq. mess. If not checked will filter out some frequent VDCP messages.

69

AIRBOX: USER’S MANUAL

The View Players button will show all active AirBox controller windows. Each AirBox controller window caption contains the AirBox number (1 to 127). In it, you can see the communication log of the relevant AirBox. The Execute button, the text field next to it and the playback control buttons are used for testing the connection with AirBox. Pressing the Machine button will bring up the input dialog box for the network address. The green lights in front of it mean that the connection with AirBox is established. If the lights are red, the AirBox is not accessible, a sign [Disconnected] will appear in the status bar. The New Player button activates a kind of virtual player, used for testing the execution of commands.

__________________________
70

CAPTUREBOX

__________________________
I. GETTING STARTED
CaptureBox provides sophisticated DV/MPEG2 capturing.

I.1. Installation
Where to Install it?
CaptureBox is typically installed on workstations with VTRs or other video sources, from which MPEG2 or DV content will be ingested. Depending on the platform used, it could be an independent workstation or the AirBox workstation itself.

Previous Versions
Prior to installing CaptureBox, you should uninstall any previous CaptureBox versions (Control Panel  Add/Remove Programs DMT CaptureBox).

Software License

CaptureBox LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE WIBU USB KEY. IT WILL NOT RUN WITHOUT THE KEY INSTALLED ON YOUR USB PORT.
Minimum System Requirements
CPU: Intel Pentium IV 2 GHz RAM: 512 MB HDD: Depends on the required bandwidth, reliability and platform requirements. If you want higher bandwidth and reliability consider using SCSI or/and RAID instead of regular IDE drives. O/S: Windows Windows XP Professional or Home edition VGA: DirectDraw compatible H/W: Supported encoder platform (see the list of the supported hardware encoders on the web site http://www.playbox.tv)

71

CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL

I.2. Quick Start
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Connect the video source signal to your hardware platform input; Launch CaptureBox; Select the media folder you wish to capture to; Fill in the Tape ID or Channel field; Type the file name you want to capture the content to; Click the Manual Capture button.

Congratulations! You have just captured your first CaptureBox clip!

72

 In the Capture Format tab you can basically specify the Input Type (SDTI or SDI). The GOP size field represents the interval between I-frames. If you select AVI. The Ref.3. showing the selected pattern. Q-factors. You can set the video resolution in the Dimensions field. 73 . GOP type – I or IBP (below. you will have to further select its format – DV (the additional settings for it are in the field below) or MPEG2. NOTE: For proper functioning of the Matrox hardware you should work under an administrator account. The following field is an example (IBBPBBPBBPBB). You cannot set Q-factors and bit rate simultaneously.do not use them if you already have set some bit rate. Check Move files to MultiMux watch folder check it. and the capture format (AV or MPEG). Capture Settings MATROX DIGISERVER SDTI CAPTURE SETTINGS: There are two tabs in this setup window – Capture Format and Preview. period field represents the interval between P-frames. and the bit rate type. you will have to specify the Out Cable and the Audio Group below. you can also specify its size and reference period).  In the Preview tab you can set the preview video and audio output. If you check SDI Embedded. Audio Group and Channel Pair fields are active for embedded audio SDI audio only. The fields below are designed for audio settings: Audio Input – enter the relevant input type. the video sampling profile.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL I. The prevalent part of this tab is dedicated to MPEG format settings: Bit rate. if you want to move automatically the captured file to the MultiMux watch folder. The audio group can contain up to 4 channel pairs. defined in FinishBox (our multiplexing product).

you will need it later. Thus. launch AirBox and right-click over the grid. In the bottom of the Clip Properties dialog. Push Play. 13. There should be at least 5 seconds between the capture start and the start of the incomplete file’s playback. 11. Use <Ctrl + C> to copy the file name. Load a playlist. The incomplete file is marked Missing as it still does not exist. To use the TDIR option.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL TDIR is a Matrox released option that can run only with Matrox DigiSuite LX or DTV platforms. Prepare your schedule-capturing list and insert the incomplete (still missing) clips in the AirBox playlist accordingly. In the Clip Properties dialog. right-click and select Insert/Incomplete clip. 5. 9. In the Options  Settings dialog. When AirBox starts playing the next clip. run CaptureBox and prepare for capturing . It will be played for 20 seconds as specified in its properties. if you have set the correct timing. All AVI files are supported. You can also Add/Insert Incomplete clips from the List menu. set Check Missing every [3] seconds and click OK.make the necessary settings and fill in the Clip Data fields. 3. Open AirBox 2. but it will still be marked as missing as it was inserted before it was created. Browse for the location to which the clip will be captured. type in the title and the filename. In it. browse and point the location where the clip will be captured. Type the Filename and copy it (<Ctrl + C>). the clip name and the filename (Use Ctrl + V to paste from AirBox) 10. Use <Ctrl + V> to paste the filename you copied from AirBox. Here is an example of setting this function. a clip that is still being captured will be played back in AirBox for 20 seconds: 1. WARNING: You must have SCSI attached HDDs for the TDIR option. In the Clip Properties dialog. 6. 4. CaptureBox will start capturing and AirBox will start playing back the relevant clips. check  Live (delayed) file and clip and set duration (). Otherwise capturing will fail. TIP: You could fully automate this process using the CaptureBox scheduler. 12. Next. 7. you will need it later in CaptureBox. you can go to CaptureBox and stop capturing. A few seconds later the incomplete clip will become available. Open CaptureBox and specify the Folder you will capture to. Start manual capturing. Using the Time Delay – Instant Replay option (TDIR) 74 . Choose Add/Insert Incomplete clip from the context menu. 8. Start the playback. Then set the Duration to [20] seconds.

. aspect ratio. In the lowest part of the window you can set the audio stream properties. Flip fields and Preview checks are optional. Determine the file structure by setting the GOP size and the reference period. If you need preview – check the Use Preview box. MOBIUS CAPTURE SETTINGS: There are two setting modes for Mobius – Advanced and Simple. . 75 . video format. So. the audio and video bitrate values. NTSC and HDTV standards. check Use File Split and set the Split time (in minutes). In the first field you can choose the Video Standard – here are listed the most popular PAL. If you choose the second one. If you select the first one. the currently captured scenes will be shown in the preview window. The section below is related to video settings – stream type. when you capture in MPEG format – point whether it should be MPEG-1 or MPEG-2. you can check the output files format (elementary and/or multiplexed). bitrate. the fields of the captured material will be flipped.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL DECKLINK CAPTURE SETTINGS: Make the preferred capture settings for your Decklink platform in this dialog. If you want to divide your file in parts. Then set the file format – it can be MPEG or AVI. video input.  For MPEG-2 you set the bitrate type (constant or variable). video file type (if it is MPEG – specify its structure as well). In Simple mode. resolution.Decklink supports encoding to both MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 files. You can reset to the default values using the relevant button.  For MPEG-1 you can set the bitrate value. the color sampling and the aspect ratio.For AVI capturing you can define the AVI format (DV or uncompressed) and the audio format (interleaved or noninterleaved).

76 .CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL Use the Advanced Mode button to “fine-tune” your capture details. select between elementary or/and multiplexed streams. Use the Default button to reset all values back to the most commonly used settings.Video reprocessing – this part of the advanced setup is also intuitive enough.Multiplexer – this part is dedicated to the MPEG structure. It is recommended not to change these values unless you are sure that you really know what to do. . . Still. do not make any changes if not sure. The Advanced setup window is divided in three main sections: .Output files – again.

the aspect ratio (4:3 or 16:9) and the relevant values for the video and the audio bitrate. The “Flip fields” and “Use preview” options have self-explanatory labels. NTSC. Here you can also determine the GOP size and the reference period of the MPEG file.) and specify the capture format – AVI or MPEG. etc. In addition for AVI capturing you can select the AVI format (DV or Uncompressed) and the Audio Format (Interleaved or Non-interleaved). 77 . the color sampling (4:2:0 or 4:2:2).CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL FIREWIRE CAPTURE SETTINGS: In the FireWire Setup dialog. For MPEG format there are more settings to precise: the bitrate type (constant or variable). choose the video standard (PAL.

Then activate batch capturing. the module is in “record” mode. In this mode.1. The operator should only change the tapes when prompted.1. You can define a list of scenes with their start and end timecode values. 78 .1. Batch Grid The automated batch capture grid occupies a large part of the window. Many people refer to this function as “batch capturing”. CaptureBox captures the desired scenes automatically from the corresponding tapes.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. you can choose a batch of scenes from tapes. Capture Mode When the Capture Page is active. USER INTERFACE II. II. collect them in the batch capture list or record every single scene manually from a VTR.

from which the particular clip will be captured. a red mark  appears. Currently only VA is supported. During this session. The dot can be added by clicking that field. it will be renamed to Duration and the column will show the clips’ durations.  The Red X button excludes the selected clip from the next capture session. The dot can be removed by clicking that field.If the clip is captured. a green mark appears. you will include the clip in the next capturing session.e. a yellow hand appears. but there is no option for VTR control. as follows: .  The Sort button sorts the list by Tape ID and then by Start Timecode.If the clip is not included in the next capture session. Thus.  The In column shows the initial timecode. .  The Capture button starts an automated capture session. what information does each column contain. when clip capturing will start. all clips.  The Out column shows the timecode. . 79 . Grid buttons:  The Blue dot button includes the selected clip in the next capture session.  Delimited List Import button enables loading all types of tab-delimited text files into the batch grid. the blue dot is missing. a “camera” appears.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL Grid Columns:  Status column shows the current state of each clip. marked with a blue dot will be captured to the hard drive.  The Sync button synchronizes the list. .If the clip is not captured yet. Thus. or there has been a problem during the capturing process. folder and file. This will exclude the clip from the next capturing session. You will have to create templates to “tell” CaptureBox what is the structure of your tabdelimited file. All clips with “not captured” status are included in the next capture session. .  Comments column shows the comments (if any) for each clip. If you click on the grey bar named Out.  Tape column shows the ID of the tape. and the timecode values in the In and Out columns are zeroes. when clip capturing will stop. If you click the grey bar named Clip Name.If the clip is included in the next capture session list. . You can enter your comments in the relevant string of the clip data field to the right. it will change to File Name and the column will display the destination full path where the clip will be stored – hard disk name.  The Clip Name column shows the clip names. the batch capture process is simplified and optimized.If the clip has been successfully captured. audio (A) or both (VA).If not the whole clip has been captured. i. a blue dot  appears.  Mode column shows what will be captured for the particular clip – video (V).

browse for the file you would like to import using the selected template and click OK. Besides. select it from the Comment: drop-down list. Then. NOTE: The OK button will not be active until you fill in all the strings in this dialog. specify the Delimiter from the dropdown list. Finally. enter their number in the Number of lines to skip string. If there is a symbol in the beginning of each row in the file that you would like to skip. they will be listed in the drop-down list. You can either Insert. you will have to create a template first. Push the Sample File button to open an example file for your template. 80 . Push the More button to open the Template Builder: First select the Template Folder – all the templates you create will be stored there until you change it. Append or Load the file. The skipped lines will be colored in red. If there are some rows in the beginning of the file that you would like to skip. Select the Action you would like to execute from the drop-down list. At opening this dialog for the first time. The latter action will delete all previously loaded entries in the batch grid. the Type the template name in the Template: string.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL Pressing the Delimited List Import button will open a dialog for you to specify the template to use when loading your file: The Template preset drop-down list contains all the templates stored in the Template Folder (see the Template Builder description below). If the selected Tmpl Folder already contains some template files.

If the list has been changed and not saved. an asterisk (*) appears after its name. You can un-assign a category either through un-checking it in the METADATA list or by selecting [Clear] from the drop-down list. Press the Validate button to check if the current template matches a specific file. MPEG2 AVI.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL Now that you have set the basic rules. duration) are copied in the right-hand panel for use in the next entry of the batch capture list. During editing. file name. Select [Bulk] if you wish to skip a column. right after CaptureBox. By pressing the Apply button. Then select one metadata category from the drop-down list to assign it to the relevant column. The Clone button “clones” the selected clip. your changes are applied in the list. Once assigned. in/out point. Back in the Import Tab Delimited Playlist dialog. The clip data are loaded into the Data Fields and you can edit them. The Compensation button – invokes a dialog box for defining the capturing delay compensation (in frames). when you capture from video recorder. All you have to do is browse for the folder and select the template from the dropdown list (See the dialog to the right). Its data (title. press the Save button to store it in the Templates folder. If you already have some templates and you select one of them from the drop-down list. The button next to the Default template string will open the Template Builder to create a new template or modify the selected one. the Edit button transforms to Cancel and the Add to List button transforms to Apply. push the Options button to set a default template folder and a default template. Just change the different points and there it is! The Edit button allows changes in the description of a clip. When the preset is ready. you will have to “explain” the Template Builder what information each column contains: Go to a column’s header and click in it. The Delete button removes the selected clip from the list. To load the currently selected template in the Template preset string.cap file). press the Pick button. which can be used later.      81 . preliminary prepared in CaptureBox with clips ready for capturing (*. This functionality could save time for entering almost the same data for each row. The name of the current list is written in the title bar of the module. You can also edit a clip by double-clicking it.  The Folder button allows loading a list. this category will be checked in the METADATA list to the left. On some stations you must manually compensate for some delays when capturing to different formats (DV. MPG). The Diskette button saves the current capture list to a file. push the Load button to load it (its settings will be displayed in the grid).

semi-colon (. See the Capture Settings section above for description of some platforms’ setting dialog boxes.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL     The Setup button – shows a window for setting up Inputs/Outputs of device. The Device select button – allows choosing the capture device or software simulation of capturing (Sample Driver).). if you enter "100". It is possible to type a value only in the In field and define Duration.1. Under the field you can see information about the free disk space at the selected disk. The Abort button – it activates during the capture preparing only. Press it to stop the capture. Clip Data fields This field is designated for clip description. NOTE: The setup dialog box may vary. 82 . If you don't enter any disjunctive symbols in the timecode. For example. this will be interpreted as a number of frames. if you enter 1.2. dot (. the initial and the final timecode. The value of Out field will be calculated automatically. you could use either of the following separators: colon ( : ). It is not possible to include the clip in the batch capture list if you have not specified the clip location on the hard drive.2. Pressing the browse button next to it opens a browse dialog box where you can specify a hard disk and a folder for storing the captured clip.  Tape ID – In this field you must type the ID of the source tape from which will be captured the footage. you do not need to enter the leading zeros in any field. this will be interpreted as 4 seconds (00:00:04:00). II. you will be asked for tapes by their IDs. If you choose to fill-in the information manually.). the tape ID.  Duration – Its value is automatically calculated by subtracting In from Out values. The Speed field shows the speed of capturing. according to the platform type. during the batch capture session.3 this will be translated to 00:01:02:03. This is very important if you work with more than one tape or the tape timecode is not continuous. Of course.) or comma (. capturing format and specific settings. as well as the clip name. For example. The Timecode field – shows the timecode during capturing.  Folder – this field describes the folder in which files will be captured. Later.  In and Out fields specify the initial and the final timecode respectively.

If left empty. Plus button increases the File name. Lock button    is used for locking the Title to the File name. there is an option to enter a new name manually. For your convenience.clears all clip data. the letter will change in alphabetical order. 83 . File Name stands for the name under which the captured clip will be saved. the field will be automatically filled-in with the Title. If the filename does not end with a number. the new filename will be [Sofib]. Title represents the name of the clip. If left empty. if the last clip name was [Sofia]. If the last clip name was [Capture001].     In the Comment field you could enter a description or a comment. but with a letter. pointing down.e. and so on. the next filename would be [Capture002].Pressing the red arrow. the filename is automatically increased by pressing the Plus button or Add to List button.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL To the right of In. i. will rewind the tape exactly to the timecode. Clear Clip button . will insert the current timecode from the VTR in the corresponding field . Out and Duration fields are situated buttons that function as follows: .Pressing the black arrow.e. Of course. any changes in the clip name will affect the file name and vice versa. pointing left. i. Your comment will be displayed in the relevant Grid column. Out and Duration fields. then [Sofic] and so on. the field will be automatically filled-in with the corresponding File name. Add to List button .transfers the clip data into the batch capture list (on the left) and most of the clip fields are cleared except Tape ID and Folder. The File name increases. concerning the particular scene sequence. written in the corresponding field .Pressing the Clear button clears all values in the In.

File Name and Folder fields are filled-in. 84 .CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. press the Abort button. the clip data is automatically moved into the batch list and marked as captured. except when a blue dot is set in front of it.3. Out.1. There is no need of re-capturing. Each of the available outputs can be used for preview control. There are several ways to preview the incoming material. All the clips from the list that are marked with a blue dot will be captured in ascending sequence of the timecodes and tape IDs.  Capturing   There are three methods to start capturing: Manual Capture –this mode can be applied only if Tape ID. Press Finish button to stop the capture. but the clip will be marked as not fully captured. If the In field contains timecode. Auto Capture (automated single capture) – this mode can be started only if the Tape ID. The Batch Capture is in fact automated capturing of a series of scenes. pressing this button will open a window for manual start of the capturing. Clip data will be moved to the batch list. Activate it with the Capture button. To stop the capturing manually. File Name and Folder fields are filled-in. During this process. You can select one in the Preview field. no special attendance is necessary– one should only take care of changing the tapes when prompted. which is situated under the clip list. If the timecode field In is empty. When capturing is finished. CaptureBox will start counting down for the same amount of time before commencing the capture. In.

In this mode. you can choose scene sequences from the hard drive and record them to a VTR. which increases automatically on every new compilation. as XXXXX is a consecutive number.2. Just follow these simple steps: .1. It is necessary to compile such effects as a single stream video. . 85 . Therefore we have created a compilation method. By default.Press Get from Incite button (it is located in the upper left area). 1 hour is transferred for 15 minutes) it is not possible to generate such a stream from footage.The compilation begins. II.2. An option for SDTI stream compilation is also included in case a 4xSDTI transfer to tape is needed.When the Incite project has ended.Start the project playback from Incite and press Start button.A dialog box will appear to guide you through the procedure. . which contains real-time effects. SDTI Compilation As the SDTI interface transfers data 4 times faster than the real-time. . . (i. which works in real-time (it requires DigiSuite DTV and DigiServer both installed simultaneously on the system). Print-to Tape This CaptureBox page takes care of the “playback” (“print-to-tape”) mode. press the Stop button.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. .e. these files are named “InciteXXXXX”.The compiled file is positioned automatically and ready for recording to a SDTI VTR.

86 . Still and Stop buttons at the bottom are used for file playback control.). The Tape In field shows where the tape recording will start. You can fill the field in either by entering a timecode value or by pressing the black-arrow button on the right.). press the C button. To preserve a record that already exists on the tape and to continue recording from a particular tape position. enter the timecode of this position in the field and press the red-arrow button. Usually there is some delay between a command (start or stop) and its actual execution.. Tape Out field shows where the tape recording will end.You do not need to enter the leading zeroes in any field.a period (. or the black-arrow buttons to the right. Pressing a red-arrow button will position the file play head to the corresponding timecode. To change the values in these fields. These settings should be determined after the Trial And Error method and are expressed in frames. It depends on both the platform and the system configuration . defined in the field. If the tape is blank. preview or start playback to tape when there is no VTR remote control.WAV) corresponding to the video file. To clear the field. typing “15.2..  Print-to-Tape         Clip In and Clip Out fields are automatically filledin with [00:00:00:00] and [XX:XX:XX:XX] respectively. use the numeric keypad. Pressing the latter will enter the current timecode from the VTR. To enter a timecode value manually you could use either of the following separators – colon (:). To change the file. different file types can cause different delays. The value in the Duration field is calculated automatically (Duration = Clip Out – Clip In) When a file has been selected for printing to tape.” will automatically be translated to “00:15:00:00”. recording will start from the current VTR position. If there is an audio file (. where the second one stands for timecode position of the last clip frame. If the Tape In field is empty. its name is displayed in the Video File field. semi-colon (. The REC button starts simultaneously the file playback and VTR recording. The Compensation button invokes the Capturing Delay Compensation dialog box. enter [00:00:00:00] in this field. For example.) or a comma (. its name is automatically entered in the Audio File field. Besides. Pressing the latter will enter the timecode of the current position in the file. The Play. The VTR will automatically rewind the tape to the corresponding position.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. press the browse button next to it.2.

the Matrox DigiServer settings are video output. as well as whether to Flip image and/or Fields. quarter or DC PAL/NTSC formats).CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL  The Setup button invokes different setting windows for the different devices. half. 87 . In the DeckLink settings dialog you can select the Video standard. audio monitoring and speed of recording. audio output. For example. Pressing the Decoder Setup button invokes a dialog for specifying the recording quality by setting the Decoding resolution (full.

3. End – shows the time. The Schedule mode interface is similar to the Capture mode interface. Schedule When the Schedule page is active. In this mode.1. you can define a capturing schedule and start capturing later. you can capture VTR signals as well. Grid Columns:       Type – shows the schedule type: daily. If you click on the grey bar named End. Start – shows the initial time. II.3. In it. the module is in “schedule” mode. it will change to Duration and the column will display clip durations. Channel – the TV channel which will be captured. when clip capturing will end. This feature is used mainly for capturing TV and satellite signals. There are several differences in Clip description and Grid buttons. Schedule Grid The grid occupies a large part of the window. Mode – shows what will be captured for the particular clip – video (V). you can create a list of scenes that will be captured after activating the scheduling. etc. Date – the starting date of each capture item. weekly. but of course.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. audio (A) or both (VA). when clip capturing will start. 88 .

It will have the same data as that of the selected entry. Press the Arm button after creating the schedule list.2.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL       Clip Name – contains clip names. The Channel field contains information about the TV channel which will be captured. the Edit button transforms to Cancel and Add to List button transforms to Apply. The changes you’ve made will be applied in the list by pressing the Apply button. in/out point. If you click the grey bar called Clip Name it will change to File Name and the column will display the destination pull path where the clip will be stored – hard disk name. Under the field. Pressing the browse button next to it opens a browse dialog box. this button performs a kind of “tomorrow cloning”. opens a dialog box in which you can create the list of up to 16 channels. You can add a new channel by double clicking in an empty line and typing the channel 89 . folder and file. Comments – shows the comments for each clip. You can also edit a clip in the list by double-clicking it. If you select a grid entry and press the Tomorrow button a new entry to the list will be created. Clone “clones” the selected clip. You can select it from the list of available channels in the left string or create it in the field next to it.3. Edit button changes the description of the clip. During editing. This will activate the schedule capturing mode. The capturing will automatically start and stop. Its data (type. channel. The clip data are loaded into the Data Fields and you can change them.  Clip Data Fields   The Folder field contains information about the file location of the captured clip. you can see information about the free disk space on the selected hard drive. In short. duration) is copied for use in the next clip to be included in the schedule list. but its starting day will be on the following day. Pressing the satellite button. Delete button removes the selected clip from the list.   II. where you can specify a hard disk and a folder for storing the clip. Grid buttons: Show days field – here you can define how many days in advance (counting from today) you will see in the schedule list. according to the “Start time” and “End time” values entered in the list.

The Lock button is used for locking the Clip name to the File name. Clear Clip button clears all clip data. Comment . independent of the entered schedule list. Crash Capture button begins capturing of the available channel immediately and without confirmation. irrespective of the entered schedule list.specify the initial and the final time respectively. it will be automatically filled with the Clip name. Date – the capture starting date. Type – defines the frequency of capturing – once. every day. Prepare Capture – opens a dialog box asking for confirmation to begin capturing of the available channel instantly. The Clip Name field contains the name of the clip you’re going to capture. If you leave the field empty. it will be automatically filled-in with the corresponding file name.contains a description or a comment. If the field is left empty. concerning the particular scene sequence. or every week. Start time/End time . Any changes you make in either field will automatically occur in the other. In the File Name field you can enter a name for the captured file.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL             name. 90 . Duration – Its value is automatically calculated by subtracting Start from End values. Add to List button transfers the clip data into the schedule capture list.

Indicator >> or << . .REC Delay – the delay (in frames) of the clip start towards the video recording start. . . . . red).Play Delay – the delay (in frames) of the video recorder start towards the capturing start. where you can define: .RecInh a record-protected tape is inserted in the VTR.EOT (End-Of-Tape) alarms that the tape is about to end or that the tape end has actually been reached. T*R (corrected timecode). It is possible to attach this window to the main one by moving it close to any of its edges. . .4. . etc.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. the VTR control panel will move together with the main window. RS-422 Controller Each VTR with RS-422 SONY protocol can be used in CaptureBox.TCR has three possible states – TCR (normally read timecode).  Tape/AutoEE and Full EE – depending on VTR’s model and its settings.Tape indicates that there is a tape in the VTR. the text [Not Connected] will appear.Local indicates that the VTR is in local control mode and the remote control is not possible. Switching the active window between the main and this one is done by pressing the <Insert> key.Com port – the port to which the recorder is connected. Thus. a combination of these keys opens the E-E circuitry. .Timecode type – the type of the timecode: LTC.  Config button – opens a Configuration Dialog box. Here is a short description of the VTR control panel:  The VTR brand is displayed in the window’s caption. VITC.CueUp indicator – shows that the timecode positioning command has been successfully completed.  Display Indicators: . If there is no connection. TCG (generated timecode.Servo indicator shows that playback is running stable. This setting refers to the Capture mode.shows the tape roll direction. . This setting refers to the Print-to-tape mode. .Preroll indicator informs that the VTR is executing a preroll command. 91 .

if you want to see the RS422 window always on top. If the box is checked you can set the REC delay and REC latency fields and the Video recorder edit mode.  The “Shuttle” slider – allows shuttling within the particular VTR capabilities. Speed field you can define the sampling speed in milliseconds. Right mouse clicking on the Volume Meter area opens a context menu. in which you can select the direction of the green bands (Vertical. Audio Control This is an additional window. Horizontal or Auto) as well as the scale range (in dB). This setting refers to the Print-to-tape mode. The REC Delay and REC Latency fields are accessible only when the Editing VCR box is checked. II.Editing VCR – it should be checked. just the display. It does not affect the audio itself.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL .is designed to control the actual captured audio volume. if you use an editing video recorder.Volume slider .Video recorder edit mode – you can choose between Insert and Assemble. if the capture device supports audio volume control.Always on top – check it. The green band shows the peak levels and the black line inside it. . It is possible to resize the window or attach it to the main one by moving it close to any of its edges. you could achieve variable speed by shifting this button left or right.  RecInh box– allows or forbids the REC button in order to protect the tape from accidental mistakes. which appears nearby the main window. Delay field refers to audio delaying in milliseconds.REC Latency – the frame offset of the record’s beginning toward the clip’s IN point. If the VTR allows it. shows the actual sound volume. The next field .5. The colored field in the window is a volume & peak meter.  The “Jog” slider allows frame-accurate positioning. It is used to compensate the delay between what you hear and what you see on the VU meter. 92 . . .

you can list up to 16 channels to be captured. You could also open text files.1.lst). you can specify the type of the trigger pulse. In the Pulse Level field to the left. as long as their structure  Save – saves the current Capture list (*.  GPI Config – the capture process can be initiated or stopped from an external GPI device. set the GPI commands from the relevant drop-down lists. specify what is the protocol it uses.CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL III.  Preferences – opens a preferences dialog box. If you press the Advanced button. File Menu  Open – opens a previously created Capture list (*.  Kramer Config – In Schedule mode. This option is valid for manual capture only. Each of them can send up to 4 GPI commands. MENU BAR III. In the Protocol field. the following dialog will open for you to specify the interface settings: Select your Kramer switcher model from the drop-down Model list. Assign the COM port for the switcher using the drop-down list of available COM ports.lst). To assign a device.cap) or Schedule list (*. look up in Appendix 1 further in this manual. In the Machine field. For more information about the GPI interface and pins involved. Below. You can also switch the channels manually via the Manual Channel Switch. select it from the list to the right and specify to which COM port you will connect it. Set the Baud rate according to the Kramer switcher manual. Each device must be associated with an available COM port on the computer. which consists of two pages: 93 .cap) or Schedule list (*. enter the number of the Kramer switcher used (there could be up to 8 switchers connected to the PC). Use a Kramer device to switch between them automatically. The pins involved in CaptureBox GPI are the same as of AirBox GPI. You can connect up to 8 GPI-devices.

therefore. A drop-down menu activates on right-clicking in this window. you can view all CPUs simultaneously. This monitor will help you predict such possible situations and set your PC prior to starting the capture. The RS422 controller is described profoundly above. (!) TIP: You can arrange all windows together by pressing <Ctrl+F12> 94 . in the User Interface section. To prevent poor encoding and framedropping.  Audio Mixer – shows the volume mixer of the available audio device. The video standard can be changed in the specific set up form of the plugin (if the relevant plug-in supports this functionality). In the Zero Based Settings field. the Date position (choose position before or after the file name) and Date format fields will become active. In it.Increment name (Calendar Based) – the names of consequent files will be formed by adding the subsequent calendar number of the capturing day to the original file name (this number may vary from 1 to 365/366 – in leap years). CaptureBox has an automatic protection which will stop the capture if the CPU usage goes above 85%. this naming type is called “Zero-based”.  Sony transport – shows the RS422 controller window.Increment name (Zero Based) –the consequent file names will be formed by adding increasing numbers to the original file name. If you choose this.  Fire Wire transport – shows the FireWire controller window. The current video standard is also displayed in the second cell of status bar. Timer – shows the system time window. you can select which CPU to view (if there is more than one).CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL In the General page you can check the current video standard which depends on the selected plug-in.  Exit – close CaptureBox. Capturing on some hardware platforms is quite CPU-intense. CPU Monitor. . . They are AUTOMATICALLY formed using the original filename entered in the File Name field (while in Schedule mode) plus some kind of index to distinguish them from one another: .Insert date – inserts the capturing date in the filename. or an average value of the CPUs’ usage.    Volume Meter – shows the volume & peak meter for the currently captured audio. View Menu Use this menu to open some additional windows to the main CaptureBox window:  Preview Window – shows the currently captured video material. Besides. you can specify the number of digits to be displayed. Volume & peak Meter is described in more details in the User Interface section above.2. you can define Naming Type for the captured files. The number in the original file name is always zero. III. In the Schedule page.

A dialog box will appear asking for your confirmation.Prepare – activates Manual capturing from the currently available source.Batch – starts batch capturing (following a predefined list) .  Schedule – It is active. The dialog box is different.starts simultaneously the file playback and VTR recording. according to the encoder used. . . if you work in Print to tape mode. .Manual – starts manual capturing from the currently available source. A dialog box will appear asking for your confirmation.Crash – immediately starts capturing from the currently available source..  Capture – It is active.  Device select – opens a dialog box for choosing the capture device.  Capture Menu Compensation . See the Capture Settings section to view the description of some encoders’ setting dialogs. without asking any further confirmation. Pause – commands for file playback control. when you work in Capture mode. .REC .starts auto capturing – the program will control the VTR . Stop.  Print to tape – It is active. .CAPTUREBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. .Arm – activates scheduling.3. __________________________ 95 . only when you are working in Schedule mode.  Setup – opens a setting dialog box.Play.invokes a dialog box for defining the capturing delay compensation (in frames). They are used when there is no VTR remote control.Auto .

IT WILL NOT RUN WITHOUT THE KEY INSTALLED ON YOUR USB PORT. Service Pack 2 Depends on the required bandwidth. The resulting files can be either MPEG1 or MPEG2. VGA: H/W: NOTE: You must install DeckLink Driver version 1. DirectDraw compatible Currently only BlackMagic Design DeckLink.1. Installation Where to Install it? CaptureBox ME is typically installed on BlackMagic Design DeckLink monitoring workstations. reliability and platform requirements.1. I. If you want higher bandwidth and reliability consider using SCSI or/and RAID instead of regular IDE drives.62 or latter – CaptureBox ME does not support older versions. the so called “Monitoring”. Minimum System Requirements CPU: RAM: O/S: HDD: Intel Pentium 4 2 GHz 1 GB Windows XP. Software License CaptureBox ME LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE WIBU USB KEY. Currently it can be assigned to one channel and runs on BlackMagic Design’s DeckLink cards. designed for archiving purposes only.1. 96 . CaptureBox Monitoring Edition (ME) is a simplified version of the CaptureBox module.CAPTUREBOX ME __________________________ I. depending on the customer’s needs. GETTING STARTED Each TV station is required by law to keep a record of its own programming for 3 or more months.

The only way to switch between applications is the Task Manager (<Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Del>). 5. Click OK. Specify the Root folder where captured files will be stored. Close the settings dialog and Push the Capture button in the upper right corner of the user interface.0 Feature CaptureBox 2. the Windows taskbar will be hidden. Open the Settings item. your files will be named after the default naming structure).0 Batch capturing Yes Auto capturing Yes Scheduled capturing Yes Print-to-tape Yes Switcher control Yes VTR control Yes DeckLink support Yes Yes Other platforms support Yes MPEG2 capturing Yes Up to 3 Mbit/sec MPEG1 capturing Yes Yes DV capturing Yes VU/Peak meter Yes Yes Video preview window Yes Yes CPU monitor Yes Multi-channel capturing Coming soon Multi-audio capturing Yes Date-based file naming Yes Multi-file splitting (MPEG) Yes Yes 97 .2. Go to Capture menu. Launch CaptureBox ME. Quick Start 1.5 CaptureBox ME 1. 4. That’s all – you’re already using the CaptureBox ME module! 3. NOTE: While CaptureBox Me is running.CAPTUREBOX ME: USER’S MANUAL I. Specify the Naming structure for your files (if you skip this step. Here is a comparison between CaptureBox 2. 6. press the Create New Channel Button and select the DeckLink Driver (click here to view the detailed description of this dialog).5 and CaptureBox ME 1. 2.

As it should perform nonstop capturing. there is an indicator of the free space available on the root disk (see Capture Setup). The second section displays the current time and date. If the free disk space goes under the one set in the setup page. If there are more than one channels captured. In the Preview pane. The next cell contains the channel number. Capture History grid. The first section to the left contains information about the currently selected capturing driver. a counter displays the time elapsed since the beginning of the current session. the bar will become red and error messages will appear after each chunk in the capture grid. Under it. A red X mark will appear in the Status column. USER INTERFACE The CaptureBox ME interface occupies the entire PC display. Audio Volume meter. Summary of the current channel’s settings. separated by commas. and a Stats Bar. The Status bar is divided into four sections. Start and Stop Button. their numbers will be listed in the third cell. Preview pane.CAPTUREBOX ME: USER’S MANUAL II. The interface is divided into several sections: Menu bar. you’d better designate a separate PC for the Monitoring of your program. 98 . and the last to the right indicated the current CPU usage.

a separate line below the relevant chunk will note that is marked as partial (i. is actually a shortcut to the Capture settings dialog described 99 . Capture Grid The prevalent part of the interface is occupied by the Capture History grid. the Stop button is not active (grey). The line under the relevant element contains its description.CAPTUREBOX ME: USER’S MANUAL II.2. The Green tick-mark means that the capturing of the relevant element has completed successfully. Each session can contain numerous Chunks (separate parts of the captured program) that depend on your settings (see the Setup description further below). NOTE: If the free disk capacity (indicated under the preview pane) goes below the one specified in the capture settings. incomplete). The Setup button further below. The blue bar indicating the free disk space will become red. Capture Control Buttons There are three buttons in the upper-right corner of the CaptureBox ME window – Start.e. When in stop mode. Stop and Setup. The Status column contains information about each element in the Channel column. II. Each row represents an element of the capture process: In the Channel column are recorded all the events that occur during capturing. the Start button becomes inactive (grey). The status of the Channel can be either Capturing (as in the picture above) or Stopped ( ). A new Session will be initiated each time you push the Start button and will end on pushing the Stop button.1. The Now capturing icon appears in the lines of both the current session and the currently archived Chunk. A Yellow exclamation mark means that some problem occurred during capturing. When in capturing mode. the Start button will become inactive. If the capture process has been interrupted for some reason.

3. Go to the File menu. Capture Menu This menu contains the core of the CaptureBox ME functionality. you can save Channel Session logs that will contain tab-delimited text description of the current log window. File Menu There are two menu items in the File menu – Save Log as… and Exit. Besides. it will be saved in the default folder (Logs) in CaptureBox ME Program directory. Capture. If you do not specify other. stop. Each time you want to save such a log. The events occurring during the capture session (start.1. 100 . it would be good to  Remember last capturing status on application restart. In case of power failure or some other unexpected event. II.2. and thus to minimize the missed archiving time. Pressing the Add new channel button will open a dialog containing several channeldescribing fields (see left). It is saved in the CaptureBox ME Program directory. select Save Log as… and specify the directory to which your Channel Session logs will be saved. NOTE: The Channel Session Log concerns only the events currently displayed in the history grid.3. you will have to go to File  Save Log as… II. and click the Update channel button. and errors) are recorded in a tab-delimited log file. Menu Bar The menu bar is quite simple and contains three menus – File. The Setup item invokes a dialog in which you can make virtually all settings allowable in this module: You could choose whether to  Launch CaptureBox ME on Windows start-up or not (). there is a list of the available channels and several buttons to the right. and Help. in the Logs folder.3. The First four menu items are self-explanatory enough and hence not discussed here. enter the Channel name (up to twelve characters) and Short Channel name (up to three characters). Under these two check boxes. one per each day.CAPTUREBOX ME: USER’S MANUAL II. Select a driver from the list of available drivers. the latter needing no explanations.

TIP: Double-clicking in a row of Selected Options will remove it from the naming pattern. Next to the Video Standard field. check  Keep all channels with same settings. Press the Filename Pattern button to change it. If you want to use the settings of the current channel for all other channels in the list. You can change the order of the relevant data in the file name by selecting them and pressing the up/down arrows in the middle of the window. The next button deletes the currently selected channel from the list. This will open the following dialog: In it. In the File Split field. 101 . check the  Use File Split box to have your output divided into multiple files at intervals as specified in the spin-box below. By default. select it from the list to the right and press the Add button . Below. select it in the list to the left and press the remove field button . Double-clicking in a row of Available Options will add it to the naming pattern. Press the Setup Root button to select another location. and the Video Standard of the output.CAPTUREBOX ME: USER’S MANUAL You can edit these settings later. in the Script Line. The Root Folder string displays the location in which the captured files will be stored. by selecting the relevant channel and pressing the Edit Channel button. and the second – to enable the preview pane in the main CaptureBox ME window. You can set the output for a selected channel by pressing the Setup Output button . The following string contains the naming structure for captured files. all captured materials will be stored on the System disk C:\. To remove an entry from the naming structure. the Video and Audio bit rates. there are two additional check-boxes –the first for flipping the output fields. an example filename is displayed to illustrate your choice. A dialog will open containing a list of available naming options (to the right) and a list of the currently selected options (to the left). you can select the MPEG type. To add new entry in your file names. you will see a description of the currently selected file name configuration. Under it.

The PlayBox Doctor is a very useful engine for gathering all the information needed by our support team if any problem occurs during the operation of our software. Help Menu There are two items in this menu. At selecting it for the first time. See detailed description of the PlayBox Doctor features in the AirBox section. etc. you can set some minimum allowable disk space at which you will be notified. 102 . Last in the Capture menu is the Admin password item. II. This option is necessary. In it.3. the dialog to the right will open for you to enter your password. so be sure not to forget your password! If you want to remove the password protection. WARNING: Clicking OK will lock all operations in CaptureBox ME. type your old password and enter nothing in the New Pass string. as most HDDs need at least 10% to operate properly.3. go to Capture Admin password once again. About… displays the information about the current software version.CAPTUREBOX ME: USER’S MANUAL There is a spin-box in the lower right corner of the Options dialog box.

IT WILL NOT RUN WITHOUT THE KEY INSTALLED ON YOUR USB PORT. 103 . FinishBox LE comes free with every PlayBox module.1. Previous Versions Prior to installing FinishBox LE. GETTING STARTED FinishBox LE (previously known as MultiMux) allows multiplexing elementary video streams (such as Matrox OpenDML MPEG2 AVI or m2v files) with elementary audio streams (mpa. you should uninstall any previous FinishBox LE versions (Control Panel  Add/Remove Programs DMT FinishBox LE). Software License FinishBox LE LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE WIBU USB KEY. uncompressed wav) to standard ISO-13818-compliant MPEG2 Program Stream (*. Minimum System Requirements CPU: RAM: O/S: Intel Pentium III 500 MHz 128 MB Windows 2000 Professional/Windows XP. m2a.FINISHBOX LE __________________________ I.mpg) containing MPEG Audio layer 1 or 2 at different bitrates. I. Installation Where to Install it? FinishBox LE (previously known as MultiMux) is typically installed on Matrox DigiSuite DTV/LX or RT2000/2500 non-linear editing workstations.

II. When you 104 . 2. If you use two mono audio files instead of one stereo audio file. USER INTERFACE FinishBox LE always starts up in the last used mode.wav file. it is loaded in FinishBox LE automatically. Standard Working with FinishBox LE is very simple and easy. Quick Start Make sure that you have some content available in the input audio/video folders. 4. Choose a name for the output MPG file (this is not obligatory). 1. you need to select the video.1. The sound file with the same name will automatically appear in the next empty box. The Standard interface is used for one-time multiplexing of video and audio streams:  audio. If there is no MPA or WAV file with the same name in your audio folders. 3.FINISHBOX LE: USER’S MANUAL I. you have to select manually the corresponding sound file. you have to keep the following naming convention for the left and the right channels respectively: In the Source streams fields. If you do not have any available. Click the Multiplex Now button. by using the folder icon select a video file and in the same folder.avi file and the or by drag-n-dropping the files. Congratulations! You have just multiplexed your first FinishBox LE file. 5. II. 9. Launch FinishBox LE. Select an exported AVI or m2v file and click the Open button. there is an audio file with the same name. Click the top button with a folder picture. export some from your NLE platform’s editing software. There are two FinishBox LE modes – Standard and Folder Watch.2. 6. 8. 7.

wav/<filename>. FinishBox LE allows creating an MPEG2 file from up to five streams inside the multiplex. the program will encode it first (Audio Encoder Options) and then will multiplex the batch.wav.  In the Output program stream field. or <filename>_1.      Add>> is used for adding the files from Source streams fields in the Batch List. 105 . you have to select only the first one. the Multiplex now button is replaced with a Stop button. following their order in the list.   New is used for clearing of all Source streams fields and to add new source files.wav In case you use two mono audio files. In the Batch List area. If there is a batch containing an uncompressed audio stream. Run Batch – starts multiplexing the items in the Batch list.FINISHBOX LE: USER’S MANUAL <filename>.wav/<filename>. the second file will be loaded automatically. Clear removes ALL items from the Batch list. <<Edit is used for moving the selected item from Batch list back to Source streams fields and edit their order or number. or <filename>_3.wav/<filename>_2. The name of the Output Program Stream. or <filename>. Create your batch list by selecting the desired source streams and locations and pressing the Add>> button or by drag-n-dropping them from the explorer window. Remove removes the SELECTED item from the Batch list.a1. followed by the names of source stream files in brackets.wav.wav/<filename>_4. you can build a list for multiplexing more than one group of streams.wav. will appear in the Batch list.a3. They will be processed one by one. you have to select the output file name and its location by using the folder icon.a2.a4. You can see the multiplex progress in the bottom of the window: During multiplexing.  Press the Multiplex Now button to start multiplexing the currently specified source streams.

Information flags – you can add some information in the encoded audio stream. if you want to define a specific mux rate for all multiplexed files and select the mux rate value [Kbits/s] in the next field. but the CPU usage will go higher. Data rate. the user can specify a mux rate close to the actual bitrate. based on the fake high bitrate. It often happens that the declared bitrate of a file differs from the actual one. The Throttle is a kind of process “accelerator”. Stereo Mode. by checking the relevant box: Error protection. FinishBox LE would produce an unnecessary big MPG file. the less the process prolongs.  Audio Encoder options. If not using the Force Mux Rate option. the program will automatically encode it in MPEG1. This is usually the case with most VBR files. Copyrighted material or Original material. Using Force Mux Rate. WARNING! Be careful when using this option: it may produce undesirable results if you choose lower mux rate than the actual video bitrate. Use this button to determine the encoding conditions: Compression. Psychoacoustics. layer 1 or 2. Deemphasis for decoder. The higher you set it.wav).FINISHBOX LE: USER’S MANUAL  Folder Watch – pressing this button will open a dialog box to specify the relevant locations for automatic multiplexing. This function will command the program to detect the actual bitrate and hence – to determine automatically the Muxrate of the multiplexed program stream. (See the Folder Watch section further in this manual).Auto Muxrate. ripped from a DVD-Video. This option comes handy when the declared video bitrate is not the same as the actual bitrate. If the source stream contains an uncompressed audio file (*.  Force Mux Rate – check this box. 106 .

Additional Folders – folders to be watched in addition to the source streams.Delete – deletes the source files. sofia. Move in – moves the source files to the folder. if the subfolders contain any stream files.  Process Sub Folders – if the selected source folder contains any sub folders. .  Same as Video – check it when the audio stream is located in the same folder as the video stream. watching over a particular folder or list of folders for incoming files. FinishBox automatically starts multiplexing them into MPEG file format and saves the new file to a predefined output folder. NOTE: The video and audio streams for additional watch should be in ONE folder. 107 .select the folder to be watched over for audio files. they will also be “watched”.done (for example.2. Use the browse button or type the path in the field.  Recreate Subfolder Structure will keep the directory structure of the Source location in the Destination location. Pressing the Folder Watch button in the Standard window will open the dialog box you see below: .FINISHBOX LE: USER’S MANUAL II.select an output folder for the multiplexed file(s). specified in the corresponding path field.avi.done). . Folder Watch This function allows running FinishBox in the background. When video and audio files arrive at the watched folders.Audio Folder . . . Rename – renames the source files. they will also be processed and sent to the destination folder.e.After processing – select how to proceed with the source files after the multiplexing: .Output folder . by adding an extension . i.avi is renamed to sofia.Video Folder – select the main folder to be watched over for video files.

the higher CPU capacity needed. Note that multiplexing is quite CPU-intense. When starting FinishBox LE it will appear in the last used mode. While in Folder Watch mode. Right-clicking on it and selecting the Show item from the pop-up menu will invoke the following window: The tray icon becomes a thermometer when FinishBox LE is processing. FinishBox LE will minimize and will appear as an icon in the system tray. __________________________ 108 .FINISHBOX LE: USER’S MANUAL When you press the button. so it could slowdown other applications running on the machine: the higher the multiplexing speed. The Throttle slider is used for accelerating/slowing the multiplexing process. you will not be able to see the Standard interface window.

genres. Content is classified using many indices such as type. The Other PlayBox modules obtain information about the visual content from DataBox. Installation WHERE TO INSTALL IT? DataBox should be installed on every workstation in the PlayBox complex which requires access to the metadata. you should have DataBox installed on the AirBox or ListBox workstations. keywords. credits. SOFTWARE LICENSE DataBox LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE WIBU USB KEY.DATABOX __________________________ I. MINIMUM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS CPU: RAM: O/S: Intel Pentium III 500 MHz 128 MB Windows 2000 Professional/Windows XP 109 . In order to transfer content directly (drag-n-drop) from DataBox to AirBox or ListBox. GETTING STARTED DataBox is an SQL-based database for media & content management.1. category. media. etc. you should uninstall any previous DataBox versions (Control Panel  Add/Remove Programs  DMT DataBox). PREVIOUS VERSIONS Prior to installing DataBox. IT WILL NOT RUN WITHOUT THE KEY INSTALLED ON YOUR USB PORT. I.

Activate the Grid by pressing the GRID button. 110 . Select a file from your media folder and drag-n-drop it in the grid. The Grid represents the database content.2. A record appears in the grid. 2. Launch DataBox. with the same name as the media file name. Quick Start 1.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL I. It is activated by pressing the Grid button in the Menu bar. 3. Congratulations! You have just created your first record in the PlayBox database! DataBox user’s interface is divided in two main parts – Menu and Grid. 4.

only the entries that correspond to the selected criteria are displayed in the GRID. the Sequences. You can add some entry to a specific classification element or credit. Keyword.1. the Templates and the Expired entries. Group or Credit is selected. You can add. Classification scheme and Credits Here you can see the classification scheme and credits as they are defined in the relevant managers. USER INTERFACE The main part of the interface is dedicated to database visualization. SEARCH FIELDS and GRID. and Countries). II. When a particular Type. Companies. 111 . It consists of three areas: TREE VIEW.1. Tree View This area contains a dendroid chart of the Classification scheme. delete or change elements in Tree View by using the right mouse button.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL II. the Credits (Persons. by drag-ndropping it to that element. II.1.

press the OK button to create as many records as the defined number of episodes. To delete a sequence. The data in these records will be the same as in the template record.2. right-click the sequence name and choose [Properties] from the context menu.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL II. To change the sequence’s properties or to add new episodes. First episode – the number of the first episode. You could choose it from the list. 112 . You can add a new sequence by right mouse clicking on the node and selecting [New] from the context menu. After setting the episode numbers and the template record for a sequence. By default. right-click on it and then click [Delete] in the context menu.1. A Property dialog box will appear and you will be able to change the number of episodes or the template record. it is not set [NONE]. Last episode – the number of the last episode. Color – color for color coding. A dialog box window appears to fill-in the sequence’s properties: Sequence name the relevant name of the sequence. create a new template record or not set a template. Sequences node This node displays the sequences. Templates – the template record name for this sequence. The first episode number could not be higher than that of the last episode.

or by right-clicking over the Templates node in Tree View and then selecting [New] in the context menu.1. the following fields are inaccessible: GeneralHouse ID and Episode No. 113 . IMPORTANT: If the template record is designed for a sequence and there are any series created for this sequence..DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL II. If the record is set as template. you can not edit the template record anymore! Templates do not appear in the Grid of ordinary records.3. Instances[Media] Notes and Location. You can create a new template record in New RecordGeneral Template record. Using templates saves efforts for entering uniform data in multiple records. Templates node This node is used for viewing and editing the templates. They are very useful for creating sequences that consist of many records with the same data. Templates are used as models for creating new records.

1.4.as well as by right mouse clicking on the grid and checking [Search] from the context menu. You have to decide how to proceed with these instance – delete them or change their kill dates. NOTE: The expired instances are automatically displayed in this node only if you have assigned [notify] in OptionsGeneral After kill date expired II. Search Fields The search fields’ area could be shown or hidden in the GRID by pressing <Ctrl> + F .2.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL II. 114 . Expired node This node is used to show the records that have expired instances.

Add button adds a new search inquiry line. the grid will display only the records that match this inquiry.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL A search inquiry line consists of the following cells: . . ends with . .dd (year.Global search – If this flag is checked the search proceeds in the entire database.day) format. .mm.the result should end with the keyword.Search button starts the search. 115 .Value – it is a keyword for searching.the search result should not be exactly the same as the keyword. contains . Type. . If you want to see all records. after . . . does not contain . If it is not checked.the result should not contain the keyword begins with – the result should begin with the keyword. After performing a search .Operand . The Search procedure is not case-sensitive.Clear button clears the search inquiry.Operator: is – means that the search result should be exactly the same as the keyword. . clear the search inquiry and click All in the Tree View.month.Remove button removes the selected line from the inquiry. etc.defines Boolean operands (OR or AND) between the search lines to refine or limit your search. before – the result should be before the keyword (when the keyword is a date). .the result should be after the keyword (when the keyword is a date).the result should contain the keyword. doesn’t .Field – a field from the entry description– Title. it must be in: yyyy. Genre. If the keyword is a date. the search proceeds only in the previous search result.

The grid columns correspond to the fields from entry’s description. Clicking on any column name will arrange the records according to the relevant feature. You can define which columns to be visible in OptionsGrid[double click on the relevant column visibility status to change it]. Clicking the same name once again will invert the arrangement. A Black bar marks the currently selected entry. Thus clicking on Title will arrange the records in alphabetical order. The records are arranged by the succession of their registration in the database. The column position in the grid could be changed by drag-n-dropping the column name.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL II. Right mouse clicking on a column’s name will resize the column.3. they will be arranged in ascending order. and clicking it once again will rearrange them in reverse order. invokes the entry properties. Data Grid The database list of entries is displayed in the GRID. If you click a field that contains figures once. 116 . the records will be arranged in descending order. Clicking twice over it. You can define a default field to serve as a sorting filter for the entries in OptionsDefault valuesAutoSort by. If you click it twice.

This procedure updates the information on missing files.New Record – opens an empty New Record dialog box. you could prepare a template form in MS Excel to be filled with records from DataBox.Check files – starts checking the availability of the files connected to the records. The relevant fields in the New Record dialog box will be automatically filled-in with the corresponding information.Options – opens the Options menu. . if you have a previously created Excel file. For example. .Edit Record opens the selected record’s properties for editing. . the changes you’ve made will take effect. Use it. . .Print current table – opens a dialog box for printing the database. . Sheet name – enter the name of a sheet in the Excel file. Target file – the Excel file name to which you want to export the data. .Search – shows/hides the search area in the GRID. if there is an MPEG file connected to the record. . NOTE: If a specific classification element or credit from the Tree View is selected at the same time. If you leave the Target file field empty or type a non-existing file name. by default). the data will be exported to the first sheet in the file.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL Pressing the right mouse button in the GRID invokes the following context menu: .Preview – invokes the Clip Trimmer for clip preview. Thus. . If you don’t. you can define the export details: DataBox’s details: 117 . In the following fields.Export to MS Excel – opens a dialog box for exporting records to MS Excel.xls. a new Excel file will be created (book1.Update – updates the database. the new record will be automatically added to this element.Delete Record deletes the selected record.

Drag-and-drop – It allows dragging clips from one grid to another (from DataBox to AirBox or from DataBox to ListBox) or from the Grid to a specific Tree View node. delete. . etc. It is used.Direction – the direction of filling the cells in the MS Excel’s table (down or right) Options: . . the exported data will overwrite any existing data in the Excel sheet.Multi-selection – allows simultaneous manipulation of many clips – move.). right-click them and choose [Edit] from the context menu. In such cases.Multi-editing – This feature allows you to edit data in several records simultaneously. as the default start cell is A1.Field – which field from the record description in DataBox should be exported. <Shift> selects from-to. . . Excel details: . . which should appear in Excel’s table for the respective field.. etc. .DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL . Enter new line by pressing the Plus button.Cell type – the type of the cell (text. WARNING! If you haven’t entered a Start cell. while <Ctrl> adds a single clip to the selection. Select the records. . A NewRecord window opens. These features will allow you to exchange metadata with other applications.Increment – the cell’s increment. Different data appear as “Various” in the data fields.Pad to – the number of symbols. Each DataBox field you want to export should be entered at a new line in the Export dialog box. If you want to export only the selected records from the DataBox grid. You can add clips to the selection by holding <Shift> or <Ctrl> key while clicking.Symbol – the padding symbol. . 118 .Export to/Import from XML. To delete a line. select it and press the Minus button. you have to check the Export Selection only box. number. Grid Features: . Press the Export button to start exporting the records.Pad type – the pad type (symbol or number).Crop . from which on will be placed the exported data.Start cell – the number of the first cell in MS Excel. . edit. you can complete it with some symbol (a padding symbol). but the DataBox’s field does not contain enough symbols. It shows only the data that are identical for all the records.defines the number of symbols from DataBox field content that will be exported. if you select cropping.

you can filter the Grid by this word in the relevant field. 119 . When filtering is being made. you can sort the Grid according to the data in that field. in the grid are shown only the records that correspond to this inquiry. . some check boxes appear grey in New RecordTrafficProperties.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL During multi-editing. The way of updating the filter result (after <Enter> or after every key-stroke) is defined in OptionGridFilter options:. . New RecordInstances fields and New RecordTrafficRequirements fields do not subject to multi-editing. delete the filtering word from the line. After multi-editing. If you want to see all records.Filtering – by writing a word in the row under a column’s name. click OK and the changes you’ve made will take effect in all the selected records.Sorting – by clicking over a field (column) name. You can sort by one field and filter by another field at the same time.

If you want to see it during dragn-dropping. right-click it and choose [delete] from the context menu. You can drag-n-drop several files simultaneously and create records for them. It has already been described in details above. Thus. After entering the file. its status becomes “SAVED”. The New Record dialog box will appear. To remove a file from the list. If a specific category from the Tree View is selected during drag-n-dropping (or during pressing the New Record button).2. 120 .DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL III. a Multi-Drag window will appear to confirm entering and describing of each file. NOTE: The Multi-Drag list is not a default option. the new record will be automatically added to this element. MENU BAR III. (See Section II.3. you will have to activate it by un-checking the Use Auto insert box (OptionsGeneralUse Auto insert) If you do not want to describe each entry separately during drag-n-dropping.1. Grid Pressing this icon invokes the database grid. Double click on a file to create a record in the database. choose [clear list] from the context menu. check OptionsGeneralUse Auto insert box and select a template record or Default options for describing the files. most of the data will be filled-up automatically. During drag-n-dropping. During the next drag-n-drop. To remove the whole list. There are three columns in the Multi-Drag list: File name. you will see the Multi-Drag list with all previously dragged files that haven’t been saved. New Record A new record can be created either by drag-n-dropping a file from local or network devices or by invoking and filling up New Record dialog box.) III. File path and Status.

the following fields in this page are not editable: House ID. It is calculated automatically.House ID – Typically the House ID is a unique identification of production house. Use it. III. You can define the sequence properties in advance from the Tree View.Star – Usually this is the name of the main talent of the program. etc. etc.Season – Many TV Series usually are made in batches. .Title string contains the entry’s name. Traffic.Sequence this string is designed for description of content that participates in certain types of sequences – music album. . depending on your settings (OptionsHouseID). if you want to regenerate a House ID. The House Id can be entered manually or generated automatically. NOTE: If the template record is intended for a sequence and there are any series created to this sequence.2.. TV series. . such as production date and/or version. a typical TV series is made of up to 20 seasons. including some extra data. General This is the main information form about the new entry: . without its extension. If the entry has been created by drag-ndropping. For example. you cannot edit the template record anymore! . Instance. Mini Series. Classification. It corresponds to the “Star” category in New RecordCreditsPeople. each containing up to 20 episodes. and Additional. the record will become a template record. Instances’ notes and Instance’s location. . . When the record is a template.Duration displays the total duration of the entry. 121 .Generate button – you can press it if the HouseID Automatic generation option has been activated beforehand (OptionsHouseIDAutomatic generation). This field is not active when there is no sequence selected. Credits. See the appropriate user’s manual section for detailed description. a New Record dialog box appears. Template records are very useful for creating sequences that comprise of many records with the same data. called Seasons. .Template record – if you check it.Episode – a unique number of the entry in the selected sequence. It consists of six pages: General. This field is not active when there is no sequence selected. .DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL After pressing the New Record button in the Menu bar. Episode No. this string is automatically filled with the filename.1.

It is possible to have several copies of the same program. select it from the list.Main – Determines whether the instance is the main one or not. previously prepared in the Qualities Manager from the Main Menu. It corresponds to “Country of origin” in New RecordCreditsCountries/Locations. other than the standard classification scheme – Type/Category/Genre. Each copy might contain several streams (video/audio/text) and they could be recorded or split on separate media.Language – Describes the original language of the entry. . . By default.Group – Generally used to classify a program in a group. . By default. their durations are cumulated. The main instance is used in calculating the program duration. It can be chosen from a list. choose “Add new group…” from the list and enter a new group name. Only one program instance could be “main instance”. When you have more than one instances. To choose a group.2. If there is only one instance. it will be named “main” by default.Country – As a rule it should contain the Country of Origin. If the instance consists of several parts. .2. Its description appears in the right half of the window: . . By default. this field is filled-in with the current date. III. the name is “main”.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL . To add a new group.ProdDate usually stands for the program production date or year. 122 . .RecDate stands for the date.Quality – subjective measurement of the instance’s quality. when the entry was recorded in the database or received at the TV facility. . It is a text field. Instances Here are described the separate instances (copies) of each entry. this field is set to current date. the main one is transferred to AirBox via drag-and-dropping the clip.Notes – Used for storing useful notes about the program. limited to 255 symbols (including spaces and punctuation). . displayed in the Grid and in New RecordGeneral.Duration contains the Program duration.Name – name of the instance.Creator – Usually this is the main producing company. MAIN INSTANCE It is the default name of the first (original) copy. . It corresponds to the “Creator” category in New RecordCreditsCompany.

the parts are created automatically. . The description form to the right contains: . if the entry was created through drag-n-dropping a file. . To delete a part. .Audio Level –describes the absolute audio level of an audio stream. Audio.Notes – Used for storing useful notes about the instance.File Name contains the stream filename and path. according to the succession of the trimmed sections. when the particular instance (copy) has to be deleted.Name – Stream name. . in order to save the changes. Under one part you can define Streams and Media. It can be a Program. you have to press <Enter>. Defining it helps AirBox to determine the average audio level of each program in order to avoid annoying audio level discrepancies when switching from one program to another while on-air. there are two possibilities.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL . limited to 255 symbols. etc stream. If you want to add a new part. You can change the Kill date later. right-click it and then click [Delete]. Video.It appears only when the entry has parts – it has been divided (and recorded) in several parts or trimmed (split) in separate sections with the Clip Trimmer. After typing the file name. . When the Kill date comes. You can enter a file name using the browse button next to the field or by typing the file name manually. 123 . . MAIN STREAM – automatically set.Kill date – The expiration date. right-click on the Main Instance and select [New part] from the context menu. It invokes the Clip Trimmer and a new IN Point can be defined. To add a new Instance. It appears if an Expiry period has been defined beforehand in OptionsDefault Values. If you trim the file.IN Point – By default it is 00:00:00:00. To delete an Instance. It is a text field. Currently this value should be entered manually. definable in Options General – deleting the instance without notification or notifying for expired instances and showing them in Expired node in the Tree View. It can be changed by pressing the button in the right of the field. Subtitles.Stream Type – describes the stream type. right-click it and then click [Delete]. right-click in the left window and select [New instance] from the context menu.Part .

.Video Compression – the type of video stream compression. . the Main Stream fields are not applicable.Video Bit Rate – the Video bitrate extracted from the stream properties. except the Stream Name. then specify the name. . previously drawn in MEDIA TYPES manager. This field is used only when describing files.). depending on the program duration. the prepare time. This field is not visible when describing a tape. right-click Main Instance and select [New stream] from the context menu. When the instance (copy) is not a file. .Sample Rate – the Audio sampling rate. To add a new Stream. Note and Part. It can be changed by pressing the button in the right of the field. This field is not available when a tape instance is being created.e. tape user bits.Notes – Used for storing useful notes about the stream. .Audio Bit Rate – Audio bitrate extracted from the stream properties. etc. and the properties. By default. To delete a Stream. MAIN MEDIA .Height – the Video Image height in pixels. Rightclick on any row of the list and select [New] from the context menu.Width the Video Image width in pixels. you should right-click it and then click [Delete] in the context menu. limited to 255 symbols.) 124 . .DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL .4. . You can also add new Media types in this field by selecting [Media type manager] from the pop-up list. i.OUT Point – By default it contains the latest available timecode. . See also the Media Types section (III.Media Type – It is selected from a list. . . .Frame Rate – The actual video frame rate of the stream. This will invoke the Media Types dialog box. Stream Type. .Part – The number of the part. This field is not visible when a tape instance is being created. It is a text field. there are no parts. It invokes the Clip Trimmer and a new OUT Point can be defined.Channels – The number of audio channels found in the audio stream.Label – Media label (CD or partition label. This field is not available when describing a tape. the color for color-coding. this field contains a zero.Audio Compression – the type of audio stream compression.

. right-click the respective Stream and choose [New media] from the context menu. right-click it and then click [Delete].). this will be its location on the local or network devices.Genre – all the genres of a type. room). It shows the program’s initial time-code on the tape (HH:MM:SS:FF). III. etc. If the copy is a file. For example. or by right clicking on it and then choosing [Assign] from the context menu. . using the classification scheme created in CLASSIFICATION manager in the Main Menu. Select a genre from the left-hand field and move it to the right-hand field.. etc. You can do this in three ways: by double clicking it. A media type is considered a videotape if its Random Access flag is not set (Media TypesRandom Access).Type this field describes the type of content – cinema. . . floor. sport.3. limited to 255 symbols. [comedy]. only the relevant Category and Genre will appear. The Archives are defined in ClassificationArchiveright-click [New archive].Notes – Used for storing useful notes about the media. It shows the program’s final time-code on that media (HH:MM:SS:FF). When you choose a Type. A media type is considered a videotape if its Random Access flag is not set (Media TypesRandom Access). To delete a Media. by pressing the right-arrow >> button. . or double clicking.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL . [documentary]. Categories are [movie film]. etc. It is a text field. [animation].OUT Point – This field is visible if the media is a video tape (Betacam. [drama].IN Point – This field is visible if the media is a video tape (Betacam. 125 . To add a new Media. DVCam. It may be a shelf number. a barcode number. and Genres are [action]. . Classification In this tab. DVCPro.2. you can classify an entry. news. . for Type [cinema]. You can select only one category from the pop-up list. Discarding a genre from the list is done in much the same manner as adding – using the left arrow << button.). etc. etc.Location – this is the exact position of the copy. DVCam. DVCPro. etc.Category –a category of the selected type.Archive describes the physical location of the copy (building.

right-click and choose [Add new] from the context menu. the activities for Countries might be country of origin. They are managed in the same way as Genres. . except to Company: creator. Locations.e. 126 . right-click it and choose [Properties/Delete] from the context menu. etc.4. . It is also possible to create lists of activities and names in advance – just open the CREDITS manager in the Main Menu. etc. etc. For Countries – countries names. right-click it and choose [Add/Delete] from the context menu. from right to left).DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL To add/delete a Genre from the list. To make a choice. director. for Companies – companies names. you have to drag-anddrop a credit’s name to some activity (i.Companies – companies took part in content creation. except to Star. Credits These are the program creation factors: Countries. In the right field are listed the names of credits. target country.Keywords – any keywords for the entry. except to Country of origin.Countries/Locations – here are described the countries that have taken part in the making of content . editor. The Star is displayed in New Record GeneralStar.. Several countries could be added to each activity. III.People – artists that have participated in the making of content. For example. In the left field are described some activities. To create a new element (activity or name). The selected Country of origin is displayed in New RecordGeneralCountry. To change/delete an element. The selected Company: creator is displayed in New RecordGeneralCompany. Several people could be added to each activity. the activities for People – can be star. Several companies could be added to each activity. Companies and People. . .2. This tab contains three pages with identical structure: each of them consists of two fields.

This could happen for example. If this box is not checked.Runs per hour/day/week/month/year – you can define limitations for clip playback in an hour/day/week/month or year.Truncation Enabled – allows truncation (trimming) of the clip. Priority – defines the playback priority of the clip. This feature will allow observing some timeslot restrictions . .Logo Enabled – allows displaying a logo over the clip. Requirements – The clip’s playback requirements are set here: . When there is gab in the TV schedule. if the clip has to be protected. Low. . Priority could be Normal. Priorities would help the system to determine whether to break.5. you can register that by using this option. . the clip playback in AirBox will not be allowed.Auto fill available – allows using the clip as auto fill material. Traffic The Data in this page concern the clips playback in AirBox.Break Enabled – allows breaking (interrupting) the clip during its playback.Protection needed – check it. it can be automatically filled with short clips.2.Daily mask – not implemented yet. when the initial and the start times of the clips are overlapped. . 127 . . Properties – Check the boxes in front the desired properties properties: . Age Rate – if the clip has some age restrictions.Significant Content – allows including the clip in an automatically generated electronic program guide. . . truncate or wait until the end of the currently running clip automatically.Runs remaining – displays how many times the clip has been played in AirBox and how many runs remain for playing.Program Enabled – allows clip playback. High or Highest. Click on the black arrow to the right of the field to choose age rate or to Add New Age Rate.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL III.Overlay Enabled – allows graphic overlaying of the clip. .

Taglines – the essence/moral of the clip content. It is used mainly when describing movies.2. the figures in from day.6. . if the relevant boxes in front of them are checked. month and year fields.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL When a figure is entered in the “from” hour field. III.Plot Outline – the subjectmatter/plot of the clip content. Additional This page contains additional information about the entry’s content. 128 . week.Trivia – here you can enter interesting. .Valid until – the date until which the clip is available for playback. .Comments Summary – comments to the clip content. . curious information about the clip production. . Each new line (after pressing the <Enter>key) in the field is accepted as a new trivia. are calculated automatically.Rating – the rating level.Valid from – the date from which on the clip is available for playback. The “until” fields are not calculated from each other. . .

The Import button opens an already created file (*. Windows XP tends to make the default share names explanatory. press the browse button to the right. For example. . IMPORTANT: The "server" station. Auto insert – check it  to make auto insertion of files into the database. 129 . as well as defining some defaults. etc. It contains several pages: General. If you want to change it.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL III. the date format is DD/MM/YYYY and the separator is a dot. the production date format is YYYY. year/day/month. Grid. when creating new records through drag-n-dropping files. By default.delete the instances (if these are files) without notification. Date format – defines a format for entering and viewing dates. it should be shared EXACTLY as "D". month/day/year. day/month/year.dbs) and adopts the settings. c. so you have to be careful with that.General – Check  the preferred format (year. Options Options dialog box allows defining useful settings. Settings . .Production date – You can define a separate format for the Production date which can differ from the other dates. By default.3. .notify for expired instances and show their records in Expired node in the Tree View.dbs). if your GDB file is on drive D. which will host the database (*. III.GDB) file should have the hard-drive shared as a single letter (d. There are two possibilities: .). General Data Base – displays the currently active database.3.Template – you can choose Default options for describing the inserted files as well as a template record. year/month/day. .It is used to save the settings made in a file.The Export button sends the settings into a file (*. .1. After kill date expired determines how DataBox should proceed with expired instances. . year/month. HouseID and Default Values. month/year) and define the separator sign.

Check boxes: .Update on every key press – the Grid will be refreshed after each key stroke. III.3. press the Plus button to the right of the window and choose a field from the list. . Buttons These buttons are valid only for to the fields’ area. Grid In the left of this page are listed all available data fields.Reset Grid button – resets the fields’ settings as defined in the program.Invert selection button – inverts all settings. Filter Options This field defines how the Grid will be refreshed during grid column filtering. To add a field. . NOTE: Use this option with caution – it may take a long time to refresh a large database. Data Fields List Name .Show only archive media type – shows the records whose Media type is Archive. just double-click it. 130 .Update on Enter – the Grid will be refreshed after pressing <Enter>.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL Fields to AirBox Notes – here you can define which fields should appear in the Notes field in AirBox.Select All button – sets all fields visible. Visible – Each field could be visible [Yes] or not [No] in the Grid. . . .Select None button – sets all fields to invisible. . selected for color coding in OptionsDefault values and previously set in the relevant Main menu item. select it and press the Minus button.the name of the data field Language – the default language of the field.Color coding color fill entire row – fills the entire grid row with the field’s color. It defines which keyboard locale will be used when entering data in the particular field. To switch the visibility status of a field. To delete a field. . Mostly used for non-Latin languages.2.

By default. HouseID The House ID is a unique identification number. check  the corresponding boxes in OptionsGrid Tree View. This Options submenu helps you create your own pattern for auto-generating House IDs. It can be entered manually or generated automatically.[Insert separator] – inserts a separator.  House ID fields – this area shows the House ID sequential. A more detailed description of the Tree View and the Classifications can be found further in this manual.checked). that are assigned to some record.  Insert field button – inserts a new field to the House ID. Double clicking in the white House ID fields area ( Automatic generation . the House ID consists of two fields. If you want to see all these entries (no matter if they are assigned to any record or not) in the Tree View. 131 . The Default separator is hyphen. do not check the boxes . invokes a context menu with the following items: .[Insert field] – invokes a dialog box for choosing a field.3.[Delete field] deletes the selected field. . such as countries. . etc. persons. You can define various classification criteria and enter their representatives in advance. keywords.  Automatic generation – check it to perform auto-generation of House ID.3.  Delete field button – deletes the selected field from the House ID. separated by a hyphen. III. If you want to view only the entries. The first field contains three symbols from the entry’s Title and the second field contains a Random number between 0 and 10000.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL Tree View Options: The Tree view displays the classification scheme of records as a tree (similar to Windows’ Explorer).

if you want to use only a part of the field’s content in the House ID number. This option is used. if you define Crop at [4] symbols. Pad to – check it. opens the following property window: Field type – shows the field name. 98. it is an interval. when you want to visualize numbers with equal length. etc. For example. double click on it. a separator or a number) will appear. means that only the first three symbols from the field Title will be included in the House ID number. 034. If you check  the Pad to box. if you define a Random number between 0 and 100. By default. when the number of symbols in the text field is less than the number in the Crop at box. 005. Define the number of symbols to be included. o Choosing a text-containing field opens the following property window: Field type – shows the field name. For example. 098. This option is applied. but the concrete entry’s field contains only 3 symbols. For example: Field type [Title].  Text padding symbol here you can define a symbol for filling-up missing characters. By default. it is one symbol short. It could be a random or a sequential number. o Choosing [separator] opens a property window. depending on the / status of the Pad to box. it is zero. if you want to fill the missing symbols from field’s content with a specific symbol. crop at [3]. if you want to fill-up the random/sequential number with a specific symbol and define the number of symbols. define pad to [3] and the previously set padding symbol is [zero] (it is defined in OptionsHouseIDNumber padding symbol). 34. the separator sign is a slash. A list of possible fields (a textcontaining field from entry’s description. By default. etc.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL To change a House ID field. 5. when Pad up box is checked. it will appear in House ID like that: 2. Crop at – check it . The padding symbol is the same for all fields and is defined in OptionsHouseIDText padding symbol.  Number padding symbol – symbol for filling-up missing digits. The missing symbol could be filled-up with a specific symbol or left empty. when the Pad up box is checked. 132 . where you can define the separator sign. Pad to – check it. the numbers will appear like that: 002. o Choosing a number-containing field.

select [Sequential number] from the pop-up menu that appears after double-clicking in the House ID fields. . i. . By default.Reset type – By default. at opening the New record dialog box). . the sequential number is never reset [None]. presented in two pages: Local This page concerns the generation of sequential numbers when the computer is in local mode. select [DB sequential number] from the dialog box that appears after double-clicking in the House ID fields. The sequential numbers are stored in the registry.e.  Random number the random number features are described in this field: . . weekly. If you want to use such a number in the House ID. DB Global This page is used when many users work simultaneously on the database. the records are created by one user. If you want to use such a number in the House ID.Current value displays the sequential number in the data base . .Current value this field displays the current sequential number on a local machine.e. The sequential numbers are generated according to the moment of creating the record (i.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL  Sequential numbers – this field contains the sequential number features. The numbers are saved in the database. If you want to reset the sequential number. monthly or annually. By default. it is zero.Minimum set the minimum value of the random number. specify the reset period: daily.Reset now button – press it to reset the sequential numbering immediately. 133 .Maximum – set the maximum value of the random number.Reset now and Apply value buttons are self-explanatory. it is 10000.

Rating – the default Rating set in New RecordAdditionalRating.Color-coding – in this cell you can define which grid column will be color-coded. If it is set to zero. they are not defined. .Color to AirBox – defines which field’s color will be transferred during drag-n-dropping to AirBox. . whereupon the instance (copy) will be considered expired. .Priority – the default priority set in New RecordTrafficPriority.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL III.3. By default.Total runs – the total number of runs set in New RecordTrafficRuns remaining.4.Expiry period – the number of days after an instance (copy) was created. no expiration will take place. Default Values You can define values for the most used record’s fields in this tab. Clicking on the field to the right opens a window to define properties.the default Country of origin set in New RecordGeneral Country. .Properties – the default properties set in New Record Traffic Properties.Original Language – the language of the record’s content .Country .Age rate – the default Age rate set in New RecordTrafficAge Rate. . . .Quality – the default instance visual quality set in New Record Instances[Instance] Quality. . . . It corresponds to the Kill date in New Record Instances Main Instance.the default stream name set in New Record Instances[Stream] Name.Instance name – the default name of the instance set in New Record Instances [Instance] Name. .Auto sort by – defines a field which will be used for Grid sorting by default. .Stream Language – the language of the main stream. .the default Media type set in New Record Instances  Media Type. . 134 . .Stream name .Media type .

xml file.xml file containing all the metadata for an instance and will attach it to the instance file. Export/Import This feature will help you in exchanging metadata and instances. Thus you can transfer not only instances. checking this field will prevent notes from exporting and you-from importing such information. Thus.3. .5. It will create automatically an *. Multi-file export When you have selected more than one file for export at the same time. .xml file. Exclude notes from import/export will not include the note fields in the *. 135 . Exclude files from import/export will not include the stream links (file paths to instances) from the exported metadata as they will probably not be the same at the destination workstation. If the box is not checked. or process these files independently from each other without losing their metadata. . . but all the metadata related to them. the metadata for all exported instances will be saved in one *.When importing existing record – Choose  the appropriate action for such cases. the recipient will not be able to forward.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL III. this feature will create a separate *.xml file for each instance exported. Since generally the notes are related to personal opinion and workstation-specific matters.

DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL III. right-click in the left area and then click [New] from the context menu. III.5. Different quality levels can be user-defined. There is a list of predefined media types in the left area of the window. If a new instance with different quality is received later. This time should account for the time needed to bring it (out) from an archive and upload it to the online storage. When you select a Media Type from the list. DVD. the fields InPoint and OutPoint in New RecordInstances Media become non-editable.4. Properties – define if the media is Rewritable. Color – chose color for media type color-coding. Doing so will open a dialog box where you can enter the name of the new quality and define a color for it. Qualities This Main menu item allows you to define a subjective measuring of the visual quality of an instance. this data field will help you determine which instance is better. This field describes the physical location of the program instance. Media Types It defines the types of media that are typically used in a TV facility – CD. NOTE: DO NOT set Random access for video tapes. right-click it and then click [Delete]. To delete a Media Type. To add new Media type. DVCAM. the Archive field in New RecordInstances Media becomes editable. right-click on it and select [Rename]. DVCPro etc. and/or Archive. A dialog box appears to enter the name of the new media type. its properties are displayed to the right and you can edit them: Name – media name. Random Access. When Random Access is checked. Prepared time – the time needed to start playback from this media type. A New Quality is added by pressing the New icon from the menu-bar or by right-clicking and selecting [New] from the context menu. 136 . When Archive is checked. To rename a Media Type.

DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL To change the name or the color of a Quality level. To delete an element. etc.Category – defines categories for each Type. Keyword and Group. select it and press the Delete icon in the menu-bar or right-click it and then click [Delete]. for Cinema these are Children film. For example. music etc. This criterion has two sub-branches: . Series. Classification  This is the classification structure of entries.  Archive – describes the physical location of the copy (building. assigned to the entry that are used for easier search. right-click it and choose [Properties] from the context menu. Category. entries may pertain to the same group. This will open a dialog box to enter the name of the new element (type. etc). The available classification criteria are Type. To change an element’s feature (name or color). Type describes the content type (cinema. You can also do that by right-clicking on it and choosing [Properties]. etc. etc. category. news.).Genres – defines genres for each Type. The default color is white. room. there is no color. For example. For example. sport. Drama. 137 . To add a new classification criterion (such as Type. it may be a special (gold) fund or Christmas/New Year programs. select it and press the Property icon in the menu-bar.  Keywords – specific. for Cinema these are Action. The Up and Down arrows in the menu-bar are used for changing the Qualities’ order. .e.  Groups – despite their type.6. floor. Keyword or Group) or Archive.) and define a color for color-coding. keywords. Comedy. III. i. etc. Making. right-click it and choose [Delete]. To delete a Quality level. Genre. you have to right-click an existing element and choose [New] from the context menu.

To add a new activity or a new name. The lists of names in the relevant pages contain country names.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL III. The columns’ size and order are the same as in the grid.. The following fields and buttons are situated along the upper panel of the window: . To change the name or the color of a credit entry (name or activity) – right-click on it and choose [Properties] from the context menu. etc. or a search result. editor. etc. company names and personal names.Name of the printer (it may be local or network connected printer). etc. target country.8.7. To delete a credit entry. right-click it and then click [Delete]. the activities for Countries might be country of origin. right-click the relevant list and then click [New] from the context menu. Companies and People. Each page contains two lists: list of activities/positions and list of names. director. the activities/positions for People might be star. shooting location. Enter a name and define a color for color-coding in the dialog box. It shows the database grid and the records listed in it – the entire database. 138 . Print The print-preview window opens after pressing the Print button in the Main menu. Credits This is a manager for description of video-content creators divided in three pages: Countries. For example. III.

Media Type – which Media Type to be assigned to the record’s instance. a new searching location. All visible in the grid records or only the Selected records. select it and press the Minus button. . described in the database.Button . Path – the searching location..Font type and Font size .Button First page . III.go to the first page . but not presented in the respective folders.hit this button to start printing the list. The search concerns only the main instances of the records.Button . i. To delete a line.Page Orientation buttons – choose Portrait or Landscape .Button Print . Log search progress – If this box is checked . Media Folders This option is used for searching for files.Button Selection – hit it to print only the selected grid rows. press the Plus button. SubFolders – check it. the search progress will be shown in the bottom area of the window.DATABOX: USER’S MANUAL .9.go to the last page . double click in the field to open the browse window. Press Check to start the search.e.Button Refresh table – refreshes the table if the content has been changed in the meantime. . To add a new line in the window.go to the next page . to search in the subfolders as well. Active – check this cell to permit searching in the selected folder.go to the previous page . _____________________________ 139 . In the Media Folder window you can create a list of search locations.Button Last page . Check Scope – it is used to define the scope of records within which search will be carried out: All records in the database.

Software License ListBox LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE WIBU USB KEY. DataBox should be also installed on ListBox workstations. Installation Where to Install it? ListBox is mostly used by schedule editors. GETTING STARTED ListBox is dedicated to creating and editing playlists.LISTBOX __________________________ I. IT WILL NOT RUN WITHOUT THE KEY INSTALLED ON YOUR USB PORT. ListBox doesn’t need any special workstation or platform. It allows preparing playlists in advance for the AirBox module and playing them on-air later. Minimum System Requirements CPU: RAM: O/S: Intel Pentium III 500 MHz 128 MB Windows 2000 Professional / Windows XP 140 . you should uninstall any previous ListBox versions (Control Panel  Add/Remove Programs  DMT ListBox). Previous Versions Prior to installing ListBox. In order to transfer content directly (dragn-drop) from DataBox to ListBox. I.1.

Trim. Append Element. Up. 2. Randomize. Congratulations! You have just created your first PlayBox playlist! II. Some particular buttons on the Toolbar will appear enabled or disabled depending on the selection made. For example. Print. Options. Delete Selection. Save as. Quick Start 1. The Toolbar contains the following command buttons that are described below in the relevant menu sections: New. Toolbar The Toolbar has a set of buttons that provide access to the most commonly used Playlist functions. USER INTERFACE II. Show Grid. Down. Insert Element. All commands from the Toolbar can also be found in the Menu Bar.LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL I. To Bottom. 4. 3. Find Text. Save. the Find File button is enabled only when a missing file is selected. To Top. Select the files you want to insert in the playlist and click the Open button. Click the Playlist button. Select Append Element.2. Find File and Folder View.1. Shift. Open. Launch ListBox. 141 . Reverse.

. By default. i. . A logo will appear over these clips during the playback. Playlist Grid This area is dedicated to playlist visualization. Move Up/Down are applied to it. . The order of Grid columns can be changed by drag-n-dropping them to the left or to the right. i.e.2. It looks the same as the AirBox Playlist Grid. the operation is Copy.Red text rows – show clips. ListBox Grid Features: .e. the executed operation is Move. which are not currently available. If <Ctrl> is pressed. They are the same as those in AirBox module. If Shift is pressed during dragging.Drag-n-Drop – It allows dragging clips within the grid or from one grid to another (from/to DataBox or to AirBox).LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. .Dark Blue bar shows the currently selected clip – all actions.Pink rows – these are the event rows. It is useful. commercials. when you have to hide the logo over a certain block of clips.Light cyan rows – these are the rows between Logo On and Logo Off events. each internal operation is Move and the operations between two windows (similar to Windows Explorer) is Copy 142 .

LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL

- Multi-selection – allows simultaneous manipulation of many clips– move, randomize, etc. Clips can be added to the selection by holding <Shift> or <Ctrl> key. The <Shift> key selects from-to, while the <Ctrl> adds a single clip to the selection. - Double-clicking over a clip invokes the Clip Trimmer. A detailed description of the Trimmer can be found further in the manual. - Right-clicking the grid opens the grid context menu. It contains commands from the Edit menu and the Playlist menu that have already been described above in the manual. Columns description: - Start Time – shows the start time of each clip. - Duration – shows the actual duration of each clip. Of course, if a clip has been trimmed, its actual duration is reduced. - Type column shows the type (MPEG) of the clip. - Category column contains category information fed by DataBox. The background is colored with the predefined category color. - File Name – shows the clip’s filename. If you have a file, stored at different locations, you can change the file path displayed in List Box for this file. Just press <F8> to open a dialog box for changing the file location. If the file is missing, after the playlist is loaded in AirBox it will skip that file and will jump to the next available clip. - Title, ClipID, Star columns contain data fed by DataBox, describing the clip name, clip ID and the performing artists. - Notes – displays trimming notification if trimmed files come from DataBox; and data from the fields, defined in DataBoxOptionsGeneralFields to AirBox notes.

II.3. Status Bar

The Status bar is located along the lowest part of the ListBox window. The First cell – Total Length – shows the playlist duration. The figure in parenthesis shows the number of lines in the list. The Second field – End at – shows when the playlist will end. The third cell – Full Path: – displays the location of a currently selected file (line)

143

LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL

III.

MENU BAR

The Menu Bar is at the top of the window and contains the following menus:

III.1.File Menu
Contains all playlist’s file-related commands:  New – allows creating a new playlist.  Open – opens an existing playlist and loads it for editing.  Save – saves the current playlist in the open file.  Save as… – saves the current playlist to a specified file.  Print… – prints the current playlist. After choosing the Print command, a Print-Preview window opens and displays the current playlist. The columns and their order of appearance are the same, as in the grid. You can change the column size in the Preview window. On the top of it, you can see: - The Name of the printer (it may be a local or networkconnected printer). - Page Orientation – Portrait or Landscape . - Auto size check box - Reset Column size button – resets to the initial column size. - Restore button - Column Size - Print - percent of the real size (zoom).

button - hit this button to start printing the playlist. - go to the first page / Last page - go to the last page

- Font type and Font size - First page - Button - go to the previous page / Button - go to the next page - Button All – hit it to print the whole document. - Button Selection – hit it to print only the rows that have been previously selected in the grid.

144

LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL

III.2.Edit Menu
This menu contains commands related to playlist editing.  Undo – undo function.  Redo – redo function.  Cut – removes selected rows from the playlist and keeps them in the buffer memory (clipboard).  Copy – saves a copy of selected rows from the playlist in the buffer memory without removing them from their original location.  Paste – pastes the clipboard content in the list before the selected row.  Delete – deletes the selected rows from the current playlist.  Select All – selects the whole playlist.  Invert Selection – inverts the selection.  Find Text – a search function. You can search through the content of all fields in the ListBox. After choosing this command, an inquiry-window opens. There you can specify the fields to search in, the search options and scope: - Text to Find –fill-in the search inquiry. - Search In – contains a list of the grid’s fields. The checked fields will be searched through. - Options – you can limit the search to Case Sensitive or to Whole Words, by checking the relevant box. - Direction – sets the search direction. By default, it is [down]. - Origin – it defines where to start the search– from the Current selection (up or down) or throughout the Entire scope. - Scope – defines the search scope. It may be the entire list (All) or the selected rows only (Selection). The scope is active only if there is some selection made in the playlist. - Find First – click to it to start the search - Find Next – click it to find the next search result of the same inquiry During search, the bar under the Find Next button is green. When search reaches the end of the search area, the bar becomes red.

145

LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL

III.3.Playlist Menu
      Append Element – adds a file to the end of the playlist. Inset Element – inserts a file in the playlist, above the currently selected row. Append Playlist – appends another playlist to the end of the current playlist. Insert Playlist – inserts another playlist in the current playlist, above the currently selected row. Delete Selection – deletes the selected rows from the current playlist. Clear All- deletes all lines from the current playlist.

 Add/insert Events – adds/inserts one of the following events: - Stop – automatically terminates the playlist playback. - Stop Cue - automatically terminates the playlist playback and shows the first frame of the next clip. - Wait – stops playback temporarily for a certain amount of time (hh:mm:ss) - Wait Until – stops playback and resumes it automatically at certain time (hh:mm:ss). - Logo Preset – allows displaying a logo file over the clips in AirBox. - GPI – activates the GPI functionality. - Kramer Switcher – activates the Kramer Switch output. - Kramer Matrix Switcher – activates the Kramer Matrix Switch output. - TitleBox NetControl Output – inserts TitleBox Output associated events.  Notes - adds/inserts Note line in the playlist. It is used for inserting comments in the playlist. One Down – moves the selection one row down in the list. One Up – moves the selection one row up in the list. Top – goes to the top of the list. Bottom – goes to the end of the list. Shift – shifts the positions of the selected rows. If there are more than two rows selected, their positions will be shifted ascending. The second selected will become first, the first selected will become last, etc.  Reverse – reverses the order of the selected rows.  Randomize – arranges the selected rows in a random pattern. The Shift, Reverse and Randomize commands are active only if a multi-selection is made.     

146

Loop – corresponds to the Playlist Loop box in AirBox. The name appears in the relevant field in AirBox. . Read only – shows whether the folder is write-protected or not ID – shows the folder ID.Start time – the time when the playlist playback should begin. Subfolders – shows whether the folder has subfolders or not.4. To change a property. In the window to the right are displayed the folders’ properties: Active – shows whether the folder is active or not.  Folder View – it is active if you have a Folder View application installed. just double click on it. where the output materials will be saved.  Edit – starts the Clip trimmer.  Folder View – it is active if you have a Folder View application installed.Media File OUT– this line displays the media folders. . Removable – shows whether the folder is removable or not.  Find File – searches for missing file(s) (red color text). the current playlist will be looped during playback in AirBox.Media File IN – this line displays the media folders that contain input media materials.Tools Menu  Options: .  Refresh List – updates the list. you can see the folders’ properties. This application helps you arrange your media files. III. Path – shows the folder path. . . In the window to the right. This application helps you arrange your media files. 147 . If it is checked.LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL  Change Directory – changes the file path for the selected entry.Playlist Name – give name/rename the playlist.  Edit – starts the Clip trimmer.

The time could be displayed in Frames. In the window to the right are displayed the folders’ properties. __________________________ 148 . Pressing icon in the toolbar invokes a form to define your own folder icons.The Show button – shows the selected column in the Playlist Grid. In order to view a correct 24-hour cycle in the playlist.The Reset button – resets the order of columns in the Playlist Grid. Minutes.  Column Properties – choosing it invokes the column properties window. Here are listed the names of playlist grid columns. appearing in ListBox. . The column will be visible if the check box in front of it is checked. To apply changes hit the icon in the toolbar. To reload the information hit the icon in the toolbar. etc.LISTBOX: USER’S MANUAL . . .  Entire row color – fills the entire row in the playlist with the Category-field color. select the properties line and hit the icon in the toolbar. saves the last file path. .The UP and Down buttons are used for changing the columns order. To add a new folder hit the icon in the toolbar To delete a folder. select the option “24 hour cycle”.Playlists – this line shows the folders that contain playlists.The Hide button – doesn’t display the selected column in the Playlist Grid. Seconds.  Time Format – specify the time format for displaying the [start time] and the [duration] in the current playlist.  Save Last Path – if checked .  Show Grid – shows the grid lines.

1. crawls. equipped with character generator frame buffer hardware. 149 . TitleBox works synchronously with the AirBox playout. SOFTWARE LICENSE TitleBox LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE WIBU USB KEY. thanks to its Scheduler.playbox. IT WILL NOT RUN WITHOUT THE KEY INSTALLED ON YOUR USB PORT. PREVIOUS VERSIONS Prior to installing TitleBox. by inserting TitleBox Net control events in an AirBox playlist. In TitleBox you can also start objects from previously created project(s) at different times. etc. clocks. you should uninstall any previous TitleBox versions (Control Panel  Add/Remove Programs  DMT TitleBox). Installation WHERE TO INSTALL IT? TitleBox is typically installed at on-air CG workstations.TITLEBOX __________________________ I. MINIMUM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS CPU: Intel Pentium 4 2.tv). Separate objects in TitleBox can be started or stopped via AirBox. and save them in projects.4 GHz RAM: 512 MB O/S: Windows Windows XP Professional or Home edition H/W: Compatible CG hardware (see the list of hardware CG boards supported at the PlayBox site: http://www. GETTING STARTED TitleBox module is an on-air graphics manager. such as rolls. You can create different static or dynamic objects in TitleBox. I. still pictures.

II. Congratulations! You have just created your first TitleBox crawl! 1. 5. Draw a rectangle in the Preview Area. 4. Click the Crawl button. Quick Start Launch TitleBox. 2.2. USER INTERFACE 150 .TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL I. 3. Type a text in the Properties dialog box and press OK. Press the two Play buttons – one in the bottom of the window and one in the third row of the taskbar.

151 . If an object is too complex and is not rendered yet. As seen in the example. show their type and/or status. their positions. Preview Area The Preview area is the main part of the TitleBox interface. It shows the objects. This sign will automatically disappear when the rendering is complete. types and status. Objects can be moved and resized in this area. a yellow/black sign saying “Rendering” will appear on the screen.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. the object below is a Picture and it is locked for moving. The upper one is an Animation and has In and Out events assigned.1. The little signs on the upper-left corner of the objects.

Pause Stop. They correspond to the relevant commands in the Object Menu. 152 . from which you can select the one to work with. and Toggle Play/Stop buttons control the play status of any particular object. that provide the standard object options. See also the corresponding section in the Project Menu description. even when the object is running on-air. The Cut. shows a window with a list of all objects available in The Properties buttons are object-related. There are two types of properties: Standard Properties. IMPORTANT: The properties can be interactively changed at any moment. rolls and crawls. as well as object ordering and alignment: The New.2.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. Paste and Delete buttons correspond to the relevant commands in Edit Menu. The Objects list button the current TitleBox project. The Select Display device button opens the list of available hardware drivers. They allow viewing or changing the properties of the currently selected object. and Property Tools. The Play. which provide an additional set of properties. Open and Save buttons correspond to the relevant commands in File Menu. The Property Tools are active only for texts. Copy. Toolbar The Toolbar is designed to facilitate the project management. individual object control.

you can activate an action for all of them by writing [*c] in the Name Mask field Group and Ungroup buttons selection of objects. you could control them simultaneously (using the wild card functionality). If the button is pushed. c2. It could also be visible in the preview area or not. You can activate this window from within the Object menu. depending on the current status of the object: you just have to write the name of a currently playing object and release the <F4> key to stop it. If you apply a unified naming system for your objects.e. Remove from Schedule button – removes the selected object from the schedule list.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL (!) TIP: While a project is in play mode. c1. etc.). with specific parameters. The [Play Toggle] command will switch to Play or Stop. if your objects are named using a letter and a number (i. The name of the currently selected object will appear in the Name field and will be highlighted in the Object list window. two or more overlapping objects will be blended. Schedule window button – opens the schedule window. and vice versa. Schedule buttons concern project scheduling. 153 . For example. Mix object button defines the draw mode of the object. The default action is [Play]. The scheduling function allows starting each object in a project at a specific time/day of week. c3. (!) TIP: When in Mix object mode. Add to Schedule button – adds the selected object to the schedule. Press and hold <F4> while setting the desired action:  Enter the name of the object in the Name Mask field (it corresponds to the Name displayed in the second row of the toolbar). It could be locked for moving and resizing or not. are intended for grouping and ungrouping a Lock and Visible buttons define the object status.  Select the action [Play/ Pause/ Stop/ Play Toggle/ Select/ None] using the left and right arrow keys on the keyboard.  Release the <F4> key to execute the selected action. you can control the separate objects in it through the Short Action function. you can switch between the overlapping objects using the <Alt> + click combination.

Its value can be positive (right-to-left movement) or negative (left-to-right movement). They are active for Text templates. Names are most important when you use Objects list window. Cross Fade. If zero. Those buttons work when more than one object is selected. IMPORTANT: Increasing the figures in these fields will decrease the speed. Lock buttons .allow aligning objects to each other. 154 . IMPORTANT: You cannot change the object size during its running on air. Duration field – here you can specify duration for an object. i. IN and OUT fields – define the effects for objects appearance/disappearance.allow defining the objects’ order in case they overlap.e. IMPORTANT: The speed can be interactively changed at any moment. where only names and properties are displayed. if needed. Still pictures.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL Name field – contains the name of the object. The duration determines how long the object will be displayed after pressing the Show object button. even when the object is running on-air. Fly and Wipe. In the fields next to the IN/OUT fields. Delay field –you can specify a delay for each individual object. A three-second delay means that the object would start three seconds after you have pressed the Show object button.used for locking the horizontal or vertical (or both) sizes of the object. you can define the speed of appearance/disappearance. Speed field .controls the speed of dynamic objects. [Crawl 1]. You can change them at your will.stand for X and Y positions of the selected object in the 2D space. Rolls and Crawls. Overlapping dynamic objects is not desirable. Alignment buttons . such as animations. [Roll 3].stand for Width and Height of the selected object. W and H numeric fields . X and Y numeric fields . the object is frozen. etc. crawls and rolls. The possible choices are Cut (None). The default names are [Type]_[#]. Order buttons .

Create a Digital Clock object (with custom background and font). Play shows all existing objects in the preview/output. Create a Text Template object (with background).4. Create a Roll object (vertically running text). Create a Still picture object. System Bar The System Bar is situated along the bottom of the Interface window. and Arabic characters II.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL II. Stop hides all existing objects from the preview/output. Status Bar The status bar displays information about the currently selected driver: 155 . Pause stops all existing objects. Create a Unicode Digital Clock object – this allows using Chinese. Create an Analogue Clock object (with custom background and clock hands).5. Setup invokes a dialog box for hardware setup.3. It contains buttons for hardware control: Clear is used for clearing the graphics frame buffer (the whole project). Create a Crawl object (horizontally running text). Hindi. Object Palette The Object palette contains buttons for all supported graphics objects for insertion in the project: Select one or several objects by dragging a rectangle around them. but they remain on the preview/output. Insert Direct Show Media Source Insert Banner Create a Chat note object. which depends on the currently installed hardware. Create an Animation object (from a sequence of 32-bit TGA files). II.

.File Menu Contains project’s file related commands: . the latter will be closed without preserving any unsaved changes.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. IMPORTANT: The project must be exported as a template. III. NOTE: If you reopen a file while working on another project. It will be saved in the special Template folder. . IMPORTANT: The Net control function must be started to perform the network control.Select All – selects all objects in the preview area. .Merge – merges the current project with another . . 156 .Net control – shows the connection status between AirBox and TitleBox. .Edit Menu Contains object’s related commands: .Save – saves the current project to the open file (*.Copy – saves a copy of the selected object in the buffer-memory.3.tbd).2. MENU BAR III. III.Open – opens an existing project (*.Cut – removes the selected object(s) and keeps them in the buffer-memory. Create. For detailed step-by-step guide how to integrate TitleBox with AirBox look up in APPENDIX 5 – Integration of AirBox with TitleBox .tbd). This folder is created automatically during TitleBox installation.New – allows creating a new project. . .Network Menu It concerns the connection between AirBox and TitleBox. Size. . .1. so that it could be controlled through AirBox. .tbd).Paste – pastes the buffer content into the project. and Delete.Reopen – shows a list of the ten recently open projects.Undo – undoes Move.Save as – saves the current project to a specified file (*.Export Project as Template – exports the currently open project as a template. This menu item is a feature of the full version only – it is not available in the light version.Delete – deletes the selected object.

Pressing OK inserts the created object in the project. .4. .freezes the object. . Analog clock. EDITING OBJECTS You can edit objects by invoking the object properties dialog box (for non-text objects) or using the special toolbars (for text objects).Remove From Scheduler – Removes the selected object from the Schedule . 2. Select the appropriate object button from the Object Palette.4. III.Play. whereas Pictures and Text templates with graphics background already can.Stop – hides the object from the graphics frame buffer. Draw a rectangle in the Preview Area where you wish to place it. . .TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. . 4.Property – opens an object properties window.Property Tools – opens additional properties windows for objects (text. rolls and crawls). . and Banner). It allows aligning the objects to each other. 3. For details.Object Menu This menu contains object-related commands: . 157 . Do this by double-clicking on the object or by clicking on the Properties buttons. DirectShow media. A Properties dialog box will appear allowing fine-tuning of non-text objects (Still picture. You can move the selected object under or over the others.shows and runs the selected object on the graphics frame buffer. Digital Clock.Order – This function is active when there are overlapped objects. The commands from this menu are also displayed in the toolbar (the second uppermost row).Add to Scheduler – Adds the selected object to the Schedule.1. . Animations and Clocks can not be resized in TitleBox. but it remains displayed on the graphics frame buffer. Animation. Creating Objects STEP BY STEP All objects are created in a similar way: 1.Objects list – shows a window with a list of all objects available in the current TitleBox project.Alignments – This function is active when more than one object is selected. see the relevant sections below.Scheduler Properties – Shows the properties of the schedule .Pause. You can edit the properties of text-containing objects either by using the special toolbars that appear when (double-) clicking the relevant object or the Properties buttons .

4.4. Still Picture Properties The Picture Properties dialog box looks like the one to the left. and Roll’s height and text size. III. Crawl’s width and text size. Push this button to create a Picture object over other objects in the project.3. now you can adjust 158 . The Toolbar allows you to Open and Save the image. you will overlay its alpha over all underlying objects. III. III.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL Crawls. interesting option. resizing Crawl’s height and Roll’s width should be done while the objects are stopped. However. asking for confirmation. It can also be deleted by using the <Delete> key on your keyboard. Thus. Object List The Object list is intended for fast switching and reviewing of objects and their properties. such as Left and Top side positions. Rolls and Text Templates without graphics background can be resized even while on-air. when you slide the mouse pointer over them. change their Order (z-order) and control their playout and visibility status.3. All objects can be deleted by clicking on the New Project button. The Draw Alpha Only button provides a new. If your picture does not have an alpha channel. DELETING OBJECTS An object can be deleted by selecting it and clicking the Delete button from the Main Toolbar. Load and Invert the mask (the alpha channel).1. Try to make effects this way! In the right part of the window. You can resize all dimensions of Text objects. All buttons have specific pictures and provide hints. A dialog box will appear. Duration and Delay. you can import one separately.4.2. and Flip the image horizontally and/or vertically. Here you can easily Group/Ungroup objects. by using the Open mask button . Object Properties The Object Properties dialog boxes look different according to the object type.

After pressing one of these buttons. The first one means that background will be displayed only while text is running.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL the object’s Contrast.3. and dynamic speed properties. while the third one can be set in the specially designated dialog box. Update from file – for picture objects only. III. The next three buttons refer to the object’s background continuity mode. it will be refreshed automatically in your TitleBox project. This list refers to pictures/OLE objects. The second one will “glue” the texts one after another. and text colors) and will play them one after another. If the value in the Loop field is [0]. TitleBox will show only the latest change.2. When a crawl/roll object is selected (single click) the following string appears in the last row of the toolbar: . The last two buttons in this toolbar concern the Queuing functionality. In the following two cells you can define the object’s Speed and number of Loops. clicking the right mouse button on an object in the list will invoke a context menu containing several useful options: Update – OLE only. The Anti-flicker option is designed for smoothing the high-contrast computer graphics when overlaying it over video. Full size – display the original size of the object.you can set custom size to your embedded object. Roll/Crawl Properties There are three groups of properties for these objects: common text attributes. You can choose to Blur the object and set the blur radius using the slider below. continuity mode and queue options. Continuity and Queue mode. The gear-wheel button opens the Embedded Objects list. If none of them is pressed.4. Brightness and change its Color Balance. You can set an auto refresh period using the arrows. texts. i. Change the Vertical Value to prevent flickering of the graphics edges. Title Box will “remember” all new changes (background colors. Invert Alpha – inverts object’s alpha channel. dimension. Press the clock button in the upper left corner to activate this function. Size… . if you update the original file (picture/OLE).e. the object will be displayed endlessly. without any space in between. In addition. The first two are controlled through object-specific toolbars. You can choose how to switch between changes (loops) while in play mode: 159 . inserted in the Crawl/Roll (see the common attributes description below). you will be able to make a queue of changes (loops). The third button will display the background continuously. Thus.

TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL Use if you want to display the subsequent loops one by one. In the Gradient properties dialog. Text and Background Properties You can edit the common text attributes (such as font selection. fix the desired settings: Choose a Style for the gradient from the dropdown list. All other marks will become white. color. Select Gradient colour from the drop-down list. click the Fill Effect button. size. TitleBox will generate one loop out of all loops in the queue. shadow. blur. use if you do not want any space between the successive loops in the object. i. Write the new texts directly in the object! NOTE: There is no possibility for inserting images as background. define the gradient colours and their initial points: Place the plus-sign cursor in the desired position and click. A black triangle will appear in that position to mark the currently selected point. In addition. but still you can insert images and OLE objects in the Roll/Crawl objects.) and background attributes from another object-specific toolbar: It appears in the last row of the TitleBox toolbar when you double-click a Roll/Crawl object. drag the cursor to change the gradient positioning. Here you can find all the formatting options. depending on your settings – see the previous paragraph). to leave some space between them (empty or with background colour. 160 . Use the Fill Effect drop-down list to modify gradient colours for your text: In the Font Formatting dialog box.e. as known from other windows-based editing applications. In the rectangle below. Pressing invokes the Font-formatting window. Another way to invoke it is by pressing the Property button (in the second row of the toolbar) while a Crawl/Roll object is selected (single click). etc. In the square field to the left.

bold. If you choose  Create from File. Use the drop-down list to fix their position in the Roll/Crawl object. Any changes in the relevant OLE object will be visible in TitleBox. You can create a link. and the button to insert OLE compatible objects. when saved (see the Roll/Crawl Property section above). 161 . Back in the Gradient properties dialog. Modify the colour for this colour-change point at your will and click OK. Press to view a transparency background during editing in the preview area. the relevant application opens and you will be able to create the desired object. Pressing invokes the Paragraph-formatting dialog box. The standard Windows OLE dialog box appears after pressing it: If you choose Create New. Import OLE-compatible objects using the button. The following fields in the toolbar provide general textformatting options (font. font size.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL Double-click on the black triangle to invoke the Colour setting dialog. underlined. where you can set all paragraph-formatting options. you can change the position of the point by dragging it. text alignment. Finally. you can add as many colour-change points in the gradient as you like. Besides. The two buttons to the right concern the background. italics. Push the button to insert a still picture object link. click OK. The last three buttons are related to inserting object links in the Roll/Crawl. or display it as icon through checking the relevant box. you will be prompted to browse for it. font color).

i. where you’d like to change the speed.e.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL Dynamic Speed Properties Pushing the Property tools button Dynamic properties dialog box: while a Roll/Crawl object is selected will open the This property dialog box allows you to specify different speeds of Roll’s and Crawl’s movement. the object moves twice faster than the default speed. you can select the position in the text. i. On the top of the graphics. 2. i. you can see the object (Roll/Crawl) text.e. the first point is in the beginning of the graphics. the object does not move. one means 1xdefault speed. two means 2xdefault speed. etc. The Zero value means 0xdefault speed. the object moves with the default speed. etc. The movement is represented graphically and you can define speed for each point of the graphics. The vertical axis represents the speed multiplier (0. A new point is added by pressing the Add button or by double-clicking in the yellow-squared area. which is set in the main screen (see Toolbar). 162 . The horizontal axis of the graphics represents the position of the Crawl/Roll on the screen. By moving the mouse pointer over the grid (the blue lines) or using the arrow keys. By default.e. The text section which will be shown at the selected “speed change” point is enclosed in a dark blue frame.) to the default speed. 1.

163 .shows the list of all “speed change” points in the object. The wait-time appears in a red square under the zero-point. where the # stands for the sequenced number of the point. Their names are [Point #]. The position’s coordinates are also displayed in the status bar. All points are shown in the Point list to the right of the graphics. If you set a speed “0” for any position. This is the period (in seconds) during which the object will remain stopped. Align buttons allow aligning the selected point toward the previous. Add button – adds a new “speed change” point in the object’s graphics. The Default speed field shows the default speed. In the Point Properties area are shown the properties of the selected point: speed. a green point will appear at the grid and its properties (speed and position) will be displayed in the Point Properties area to the right.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL When you select a position to change its speed. the next or the first point in the graphics. as it was defined in the main TitleBox window (see Toolbar). Delete button – deletes the selected “speed change” point in the object’s graphics. position and time (for zero-speed points only). then you will have to define a delay period. Point list .

This list refers to pictures/OLE objects. size. If you want to open an image as a background.) and background attributes from another object-specific toolbar: It appears in the last row of the TitleBox toolbar when you double-click a Text template object. blur. the following object-specific toolbar appears in the last line of TitleBox’ toolbar: .you can set custom size to your embedded object. etc. if you update the original file (picture/OLE). In addition. have three groups of settings options: Embedded objects and picture background If you click once in a text object.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. The first button opens the Embedded Objects list. color.3. Thus. Invert Alpha – inverts object’s alpha channel. Text and Background Properties You can edit the common text attributes (such as font selection. Write the new texts directly in the object! 164 . Tile or Center). it will be refreshed automatically in your TitleBox project. Update from file – for picture objects only. Press the clock button in the upper left corner to activate this function.3. You can set an auto refresh period using the arrows. Text Template Properties The Text Template objects. Another way to invoke it is by pressing the Property button (in the second row of the toolbar) while a Text object is selected (single click). Delete the background image by pushing the button. similar to rolls and crawls.4. inserted in the text object (see the Property description below). push the Open image button . shadow. Full size – display the original size of the object. Stretch. clicking the right mouse button on an object in the list will invoke a context menu containing several useful options: Update – OLE only. Size… . Use the drop-down list to the right to fix its layout in the object (Normal.

and the button to insert OLE compatible objects. Import OLE-compatible objects using the button. font color). bold. 165 . Use the drop-down list to fix their position in the Text object. The last three buttons are related to inserting object links in the Text. Here you can find all the formatting options. text alignment. Pressing invokes the Paragraphformatting dialog box. The standard Windows OLE dialog box appears after pressing it. as known from other windows-based editing applications. underlined. The following fields in the toolbar provide general textformatting options (font. italics. Press to view a transparency background during editing in the preview area. The two buttons to the right concern the background. Push the button to insert a still picture object link. font size. where you can set all paragraphformatting options.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL Pressing invokes the Font-formatting window.

Moving down . Any changes in the relevant OLE object will be visible in TitleBox. Auto refresh box – automatically displays the changes made in the currently loaded text file. Delete item button – deletes the selected text line.moves the selected text line down. Moving up – moves the selected text line up. the relevant application opens and you will be able to create the desired object. You can change the text by double-clicking on a text string as well. Play button – starts displaying the text lines in the preview/output window. You can create a link. You can prepare texts in advance or create them online. Add item button – adds a text line. using the open button . If you choose  Create from File. Each paragraph in the text appears as a separate line in the Text Template window. Save button – saves the entered text as a file. Open button – You can open a previously prepared text file. or display it as icon through checking the relevant box. Edit item button – opens a dialog box for editing the selected text line. you will be prompted to browse for it. for specified periods in seconds. A dialog box opens for typing the text. Insert item button – inserts a text line. Stop button . 166 . Time field – defines the frequency of changing the text lines. Text Template Property Tools The property dialog box for text objects allows displaying different texts consequently.stops displaying the text lines in the preview/output window. even during its play-out. The different texts are shown as a list of texts (separate lines) in the Text Template window – press the button to view it. A dialog box opens for typing the text in. when saved (see the Text Property section above).TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL If you choose Create New. New button – opens a new text template.

Be sure to place the hands’ ends on the exact centres of the relevant images.4. hour. minute and second hands. Save them in separate files – one per each element of the clock (background. use a picture-editing application to create four square images with equal dimensions. Open button – loads a previously created clock object (*. There are different pages for each clock layer – background (clock plate). It cannot be resized! 167 . (!) TIP: To achieve most satisfactory result. Settings: . hour hand. Bear in mind that the clock object will be the same size as the image in the file. ./ Key Color – key color for the image.clc). hour.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL III.Load Image – loads the relevant image (for the background. If the image does not have a mask./ Enable – enables/prohibits displaying the relevant element. as well as a preview page of the overall clock layout. minute or second hands). . All pages have identical structure: a settings area and a preview area. and second hand). minute hand.clc). Lock position – locks the X/Y position of the image. .Transparency – set the image transparency Preview area – It is used for previewing the relevant clock element.4. Save button – saves the current clock image into a file (*.3. . Analog Clock Properties The Analog Clock properties dialog box looks like the one to the right. New button – opens an empty clock property object. you can select the key color.

seq) or a sequence of files (*.Open button .New button .4.tga.3. 168 .loads a file (*.jpg. *.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. *.5.jpeg.bmp) for an animated logo: .allows creating a new sequence. *. Animation Properties The Animation Property dialog box looks like this: .

reverses the files’ order . because they have only 256 indexed colours and do not have 8-bit transparency (just one colour can be either entirely transparent or entirely solid). .inverts the alpha channel of the selected file.Reverse button . specify the first field – A or B. Click Open.Invert alpha button . . Use the blue arrows to the right to enter the number of the currently selected file in the relevant field. 169 . If you are loading an interlaced animation. TitleBox will load the entire range of *. If the animation files do not have an alpha channel.Export button .View buttons are used for changing the sequence files’ view – list or thumbnail mode.Insert button .Move Up/Down buttons – moves the selected file up/down the list. enter the numbers of the first and of the last file of the sequence in the Load from and Load to fields respectively.deletes a selected file from the sequence. you can load animated *.gif files.adds a new file to the sequence. If you use the Add button. A blue arrow to the right of them will mark the final and the initial frame of the loop. If you want to loop between two frames in this working range fill-in the Start and End fields. . If you want to load only à part of the files.saves the current sequence as a file (*. . you can select a key color by using the Key color tool: Underneath the key-color setting kit are situated the Range.Delete button . The frames included in the loop will be highlighted in pale yellow. The background of the working range will remain white.Add button . The currently selected file from the sequence is shown in the preview area to the right.inserts a file into the sequence. The names of the frames that are out of this range will become red. If you use the Open button.seq). .gif sequences for high quality applications. .and Loop-related boxes. . Select the Range of frames that will be used in the sequence – enter the values you wish in the From and To fields. The sequence is displayed in the animation property window.gif images.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL Besides. and their background – gray. TitleBox will load only the first picture of the file. NOTE: We do not recommend using *. and the number of loops.

color. After you have made your choice. If this option is selected. etc. press OK and the Digital clock will be created (or updated) automatically. To see it. These numbers will be displayed in the status bar of the sequence properties dialog box: [Count] stands for the total number of frames in the list. In it. click on the animation object: Select the desired Speed and how many times you want to Loop the animation. you can define common text attributes (such as font. just uncheck  the Loop option.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL After adding your animation to the preview area.4. Thus. This taskbar duplicates the range and loop setting in the Properties dialog box. If you want the animation to run as regular again. [Used] stands for the number of frames in the working Range.6. You can change those here as well: choose a Range of animation frames to be displayed or activate/deactivate the Loop option (it enables leader-loop-trailer functionality). animation will start from the beginning. 170 . NOTE: The From and Start fields represent the first frame that will be shown. the difference between the To and From (and between the End and Start) values will equal the number of frames that will be shown in your sequence. run to the End frame and loop between Start and End frames.) and background attributes. size. shadow. an additional toolbar appears active. Check it and select the range of frames within which you want to loop. III. or at double-clicking the object. and [Loop] stands for the number of frames that will be looped. Digital Clock Properties The Digital Clock Properties dialog box looks like this: It appears after you have drawn the rectangle to create this object. blur. or when you press the Property button while the object is selected. and the To and End fields represent the first frame that will NOT be shown.3.

If you have changed the mask. Update the mask using the green arrows button. some additional options are available – select the type of your counter – Countdown or Regular through the button. the Initial and Stop times and a Mask. The twelve-hour time format is active when the button is pressed. Pressing Properties invokes the Digital Clock Properties dialog box. It does not stop the clock/counter. Visible determines if the clock/counter will be visible on the monitor or not. The background color is changeable through the button. During freeze. if Stop checked. the counter is running in the background. but just hides/shows it. which appears beneath the standard ones. Pushing the Intermediate button will “freeze” the counter. you will have to press this button to update it. If pushed. the counter starts showing current time again. You can choose the time format through the 12/24 hours clock button . Then Prepare your counter and Start it. After selecting the counter type. Run your project and show your object using the well-known Play button. While in clock mode. Stop the counter with the button. it runs as an ordinary digital clock. you are ready to run your counter. the counter will count from an Initial time to a Stop time. 171 . After pressing the Prepare button your counter sets to Initial time and waits for a Start command. Select a mask for the clock in the box. When you push the Intermediate button once more. and the twenty-four hours format – when it is not pressed. If you do not see it.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL After creating your Digital clock more options will become available via an additional toolbar. just click on the Digital clock object and it will appear: You can select two modes for the Digital clock – to run as a clock or as a counter. but you see a still frame displaying the time when the Intermediate button was pressed. If not pushed. There are two common buttons for the clock and counter modes – Properties and Visible . counter will count up. In the counter mode.

Capture Device displays video streams from any capture device compatible with the direct show standard. an object-specific toolbar appears under the standard ones: Check  Alpha to use the video’s alpha channel. Virtual Channel is a DMT standard that helps external programs (as AirBox. Loop = [1] means that the video will be played once and so on. Graph Edit. you can select the picture re-scaling algorithm.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. Use the Load button to browse for them. Select the capture device from the dropdown list. In it. When a direct show object is selected in the TitleBox preview area. Direct Show Media Properties TitleBox allows inserting all kinds of media supported in the Direct Show standard: File shows any files that are supported by the Direct Show standard. the lower CPU usage. as you want. When in [Center] mode. Loop = [0] means that the video will be repeated incessantly.4. Adjust it using the percentage spin box to the right. there are two drop-down lists: one to select the display Mode (Stretch or Center). Any loop number different from zero represents how many times will the object be looped.7. Enter the loop number to repeat the video as much times. or any Direct Show-compatible player) to transfer video information. Select its Color from the palette to the left of the Use Alpha check box. In this toolbar.3. You can crop the image Width and Height using the relevant spin boxes under the preview window. 172 . and another one for the scaling quality. you can Use Alpha matte to fill-in the space between the edges of the video and the object’s borders. Use them to move the video vertically or horizontally within the object boundaries. The faster the mode. which to be inserted in the object. The last two spin boxes control the image offset in relation to the object’s centre.

4. there is a new feature in the banner properties – the Watch Directory option. a browser opens automatically for you to specify a folder that contains picture files.3. They will be displayed as a slide show in this object: Use the well-know buttons to add. 173 . The buttons above it are relevant to the currently selected picture. Specify how long it will be displayed and the transition pattern and duration. Banner Properties Pushing the Insert Banner button invokes a dialog box for you to create a list of picture files. invert their alpha and move them up and down. When you check this option. as well as the picture’s layout (in the drop-down list in the upper right corner). and reverse their order. just press the Set As Default button . Thus. By pushing the button.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. Opening it will activate a kind of slide show in the banner and there will be no need to insert each picture from this folder manually.8. When you select a picture from the gallery to the right. insert and delete pictures from the list. it is displayed in the preview window to the left. you can choose a background colour for it. If you would like to set the same parameters for all pictures included in the banner. For your convenience. the settings you have already made will affect all other pictures in this object.

To add an object to the Schedule.4. The object’s properties are controlled as those of the other objects (See the Text template properties section). When you click this object once.9. Scheduler The Schedule mode allows creating a schedule for playing the objects. Object’s settings and Object list. but when you enter a text in it.3. It can be considered as a Text template object.4. press the Add to Schedule button from the TitleBox’ Toolbar. The chat note will be updated at each save of the relevant file. You can also insert a file link (ProjectPluginsFile Link) to a text and/or a picture file. 174 . text is always shown as a new line coming from the bottom and the old text is rolling to the top. This kind of objects is suitable for use together with some SMS applications. A Schedule window will appear. It consists of Schedule commands. an additional object-specific toolbar appears underneath the standard ones.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL III.4. Specify the desired speed for changing the text lines in the chat note: III. Chat note objects The last object is the object palette is the Chat note object .

A browse window will open for defining a log file.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. . when you want to define a different behavior of the object in the different days or hours. III. .4. The Stop date is not mandatory.Duration – defines the duration of the object appearance through: Loop – the number of loops. Default – sets the default settings. Scheduler Commands Activate – press it to activate the schedule for the current project. Reset – resets the Schedule. This field is active only for dynamic objects.2. you have to check the Advanced box in the Type field. an event (for example GPI) or CMD. .Cycling – defines the period of repeating the object appearance in minutes. every week.Date – defines the Start and/or Stop date. It could be a specific time. Clone – “clones” the settings of the selected object. You can create your own default settings as well. for example. Here you can define a specific day of the week or a date for showing the object.1. Stop Time – the stop time within the relevant day. every day. This feature is useful. the Start day is today. Log File – press it. . Del – deletes a selected object from the Object’s list. 175 . Object’s Settings Here are the available settings for scheduling of objects.Start by – defines the starting trigger.4. .Advanced – to get access to these settings. A new line for the same object will appear in the Object’s list. By default. if you want to create a log file. . It is possible to define the end time of the object appearance within the day (Until).defines the frequency of the object appearing – only once.4. every month or in a more sophisticated pattern (Advanced). Loop Until – a stop event (GPI for example).4. Duration – duration within the relevant day. You should select an object from the list below to make the settings for it. Then you can modify its settings.Type .

It is used for activating/ deactivating the particular object in the schedule. 31st.Display the object on Tuesdays and Saturdays (i. An Example: If you want to: . In front of each object in the list. there is a check box. A right-mouse click in the Objects list opens a context menu for copying and pasting the object’s settings. .e. The schedule settings for this object will look like this: 176 .TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL III.Display it for 15 minutes every hour. an advanced displaying).4. Objects List The Schedule Objects list occupies the lower part of the Scheduler window.Start object1 (picture1) at 10 o’clock on November.3.4. 18th and put it on schedule till December. All the scheduled objects and their settings are displayed in it. .

If there is an object that is being played.Back Color – set a color for the working background. the pulses are low. III. If you have no devices installed.  File link . The file content could be an image or a text. the computer “knows” when an object is being played.Back image – you can select an image for background as well.Workspace – set a color for the entire workspace. Pause.Options – invokes the Project Options window.Driver Select – opens the list of available hardware drivers. the list will contain [Simple Preview Output Driver].Clear Buffer – clears the graphics frame buffer.Plugins – shows the available plugins. you can select the desired COM port or [None] if you do not want any pulses at all.  Active Event . situated along the bottom of the window. General Options: These options allow defining the colors. . .Project Menu This menu contains project-related commands. Clear) are also operated through buttons. . .Stop – hides all existing objects. When there are no objects played. The assigned module in AirBox must support “Use Graphic layer” option (AirBoxOptionsPlaybackAssigned modules). .Scheduler – Displays the schedule window.Driver Setup – invokes a dialog box for hardware setup.TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL III. . Some of them (Play.Creates an object containing information from an external file and observes the changes in real time. from which you can select the one to work with.Play – shows (plays) all existing objects. .Pause – stops all existing objects . 177 . . .This function keeps you informed any time whether a TitleBox object is being played or not. In this menu item. It contains three pages – General options. Network options and Output options.Work Area – set the color for frame line of the work area. Graphics is fed to AirBox through the Mapped Memory Driver. which is used for previewing the TitleBox project in the AirBox preview window. Stop.5. the a high pulse is sent to the COM port. the safe area and grid usage for the Preview area: .Mix Objects – Blends two or more overlapping objects. .5. Thus.1. . which depends on the currently installed hardware. .

where available. To control a project (its objects) from AirBox.Snap to Grid – the size of a grid element.5. then after installing AirBox. .3. it corresponds to AirBox OptionsModules  Remote control [TitleBox Net Control] Configure [Channels]. III. __________________________ 178 .Safe Frame –the size of the safe area in percentage. The default setting is [Square pixel] IMPORTANT: To use TitleBox Net Control output event in AirBox. you need to run TitleBox Net Control Setup on both and select the same folder.\TitleBox Net Control Setup). you have to create that project in TitleBox first and export it as a template in the Template folder (TitleBox -> Network -> Export project as template).2. Output Options Here you can set the aspect ratio of the output. .Port – select a network port. III.View Grid/ Grid color – check the box for setting the grid view and select the grid color. The Template folder is created automatically during TitleBox installation. .TITLEBOX: USER’S MANUAL .5. If the AirBox module is installed on another computer or you need to change the folder’s location.Safe frame color – color for safe area frame line. . you have to start your TitleBox with Net Control function (TitleBox-> Network > Net Control). . The grid is very useful when you size up the objects. For example if you have AirBox and TitleBox installations on different workstations.TitleBox Channel ID – TitleBox’s channel ID. Network Options These options are used for interaction between TitleBox and AirBox. you have to start the TitleBox Net Control Setup (Start\Programs\Digital Media Technologies Ltd.

DataBox and AirBox modules. I. Pressing the right mouse button on the Preview screen. 4:2:2 P@ML).CLIP TRIMMER __________________________ The Clip Trimmer is used for previewing and trimming clips in ListBox. It shows the video clip which is being trimmed. Clips are loaded into the Trim Window by double-clicking on them in ListBox. limited to half a GOP for the IN points and 1-3 frames for the OUT points. this may lead to a slight inaccuracy. Depending on the stream’s GOP size. NOTE: Trimming is GOP accurate! IN points can be positioned only on I-frames.or P-frames. while OUT points can be positioned on I. Preview Screen The Preview screen occupies the largest part of the Trim Window. 179 . DataBox or AirBox modules. then trimming will be frame accurate. I. invokes a context menu with the most frequently used commands in Trimmer (See the screenshot to the left). The trimmer window has a number of keyboard shortcuts that are listed in the shortcuts leaflet in the PlayBox customer’s package. so you do not need any specialized hardware equipment to use it. If the stream’s GOP size is one (I-frames only. You can preview clips even during the on-air playback in AirBox. USER INTERFACE It combines a VGA preview screen and tools for editing the In and Out points of MPEG clips.1. The Trimmer uses software decoding of MPEG2 files.

the Out point timecode will be calculated automatically. after entering the In and Duration values. Out or Duration value (but not all the three of them. for example). the marker will move to the relevant position. untrimmed duration of the clip.Out box – displays the Out point timecode . The Trim bar visualizes the clip length and the clip markers. by mouse dragging.Position box contains the timecode of the currently selected point in the clip. 180 . .Total Duration box – displays the original.CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL I. . It is quite useful for long clips.2. If you type another timecode in this box and press <Enter>. Thus. Moreover.In box – displays the In point timecode . The following Boxes are situated under the preview window: . Trimmer Control Once a clip is loaded. you can protect their values from changing (by mistake.Details box – it shows the part of the clip. you can navigate and edit it. You can move or resize the zoom frame. It is equal to the difference between In and Out points. of course) by clicking on the lock icon to the right of the box. the Duration value will be calculated automatically.Duration box – displays the clip duration. You can define a new Zoom area by drawing a rectangle through dragging the mouse while holding its right button. Out or Duration box. It is possible to lock the In. using the Clip Trimmer controls. . To enter values in the In. It defines what part of the clip is being shown in the Detail View. After entering the In and Out timecodes. you can use the arrows beside them or type numbers in the boxes. The Zoom frame is a yellow square in the trim bar. enclosed in the zoom frame.

The In. Out and Duration boxes display information about the selected section. It stops and resumes the clip playback from the . The IN point marker is colored green and by default it is at the beginning of the clip.rewind (if possible) .  Play button starts playing the clip.splits the clip and thus defines separate sections in the clip. You can define In/Out points for each section of the split clip. creates a new section before the existing one. etc.  OUT button – marks the Out point for end of playback in AirBox. etc.).moves to the previous mark point (in/out/bookmark) 181 .moves to the next mark point (in/out/bookmark) . After splitting the clip. Multiple In/Out definitions are used for skipping some parts of the clip during its playback. You can set an In/Out point. insert other clips between them.CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL  SPLIT button .e. You can play them separately. creates a new section after the existing one. Pressing the In button after an existing Out point.  Stop button  Pause /Resume same timecode position.  Button  Button  Button  Button  Button  Button stops the playback and “rewinds” the clip to its beginning. each new clip section appears as a separate row in the play list. Pressing the Out button before an existing In point.fast forward (if it is possible) . Thus. you actually see the next frame.  IN button – marks the In point for start of playback in AirBox. You can create separate sections also by pressing repeatedly the In/Out buttons. The IN/OUT markers show the frame before/after (i. titles. if the marker is on the Out point. button. but not the last frame of the trimmed part. press <Shift> + Play. from the original clip. you can exclude existing commercials. change their order. The OUT point marker is colored red and by default it is at the end of the clip.reverts to one frame backward . If you want to play only the trimmed part (i. between the IN and OUT points). by dragging the IN/OUT marker on the trim bar or by entering timecode directly into the IN/OUT box.e.skips one frame forward . Then it transforms to pause/resume.

opens a dialog box for exporting the trimmed clip as a file. the slower the other simultaneously running processes on the machine. you can change their order using the up and down arrows. I. 182 .CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL  Add Zone button .  Export button . A yellow point appears in the trim bar. . they will appear in the Export list as different parts.deletes the selected zone point. press <Ctrl>+<BkSp>.Balance box – shows the clip playback L-R balance. Besides. There is a reset button beside the slider to restore the default value. Volume Control You can change the audio volume and audio balance of the clip. There is a reset button beside the slider to restore the default value.marks the beginning of a zone. Select which of them to export by checking the checkboxes in front the relevant section. using the relevant sliders in the Clip Trimmer.Volume box – shows the volume level of the clip playback. you have to specify the way they should be exported: as separate files (Export selection(s) as multiple files) or as a single file (Export selections as a single file). select it and press <Ctrl>+<D>. The new values will not take effect in AirBox playback.  Delete Zone button . . If you choose to export several parts at a time.  Open button will load a clip in the Trimmer window. and the quicker the export made.3. To delete a clip section. These sliders are used for convenience during the trimming process. Normal and High. The higher the priority. Pressing the Export button in this dialog opens another dialog box for you to specify the file name and store location and to begin the export. To reset the original clip length. If you have divided the clip into several sections. Each of them “tells” the CPU what priority to give to the export process. The Throttle has three levels – Low.

audio channels.Duration of the clip in HH:MM:SS. . audio bitrate.The third field [Version] – displays the current Trimmer version.Type of PES (packetized elementary stream) . when dragging over the trim bar. Status Bar It is located along the lowest part of Trimmer window.The first field [Position] – shows the current timecode.Mux rate (the multiplexing rate in bps) .Audio stream information: number of streams.1. . Filters. . audio sampling rate. Zones. II. audio compression type.The last field shows the clip’s filename and location. image width and height in pixels. .CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL I. Video Clip Info This page shows important system stream information.Type of MPEG packages . TRIMMER PAGES There are six pages on the right side of the Trimmer Window: Info.ms (hours:minutes:seconds. Shots. video bitrate.Video compression type . . Stream and Extra. II. extracted from the file.The second field [Zoom Frame] – shows the scale of the Zoom zone. video frame rate. .4.Filename . It contains: .Video stream information: number of streams.miliseconds) 183 .

184 . which can be deleted only by deleting the whole zone. you can mark an initial or final timecode of an important zone in the clip. the third point is 5 seconds later and the fourth point is 6 seconds later. pressing the black arrow of the Add Zone button. by default. you can choose a display mode of the markers: . except the first one. showing the beginning of the zone. The first point is the current playhead position. press the Add Zone marker button. A yellow point appears in the trim bar. It will add a marker 10 seconds after the last marker in that zone. select it and press the Delete Zone marker button. Thus. For example. You can change the Zone name (Advanced Zone by default) and timecodes manually.CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL II.Advanced skip zone – creates a four-point zone. By pressing the Clock buttons. By default the second point is 1 second later. . To add a next marker in the Zone. and a commercial slot will be inserted instead.Simple skip zone – creates a two-point zone.2. select it and press the Delete Zone button from the page or from the main window.Offset value – shows the interval between the current marker and the first one. You can change the Zone name (Bookmark by default) and timecode manually. The first point is set at the current playhead position. and the second is 5 seconds later. . Those breakpoints can be defined in Clip Trimmer as single split points or zones (blank/stills) that will be skipped. You can define different zone types. It will delete all markers. set the cursor at the appropriate point and press the Add Zone button in the page or in the main window. . Clip Zones This page is used for registering a set of timecodes (points) in the clip.Time – shows exact timecodes in HH:MM:SS:FF format . in each movie there are predefined commercial break points that might be used later for automated commercial slot insertion. To delete a Zone. It opens a button menu: . To add a Zone. You can change the Zone name and timecodes manually.Bookmark – creates a single split point at the current playhead position. To delete a marker from the Zone. by default.Duration – shows the time difference between two consecutive zone markers.

4. select it and press the Export button. A browse window appears to select the file name.jpg or *. The checked streams will be loaded in the playlist after clicking and will be played in their turn. If you preview several audio streams. Clip Shots Use this page to extract shots from the video clip. To delete a shot. Clip Streams This feature is applicable in case the file contains more than one video and/or audio stream. 185 . To set a shot as thumbnail of a file. If you click on the double tick. The shot. Here you can choose which of them to view/listen during playback.. by default) manually. press the Thumbnail button. To create a shot. type (*. the preview window will split according to the number of streams (up to 32). Use the blue arrows to move streams up and down the list. stop the playhead at the desired frame and press the Add button. II. To extract a shot to a file. you will preview only the selected stream. you will preview all the streams simultaneously. The green ticks serve for previewing the desired streams – if you click on the single tick. they will be mixed-up. You can change the shot’s name (Scene No. The check boxes  in front the relevant streams show their playback status.bmp) and location. select it and press the Delete button.CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL II.3. If the streams are video. as a thumbnail and its timecode are displayed in the tab.

a TC file will be created automatically.mpg or *c3.c#. Extra This “extra” will help you in managing multiple monitor video wall systems of up to 16 monitors. in up to 4 rows of up to 4 files each.) or by using the blue arrows above the file list. etc. the first row will contain files #1 to #4. The trim bar and the buttons above the list of files are designed for control of the entire bunch. If you check this box. The files in the preview window are arranged horizontally. etc. such as In and Out points.c1. You can also rearrange the display positions of files by drag-and-dropping the relevant squares in the preview window (i.5. Just load the first file in the playlist. The files that are usually used for video walls end in *.c#.avi (for example *. file #1 can be displayed on monitor#3. The Create TC file check box is situated at the bottom of the file list. saving you settings. etc. AirBox will detect the others automatically.avi). The trim bar and the buttons under the preview window are used for control of the currently selected monitor (the one in the red dotted-line frame). This means that if there are 16 files in the bunch (the most possible). Thus you will be able to use your settings again the next time you open the relevant file. the second one will contain files #5 to 8#.mpg or *.e. file order. 186 . This feature will help you in synchronizing the video wall and will allow you to control each monitor separately.CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL II.

You could change the filter’s setting there.6. There is a legend at the bottom of the page: The sign marks all filters from the preset. containing groups of preferred filters (presets). __________________________ 187 .CLIP TRIMMER: USER’S MANUAL II. The Windows Registry contains a key [HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Digital Media Technologies Ltd. There is a Property button right under the tab name.\PlayBox\2. Clip Filters This tab provides information about the filters that participate in playing the current clip and an opportunity for changing the filters’ settings. The sign marks filters that are included in the preset. but do not participate in executing the current particular file. All filters of the currently selected preset are displayed in Filters page. Pushing it will open the property page (if any) of the selected filter.0\DXPresets] in which you could create your own string values.

SAFEBOX __________________________ SafeBox is another module from the PlayBox suite. for example) or somewhere on the network. but SafeBox can be used for copying all kinds of content you have – not only clips and playlists. The Destination location can be either on the local storage (from the point of view of AirBox. The user interface is quite simple: it is divided into two major parts – your Source and Destination locations: Typically. the Destination is the location. copying or deleting your files. but a local one is advisable. automatically or manually. these are permanently accessible storage destinations. SafeBox takes care of moving. This is done following a number of pre-definable locations. from which AirBox is playing clips. 188 . priorities and rules. which serves as utility for file management. In short.

A colored bar in its line displays the progress of transfer. where your files are stored or where files appear if you use some kind of removable storage or network connection. you can avoid saving the same files several times. The supported General options are selfexplanatory. the ingested content will not be editable. Perform checksum verification will check for identical files in the destination location and will not transfer them from the source location. NOTE: Priorities are valid only in Automatic mode! The highest priority is [10]. in automatic mode. you will not be able to delete it. Set this in the Options menu after pressing the Options button . They provide hints at pointing at them. Further on are situated the transfer control buttons. A  sign in front of a Source location means that it is currently inaccessible. the yellow one – the space needed for transfer of the selected offline content. A sign in front of a given Source location means that it is currently accessible. If this box is not checked. When ingesting content that contains folders and subfolders. In short. The first pair of plus and minus signs is used for adding/deleting Source locations. The blue section stands for Used space. 189 . SafeBox could proceed in two ways: preserve the treestructure of the source location (if checked). Along the lower mid-window is situated a colored bar that represents the distribution of the storage (Destination location) space. and the green one represents the free space. This is done by simple browsing after pressing the Add button to the far left. either. SafeBox could perform all necessary actions manually or automatically.SAFEBOX: USER’S MANUAL The Source locations are locations. Remove read-only flag will allow you to edit the content after its ingestion. these are temporary accessible locations. Do not copy incomplete files will not transfer files in which another program/user is currently writing. or save all files from the source in a single folder (if not checked). Thus. When a source location is being transferred. which will remain after the transfer. The second pair is designed for the Destination locations. a symbol representing the currently executed action appears in front of it. You can give priorities for each Source location. simultaneous jobs are performed only for locations with equal priorities. Along the upper part of the main window are situated the control buttons. Build source directory tree in destination. You can add to the list as many Source locations as you wish. This is done by right-clicking on the relevant location and selecting the desired Priority.

NOTE: The higher this number is the slower transfer (for a separate file) will proceed. you can set the expiry criteria for content removal. If  Delete expired playlist files is checked. These options can be turned Off if not needed.ply files contain paths of files that are to be deleted according to the previous settings. If this box is checked. i. so that there is no need to change them manually. The values in the Mbps filed will be converted into KB/s automatically and vice-versa. If not checked.SAFEBOX: USER’S MANUAL PlayList mode. it will search for. Now you can move all expired files to a specified folder. In this mode. NOTE: The playlist(s) and their related files will be copied/moved to the same Destination directory. You could also manage files according to the free disc space on your computer: Maintain at least […] MB free space will delete any files. the playlist files will not be deleted even if they have expired according to the criteria set above. all playlist files in the Destination directory that fit the expiration criteria will be deleted without notification. and copy/move all the files contained in the playlist following their file paths. Check the Speed limit box if you wish to change the process duration. such files will not be deleted. you can either use the spin-boxes to set the transfer rate. In the Removal options tab. used in non-expired playlist will check if the non-expired *. Below. After copying/moving the files to the Destination folder. regardless their type.ply) that fit the expiration criteria. in order to achieve the required space. The last check box concerns the management of playlist files (*. the higher CPU usage will occur. or type it directly in the relevant field. SafeBox allows multiple assignments. In the Max simultaneous jobs field you can set the number of transfers to be performed at a time.ply) and will copy/move them to the Destination directory. you can transmit a given source content to more than one destination location: select a Source location (it will be marked in dotted-line 190 . Besides.e. If you check the box underneath as well. SafeBox will search the Source directory only for playlist files (. Just check  Move expired files to and browse for the folder’s location or enter its path in the string below. only the files larger than the specified size will be deleted. In the following field. If you check the Delete files older than…box. you can specify the way SafeBox maintains file removal in the Destination directories. you will have to go to the Removal list and delete the files you want from there. Do not delete files. If Approval needed is selected. all files will be deleted when the period you have specified is over. NOTE: The higher you set the transfer rate values. SafeBox will change their file paths in the playlist to match the Destination location.

You can decline a destination location by pressing the Assign/Decline button once again. Beneath the Destination locations list you can view detailed information about the currently selected entry. To browse for a new destination location. You can view the assigned destination(s) of a source location by selecting its row. The assigned destination line will become green. Thus. Now you can already export OML files from SafeBox. __________________________ 191 .SAFEBOX: USER’S MANUAL frame) then select the desired online location in the list to the right. The third button will erase all the content from the selected Destination location. Push the Export media list button and then specify the directories you would like to scan: Use the PLUS sign button to add directories to the list. Push the second one to go one level up the current directory. you will be able to export information about the media stored on selected directories into a file (OML file). There are three buttons to the right of the Current location string. If you wish to delete the transfer log. All destinations will go green. Its path is displayed in the Current location string and below are listed all sub-directories contained in it. use the first one. Push the Gear button to check the selected directories and export the information to the specified file. Enter the name of the file to which information will be exported or browse for it. and the MINUS if you want to remove the currently selected directory from it. Press the Assign/Decline button. push the Delete Log button situated to the far right.

192 . soldered to a momentary contact switch. GPI-IN Implementation The simplest triggering device would be a pair of wires running from the COM port GPI pair. and the second GPI trigger generates a pulse on RTS. Many external devices like switchers or mixers have dedicated GPI connectors or screw terminals with a description of what GPI trigger type (low or high pulse) was implemented. associated to certain pins on the standard PC RS-232 Serial Ports (COM1. CTS. You can use any of the output pins for supplying voltage to the GPI circuit. Low pulse means the GPI trigger is activated when the circuit is temporary opened. This switch can be either Push Button Normally Open (PBNO) or Push Button Normally Closed (PBNC). It should be connected to the corresponding COM port pin pair (4-6 or 7-8) and it should close or open the GPI circuit of the external device. OUT or Unused. GPI Pinout Each COM port accommodates 4 GPI-IN pairs and 2 GPI-OUT pairs. In order to function.AIRBOX GPI (GENERAL PURPOSE INTERFACE) GPI in AirBox GPI (General Purpose Interface) is implemented in AirBox as a set of triggers. the GPI trigger will generate a pulse (low or high. GPI-OUT can be used to slave external equipment to events taking place in AirBox. 2 triggers per port. COM2. According to the number of installed COM ports. GPI-IN can be used to slave AirBox to 4 triggers from external devices or simple contact switches. GPI-IN pairs are located at output pins DTR&RTS and input pins DSR. a trigger can be a temporary closing or opening of the GPI circuit. user-defined) to the corresponding output pin for a short user-defined period (pulse duration). the first GPI trigger generates a pulse on DTR.APPENDIX 1 . The trigger type is configured in AirBox GPI Settings Panel as High or Low pulse. AirBox supports up to 32 GPI-IN triggers (up to 8 COM ports with 4 GPI-IN triggers per port). GPI-OUT Implementation In order to control external devices by GPI. A particular COM port can be assigned as either IN. a simple 12V contact relay should be used. RI. Depending on the AirBox setup. GPI-OUT pairs are located at output pins DTR&RTS.). High pulse means the GPI trigger is activated when the circuit is temporary closed. the COM port should be correctly installed in the Windows environment (See Device Manager -> Ports). Depending on the trigger setup. CD. but not at the same time. etc.

to invoke a table for setting the COM ports. to allow the GPI OUT trigger. All GPI-OUT triggers can be activated by specific AirBox event. After that you can Add/Insert GPI Output event in the playlist. to allow the GPI-IN trigger. select “GPI Input” enabled. AirBox supports up to 16 GPIOUT triggers (up to 8 COM ports with 2 GPI-OUT triggers per port). by right mouse clicking. From Options -> Modules -> Remote Control. select “GPI Output” enabled.According to the number of installed COM ports. 193 . GPI groups and the available actions for them. Press the Generate button. AirBox as a GPI Slave A wide variety of AirBox actions can be associated to a GPI trigger: o Start playback o Pause/Resume playback o Stop playback o Jump to next clip o Jump to specific clip (predefined playlist index) o Jump to specific location in the clip/playlist (predefined timecode) o Playlist reset (during stop mode only) o Hardware reset (terminates the playback!) o Turn logo on o Turn logo off AirBox as a GPI Master These AirBox events can activate a GPI trigger: o Dedicated GPI event o Playback start o Playback stop o Playback pause/resume o Playback jump o Clip start o Clip end o Logo On event o Logo Off event o Stop event o Wait event start o Wait event end AirBox GPI Settings Panel All GPI-IN triggers can be assigned to a specific AirBox action. From AirBox Options -> Modules -> Remote Control.

RS232 9-pin D-SUB pinout reference Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Name CD RXD TXD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS RI Description Carrier Detect Receive Data Transmit Data Data Terminal Ready System Ground Data Set Ready Request to Send Clear to Send Ring Indicator Direction In In Out Out In Out In In 194 .

 Non-linear editing hardware (NLE) – for example DigiSuite DTV/LX etc. Argus etc. The truth is simple – companies with traditions on that market like Optibase or Vela for example. ─ The picture examination algorithms are fixed and are not subject to further development.. There are too many examples for that! You can now buy a hardware (!!!) MPEG2 encoder for less than $500. if they are not equipped with the appropriate export modules. together with all its supplements defines a very flexible format. How qualitative the picture will be and to what extent the generated stream will be compatible with MPEG2 decoders is an entirely different question. which may cause plenty of troubles later during the playback of some particular MPEG2 content. DVMPEG. + They do not require an extremely powerful computer station. MPEG2 HARDWARE ENCODERS – PROS & CONS + They encode the video signal in MPEG2 in real-time.. etc. They allow inaccuracy in their work. which rules unfortunately are hardly understood by some particular manufacturers of MPEG2 coders. It is next to an art… Anyway. which however are not created with the idea for a complete compatibility with the standard. Ligos LSX Encoder. regarding thit question in brief: PROBLEM The ISO-13818 standard. + They do not require an extremely powerful computer station. naturally at higher prices. NLE HARDWARE – PROS & CONS + They do not require additional investments. SOLUTIONS  Hardware MPEG2 encoder – for example Movie Maker 200. ─ They convert the edited material in MPEG2 comparatively slow (from 1:4 up to 1:8). There are too many cheap MPEG2 encoders on the market lately.  Software MPEG2 coder – i. ─ They cost relatively expensive.APPENDIX 2 – MPEG2 ENCODING CAPTUREBOX GENERAL It is quite hard to pick out the most appropriate MPEG2 coder for your needs and conditions . + They can be used as a fast connection with the old analogue equipment. we will try to share with you our knowledge. MPEG2 SOFTWARE ENCODERS – PROS & CONS + They are not expensive. + They allow preliminary processing of MPEG2 content.e. are working hard to qualify their development teams well enough. 195 . which helps them to provide stable and standard coders.

One way or another. equally with D9 and DVCPRO50.. + The examination and compression algorithms are regularly updated with more effective ones. ─ They work relatively slow (from 1:4 up to 1:20) depending on the processor’s speed. 4:2:2P@ML is used for postproduction. They can contain up to 8 video streams. which in the same time will take less disk space. 8 audio streams and up to 32 streams with subtitles. The transport stream on its part carries large quantity of television programs inside. depending on its application. CHEAP VS EXPENSIVE Once again. Another aspect of the cheap encoders is the incorrect multiplexing of the program stream. If the disk space is not a problem for you. your only choice is to buy something high-grade! We are talking about VBR encoding at 3-4 Mbit/sec with dual pass and control of the feeding VTR. if you have requirements for higher-quality inputs like YUV or SDI. 196 . the program stream is used for transporing a single program. which may distract seriously the final decoder! To your relief. It has wider application in transport of MPEG2 programs (satellite. Of course. the AirBox re-multiplexing algorithm takes care of eliminating this sort of mistakes. but there are isolated cases when even God won’t be able to help you. MPEG2 TYPES Multimedia-orientated MPEG2 products work mainly with MPEG2 program streams. you may double or triple the amount.. ─ They need a fast computer station (faster is better). Those differences must play the leading role in picking up the MPEG2 encoder. we come to the particular needs. Besides. If you need decent quality. etc.. you may save from the encoder and work at 8-9 Mbit/sec with a similar quality..). Transport streams contain exceptionally and only MP@ML program streams. the stream is described on different levels and profiles. because encoders often work with limited submultitude of profiles and multiplexes.+ They allow a wide range of options and variants.

which requires specific conditions. ─ The cheapest ones have some serious limitations. which can be used either for recording to video tape or for broadcasting. SOLUTIONS  Hardware MPEG2 decoder – for example NetStream2000 or VideoPlex OR  Fast processor – Pentium III at 500 MHz at least + additional software. + They have a standard video output. depending on the particular need. the decoding of MPEG2 stream is very difficult computing task. ─ They are relatively expensive.APPENDIX 3 – MPEG2 DECODING AIRBOX GENERAL In contrast to MPEG1. MPEG2 HARDWARE DECODERS – PROS & CONS + They decode MPEG2 data into a video signal in real-time. which often cannot be surmounted by means of software methods. followed by decoding. While each common PC with Windows can manage with MPEG1 decoding. you can preview the video only on the VGA screen). ─ They drop frames or bother other critical processes on slower workstations. + They allow simultaneous decoding of more than one MPEG2 stream. there is no integrated support in Windows for MPEG2 decoding of encoded materials. ─ They do not have an output video signal (i. PROBLEM Due to the specifics of ISO-13818 standard. either software or hardware. ─ They create additional CPU overhead. This automatically brings up the need of additional MPEG2 decoder. MPEG2 SOFTWARE DECODERS – PROS & CONS + They are cheap. + They do not bring about CPU overhead. viewing MPEG2 content involves demultiplexing of audio/video stream.e. 197 .

8. the stricter you have to stick to a single range of MPEG2 parameters. The rules are simple:  The cheaper your decoder is.000 will take the created MPEG2 content without a problem. Although the re-multiplexed AirBox algorithm attends precisely this kind of problems. which in deed cannot be eliminated by any means. etc. cheaper decoders cannot even detect the diversion from the standard and run riot. you may be enforced to observe some rules in creating your MPEG2 programs.000 and expect that an expensive decoder for $2. 6. leads to different problems – loss of lip sync. the stricter it will stick to the standard and every single diversion from it will cause a problem.  The cheaper encoder you have. of course. 5. This. which should advisably be observed in most cases: 1.  The cheaper your encoder is. GOP structure: IBBPBBPBBPBB – 12 frames.APPENDIX 4 – TYPICAL MPEG2 (PAL) Depending on the MPEG2 encoders and decoders used. 3 P frames Closed GOP – only the first GOP in the stream has to be closed InitialSCR – between 1 and 5 (this is a multiplexing parameter) field/frame – you have to select fields and upper field first CBR/VBR – it depends mainly on the encoder (in principle VBR gives better quality) Audio Bitrate – between 192 and 384 gives satisfactory results – “ MPEG1 Layer 2” Audio Frequency – it is recommended to use 48kHz to escape incompatibilities 198 . Here are the typical parameters for MPEG2 at PAL. 9. Frame size: 720 õ 576 – Fukk-D1 (352 õ 576 – Half-D1 is also allowed) 3. the more problems you may expect when using expensive decoder for playback. WARNING! This is not a theoretical conclusion! This is a conclusion based on our experience with numerous problems we have met and solved. There is a single reason: the more expensive your MPEG2 equipment is. there are things. 4.. Video Bitrate: 4 – 9 Mbit/sec (bit rates > 10 Mbit/sec cause problems to NetStream decoders) 2. Some simple examples – you cannot buy a cheap encoder for $2. 7.. the higher Bit rate you must use for the encoding. On the contrary. in order to be able to meet the visual quality.

6) Go to Network>Net control..tmpl (template) files are exported in the templates folder. Select a whole project or some objects from it. giving them respective names. 199 .TitleBox settings: APPENDIX 5 – INTEGRATION OF AIRBOX WITH TITLEBOX 1) Run Programs>DMT>TitleBox PLNetInst. The functions are self-explanatory. Run it.all exported template projects should appear in this list. Please note that it is not possible to edit objects in TitleBox while in this mode. Remember the TitleBox channel ID and Port values. 5) Go to Project\Options. That’s it! Run AirBox.. Confirm. AirBox settings: 1) Go to Options>Modules.exe and select a folder for your TitleBox templates. Confirm any changes. Now it stays in standby mode and executes the commands coming from AirBox. but since this module is still under development. 5) If you have entered Play Project mode. Enable TitleBoxNetCtrl Output setting with Yes. 2) Create your TitleBox projects. You are recommended to choose the 'Wizard' mode for now. That's all for TitleBox. 3) Export them via Network >Export project as template. 2) Go to Events  Add/Insert event  TitleBoxNetCtrl Output 3) There are two modes for event insertion . When the time for a TitleBox event approaches. the second one is for project/objects control commands. 4) *. 6) Click Finish. Click Configure.'Wizard' or 'Advanced' (selectable through the Advanced button).the first one is for global TitleBox control commands. 4) In 'Wizard' mode you can choose between Template Control and Play Project . Enter same Channel ID and Port values as in TitleBox settings. then to Remote control tab. some of them are not functioning as desired. further you can select your project by list . look at Network tab. respective commands are being sent to TitleBox and it runs the appropriate objects.

2. Do you have license for this particular module? Please. Solution: Verify the following: 1. This is a restricted area and you should login with your password there.tv). Did you install everything under Windows Administrator account? 3.APPENDIX 6 – TROUBLESHOOTING GENERAL Problem: When launching a PlayBox module. 2. Possible Cause: 1. You can download the drivers from the WIBU site: http://www. Problem: When launching a PlayBox module. or the library wibukey. The PC USB port.2. Plug the hardware key (dongle) into the PC USB port.1.dll (it should be <device>\Program Files\WIBUKEY\Bin). an error message appears: “Program needs WIBU-BOX with 250525: 5259896”. is not recognized by the operating system (Windows) or it does not work. 200 . 3. Possible Cause: This means you have installed a wrong module version (demo version) or you have no permission for running this module. where < file path > is the location of Wibukey. it goes into DEMO version mode. Install the WIBU driver. Register the Wibukey.playbox.dll is not registered.com Be sure you work under Windows administrator account. 2.wibu. The program does not find its license hardware USB key (WIBUBOX). Type "regsvr32 <file path> \Wibukey. download the standard version from the Updates/Patches section of the PlayBox site (http://www. Use another USB port or use a PCI USB controller.dll”. where the key is plugged. The WIBU drivers are available under Microsoft Windows 2000 Pro/ XP Pro. Solution: 1. Did you install the "normal" module (not a Demo version)? 2. 3.dll: Press Start buttonRun command. The WIBU driver is installed improperly or not installed at all.

(We use a network hardware key). You have not configured your WIBU. “Local (Kernel)”. Please. “WkLAN”. Solution: You have to install a “normal” module if you have an end-user. Restart the WIBU-Network Server (from Start Programs WIBUKEY Network Server) so that changes can take effect. Configure your WIBU-server: Go to Control PanelWIBU-KEY Server and check “Access FSB” box. From other computers – go to Control PanelWIBUKEYNetwork ServerName/IPaddress and select the name of your WIBU-server. order the subsystems like that: “WkNet”. Possible Cause: You are trying to run a Network version of PlayBox module with a “normal” (end-user) hardware USB key. 2. an error message appears: “Program needs WIBU-BOX with 2466:5259896”. Check the number of users connected to the server: StartPrograms WIBU-KEY Server monitor. select View User View and check the number of connected users. Possible Cause: 1. Problem: We cannot start a PlayBox module from the network. download the standard version from the Updates/Patches section of the PlayBox site (http://www. In the “WIBU-KEY subsystems” field. Solution: 1. These keys are for local use only. You have reached the maximum number of permitted PlayBox users/ modules. local key (transparent-green key).tv).Problem: When launching PlayBox module. 2.server machine (where the hardware USB key is plugged in) properly. 201 . This is a restricted area and you should login with your password there.playbox.

It contains the most common problems. avoid such combinations of MPEG content. Solution: Add a PCI USB controller card at your machine. This means that if you need to run 2 AirBox instances (channels) at the same time. Solution: This is a licensing issue. This particular problem shouldn’t arise with newer VIA chip sets. Solution: Please. 44. avoid using MPEG1 and MPEG2 files simultaneously in the same program. Solution: Please.AIRBOX In case you have some difficulties with the system. Problem: Sometimes the video jerks and the audio volume is slightly changed. Each separate instance (channel) of AirBox is licensed separately. as well as possible solutions: Problem: When we start AirBox for the second time (a second AirBox channel) a message appears: "Reached maximum running instances". Possible Cause: This is probably caused by a combination of MPEG1 and MPEG2 files in the same program. This limitation comes from the NetStream decoders. (PCs with AMD processors). before looking for technical support.1 or 48 kHz) or a different television system (PAL or NTSC) in the same program. explanations of the reasons. Problem: After plug-in the hardware USB key. Possible Cause: You have no permission for starting a second AirBox channel. (NetStream decoders). especially if you use NetStream 2000. please consult with the table below. The video window of AirBox does not refresh properly. 202 . you need to purchase 2 AirBox licenses.tv). (Only for NetStream 2000). AirBox freezes. Problem: Sometimes the playback freezes for a long period of time. Contact our Sales Department for more information (sales@playbox. Possible Cause: It is caused by a problem with the USB key and the USB port appearing on the KT-133 VIA chip set. Probably you have purchased only one AirBox license. Possible Cause: The only reason for this problem is that you use MPEG files with different audio frequency (32.

Problem: When launching AirBox. but this time with “Custom install”. (NetStream decoders). In Options Modules. Possible Cause: You have included in the program a file. avoid using such files. Possible Cause: This comes from a driver limitation. Solution: Please. "AirBox (DEMO)". which does not contain an audio stream. (Only with VideoPlex) Possible Cause: You have installed AirBox with “Custom settings”.com. It is important to see NetStream 2000 in the upper left angle of the screen. (Only Windows 2000 and NetStream 2000). It happens when the first MPEG file does not contain audio data in the first 128 KB. Possible Cause: This usually happens if the Elecard MPEG2 software decoder is not installed properly. not with “Typical settings”. If not. Solution: Increase the DirectShow buffer size to 256 KB – this can be done in Settings  Module Options  DirectShow. Solution: Install the Elecard software MPEG2 decoder again. there is a number of failure messages. the “VideoPlex playback module” doesn’t exist. you must install the driver properly. which blockades the computer’s work. Problem: It is possible to get flickering in the hardware playback when starting MPEG editor. Problem: Sometimes the playback starts with no audio and this problem can be fixed only after Reset. the Status bar says. Possible Cause: NetStream 2000 driver is not properly installed.elecard. It can be found at http://www. The typical installation does NOT install the VideoPlex plug-in. (Only NetStream 2000). 203 .Problem: Sometimes the clips are starting with wrong audio or audio/video asynchrony. For your convenience. Solution: Check if you can play MPEG2 materials in Microsoft Media Player. Solution: You just have to reinstall AirBox over the old one. Problem: When launching AirBox. we have included it in the PlayBox distribution CD.

Possible Cause: 1. the playback will not stop at 26 hours. that the clip’s first frame is not black. which means that playback could not long more than 26 continuous hours. Possible Cause: You do not have permission for using that function. Contact our Sales Department for more information (sales@playbox. a black frame appears. Possible Cause: Probably your dongle does not have a HDV flag Solution: The HDV support is a paid option to AirBox. Problem: During the playback. Install Matrox VGA card. Problem: The HDV files inserted in the playlist are marked as unsupported file format. 2. 204 . VGA overlay does not work. Solution: Check what is the VGA card you use. It will not work with any other VGA cards. This means that the green counter will be reset at approximately 24 hours. Please contact our Sales Department for further information (sales@playbox. thus.tv). Solution: 1. This is because each clip in the playlist is included in a continuous non-stop MPEG2 stream. instead of the first frame of the clip. The clip begins with black frames. the CUE function doesn’t always work properly. (Matrox RT2500). At some hardware configurations. Possible Cause: You need to use a Matrox VGA card (G450. Make sure. It is machine-dependent. Solution: The GPI function is a paid option to AirBox. try to find the best one for your case. Problem: GPI-Output/GPI-Input function does not work. Problem: Sometimes after pressing the CUE button. to trim the black frames from the clip beginning. 2. Please. Edit the clip with Clip Trimmer. Go to Options Settings dialog box  Cue Delay.Problem: The playback stops after 26 hours Possible Cause: This is caused by addressing limitation of MPEG2. G550) in order to have VGA video overlay. sent to the decoder.tv). This option defines a small delay before pausing on the first frame. It is 33-bit at 90 kHz per second. Solution: Go to AirBox Options  Settings and set "Restart after XX hours" to 24.

The problem occurs only during the initial launching of the system. Solutions: First determine your case: 1. The hardware does not function. this means that the hardware is missing or not functioning properly. Wait for 20 seconds and launch CaptureBox again. 205 . If you don’t get the same message. If you receive error messages. 4. Both devices are not properly connected into a closed circle (VTRDigiServer and DigiServerVTR). as well as possible solutions: When launching CaptureBox. Ask for help. 3. Solution: Make sure the VTR’s SDTI Out is connected to the DigiServer’s SDI/SDTI In. Make sure the DigiServer’s In is not commutated. 2. we receive a message “Preview Not Available” (only if using Matrox DigiServer/SDTI). 4. The driver is not started yet (it needs 5-10 sec after the initial launching). 2. Problem: Problem: When capturing from VTR. Possible Cause: DigiServer’s input is not properly commutated. 2. Possible Cause: 1. Possible Causes: There is only one reason for this – the hardware driver does not function properly. The hardware is missing. Solution: 1. VTR does not start recording and shows error E-03 (only for Matrox DigiServer/SDTI). Problem: When launching print-to-tape function. There is no driver installed. you may continue with your work. It contains the most common problems. 3. the recorded material does not contain video (only for Matrox DigiServer/SDTI). Make sure that the DigiServer’s SDI/SDTI Out is connected to VTR’s SDTI In. This occurs in the following cases: 1. ask help for installation of the needed driver. The driver has blockaded. And (5): launch DigiSuite. please consult with the section bellow before contacting us. Reboot the workstation. If not. If you don’t get the same message. explanations for the reasons. you may continue with your work.CAPTUREBOX In case you have some difficulties with the system. 2. Check if Control Panel  DigiSuite exists. VTR’s input is not properly commutated. 5.

VTR’s control cable is not commutated. The VTR is in local control mode (Local indicator is on). 3. Possible Cause: 1. 3. It will not work with any other VGA card. Solution: 1. RS-422 / RS-232 converter is not supplied. 2. Solution: You have to install a Matrox VGA card (G450 or G550) in order to see the video preview window on a VGA screen. Problem: Video preview window in Capture Box doesn't work.Problem: VTR is not reacting to the commands from CaptureBox control panel. Make sure the intermediate converter device is power-supplied (its adapter should be connected to the electrical network). 206 . Switch the VTR control to Remote. 2. Make sure the control cable is properly connected to both the VTR and computer. (Matrox RT2500) Possible Cause: You don’t use a Matrox VGA card.

as well as possible solutions: Problem: If we create a new record to the database from a PC over the LAN. before contacting us. a windows message appears: "Unable to complete network request to host. if the database file is on C:\ProgramFiles\DMT\DataBox. For example. Then the remote station will find the database. It contains the most likely problems. This is a requirement of the Interbase engine.GDB) is not shared as a single letter coinciding with the logical device letter. the share name of this drive should be "c". explanations for the reasons.DATABOX In case you have some difficulties with the system. please describe them and send them to the following e-mail address: support@playbox. IMPORTANT: If you have problems different from the ones listed above. The specified name was not found in the host file or Domain Name Services". Possible Cause: This happens when the drive which contains the database file (DataBox.tv Thank you in advance! 207 . please consult with the section bellow.GDB) is shared as a single letter coinciding with the logical device letter. Failed to locate host machine. Solution: Make sure that the drive which contains the database file (DataBox.

Only the first 90 seconds of each clip are captured. 3. 7. Only 50 database records can be made. 7.APPENDIX 7 – DEMO VERSIONS LIMITATIONS AIRBOX 1. 4. 2. Cut/Copy/Paste not available. 208 . Command line parameters not accepted. DEMO word is automatically inserted in text objects. Clip duration will be truncated to 90 seconds. No MPEG-2 capturing on DeckLink Extreme through Firewire. DATABOX 1. No object loading or saving. 8. 2. Demo version messages are going to pop-up regularly. No multiplexing will take place unless registered & activated. Playlist Save function does not work. 2. No TitleBox integration. No LAN control. TITLEBOX 1. 3. 3. 6. GPI & Kramer events are not functional. Print function is not available. Demo version messages are going to pop-up regularly. Elecard MPEG2 Player 1. No multi-channel playout. Cut/Copy does not work. 2. No network control from AirBox. 6. FINISHBOX LE 1. LISTBOX 1. 5. 5. No project loading or saving. 3. No playlist loading or saving. Playlist can not contain more than 10 entries. CAPTUREBOX 1. 4. The Elecard logo is superimposed on the output. A "DEMO" logo is superimposed on the clip (DigiSuite LX/DTV).

No grouping & linking. when unifying all content clips to 48kHz. For example. stream. No GPI/Kramer/Live MPEG2 Stream 7. No MPEG Stream analysis and validating.1 kHz -> 48 kHz. No clip splicing/joining. 4. No TitleBox integration 8. 5. part & media per record. No audio normalizing for equal audio levels in all processed clips. 10. decoded. 6. Up to 5 network clients. all existing 44 kHz clips will be demultiplexed. No Advanced Boolean Search engine. encoded and multiplexed in just a single user operation. 9.000 records. No Audio/Video stream resynching with custom offset. rating. 2. Sigma Designs (Xcard or NetStream) playback only (no Stradis/Matrox/DeckLink support) 5. No Additional info (description. 6. in the full version. No Timecode support APPENDIX 8 – LIGHT EDITIONS LIMITATIONS FINISHBOX LE 1. DATABOX LE 1. Single instance. No Traffic Rules. 8. 4. No audio upsampling for DVD and DVB/ATSC compliance: 32 or 44. No simple GOP-accurate cut editing. No Elecard MPEG2 Decoder bundled 6. 7. 11. trivia. No trimming with saving the trimmed portion into a new file. No advanced credits. Only 1 logo preset (as opposed to 16 logo presets in the full version) 9. 5. No Sequence description. No Clip Trimmer (it is still possible to enter or change trim points) 4. upsampled to 48 kHz. No multiplexing errors correction and remultiplexing. Up to 5. No Remote IP control 10.AIRBOX LE 1. No MultiMux bundled 3. 9. 2.). No Automated / batch / mixed mode operations for a single-click complex processing. 3. 209 . etc. 7. No ListBox bundled 2. No audio decoding from MPEG Audio layer 1&2. No program Stream to Transport Stream remultiplexing (and vice versa). or totally automatically (with a watch folder). 3. 8.

TITLEBOX LE 1. 2. No advanced scheduling 3. etc. No object transitions such as fades. No Network control mode 210 . wipes.

now adopted by ANSI (American National Standards Institute). To see the original picture. The Audio Engineering Society (AES) and the EBU (European Broadcasting Union) together have defined a standard for Digital Audio. for example CDs at 44. higher bit rate encoding used in professional video. the algorithm created by Microsoft for synchronizing and compressing analogue audio and video signals.GLOSSARY Abbreviation 4:2:2@ML Description 4:2:2 Profile at Main Level – High quality. Abbreviation for Audio-Video Interleaved. and Iframe only IMXVTRs with 50 Mb/s.1 kHz. a constrained version of which is used by BetacamSX using a 2-frame (IB) GOP producing a bitstream of 18 Mb/s. A AES/EBU AVI AVI2MPG BDE B-frames 211 . As they contain only predictive information they do not make up a complete picture and so have the advantage of taking up much less data than the I-frames. Commonly referred to as ‘AES/EBU’. used in the transmission or reception of sound. 48 kHz is widely used in broadcast TV production. this digital audio standard permits a variety of sampling frequencies. Synonyms: SP@ML Audio – Relating to sound or its reproduction. one has to decode information from a whole sequence of MPEG frames that includes an I-frame. It is a fully editable profile. AVI is also the file format used by Video for Windows AVI-to-MPEG Software Converter Borland Database Engine Bi-directional predictive frames composed by assessing the difference between the previous and the next frames in a television picture sequence. or digital VTRs at 48 kHz. It has more chroma information than 4:2:0 (the color sampling is in 4:2:2 format).

still and/or moving images in monochrome and/or colour. Constant Bit Rate Compact Disc – A 4. Bayonet Neill Concelman. Closed Group Of Pictures – A GOP whose last B-frames do not refer to the following I-frame. 212 . The D1 equipment can integrate without transcoding to various digital effects systems. British Naval Connector. and digital program and information files. graphics devices.Abbreviation BNC CBR CD Closed GOP CPU CVBS D1 Description A connector for coaxial cable such as that used for some video connections and RG58 "cheapernet" connections.72 inch disc developed by Sony and Philips that can store. the CPU. telecines. Central Processing Unit – The part of a computer (a microprocessor chip) that does most of the data processing (interprets and executes instructions). on the same disc. etc. disk recorders. it is ideal for studio or postproduction work for its high chrominance bandwidth allowing excellent chroma keying. D1 equipment is not extensively used in general areas of TV production due to its high cost. The tape is 19 mm wide and allows up to 94 minutes to be recorded on a cassette. A BNC connector has a bayonet-type shell with two small knobs on the female connector which lock into spiral slots in the male connector when it is twisted on. together with the memory. Different sources expand BNC as Bayonet Navy Connector. Despite the advantages. As a component recording system. or Bayonet Nut Connection. form the central part of a computer to which the peripherals are attached Composite Video Broadcast Signal – analogue composite video A format for digital video tape recording working in 4:2:2 standard using 8-bit sampling. stereo or two separate sound tracks integrated with and/or separate from the images. Also multiple generations are possible with very little degradation of quality. but only to the preceding Pframe.

Video sampled at 4:2:2 is compressed at 3. DirectShow is an architecture for streaming media on the Microsoft Windows platform.Abbreviation D9 DAT DCT Desktop DirectDraw DirectShow DTS Description Previously known as Digital-S. Decoding Time Stamp 213 . the hardware blitter. Audio-Video Interleaved (AVI). and WAV sound files. MPEG Audio Layer-3 (MP3). The format also includes two cue tracks and four further audio channels in a cassette housing with the same dimensions as VHS. The tape can be shuttled and searched up to x32 speed. Two audio channels are recorded at 16-bit. including Advanced Systems Format (ASF). Motion Picture Experts Group (MPEG). It supports a wide variety of formats. DCT operates on blocks of the picture (usually 8 x 8 pixels) resolving them into frequencies and amplitudes.NET is the component of the DirectX application programming interface (API) that allows you to directly manipulate display memory. 48 kHz sampling. DirectShow provides for highquality capture and playback of multimedia streams. MPEG and DV compression depend on DCT. screen background The DirectDraw feature for Microsoft Windows CE .widely-used as the first stage of compression of digital video pictures. JPEG. Video CD Media File Discrete Cosine Transform . hardware overlays. DCT itself may not reduce the amount of data but it prepares it for following processes that will do so. Windows Desktop – The area of the screen in graphical user interfaces against which icons and windows appear Synonyms: background.3:1 using intra-frame compression. and surface flipping. each is individually editable. this is a half-inch digital tape format for video data recording at rate of 50 Mb/s.

Abbreviation DV DVB DVB-C DVB-S DVB-T DVCPRO Description Digital Video – This digital VTR format is a co-operation between Hitachi. As with the other DVB standards. with over 200 members in 25 countries. JVC. Both Linear (LTC) and Vertical Interval Time Code (VITC) are supported. The DVB Group has put together a satellite system. A transmission scheme for CABLE digital television.1 kHz. Sharp. Panasonic's development of native DV which records an 18micron track on metal particle tape. In the areas of overlap. Matsushita. The consumer versions and DVCAM sample video at 4:1:1 (525/60) or 4:2:0 (625/50) video and provide two 16bit/48 or 44. Digital Video Broadcasting. DVCPRO uses native DV compression at 5:1 from a 4:1:1. or four 12-bit/32 kHz audio channels. It uses 12 tracks per frame for 625/50 sources and 10 tracks per frame for 525/60 sources. 214 . It uses Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (COFDM).5 MHz luminance sampling. Mitsubishi. current or planned. Sony. the weaker of the two received signals is rejected. The recording rate is 25 Mb/s. which spreads the signals over a large number of carriers to enable it to operate effectively in very strong multipath environments. DVB-T. the group. and a digital terrestrial system. It includes two 16-bit digital audio channels sampled at 48 kHz and an analogue cue track. which developed the preferred scheme for digital broadcasting in Europe. Philips. 8-bit sampled source. Its specification was approved by ETSI in February 1997 and DVB-T services started in the UK in Autumn 1998. The multipath immunity of this approach means that DVB-T can operate an overlapping network of transmitting stations with a single frequency. DVB-C. a matching cable system. A transmission scheme for SATELLITE digital television The DVB-T is a transmission scheme for TERRESTRIAL digital television. It uses quarter-inch wide tape in a range of products to record 525/60 or 625/50 video for the consumer (DV) and professional markets (Panasonic’s DVCPRO and Sony’s DVCAM). All models use digital intrafield DCT-based ‘DV’ compression (about 5:1) to record 8-bit component digital video based on 13. that can be used with any transponder. Sanyo. Thomson and Toshiba. DVB-S. MPEG-2 sound and vision coding are used. The video data rate is 25 Mb/s.

g. single-layer 4. dual-layer 7.38 GB of actual data (seven times CD capacity) on a single-sided.95 GB DVD-10 Double-sided. It is the same size as a CD but stores upwards from 4. The single complete image of motion picture film: the area occupied by one such image. One half of a complete picture (or frame) interval. subtitles and copy protection capability. chroma keying). containing all of the odd or even scanning lines of the picture. The capacities commonly available at present: DVD-5 Single-side.38 GB DVD-9 Single-side. useful in post production processes (e. Digital Versatile Disk – a high-density development of the compact disk. Sampling is 4:2:2 to give enhanced chroma resolution. partly because they are more difficult to make and they cannot carry a label. dual-layer 15. The double-sided disks are quite rare. Therefore two fields equal a frame Film: One image or picture on a motion picture film. Standard Definition with 720 (h) x 576 (v) pixels resolution Synchronizing of the video signal clock of a devise with that of an external device in order to achieve equal frequencies and phases of the clock signals. it is aimed at the studio/higher quality end of the market. Video: The combination of two sucessive "fields". To maximise quality and playing time DVD-Video uses variable bit rate (VBR) MPEG-2 coding where the bit rate varies with the demands of the material.3:1 video compression. DVDs can also be double-sided or dual-layer – storing even more data.9 GB DVD-5 and DVD-9 are widely used. Four 16-bit audio tracks are provided. 215 . This combines the DVD optical disk with MPEG-2 video compression for recording video on a CD-sized disk and has multi-channel audio. single-layer disk.75 GB DVD-18 Double-sided. single-layer 8.Abbreviation DVCPRO50 DVD DVD-Video Field Frame Full-D1 Genlock Description In many ways this is a x2 variant of DVCPRO with a video data rate of 50 Mb/s and using 3.

The generation may vary from simple contact closure to electronically generated pulses. television transmission. Hardware – A computer and the associated physical equipment directly involved in the performance of data-processing or communications functions. There are many picture formats proposed and several in use.line and upward is HD. it is generally accepted that 720. about half a second) but this can vary. High Definition Television. While DTV at 625 or 525 lines is usually superior to PAL and NTSC. This also has a picture aspect ratio of 16:9.Abbreviation GOP GPI H/W Half-D1 HDD HDTV IDE Description Group Of Pictures. the GOP is typically 12 frames in a 25 fps signal and 15 frames in a 30 fps signal (i. Synonyms: ATA. In an MPEG signal the GOP is a group of pictures or frames between successive I-frames. Integrated Drive Electronics (presently ATA). Standard Definition with 352 (h) x 576 (v) pixels resolution Hard Disk Drive – A disk drive used to read and write hard disks.e. but there is increasing consensus that 1080 x 1920/24P is a practical standard for global exchange. In the widest application. A television format with higher definition than SDTV.master and slave. General Purpose Interface – The generation of electrical pulses to act as triggers for something. The ATA "bus" only supports two devices . the others being P and/or Bframes. The ATA specification deals with the power and data signal interfaces between the motherboard and the integrated disk controller and drive. A disk drive interface standard based on the IBM PC ISA 16-bit bus but also used on other personal computers. AT Attachment 216 .

and mouse interfaces.these contain all required data to reconstruct a whole picture . ♦ Level: a defined set of constraints imposed on parameters in the bitstream. Synonyms: 4:2:0@ML ♦ Profile: a defined sub-set of the entire bitstream syntax. such as computers and word processors. often used for S-video signals Main Profile at Main Level covers broadcast television formats up to 720 pixels x 576 lines and 30 fps so includes 720 x 486 at 30 fps and 720 x 576 at 25 fps. The economy of 4:2:0 sampling is used and bit rates vary from as low as 2 Mb/s on multiplexed transmissions. A type of Multi-Purpose Connector. I-Link Intra-frames . Its isochronous data channel can provide guaranteed bandwidth for frame-accurate real-time (and faster) transfers of video and audio. and its asynchronous mode can carry metadata and support I/P. check ISO/IEC JTC1/SC29/WG11 Standard of the International Organization for Standardization MPEG Audio File Motion Pictures Expert Group of the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) that has defined multiple standards for compressing audio and video sequences. A system that links together electronic office equipment. the microprocessor. 200. and integrated circuits used for controlling any built-in peripherals such as the keyboard. MPEG is also referred to as both a type of compression and a video format. and forms a network within an office or building. as of the performance of a machine or the progress of an undertaking. text and graphics display. Synonyms: FireWire. Local Area Network. serial ports and parallel ports. up to 9 Mb/s on DVD-video. joystick.very similar to JPEG. Logging – the process of creating a record. For details. IEEE 1394 is recognized by SMPTE and EBU as networking technology for transport of packetized video and audio. or 400 Mb/s.Abbreviation IEEE-1394 I-frames LAN LOG M/B Mini-DIN MP@ML MPA MPEG Description A standard for a peer-to-peer serial digital interface which can operate at 100. 217 . Both modes can be run simultaneously. The PC Motherboard – It contains the bus.

Abbreviation MPEG1

MPEG2

MPG MS NLE

Description The international compression standard for the conversion of analogue motion video to digital motion video that includes both video and audio data. MPEG meets the needs of CDROM and video-on-demand applications. Actual compression over uncompressed digital video is about 100:1. MPEG-1 was initially designed to deliver near-broadcast quality video through a standard speed CD-ROM. Playback of MPEG-1 video requires either a software decoder coupled with a highend computer or a hardware decoder. Its quality is not sufficient for TV broadcast. ISO-11172 A family of inter- and intra-frame compression systems designed to cover a wide range of requirements from ‘VHS quality’ all the way to HDTV through a series of compression algorithm ‘profiles’ and image resolution ‘levels’. With data rates from below 4 to 100 Mb/s, the family includes the compression system that delivers digital TV to the home and that puts video onto DVDs. Coding the video is very complex, generally producing I, P and B-frames, and is designed to keep the decoding at the reception end as simple, and therefore cheap, as possible. MPEG-2 generally uses very high compression rates and can offer better quality pictures than JPEG for a given bit rate, but is less editable. It uses intra-frame compression to remove redundancy within frames as well as inter-frame compression to take advantage of the redundancy contained over series of many pictures. This creates long groups of pictures (GOPs). ISO-13818 MPEG Program Stream File Microsoft Non-Linear Editing. Random-access editing of video and audio on a computer, enabling edits to be processed and reprocessed at any point in the timeline, at any time. Traditional videotape editors are linear because they require editing video sequentially, from beginning to end. The term is widely used in association with off-line editing systems storing highly compressed pictures but on-line nonlinear systems are increasingly available. There is a wide range of systems claiming on-line quality – many using video compression.

218

Abbreviation NTSC

O/S

OpenDML OSD PAL

P-frames

PID PL plug-ins PTS RAM

Description Abbreviation for the National Television Standards Committee that standardized the NTSC color broadcasting system currently used in the United States. This video format standard is also called composite because it combines all the video information, including color, into a single signal. The bandwidth of the NTSC system is 4.2 MHz for the luminance signal and 1.3 and 0.4 MHz for the I and Q colour channels. Operating System. The low-level software which handles the interface to peripheral hardware, schedules tasks, allocates storage, and presents a default interface to the user when no application program is running. OpenDML AVI (DirectShow) On-Screen-Display used for graphics overlay Phase Alternating Line. The colour coding system for television widely used in Europe and throughout the world, almost always with the 625/50 line/field system. It was derived from the NTSC system but by reversing the phase of the reference colour burst on alternate lines (Phase Alternating Line) is able to correct for hue shifts caused by phase errors in the transmission path. Bandwidth for the PAL-I system is typically 5.5 MHz luminance, and 1.3 MHz for each of the colour difference signals, U and V. Used from Main Profile upwards, these contain only predictive information (not a whole picture) generated by looking at the difference between the present frame and the previous one. As with B-frames they hold less data than I- frames and a whole GOP must be decoded to see the picture. Program ID Playlist Plug-in modules Presentation Time Stamp Random Access Memory. The most common computer memory which can be used by programs to perform necessary tasks while the computer is on; an integrated circuit memory chip allows information to be stored or accessed in any order and all storage locations are equally accessible. Synonyms: random-access memory, random memory, read/write memory

219

Abbreviation RCA ROM

RS-232

RS-422

S/W

SCR SCSI

Description A connector for Unbalanced Audio Read-Only Memory. Memory hardware that allows fast access to permanently stored data but prevents addition to or modification of the data. A standard for serial data communications defined by EIA standard RS-232 and is designed for short distances only - up to 10 metres. It uses single-ended signalling with a conductor per channel plus a common ground, which is relatively cheap, easy to arrange but susceptible to interference - hence the distance limitation. Not to be confused with 4:2:2 sampling or 422P MPEG, this is a standard for serial data communications defined by EIA standard RS-422. It uses current-loop, balanced signalling with a twisted pair of conductors per channel, two pairs for bidirectional operation. It is more costly than RS232 but has a high level of immunity to interference and can operate over reasonably long distances - up to 300m/1000 ft. Software. The instructions executed by a computer, as opposed to the physical device on which they run (the "hardware"). The term was coined by the eminent statistician, John Tukey. Programs stored on non-volatile storage built from integrated circuits (e.g. ROM or PROM) are usually called firmware. Synonyms: "computer program", "program", "code" System Clock Reference The Small Computer Systems Interface is a very widely used high data rate, general purpose parallel interface. A maximum of eight devices can be connected to one bus (16 for Wide SCSI), for example a controller, and up to seven disks or devices of different sorts – hard disks, optical disks, tape drives, scanners, etc. – and may be shared between several computers. The SCSI interface is used by manufacturers for high performance drives while ATA is popular for lower performance drives.

220

Abbreviation SDI

SDK

SDTI

SDTV

shortcut SPDIF Trim TV V

Description Serial Digital Interface. The standard digital televsion studio connection based on a 270 Mb/s transfer rate. This is a 10-bit, scrambled, polarity-independent interface, with common scrambling for both component ITU-R BT.601 and composite digital video and four groups each of four channels of embedded digital audio. Most new broadcast digital equipment includes SDI which greatly simplifies its installation and signal distribution. It uses the standard 75 ohm BNC connector and coax cable as is commonly used for analogue video, and can transmit the signal over 200 metres (depending on cable type) Software Developers Kit. Typically a software and documentation package to facilitate the development of applications to run on a given operating system or other application. It provides another layer on top of an API, often including shortcuts and pre-built routines to make development easier and final operation faster. Serial Digital Transport Interface (SMPTE 305M). Based on SDI, this provides real-time streaming transfers. It does not define the format of the signals carried but brings the possibility to create a number of packetised data formats for broadcast use. There are direct mappings for SDTI to carry Sony SX, HD-CAM, DV-DIFF (DVCAM, DVCPRO 25/50, Digital-S) and MPEG TS. Standard Definition Television. A digital television system in which the quality is approximately equivalent to that of analogue 525/60 or 625/50 systems. File Shortcut Serial Digital Audio interface Trimming. Editing a clip on a frame-by-frame basis, or editing clips in relationship to one another. Television Video. A means for reproducing moving visual images by representing them with an analog electronic signal. The images are decomposed into a series of horizontal scan lines. In this way the signal can be stored, transmitted and reproduced. There are various standards that define this signal (NTSC, PAL, SECAM, RGB). Referring to the NTSC composite video standard, this is a widespread standard such that the video in of one machine is compatible with the video out of another.

221

Abbreviation VBR

VGA

VideoCD VOB WAN WAV

Windows XLR Y/C

Description Variable Bit Rate. While many video compression schemes are 'constant bit rate' – designed to produce fixed data rates irrespective of the complexity of the picture, VBR offers the possibility of fixing a constant picture quality by varying the bit-rate according to the needs of the picture. This allows the images that require little data, like still frames in MPEG-2, to use little data and to use more for those that need it, to maintain quality. The result is an overall saving in storage – as on DVDs – or more efficient allocation of total available bitrate in a multi-channel broadcast multiplex. Video Graphics Array. A display standard for IBM PCs, with 640 x 480 pixels in 16 colours and a 4:3 aspect ratio. There is also a text mode with 720 x 400 pixels. IBM technical references define the *product name* of their original VGA display board as "Video Graphics Array", in contrast to the preceding boards, the "Color Graphics Adapter" (CGA) and "Enhanced Graphics Adapter" (EGA). Video Compact Disc DVD-Video Object / Video OBject file Wide Area Network An audio file format developed by Microsoft that carries audio that can be coded in many different formats. Metadata in WAV files describes the coding used. To play a WAV file requires the appropriate decoder to be supported by the playing device. Synonyms: .WAV MS Windows (2000, XP) A Connector for Balanced Audio Analogue S-Video. Short for Super-video, a technology used for transmitting video signals over a cable by dividing the video information into two separate signals: one for luminance and one for chrominance. (S-Video is synonymous with Y/C video). S-video is a consumer form of component video used primarily with Hi8 and S-VHS equipment.

222

Abbreviation YUV

Description Convenient shorthand commonly – but incorrectly – used to describe the analogue luminance and colour difference signals in component video systems. Y is correct for luminance but U and V are, in fact, the two sub-carrier modulation axes used in the PAL colour coding system. Scaled and filtered versions of the B-Y and R-Y colour difference signals are used to modulate the PAL sub-carrier in the U and V axes respectively. The confusion arises because U and V are associated with the colour difference signals but clearly they are not the same thing.

223

INDEX
AIRBOX big timer ....................................... 30 Block Timer.................................. 30 Clip Properties.............................. 28 Clip Timer .................................... 30 color options................................. 42 commands menu........................... 63 events............................................ 32 events - GPI.................................. 33 events – Kramer switcher ............. 33 events - logo ................................. 32 events - Return.............................. 33 File Menu ..................................... 26 filename parser ............................. 56 help menu ..................................... 64 Installation.................................... 17 list menu ....................................... 27 log options .................................... 53 log view ........................................ 30 logo options .................................. 51 module options… ......................... 48 modules ........................................ 43 options/settings............................. 39 playback control ........................... 21 playback modules ......................... 43 playback remote control ............... 45 playlist and clip buttons................ 22 playlist grid................................... 23 remote control - GPI..................... 45 startup options .............................. 54 Status Bar ..................................... 19 tc options ...................................... 56 Timecode Timer ........................... 31 TitleBox net control...................... 36 user interface ................................ 19 Video Overlay Window................ 20 View Menu................................... 30 VikinX Matrix Switcher ............... 38 volume control.............................. 22 CAPTUREBOX audio control................................. 87 batch table (grid) ...........................75 capture ...........................................75 capture settings - Digiserver ..........71 capturing........................................79 installation .....................................69 menu bar........................................88 printing to tape ..............................81 RS-422...........................................86 schedule.........................................83 SDTI compilation..........................80 VTR control...................................86 CAPTUREBOX ME.........................91 Installation.....................................91 Quick Start ....................................92 CLIPTRIMMER clip shots......................................180 clip zones.....................................179 pages............................................179 preview screen.............................175 Status bar.....................................178 trimmer control............................176 user interface ...............................175 video clip info..............................179 volume control.............................178 DATABOX classification................................132 credits ..........................................133 default values...............................129 expired node ................................109 grid ..............................................111 installation ...................................104 media folders ...............................134 media types..................................131 menu............................................115 multi-editing................................114 new record – additional ...............123 new record – credits ....................121 new record – general ...................116 new record - instances .................117 new record – traffic .....................122 options.........................................124

224

..........................163 animation properties ..................................................................................197 CaptureBox......................66 225 ..................... 136 tools menu ................................................ 137 playlist menu .................................................. 139 finding text ........... 190 typical encoding options.......................print ... 203 DataBox...195 VDCP MANAGER Adding new clips....................................70 DataBox................. 122 CaptureBox..................... 131 searching.................................................105 FinishBoxLE .......... 203 TitleBox....................151 network control ...173 installation ....................................................67 Set Up. 206 GPI....................................................154 system bar..151 object palette ................................................................. 203 ListBox................................................... 108 tree view ........................... 133 qualities .............................................. 204 LISTBOX column properties .......................................................................166 Direct Show media .......................136 TitleBox......................... 192 encoding ...............................................................145 TROUBLESHOOTING AirBox.......................................................................150 text field properties............................................... 98 installation .....................67 User Interface ... 203 FinishBox LE ........................................................................................... 107 templates..........................147 user interface ......160 toolbar ........................... 102 GLOSSARY ................................................................ 109 sequences.............145 TITLEBOX analog clock............................................................................................202 General ................................................150 roll&crawl properties ................................................. 203 CaptureBox.................................................... 142 MPEG2 decoding ........................................155 Schedule mode ....... 98 watch folder..................................................169 chat note ....................... 193 QUICK START TitleBox........... 143 edit menu ..152 general options ....170 still picture properties.... 106 DEMO VERSION LIMITATIONS AirBox............................................................ 140 file menu..............169 creating objects.......................................200 DataBox.. 135 playlist grid.........164 banner.......................................................................................................... 203 FINISHBOX LE ......... 141 toolbar ......................................................................99 ListBox................. 187 LIGHT EDITIONS LIMITATIONS .........144 menu bar...168 editing objects ......................................................................................152 digital clock...... 140 installation .............................................

NOTES: 226 .

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->